Palm Lifedrive User Guide

LifeDrive - User Guide lifedrive Free User Guide for Palm Mobile Phone, Manual - page1

2015-07-27

: Palm Palm-Lifedrive-User-Guide-777781 palm-lifedrive-user-guide-777781 palm pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 724 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

User Guide
LifeDrive from palmOne ii
Copyright and Trademark
© 2005 palmOne, Inc. All rights reserved.
palmOne, Addit, Blazer, Graffiti, HotSync, LifeDrive, Palm, Palm Powered, Palm OS, the Palm logo, and
VersaMail are among the trademarks or registered trademarks owned by or licensed to palmOne, Inc. All
other brand and product names are or may be trademarks of, and are used to identify products or services of,
their respective owners.
palmOne, Inc. uses the Bluetooth wireless technology trademark under express license from Bluetooth SIG,
Inc. and uses the Wi-Fi wireless technology trademark under express license from the Wi-Fi Alliance. Pocket
Tunes is a trademark of NormSoft, Inc. WiFile is a trademark of Hands High Software, Inc. MPEG Layer-3
audio decoding technology is licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson. This product includes technology
owned by Microsoft Corporation and cannot be used or distributed without a license from Microsoft
Licensing, GP.
Disclaimer and Limitation of Liability
palmOne, Inc. assumes no responsibility for any damage or loss resulting from the use of this guide.
palmOne, Inc. assumes no responsibility for any loss or claims by third parties which may arise through the
use of this software. palmOne, Inc. assumes no responsibility for any damage or loss caused by deletion of
data as a result of malfunction, dead battery, or repairs. Be sure to make backup copies of all important data
on other media to protect against data loss.
Please read the End User Software License Agreement with this product before using the
accompanying software program(s). Using any part of the software indicates that you accept the terms of the
End User Software License Agreement.
Software Download Available
Palm®Desktop software is supplied on a CD. If you do not have access to a CD drive for your computer, you
can download Palm Desktop software from www.palmOne.com/lifedrive-userguide/
IMPORTANT
[!]
LifeDrive from palmOne iii
Table of Contents
About This Guide .................................................................xxi
Tips for viewing this guide........................................................................xxi
What’s in this guide? ................................................................................xxii
Step-by-step instructions.................................................................. xxii
Links.................................................................................................... xxii
Sidebars....................................................................................................xxiii
Chapter 1: Setting Up Your Device and Your Computer ......1
What’s in the box? ........................................................................................2
System requirements ...................................................................................2
Step 1: Charging your device.......................................................................4
What you should know about your device’s battery.......................... 5
Step 2: Turning on your device for the first time .......................................6
Step 3: Installing your software...................................................................7
Step 4: Connecting your device to your computer ....................................8
Switching to another desktop software application ................................10
Using user profiles......................................................................................11
Creating a user profile .........................................................................12
Synchronizing with a user profile ......................................................14
Related topics..............................................................................................17
Chapter 2: Your Mobile Manager .........................................18
What’s on my device? ................................................................................19
Front ..................................................................................................... 19
Top........................................................................................................ 21
Side....................................................................................................... 22
Back ...................................................................................................... 23
Bottom.................................................................................................. 24
Using the power switch..............................................................................25
Using the status bar....................................................................................26
LifeDrive from palmOne iv
Rotating the screen.....................................................................................27
What’s on the screen? ................................................................................28
Input area ............................................................................................. 28
Application controls ............................................................................ 29
What software is on my device?................................................................30
What’s on the CD? ......................................................................................32
Related topics..............................................................................................36
Chapter 3: Moving Around in Applications.........................38
Opening applications..................................................................................39
Using Favorites.................................................................................... 39
Using Applications .............................................................................. 40
Using Files............................................................................................ 41
Working with files and folders ........................................................... 43
Sorting Files ......................................................................................... 45
Opening files and folders from within an application...................... 46
Switching between applications ........................................................ 46
Using the 5-way navigator .........................................................................47
Moving around with the 5-way .......................................................... 47
Moving around in Favorites View ...................................................... 49
Moving around in Applications View ................................................ 49
Moving around in list screens and entry screens............................. 50
Moving around in dialog boxes ......................................................... 50
Moving around in menus ................................................................... 51
Using menus ..............................................................................................52
Using the Command stroke................................................................ 53
Using the Command toolbar .............................................................. 53
Finding information ...................................................................................54
Related topics..............................................................................................55
Chapter 4: Entering Information on Your Device ................56
How can I enter information on my device?.............................................57
Entering information with Graffiti® 2 writing ...........................................57
Writing in the input area ..................................................................... 57
Using full-screen writing..................................................................... 58
LifeDrive from palmOne v
Writing Graffiti 2 characters ...............................................................60
Graffiti 2 alphabet................................................................................ 62
Graffiti 2 numbers ............................................................................... 63
Graffiti 2 gestures................................................................................ 67
Writing Graffiti 2 symbols and other special characters ..................68
Graffiti 2 symbols and special characters ......................................... 69
Writing Graffiti 2 ShortCuts ................................................................70
Graffiti 2 ShortCuts.............................................................................. 71
Entering information with the onscreen keyboard ..................................72
Entering info from Contacts into another application .............................74
Editing information.....................................................................................76
Selecting information.......................................................................... 76
Copying and pasting information ......................................................77
Deleting information ...........................................................................78
Related topics..............................................................................................79
Chapter 5: Moving and Managing Info Between
Your Device and Your Computer ...........................................80
Program memory and the hard drive .......................................................81
How can I work with information? ............................................................82
LifeDrive™ Manager and Drive Mode.......................................................83
LifeDrive Manager ............................................................................... 83
Drive Mode........................................................................................... 83
Using LifeDrive Manager ...........................................................................84
Transferring information using the LifeDrive Manager icon ...........85
Transferring information using the LifeDrive Manager window .....88
Renaming a file or folder ....................................................................91
Deleting a file or folder .......................................................................92
Deleting sync items from your computer when they are deleted
from your device ...........................................................................93
Using Drive Mode ......................................................................................94
Synchronizing information ........................................................................98
Doing a full sync ..................................................................................98
Synchronizing using the cable .........................................................100
Synchronizing using LifeDrive Manager ......................................... 101
LifeDrive from palmOne vi
Creating sync items ...........................................................................101
Doing a folder sync ...........................................................................102
Locating sync items on your computer ........................................... 103
Entering information using desktop software ................................ 104
Customizing your synchronization settings .................................... 107
Choosing how your computer responds to
synchronization requests ...........................................................108
Setting synchronization options ......................................................110
Choosing whether application information is updated ..................111
Installing applications to your device .............................................. 116
Using Quick Install .............................................................................117
Installing applications from a Mac computer ................................. 118
Using the Send To Handheld droplet .............................................. 118
Using commands in the HotSync menu ..........................................119
Other ways of managing information.....................................................120
Importing information from other applications.............................. 121
Restoring archived items on your computer .................................. 123
Installing the additional software from the CD ............................... 124
Checking space and version numbers .............................................125
Removing information .............................................................................127
Removing an application from your device .................................... 127
Removing Palm Desktop software from your computer ............... 128
Related topics............................................................................................130
Chapter 6: Managing Your Contacts ..................................131
Adding a contact ......................................................................................132
Entering additional contact information ..........................................135
Selecting contact field types .............................................................136
Defining custom fields ......................................................................137
Selecting a contact as your business card ......................................138
Copying contact information into multiple contacts ............................139
Locating a contact on your list ................................................................140
Deleting a contact ....................................................................................141
Customizing the Contacts list .................................................................142
Making connections from Contacts.........................................................144
LifeDrive from palmOne vii
Using Quick Connect .........................................................................144
Customizing Quick Connect settings ...............................................146
Using Tap-to-Connect .......................................................................147
Working with Contacts on your computer..............................................149
Related topics............................................................................................150
Chapter 7: Managing Your Calendar ..................................151
Scheduling events ....................................................................................152
Scheduling an appointment .............................................................152
Scheduling an event without a start time .......................................154
Scheduling a repeating event—standard interval ..........................156
Scheduling a repeating event—unusual interval ............................157
Scheduling an event that is longer than a day ...............................159
Entering a location or a note for an event .......................................160
Scheduling an event with a time zone .............................................162
Color-coding your schedule.....................................................................163
Managing your color-codes ..............................................................164
Assigning a color code to an event ..................................................166
Setting an alarm .......................................................................................167
Rescheduling an event ............................................................................168
Deleting events .........................................................................................170
Deleting a specific event ...................................................................170
Deleting all your old events ..............................................................172
Checking your schedule ...........................................................................173
Viewing your appointments and tasks together .............................173
Viewing your daily schedule ............................................................175
Viewing your weekly schedule .........................................................177
Viewing your monthly schedule ......................................................178
Viewing a yearly calendar .................................................................179
Finding events that overlap .............................................................. 180
Customizing your calendar ......................................................................180
Customizing display options for your calendar ..............................181
Setting alarm and time options ........................................................184
Working with Calendar on your computer .............................................186
Related topics............................................................................................187
LifeDrive from palmOne viii
Chapter 8: Your Microsoft Office Manager ........................188
Creating and managing Office files.........................................................189
Opening files from within Documents ....................................................190
Related topics............................................................................................191
Chapter 9: Viewing Your Photos and Videos ....................192
Reformatting files and copying supported file types.............................193
Viewing photos or videos .......................................................................194
Viewing a slide show ........................................................................ 198
Rotating a photo ................................................................................ 200
Viewing and editing photo or video details............................................202
Organizing photos and videos.................................................................205
Organizing photos or videos into albums .......................................205
Moving a photo or video within and between albums ..................207
Sorting photos and videos ............................................................... 209
Personalizing a photo ...............................................................................210
Drawing on a photo ...........................................................................210
Adding audio to a photo ...................................................................212
Copying a photo or video ........................................................................214
Deleting a photo or video ........................................................................215
Sharing photos and videos ......................................................................216
Related topics............................................................................................217
Chapter 10: Managing Your Camera Card Media..............218
Copying photos and videos from your camera card ............................219
Viewing photos or videos .......................................................................221
Related topics............................................................................................223
Chapter 11: Listening to Music...........................................224
Benefits ......................................................................................................224
Transferring music from a CD to your device using Rhapsody ...........230
Managing playlists....................................................................................233
Creating a playlist ..............................................................................233
Playing songs from a playlist ...........................................................235
Editing a playlist ................................................................................236
LifeDrive from palmOne ix
Deleting a playlist ..............................................................................238
Customizing your player ..........................................................................239
Turning off the screen .......................................................................239
Setting background preferences ......................................................240
Flashing the LED when the pTunes console is turned off ..............241
Working with Rhapsody on your computer ...........................................242
Related topics............................................................................................243
Chapter 12: Managing Your Tasks ......................................244
Creating a task ..........................................................................................245
Setting an alarm ................................................................................246
Scheduling a repeating task—standard interval .............................247
Scheduling a repeating task—unusual interval ..............................249
Organizing your tasks ..............................................................................251
Marking a task as complete ....................................................................252
Deleting tasks ...........................................................................................253
Deleting a specific task ......................................................................253
Deleting all your completed tasks ....................................................254
Customizing your Tasks list ....................................................................255
Working with Tasks on your computer...................................................257
Related topics............................................................................................258
Chapter 13: Writing Memos................................................259
Creating a memo .....................................................................................260
Viewing and editing a memo ..................................................................261
Moving memos in your memos list .......................................................262
Deleting a memo ......................................................................................263
Working with Memos on your computer................................................264
Related topics............................................................................................265
Chapter 14: Writing Notes in Note Pad..............................266
Creating a note .........................................................................................267
Choosing the pen and paper (background) colors .........................268
Setting an alarm ................................................................................269
Viewing and editing a note .....................................................................271
LifeDrive from palmOne x
Deleting a note .........................................................................................272
Working with Note Pad on your computer.............................................273
Related topics............................................................................................274
Chapter 15: Recording Voice Memos.................................275
Creating a voice memo ...........................................................................276
Creating a quick voice memo using the application button ..........276
Creating a longer voice memo using the pause control ................278
Listening to a voice memo ......................................................................281
Setting an alarm for a voice memo ........................................................283
Storing voice memos ..............................................................................285
Saving a voice memo to another location ......................................285
Automatically storing all voice memos on an expansion card .....287
Related topics............................................................................................288
Chapter 16: Making Wi-Fi® Wireless Connections ...........289
What can I do with the built-in Wi-Fi® wireless technology?................290
What types of connections can I make?..................................................290
Wi-Fi signal strength indicator.................................................................291
Setting up a Wi-Fi network connection ..................................................292
Setting up a connection for Wi-Fi synchronization ...............................298
Accessing email and the web with Wi-Fi ...............................................302
Setting up a Wi-Fi device-to-device network .........................................304
Related topics............................................................................................310
Chapter 17: Making Bluetooth® Wireless Connections ... 311
What can I do with the built-in Bluetooth® wireless technology? ........312
What types of connections can I make? .......................................... 312
What is device discovery? ................................................................ 313
Entering basic Bluetooth settings............................................................314
Setting up a Bluetooth phone connection .............................................315
Accessing email and the web with Bluetooth .......................................320
Setting up a connection for Bluetooth synchronization .......................322
Setting up a connection to a Bluetooth network ...................................327
Creating trusted devices ..........................................................................329
LifeDrive from palmOne xi
Setting advanced Bluetooth features .....................................................331
Storing recently found device names ..............................................331
Allowing your device to wake up when it is turned off ..................332
Related topics............................................................................................333
Chapter 18: Sending and Receiving Email Messages ......334
Upgrading an existing email account ....................................................335
About email accounts...............................................................................336
Using an email provider ................................................................... 336
Using a corporate email account ..................................................... 337
VPNs ................................................................................................... 338
Connecting to a VPN .........................................................................339
Creating an account..................................................................................340
Transferring settings from an existing account ..............................341
Setting up an account on your computer: Common providers .....343
Setting up an account on your computer: Other providers ...........346
Entering advanced account settings on your computer ................349
Setting up an account on your device .............................................354
Setting advanced mail options on your device ..............................357
Testing your new account ................................................................ 358
Editing an account............................................................................. 359
Editing an account on your computer .............................................359
Editing an account on your device ...................................................360
Deleting an account ...........................................................................361
Adding ESMTP to an account ...........................................................362
Getting and reading messages................................................................363
Auto Sync with notification .............................................................. 364
Scheduling Auto Sync .......................................................................365
Auto Sync notifications..................................................................... 366
Setting alert options ..........................................................................367
Viewing and using the Reminders screen....................................... 368
Auto Sync retries ............................................................................... 369
Resource issues with Auto Sync ...................................................... 369
Inbox icons in the VersaMail application ........................................ 370
Setting preferences for getting messages ......................................370
LifeDrive from palmOne xii
Reading email messages .................................................................. 373
Adding or updating a contact directly from a message................. 374
Sending an email message......................................................................375
Entering an address using Smart Addressing ................................377
Entering an address directly in the To field ....................................378
Entering an address using Contacts ................................................379
Attaching a personal signature ........................................................380
Send retry ...........................................................................................381
Send retry notifications..................................................................... 381
Modifying messages in the Outbox................................................. 382
Outbox icons in the VersaMail applications.................................... 382
Working with email folders......................................................................383
Viewing another folder .....................................................................383
Customizing the appearance of the message list ...........................384
Moving messages between folders .................................................386
Creating and editing mail folders .....................................................388
Working with email messages ................................................................389
Forwarding an email message .........................................................389
Replying to an email message .........................................................390
Setting reply preferences ..................................................................391
Working with URLs, email addresses, and phone numbers in a
message....................................................................................... 393
Deleting a message ...........................................................................393
Deleting old messages ......................................................................394
Emptying the trash ............................................................................396
Setting the trash to be emptied automatically ................................397
Marking messages as read or unread .............................................398
Working with attachments .......................................................................399
Working with a downloaded attachment ........................................400
Saving attachments ...........................................................................403
Attaching files to outgoing messages .............................................404
Advanced VersaMail application features ..............................................406
Creating and using filters.................................................................. 406
Turning filters on and off ..................................................................409
Editing or deleting a filter .................................................................411
LifeDrive from palmOne xiii
Setting connection preferences .......................................................412
Setting server preferences ................................................................413
Changing email header details......................................................... 415
Synchronizing IMAP mail folders wirelessly................................... 416
Prerequisites for wireless IMAP folder synchronization ................ 417
Turning IMAP folder synchronization on or off ..............................417
Synchronizing device and mail server IMAP folders from the
Options menu ..............................................................................418
Working with root folders................................................................. 418
Using Secure Sockets Layer (SSL)................................................... 418
Working with Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync ......................................419
What do I need to use Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync?............... 419
How does a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync email account differ
from other accounts?.................................................................. 420
Setting up a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account................... 420
Setting up a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account on your
computer .....................................................................................421
Setting up an account on your device .............................................424
Setting advanced mail options on your device ..............................427
Getting email messages ................................................................... 428
Sending messages ............................................................................ 429
Previewing attachments ................................................................... 430
Working with meeting invitations ....................................................430
Working with Calendar events ......................................................... 433
Synchronizing Calendar events using Microsoft Exchange
ActiveSync................................................................................... 434
Updating Calendar events when you delete a Microsoft Exchange
ActiveSync account .................................................................... 434
Related topics............................................................................................435
Chapter 19: Sending and Receiving Text Messages.........436
Creating and sending a text message ....................................................437
Receiving and viewing a text message ..................................................440
Editing a draft text message ...................................................................442
Setting advanced messaging features ...................................................443
Related Topics...........................................................................................445
LifeDrive from palmOne xiv
Chapter 20: Browsing the Web...........................................446
Accessing a web page ..............................................................................447
Accessing a web page using the action bar ....................................447
Accessing a web page using the address field ...............................448
Using a password to access a web page .........................................449
Finding information on a web page .................................................450
Quickly jumping to a page .......................................................................451
Following a link.................................................................................. 451
Returning to your home page or a page you recently visited ....... 451
Changing how you view a page .............................................................452
Bookmarking your favorite pages ...........................................................454
Adding a bookmark ...........................................................................454
Viewing a bookmarked or saved page ............................................455
Editing information about a bookmark or saved page ...................456
Arranging the bookmark list .............................................................457
Disconnecting from and connecting to the Internet ..............................459
Disconnecting from the Internet ......................................................459
Connecting to the Internet ................................................................460
Downloading files and pages ..................................................................461
Downloading a file ............................................................................461
Saving a web page ............................................................................462
Viewing a saved file ..........................................................................463
Communicating with other users ............................................................464
Sending email by means of an Internet email account ..................464
Changing your home and start pages.....................................................465
Changing your home page ...............................................................465
Changing your start page .................................................................467
Setting advanced browser options .........................................................468
Changing how images are downloaded ..........................................468
Setting whether to automatically complete web addresses and
form fields ...................................................................................469
Allowing websites to remember personal information .................470
Clear Cookies and cache preferences ..............................................471
Setting preferences for using a proxy server ..................................473
Setting whether to accept JavaScript ..............................................475
Related topics............................................................................................476
LifeDrive from palmOne xv
Chapter 21: Dialing Phone Numbers from Your Device ...477
Dialing a number .....................................................................................478
Entering a number .............................................................................478
Redialing the most recently used number ......................................479
Dialing a number from the Call History List ....................................480
Using speed dial ......................................................................................481
Adding a speed-dial entry .................................................................481
Dialing a number using speed dial ..................................................482
Editing a speed-dial entry .................................................................483
Related topics............................................................................................484
Chapter 22: Sharing Information........................................485
Using the Send command ......................................................................486
Sending information from within an application using
Bluetooth® technology ...............................................................486
Sending a category using Bluetooth technology ...........................488
Sending an application using Bluetooth technology .....................489
Using the Send command with the VersaMail® application ......... 490
Using the Send command with SMS .............................................. 490
Beaming ....................................................................................................491
Beaming information from within an application ..........................491
Beaming a category ..........................................................................493
Beaming an application ....................................................................494
Other ways of sharing information .........................................................495
Related topics............................................................................................496
Chapter 23: Managing Your Expenses ...............................497
Adding an expense ...................................................................................498
Choosing currency options ......................................................................500
Customizing the currency pick list ...................................................500
Presetting the currency symbol .......................................................501
Creating a currency symbol ..............................................................502
Deleting expenses.....................................................................................504
Deleting an individual expense ........................................................504
Deleting an entire category of expenses .........................................505
LifeDrive from palmOne xvi
Customizing the expense list ...................................................................506
Working with Expense on your computer ..............................................507
Related topics............................................................................................508
Chapter 24: Performing Calculations .................................509
Calculator buttons.....................................................................................510
Viewing recent calculations ....................................................................511
Accessing different calculators ...............................................................512
Related topics............................................................................................513
Chapter 25: Keeping Your Information Private..................514
Choosing a security level .........................................................................515
Marking information as private ...............................................................516
Setting the level of privacy ......................................................................517
Hiding or masking private entries ....................................................517
Viewing an entry that is masked ...................................................... 518
Using a password .....................................................................................518
Creating a password .........................................................................519
Changing a password .......................................................................520
Deleting a password.......................................................................... 522
Deleting a forgotten password .........................................................523
Locking your device..................................................................................524
Locking your device automatically ..................................................525
Locking your device manually ..........................................................527
Using Quick Unlock ..................................................................................528
Creating a Quick Unlock combination ............................................. 528
Deleting your Quick Unlock combination........................................ 530
Encrypting your information....................................................................531
Limiting the number of password attempts ...........................................533
Related topics............................................................................................536
Chapter 26: Using Categories to Organize Information ...537
Adding a category.....................................................................................538
Renaming a category ...............................................................................539
Deleting a category ..................................................................................540
LifeDrive from palmOne xvii
Placing information in a category ...........................................................541
Placing an entry in a category ..........................................................541
Placing an application in a category ................................................543
Viewing information by category ...........................................................544
Related topics............................................................................................545
Chapter 27: Managing Clock Settings ...............................546
Checking the current date and time ........................................................547
Setting the primary location ....................................................................547
Setting the date and time for the primary location ........................548
Choosing secondary locations for other time zones .............................550
Modifying the locations list......................................................................551
Adding new locations .......................................................................551
Deleting a location .............................................................................553
Setting the alarm clock.............................................................................554
Responding to the alarm clock......................................................... 555
Changing the clock display ......................................................................556
Related topics............................................................................................557
Chapter 28: Customizing Your Device ...............................558
Customizing Favorites View ....................................................................559
Changing the background photo in Favorites View .......................559
Changing entries in Favorites ...........................................................560
Customizing Applications View ..............................................................563
Making the screen easier to read ............................................................565
Changing the screen fonts ................................................................565
Adjusting the brightness ...................................................................567
Changing screen colors ....................................................................568
Changing handedness orientation of the screen ............................569
Assigning a button to your frequently used applications ....................570
Setting the date and time ........................................................................572
Selecting a location ...........................................................................572
Resetting the date and time ..............................................................574
Selecting formats for dates, times, and numbers ..........................576
Customizing the way you enter information ..........................................578
LifeDrive from palmOne xviii
Customizing the input area ...............................................................578
Customizing Graffiti® 2 strokes ........................................................579
Setting up ShortCuts .........................................................................581
Changing ShortCuts ..........................................................................583
Correcting problems with tapping ...................................................584
Selecting sound settings .........................................................................585
Entering your owner information ...........................................................586
Conserving battery power .......................................................................587
Selecting power-saving settings ......................................................587
Connecting your device to other devices ...............................................589
Changing the preset connection settings ........................................589
Creating your own connection settings ...........................................592
Connecting your device to a mobile phone ....................................596
Customizing network settings .................................................................597
Setting up a service profile ...............................................................597
Connecting to your service ...............................................................600
Adding details to a service profile ...................................................601
Deleting a service profile ..................................................................603
Creating login scripts ........................................................................604
Adding plug-in applications .............................................................607
Setting up a VPN.......................................................................................608
Setting up a VPN account on your device .......................................608
Establishing a VPN connection ........................................................610
Ending a VPN connection .................................................................611
Related topics............................................................................................612
Chapter 29: Expanding Your Device...................................613
What type of expansion cards can I use? ...............................................614
How can expansion cards help me?........................................................614
Removing an expansion card .................................................................615
Inserting an expansion card ....................................................................616
Opening an application on an expansion card ......................................617
Opening files on an expansion card .......................................................618
Viewing card information.........................................................................619
Renaming a card ......................................................................................620
LifeDrive from palmOne xix
Copying applications to an expansion card ..........................................621
Removing all information from a card ...................................................622
Related topics............................................................................................623
Chapter 30: Maintaining Your Device ...............................624
Device do’s and don’ts .............................................................................624
Device do’s......................................................................................... 624
Device don’ts ..................................................................................... 625
Resetting your device ...............................................................................626
Doing a soft reset .............................................................................. 626
Doing a hard reset ............................................................................. 627
Restoring your information after a hard reset........................................630
Related topics............................................................................................632
Chapter 31: Common Questions .......................................633
Setup..........................................................................................................633
Device ........................................................................................................635
Moving around..........................................................................................639
Entering information ................................................................................639
Synchronizing ...........................................................................................641
LifeDrive™ Manager/Drive Mode ............................................................647
Calendar.....................................................................................................649
Memos .......................................................................................................650
Note Pad ....................................................................................................651
Media .........................................................................................................651
Camera Companion..................................................................................651
Pocket Tunes™..........................................................................................652
Tasks ..........................................................................................................653
Connecting wirelessly ..............................................................................653
The VersaMail® application.....................................................................655
Privacy .......................................................................................................658
Sharing ......................................................................................................659
Problems with incompatible applications ..............................................661
LifeDrive from palmOne xx
Chapter 32: Getting Help ...................................................664
Self-help resources ...................................................................................664
Technical support .....................................................................................665
Product Regulatory Information .........................................666
Index ......................................................................................672
LifeDrive from palmOne xxi
About This Guide
This guide tells you everything you need to know about your device: the things
you’ll do every day, the advanced features that let you get the most out of your
device, and the things that make your device not only useful, but fun.
Tips for viewing this guide
Here are some helpful tips for making it easier to read and find information in this guide as you
view it in Adobe Reader:
• To magnify the page, click the magnifying glass , move the cursor (which is now a
magnifying glass) over the page, and click repeatedly. Click Previous View ( or depending
on your version of Reader) to return to the original view.
• Click an entry in the Table of Contents or Index to go directly to that section of the guide.
• If you click a link and go to a page, in the guide click Previous View ( or depending on your
version of Reader) to return to the page you were on before you clicked the link.
• If you click a link and go to a web page, the page may open in Adobe Reader instead of in your
web browser. To specify whether pages open in Reader or in your web browser, go to the Edit
menu in Reader, select Preferences, and then select Web Capture. In the Open Web Links drop-
down list, select either In Acrobat or In Web Browser, and then click OK.
• When selecting the page(s) to print, be sure to use the file page number shown at the bottom of
your computer screen, not the printed page number. For example, to print the first page of
Chapter 2, “Your Mobile Manager,” select page 41 (the file page), not page 18 (the printed page).
LifeDrive from palmOne xxii
What’s in this guide?
The info in this guide includes step-by-step instructions, links to cross-references, and sidebars.
Step-by-step instructions
Here you’ll find how-to information. Look for these cues in instructions:
Links
Links that appear as underlined words in body text and in sidebars take you to other sections of
this guide. Links also appear in the following sections:
Cue that means the procedure continues on the next page.
Cue that signals the end of the procedure. You’re done.
A step that you must follow; otherwise, you could experience an
error or even lose information.
[ & ] OPTIONAL A step you might find useful.
Information that applies only in certain cases or that tells more about
a procedure step.
WINDOWS ONLY
MAC ONLY
A procedure or text that applies to one platform only. In most cases,
if you see one heading check the following or preceding sections for
the other. Sometimes, there is no Mac counterpart for a Windows
procedure or text; this feature is not available to Mac users.
In this chapter Links on the first page of each chapter that send you to a specific section.
Related topics Links that send you to other topics in this guide to learn about more
things you can do with an application or feature.
Continued
Done
IMPORTANT
[!]
NOTE
LifeDrive from palmOne xxiii
Sidebars
Before You Begin
[!]
Things you must complete before you can do the steps described in a procedure or group of
procedures.
Tip
A suggestion on how to use a feature more fully; a shortcut; a pointer to a related feature.
Did You Know?
An interesting fact about the topic being described; may include a link to more information.
»
Key Term
A technical term related to the topic being described. The term may appear in this guide or only
on your device.
Tips & Tricks
A pointer to a website where you can obtain general information about your device and learn
the latest tips, tricks, and more.
Support
A pointer to a website where you can find help if you experience problems with a specific
feature or with your device.
LifeDrive from palmOne 1
CHAPTER 1
Setting Up Your Device and Your Computer
Congratulations on the purchase of
your new LifeDrive™ mobile manager
from palmOne! You’re about to
discover so many things about your
device that will help you better manage
your life and have fun, too. As you
become more familiar with your
device, you’ll probably personalize the
settings and add applications to make
it uniquely yours.
While you’re likely to get years of
enjoyment from your device, it takes
only four easy steps to get up and
running.
Benefits
• Start using your device right away
• Establish a link between your device
and your computer
• Set up your device for optimal use
I
n t
hi
s c
h
apter
What’s in the box?
System requirements
Step 1: Charging your device
Step 2: Turning on your
device for the first time
Step 3: Installing your
software
Step 4: Connecting your
device to your computer
Switching to another
desktop software application
Using user profiles
Related topics
LifeDrive from palmOne 2
CHAPTER 1 Setting Up Your Device and Your Computer
What’s in the box?
System requirements
The installation CD contains Palm®Desktop software and other applications you need to set up
and use your device. To use Palm Desktop software, your desktop computer must meet these
requirements:
WINDOWS ONLY
• A PC with a Pentium II processor or later, and one of the following operating systems:
• Windows 2000 (requires administrator rights to install Palm Desktop software)
• Windows XP (requires administrator rights to install Palm Desktop software)
• Internet Explorer 5.0 or later
• 32 megabyte (MB) available RAM (64MB recommended)
»
Key Term
Palm Desktop software
The software that lets you
enter, update, review, and
synchronize information
on your computer.
AC charger
Software installation CD
USB sync cable
LifeDrive™ mobile manager
from palmOne
Pouch
LifeDrive from palmOne 3
CHAPTER 1 Setting Up Your Device and Your Computer
• 170MB available hard disk space
• One available USB port
• USB sync cable (included with your device)
• CD or DVD drive for installing Palm Desktop software from the CD that came with your device
MAC ONLY
• Mac computer or compatible with a PowerPC processor
• Mac OS X, version 10.2 or 10.3 (requires administrator rights to install Palm Desktop software)
• 128MB total RAM
• 190MB available hard disk space
• Monitor that supports screen resolution of 800 X 600 or better
• One available USB port
• USB sync cable (included with your device)
• CD or DVD drive for installing Palm Desktop software from the CD that came with your device
LifeDrive from palmOne 4
CHAPTER 1 Setting Up Your Device and Your Computer
Step 1: Charging your device
0
1Connect your device:
a. Plug the USB sync cable into
your device and into a USB
port on the back of your
computer.
b. Plug the AC charger into the
Multi-connector on the sync
cable and into an outlet.
2Charge your device for three hours. Be sure your device is fully charged before
going on to Step 2.
Done
Before You Begin
[!]
If you’re upgrading from
another Palm Powered™
device, synchronize your
old device with your old
desktop software.
Tip
After the initial charge,
charge your device at
least half an hour every
day.
LifeDrive from palmOne 5
CHAPTER 1 Setting Up Your Device and Your Computer
What you should know about your device’s battery
While your device is charging, take a minute to learn about the battery:
• If you see an alert on the screen warning you that the battery is low, recharge your device. Also
recharge your device if it doesn’t turn on when you press the power button. So that your battery
doesn’t drain completely, your device’s Wi-Fi® functionality and expansion card slot
functionality are automatically turned off when you see a “Low battery” warning message, and
the Bluetooth® wireless technology and infrared (IR) functionality are turned off when you see a
“Critically low battery” warning message.
The memory on your device is designed to store your information even if the battery
becomes drained to the point that you cannot turn on your device. When you recharge your
device, all of your existing information, both in program memory and on the hard drive, should
appear.
• Conserve battery life by doing any of the following:
•Adjust the screen brightness.
•Reduce the Auto-off setting.
•Use Keylock to prevent your device from turning on by accident.
•Stop music or video playback when not in use.
• Keep your device connected to the AC charger plugged into a power outlet when using Drive
Mode or Camera Companion for an extended period of time.
•Respond to or cancel alerts promptly.
•Turn off Bluetooth wireless technology and Wi-Fi functionality when not in use.
• If using Auto Sync to automatically retrieve email messages, set the time interval to one hour
or less often.
•Minimize use of the expansion card slot.
Tip
Also take a minute to
learn about proper care
and handling of your
device.
NOTE
LifeDrive from palmOne 6
CHAPTER 1 Setting Up Your Device and Your Computer
Step 2: Turning on your device for the first time
0
1Unplug the USB sync cable from
your device.
2Slide the power switch to the right.
3Press and release the stylus, and then slide it out of the slot.
4Hold the stylus as you would hold a pen, and follow the onscreen instructions
to set up your device.
Done
Before You Begin
[!]
Be sure to fully charge
your device, as described
in the preceding
procedure.
Tip
After you set up your
device, review the Quick
Tour on your device and
take the tutorial on the
software installation CD
to learn the basics.
Power switch
Stylus
LifeDrive from palmOne 7
CHAPTER 1 Setting Up Your Device and Your Computer
Step 3: Installing your software
0
1Insert the CD into your computer.
You need administrator rights to install Palm Desktop software on a
computer running Windows 2000/XP or Mac OS X.
2WINDOWS ONLY
Follow the onscreen instructions. If you’re upgrading, select the username that
you assigned to your old device.
MAC ONLY
Double-click the CD icon, and then double-click palmOneSoftware.pkg.
During installation, you’re asked to connect your computer to your
device. See Step 4.
Did You Know?
When you upgrade,
there’s no need to delete
the old desktop software
first. When you install the
new Palm Desktop
software, all of your
information transfers
automatically to the new
software.
Tip
Take the interactive
tutorial on the CD to learn
how to create an
appointment; set up your
device’s features for
photos, video, and music;
and more.
Did You Know?
IT managers can set up a
profile if they want to
install the same set of
information on several
devices.
NOTE
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 8
CHAPTER 1 Setting Up Your Device and Your Computer
Step 4: Connecting your device to your computer
During installation, you connect your device to your computer and do a full sync for the first time.
Synchronizing simply means that any information you enter in one place (your device or
computer) is automatically updated in the other.
Be sure to do a full sync of the info on your device at least once a day so that
you always have an up-to-date backup copy of this info on your computer.
0
1Connect your device to your
computer:
a. Plug the USB sync cable into a
USB port on the back of your
computer.
b. Plug the cable into your
device.
Continued
IMPORTANT
[!]
Tip
If the Select User dialog
box appears during
synchronization, select
the username of the
device you want to
synchronize, and click OK.
»
Key Term
Third-party application
A software program that
runs on a Palm
Powered™ device but is
not created or supported
by palmOne, Inc.
Tip
If you have problems with
your new device after you
synchronize, you may
need to update your
third-party applications.
LifeDrive from palmOne 9
CHAPTER 1 Setting Up Your Device and Your Computer
2Slide the power switch to the right to turn on your device.
3Continue with the onscreen instructions. Do a full sync by pressing the sync
button on the USB sync cable.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 10
CHAPTER 1 Setting Up Your Device and Your Computer
Switching to another desktop software application
WINDOWS ONLY
During installation, you chose a desktop software application to synchronize with your device. You
may have chosen Palm Desktop software at that time. But if Microsoft Outlook already contains all
of your contacts, appointments, tasks, and notes, you can change your synchronization method so
that your device synchronizes with Outlook instead. You can also change from Outlook to
Palm Desktop software.
If you choose to synchronize with Outlook, info from Contacts, Calendar, Tasks, and
Memos is synchronized with the corresponding application in Outlook. (Memos is called Notes in
Outlook.) You can also set up the VersaMail® application to synchronize email on your device with
email in Outlook. Other info, such as voice memos and notes, is synchronized with info in
Palm Desktop software.
0
1Insert the CD into your computer.
2From the screen that appears, select Change your synchronization method.
3Follow the onscreen instructions for the desktop software you want to use.
Done
NOTE
LifeDrive from palmOne 11
CHAPTER 1 Setting Up Your Device and Your Computer
Using user profiles
Only IT managers may need to use user profiles for their company. If you are not an IT
manager, you can skip this section.
Suppose your sales organization wants to distribute two dozen devices that all have a common
company phone list, a set of memos, and several key applications. A user profile can be created to
install this information before the devices are distributed to employees. When the employees
synchronize for the first time, this common information becomes part of their user-specific
information.
A user profile enables you to install the same information onto multiple devices before each
device is individualized with a unique username and user-specific information. A device that has a
user profile installed can be given to anyone, because the device is not yet identified by a unique
username. When the new user synchronizes for the first time, he or she gives the device a unique
username.
Devices that are synchronized with a user profile must be either new devices that have
never been synchronized or devices that have had their usernames and information removed by a
hard reset.
SKIP
NOTE
LifeDrive from palmOne 12
CHAPTER 1 Setting Up Your Device and Your Computer
Creating a user profile
WINDOWS ONLY
0
1Open the New Profile screen:
a. Open Palm Desktop software.
b. From the Tools menu, select Users.
c. Click Profiles, and then click New.
2Enter a unique name for the profile, and click OK twice.
3Select the profile from the User
list, and create the info in
Palm Desktop software for the
profile.
Done
Tip
Save time by importing to
quickly add information
to a profile.
LifeDrive from palmOne 13
CHAPTER 1 Setting Up Your Device and Your Computer
MAC ONLY
0
1Open the New Profile screen:
a. Open Palm Desktop software.
b. From the User pop-up menu, select Edit Users.
c. Click New Profile.
2Create the profile:
a. Enter a unique name for the profile, and click OK.
b. Close the Users window.
Continued
LifeDrive from palmOne 14
CHAPTER 1 Setting Up Your Device and Your Computer
Synchronizing with a user profile
WINDOWS ONLY
0
3Select the profile from the User pop-up menu, and create the info in
Palm Desktop software for the profile.
4Set the profile’s conduit settings:
a. From the HotSync® menu, select Conduit Settings.
b. Select the conduit settings for the profile.
Done
1Begin synchronization:
a. Connect the USB sync cable to the USB port on the back of your computer,
and then insert the other end into the Multi-connector on your device.
b. Press the sync button on the USB sync cable.
Continued
LifeDrive from palmOne 15
CHAPTER 1 Setting Up Your Device and Your Computer
2Transfer the profile information:
a. Click Profiles.
b. Select the profile you want to
load on the device, and click
OK.
c. Click Yes.
The next time you or a user synchronizes that device,
Palm Desktop software prompts you or the user to assign a
username to the device.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 16
CHAPTER 1 Setting Up Your Device and Your Computer
MAC ONLY
0
1Begin synchronization:
a. Connect the USB sync cable to the USB port on the back of your computer,
and then insert the other end into the Multi-connector on your device.
b. Press the sync button on the USB sync cable.
2Select the profile you want to
load on the device, and click OK.
The next time you or a user synchronizes that device,
Palm Desktop software prompts you or the user to assign a
username to the device.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 17
CHAPTER 1 Setting Up Your Device and Your Computer
Related topics
Click a link below to learn about these related topics:
Y
our Mobile
Manager
Keeping your device from turning on accidentally
Managing Info • Synchronizing your device with Palm Desktop software or Microsoft
Outlook on your computer
• Synchronizing wirelessly using the built-in Bluetooth technology or
Wi-Fi capabilities on your device
• Using your company’s network to synchronize information
• Choosing whether or not to synchronize information for a specific
application
• Adding applications to and deleting applications from your device
• Installing additional software from the CD
• Viewing application information
Customizing • Adjusting the screen display
• Reducing the Auto-off setting
Common
Questions
Answers to frequently asked questions about setup
Tips & Tricks
Make your device uniquely
yours. For great tips,
software, accessories, and
more, visit
www.palmOne.com/
mylifedrive.
Support
If you’re having problems
with setup or anything else
on your device, go to
www.palmOne.com/
support.
LifeDrive from palmOne 18
CHAPTER 2
Your Mobile Manager
Your new LifeDrive™ mobile manager
from palmOne takes mobile computing
to a whole new level. As always, it
helps you keep track of your schedule,
your business and personal contacts,
your to-do list, and even your
Microsoft Office and multimedia files.
But the device offers much more—like
a 4GB hard drive that lets you carry all
your crucial Office files, plus hours of
your favorite music, photos, and
videos. Transfer information in real
time between your device and your
computer and, on a Windows
computer, select which files and
folders to synchronize. Import photos
and videos from your digital camera’s
memory card, or connect wirelessly to
a Wi-Fi® network.
Benefits
• Carry files and folders on an internal
hard drive containing nearly 4GB of
storage, and work with them on the
go
• Save time and stay organized
• Travel light
• Never lose important information
• Stay in touch using wireless
connectivity
I
n t
hi
s c
h
apter
What’s on my device?
Using the power switch
Using the status bar
Rotating the screen
What’s on the screen?
What software is on my
device?
What’s on the CD?
Related topics
LifeDrive from palmOne 19
CHAPTER 2 Your Mobile Manager
What’s on my device?
Front
Indicator light Notifies you of various functions. A solid amber light indicates that the
device is charging; a solid green light indicates that the device is fully
charged.
A flashing amber light indicates that the device’s hard drive is currently
processing information—opening a file, saving changes, and so on. Be
especially careful not to drop, bang, or otherwise cause a strong
impact to your device while the indicator light is blinking; you may
damage the hard drive.
Screen
5-way navigator
Home
Media
Files
Star
Quick buttons
Indicator light
LifeDrive from palmOne 20
CHAPTER 2 Your Mobile Manager
Screen Displays the applications and information on your device. The screen
is touch-sensitive.
Display the input area by tapping the Input icon on the status bar.
Use the input area to enter info with Graffiti® 2 writing or the onscreen
keyboard.
5-way navigator Helps you move around and select info to display on the screen.
Quick buttons Turn on your device and open the corresponding application. Press the
Home button once to open Favorites, twice to open Applications. The
Star button opens the Pocket Tunes™ music application by default, but
you can customize it to open any application you choose.
Tip
The Favorites application
offers four pages of
favorites. Pressing Home
once opens the first page
of Favorites; use the
buttons in the upper-right
corner of the Favorites
screen to go to the other
pages.
LifeDrive from palmOne 21
CHAPTER 2 Your Mobile Manager
To p
IR port Beams information to and receives beamed information from other
devices that have an IR port.
Power switch Turns your device on or off and lets you turn Keylock on. A red indicator is
displayed on the switch when Keylock is on.
Stylus Lets you enter information on your device by writing or tapping. To
remove the stylus from its slot, press down on the top, release to let it
pop out of the slot, and then slide it out. Hold the stylus as you would a
pen or pencil. Using your fingertip instead of the stylus is OK, but don’t
use your fingernail, a real pen, or any other sharp object to touch the
screen.
Expansion card
slot
Lets you insert an expansion card (sold separately) to back up info and
add memory, applications, and accessories to your device.
»
Key Term
IR Short for infrared.
Beaming uses infrared
technology to send
information between two
IR ports that are within a
few feet of each other.
Did You Know?
Beaming lets you quickly
share appointments,
addresses, phone
numbers, files, photos,
and more.
Stylus Three-position
power switch
IR port
Expansion card slot
LifeDrive from palmOne 22
CHAPTER 2 Your Mobile Manager
Side
0
Screen rotation
button
Rotates the screen between portrait and landscape views.
Voice Memo
button
Opens the Voice Memo application when you press and release the
button. Records a voice memo when you press and hold the button.
Microphone Lets you record sound to create a voice memo.
Microphone
Voice Memo
button
Screen rotation button
LifeDrive from palmOne 23
CHAPTER 2 Your Mobile Manager
Back
Hard drive (internal) Provides 4GB of storage to carry and manage all of your crucial work
information, music and media files, and more.
Speaker Lets you listen to alarms, game and system sounds, music, and
voice memos.
Bluetooth® radio
(internal)
Enables your device to connect with other devices (sold separately)
that use Bluetooth wireless technology.
Wi-Fi radio (internal) Enables your device to connect to a Wi-Fi network to wirelessly
access email, browse the web, and synchronize.
Bluetooth radio
(internal)
Speaker
Hard drive
(internal)
Wi-Fi radio (internal)
LifeDrive from palmOne 24
CHAPTER 2 Your Mobile Manager
Bottom
Reset button Resets your device if it freezes (stops responding).
Multi-connector Lets you connect a USB sync cable (included) or a cradle (sold
separately) to your computer so you can synchronize or exchange
information. You can also charge your device by connecting it to
your computer using the USB sync cable.
The Multi-connector also lets you connect the AC charger to your
device—either directly to the connector or through the USB sync
cable—so you can charge it.
Be sure to plug in the sync cable with the arrow on the
cable connector facing the front of the device.
Headphone jack Lets you connect standard 3.5mm stereo headphones (sold
separately) to your device so you can listen to music and other audio
applications.
»
Key Term
USB The type of
connector or cable that’s
commonly used to
connect accessories to a
computer.
Did You Know?
You can purchase a cradle
accessory that lets you
connect external
speakers (sold
separately) to hear audio
from your device through
the Multi-connector. Visit
www.palmOne.com/
mylifedrive and click the
Accessories link.
Tip
It takes a little while for
your device to reset when
you press the reset
button. During the reset,
you see a progress bar,
then a screen with the
Palm Powered™ logo.
Resetting is done when
the Date & Time
Preferences screen
appears.
Connector
port
Reset
button
Headphone
jack
Multi-connector
AC charger
NOTE
LifeDrive from palmOne 25
CHAPTER 2 Your Mobile Manager
Using the power switch
Your device’s power switch turns your device on and off, and also lets you lock your device so that
it does not respond to taps, 5-way presses, or presses on the buttons on the front and side of your
device.
Use the power switch for the following actions:
• To turn on your device, slide the switch to the right and let it return to the center. To turn your
device off, slide the switch to the right again.
• If your device is off, slide the switch to the left to lock your device. Your device does not respond
to button presses, taps, or 5-way presses and cannot turn on until you slide the switch to the
center position. Locking your device when it is off is useful if you carry your device in a bag and
want to prevent it from turning on accidentally when something presses against it.
• If your device is on, slide the switch to the left to lock your device at the current screen. Your
device does not respond to button presses, taps, or 5-way presses, and the current screen
cannot be changed until you slide the switch to the center position. Locking your device at a
current screen is useful, for example, if you want to pass your device around to show a photo to
a group of people and you do not want someone to accidentally tap or press something that
causes the photo to disappear.
Did You Know?
A red indicator is
displayed on the power
switch when Keylock is
on.
On/Off
Keylock
Front of device
LifeDrive from palmOne 26
CHAPTER 2 Your Mobile Manager
Using the status bar
The status bar at the bottom of the device screen gives you access to valuable tools and is
accessible in all views.
0
Home Tap once to open Applications, twice to open Favorites.
Find Tap to open the Find dialog box.
Menu Tap to open the menu for the current screen.
System
info
Tap to open the System information dialog box. The dialog box shows the date and
time, available memory, and battery level, and allows you to turn system sounds
on and off and to adjust screen brightness.
Alert When the icon is blinking, tap to display the Reminders screen.
Bluetooth
controls
Tap to display the Bluetooth dialog box, where Bluetooth functionality can be
turned on and off and you can connect to another Bluetooth device. The icon color
changes from blue to white when your device’s Bluetooth functionality is turned on.
Wi-Fi
controls
Tap to display the Wi-Fi dialog box, where you can make a wireless connection to a
Wi-Fi network. The icon displays “Wi-Fi” when Wi-Fi is turned off, and a signal
strength indicator when Wi-Fi is turned on.
Tap anywhere outside of the Wi-Fi dialog box to close the box and return
to the screen you were viewing.
Full-
screen
writing
Tap to turn full-screen writing on and off. When it is on, you can write Graffiti® 2
characters anywhere onscreen. The icon color changes from blue to white when
full-screen writing is turned on.
Input Tap to switch between showing and hiding the input area. Tap and hold to display
the input area selection menu.
Home
Find
Menu
System info
Alert
Bluetooth controls
Wi-Fi controls
Full-screen writing
Input
Tip
Use the Find dialog box to
locate specific items of
information in your
device’s program
memory—for example, a
name or a phone number.
Did You Know?
The System info icon
shows the current time on
the status bar.
In the System info dialog
box, both the hard drive
and the program memory
are labeled Device. The
hard drive is indicated by
the larger available
memory size.
Did You Know?
When Wi-Fi is on, the
signal strength indicator
shows an alert symbol
when the device is not
connected to a network,
and an arrow symbol
when the device is
connected. The number
of bars indicates the
signal strength when
connected.
NOTE
LifeDrive from palmOne 27
CHAPTER 2 Your Mobile Manager
Rotating the screen
You can switch between landscape and portrait views by pressing the screen rotation button on
the side of your device. Landscape view is useful for viewing spreadsheets, email, web pages, and
photos.
Did You Know?
You can customize which
way the screen rotates in
landscape mode by
choosing right- or left-
handed rotation.
Screen rotation button
LifeDrive from palmOne 28
CHAPTER 2 Your Mobile Manager
What’s on the screen?
Your device includes many features that make it easy to use. Among them are the input area and
the common elements that appear on the screen in each of the applications. Once you learn how
to use them in one application you can easily use them in all the others.
Input area
By default, the input area is displayed. To hide the input area, tap Input on the status bar. To
display the input area if it is hidden, tap Input again. Tapping the icons in the input area opens
the following applications:
You cannot display the input area in the main Favorites View. However, if you perform a
task such as adding or deleting a favorite, you can display the input area.
Application
icons: Calendar,
Contacts,
Memos, Tasks
Open the corresponding application.
Letter keyboard
icon
Opens the alphabetic keyboard.
Number
keyboard icon
Opens the numeric keyboard.
Tip
You can select an input
area that does not display
the application icons.
Tip
If you use another
application frequently,
customize the input area
to display that
application’s icon. Tap
and hold any of the four
application icons, and
select the new application
you want from the list.
The new application’s
icon replaces the icon you
tapped.
Contacts icon
Letter keyboard
Icon
Tasks icon
Calendar icon
Memos icon
Number keyboard
Icon
NOTE
LifeDrive from palmOne 29
CHAPTER 2 Your Mobile Manager
Application controls
Previous/next
arrows
Select the left and right arrows to view the previous and next entry; where
up and down arrows appear, select them to view the previous and next
screens of information.
Scroll bar Drag the slider, or tap the top or bottom arrow, to scroll the display one line
at a time. To scroll to the previous screen, tap the scroll bar just above the
slider. To scroll to the next screen, tap the scroll bar just below the slider.
Command
button
Select a button, such as OK, Cancel, or Details, to perform a command or to
open a dialog box. Command buttons appear at the bottom of dialog boxes
and application screens.
Tips icon Tap the Tips icon to view shortcuts and other useful information for the
screen where the icon is located. When you have finished viewing the tip,
select Done.
Entry box Tap an entry box to open a dialog box where you can enter info for that field.
Pick list Select the arrow to display a list of choices, and then select an item in the
list.
Box Check or uncheck a box to select or deselect it. When a box is checked, the
corresponding option is selected and active. When a box is unchecked, the
corresponding option is deselected and inactive.
Scroll bar
Previous/next arrows
Command button
Pick list
Entry box
Box
Tips icon
»
Key Term
Slider The solid area on
the scroll bar. The slider
moves to indicate the
relative position within
the entry or list.
Tip
You can also use the
5-way navigator to select
an item from a pick list
and to select some
command buttons.
LifeDrive from palmOne 30
CHAPTER 2 Your Mobile Manager
What software is on my device?
Your device comes with many applications preinstalled and ready to use.
0
Favorites Customize a list of your favorite applications, files, and folders so that you can
locate and open them quickly.
Files View, organize, and open files and folders on your device’s drive.
Drive Mode Connect your device as a USB removable drive on another computer. Open files
stored on your device on the computer, and move, copy, and work with files
between your device and the computer.
Calendar Manage your schedule from single entries, like lunch with a friend, to repeating
and extended events, like weekly meetings and holidays. Even color-code your
schedule by category.
Contacts Store names and addresses, phone numbers, email and website addresses; even
add a birthday alarm or a contact’s photo.
Documents Create, view, and edit Microsoft Word and Excel files. View and manage
PowerPoint files.
Wi-Fi® controls Set up wireless connections to a Wi-Fi network for sending and receiving
information. Access these controls from the status bar.
Bluetooth®
controls
Set up wireless connections to a mobile phone, network, or computer for sending
and receiving information. Access these controls from the status bar.
Media View, share, and organize photos and videos.
Camera
Companion
Import photos and videos from your digital camera’s memory card, open them
and work with them on your device, or copy them to your computer. After
importing items, delete them from the card to make room there for more photos
and videos. This icon is named Companion in Applications View.
Tip
Can’t find some of these
applications? Press the
Home button twice and
use the Category pick list
to view more applications
in Applications View.
LifeDrive from palmOne 31
CHAPTER 2 Your Mobile Manager
Pocket Tunes™ Carry music, create playlists, and listen to music on your device. This application
works with the Real Rhapsody desktop application that you can install from the
software installation CD (Windows only). Both Mac and Windows users can use
Pocket Tunes on the device.
VersaMail®Send, receive, and manage email messages wirelessly using your device’s
wireless capabilities or by synchronizing it with your Windows computer.
Web Browse your favorite sites on the web using your device’s wireless capabilities.
SMS Send and receive short text (SMS) messages using your device’s wireless
capabilities.
Ta s k s Stay on top of your to-do list. Enter things you need to do, prioritize them, set
alarms, and then monitor your deadlines.
Voice Memo Record short voice clips using the built-in microphone.
Memos Capture information such as meeting notes, lists of books to read, movies to see,
recipes, and anything else you need to write down.
Note Pad Write on the screen in your own handwriting or draw a quick sketch.
Addit™ Receive notifications of upgrades and patches and then install them onto your
device; obtain personalized news and other information as well as user tips at a
glance; preview, try, and buy software for your device. (Windows only for
downloads using the sync cable; both Windows and Mac users can download
software using your device’s wireless capabilities. Internet connection required.)
Calculator Do basic math calculations such as splitting restaurant bills and figuring tips.
Quick Tour Learn about your device and how to enter information.
Card Info View information about your device’s drive or about an expansion card seated in
the expansion card slot.
HotSync®Synchronize info on your device with the info on your computer.
LifeDrive from palmOne 32
CHAPTER 2 Your Mobile Manager
What’s on the CD?
The LifeDrive™ software installation CD includes desktop software for your computer and
additional software for your device.
The desktop software lets you use your computer to view, enter, and manage info for many of the
applications on your device. Make sure you install the desktop software so that you can back up
and save the info on your device onto your computer.
The additional device software lets you do more things with your device. When you set up your
device you may install some (or all) of these applications. You can install any of the applications at
any time after you set up your device, as well.
The software installation CD includes titles such as the following.
Prefs Customize your device’s sound levels, colors, security, and more.
Handmark
Solitaire
Enjoy hours of entertainment with this solitaire game.
World Clock Set the time in your home city and two other locations, and set an alarm to wake
you up.
Dialer Dial phone numbers directly from your device.
Expense Track business or travel expenses and print expense reports after you
synchronize your device with your computer.
Tip
To learn how to install the
desktop software from
the CD, see Step 3:
Installing your software.
Tip
To learn how to install
additional device
software from the CD, see
Installing the additional
software from the CD.
LifeDrive from palmOne 33
CHAPTER 2 Your Mobile Manager
0
Palm®Desktop software View, enter, manage, and back up info for Calendar, Contacts, Tasks,
Memos, Expense, and Voice Memo on your computer (Expense is
Windows only). You can also view, manage, and back up info for Note
Pad. When you synchronize your device with your computer, this info
is updated in both places.
Palm Desktop includes HotSync® Manager software, which allows you
to customize the settings for synchronization. You can access HotSync
Manager by selecting its icon in the task bar at the bottom of your
computer screen.
On a Windows computer, use Quick Install within Palm Desktop
software to install applications (PRC) to your device or to an expansion
card that is seated in the expansion card slot.
Palm Desktop is installed automatically during the initial CD
installation process.
During installation, you can choose to synchronize your
device with Microsoft Outlook on your computer (Windows only). If
you do, information from Contacts, Calendar, Tasks, and Memos is
synchronized with info in the corresponding application in Outlook.
(Memos is called Notes in Outlook.) Information for Expense, Note
Pad, and Voice Memo is still synchronized with the corresponding info
in Palm Desktop software.
Send To Handheld droplet
(Mac only)
Install applications from your Mac computer to your device or to an
expansion card that is seated in the expansion card slot for use on your
device. The Send To Handheld droplet is installed automatically during
the initial CD installation process.
HotSync Manager
NOTE
Tip
After you install an app
and discover how
valuable it is, be sure to
add it to Favorites. Assign
your most important
application to the Star
button so that you can
open it with one press.
Did You Know?
You can categorize
applications in
Applications View. Some
apps are automatically
assigned to a category
when you install them;
others are assigned to the
Unfiled category. Apps
from all categories
appear in the All
category. Assign an
application to a category
in Applications by
selecting Category in the
App menu. Select the pick
list next to the
application’s name; then
select a category.
LifeDrive from palmOne 34
CHAPTER 2 Your Mobile Manager
LifeDrive™ Manager
(Windows only)
Install applications and transfer folders and files from your Windows
computer to the hard drive on your device or to an expansion card,
synchronize files and folders, and convert photos and videos for
viewing on your device. LifeDrive Manager is installed automatically
during the initial CD installation process.
Manual Install a version of the Getting Started guide on your device. On
Windows, you can also access the full Acrobat version (PDF) of Getting
Started from the Help menu of Palm Desktop software and from the
Start Programs menu of your Windows desktop. On a Mac, access
Getting Started from the Palm/Documentation folder.
WiFile™ Access your wireless network so that you can open photos, music files,
and documents that are located in shared folders on a networked
computer.
Adobe® Reader
for Palm OS®
View PDF files that are tailored to fit your device’s screen.
Power by Hand eReader Purchase and download eBooks from the web so you can read them
when you want, where you want.
Enterprise Software link Access the palmOne enterprise website, where you can purchase
software to create a secure wireless connection to your corporate
network in order to safely send and receive email messages and
access the corporate intranet with a VPN client. You can also purchase
software to encrypt individual files and folders to protect your critical
information (download requires Internet connection; additional fees
may apply).
AudiblePlayer Listen to newspapers, books, public radio, language instruction, and
more (Windows only; download requires Internet connection;
additional fees may apply).
Tip
Be sure to use the
Enterprise Software link
to check for new software
available from the
palmOne enterprise
website, such as
upcoming software that
provides robust security
for Wi-Fi authentication
and connection to a
network.
LifeDrive from palmOne 35
CHAPTER 2 Your Mobile Manager
Documents To Go Companion desktop software for the Documents application on your
device. Lets you move or copy Microsoft Word, Excel, and PowerPoint
files to the Documents folder on your device’s drive, as well as create
and edit files.
Handmark Express Download current news as well as information on the weather, stocks,
sports, movies, and more (download requires Internet connection and
subscription to service with Handmark).
RealRhapsody Transfer MP3 music files from your computer to your device or to an
expansion card (sold separately), and copy music from your CDs to
your computer. This is the desktop companion for the Pocket Tunes
music application on your device (Windows only).
Windows Media Player
link/Direct X
Required to prepare videos for playback on your device (Windows
only).
We recommend that you install the Windows Media Player/
Direct X software from the CD, even if you already have Windows
Media Player on your computer. The version on the CD contains all of
the components needed to prepare videos for playback on your device.
Windows Media Player
plug-in
Works with Windows Media Player to convert music files for playback
using the Pocket Tunes application on your device.
QuickTime Required for preparing videos in certain formats for viewing on your
device.
QuickTime is included on the CD for Windows computers
only. For Mac computers, QuickTime is included in OS X.
Tu t o ri a l Learn to use the popular features of your device. The Tutorial includes
a tour of your device and step-by-step instructions. Access it from the
Discover your device screen on the software installation CD.
Did You Know?
You can categorize
applications in
Applications View. Some
apps are automatically
assigned to a category
when you install them;
others are assigned to the
Unfiled category. Apps
from all categories
appear in the All
category. Assign an
application to a category
in Applications by
selecting Category in the
App menu. Select the pick
list next to the
application’s name; then
select a category.
NOTE
NOTE
LifeDrive from palmOne 36
CHAPTER 2 Your Mobile Manager
Related topics
Click a link below to learn about these related topics:
Setup Installing the desktop software from the CD
Entering
Information
• Entering information with Graffiti 2 characters and shortcuts
• Entering information with the onscreen letter and number keyboards
Moving
Around
• Opening applications and using menus
• Finding information
Managing Info • Synchronizing your device with your computer
• Using LifeDrive Manager and Drive Mode to work with information
between your device and your computer
• Installing additional software from the CD
Sharing • Beaming information and applications to other Palm Powered™ devices
• Sending information and applications to other Bluetooth devices by using
Bluetooth technology on your device
World Clock Viewing the current date and time
Customizing • Setting the current date and time
• Adjusting the brightness of the display
Tips & Tricks
Make your device uniquely
yours. For great tips,
software, accessories, and
more, visit
www.palmOne.com/
mylifedrive.
Support
If you’re having problems
with your device, go to
www.palmOne.com/
support.
LifeDrive from palmOne 37
CHAPTER 2 Your Mobile Manager
Maintaining • Caring for your device
• Resetting your device
Common
Questions
Answers to frequently asked questions about your device
LifeDrive from palmOne 38
CHAPTER 3
Moving Around in Applications
Have you ever been to a new city and
felt a bit lost until you figured out that
the numbered streets run north/south
and the avenues run east/west?
Learning to move around on your
device is similar. Most Palm OS®
applications use the same set of
application controls. So once you learn
how to use these standard controls,
you’ll be driving all over town and you
won’t even need a map. Benefits
• Find and open applications quickly
• Access extra features with menus
• Move around in applications with one
hand, using the 5-way navigator
• Locate information in any application
with the Find feature
I
n t
hi
s c
h
apter
Opening applications
Using the 5-way navigator
Using menus
Finding information
Related topics
LifeDrive from palmOne 39
CHAPTER 3 Moving Around in Applications
Opening applications
You can open applications from Favorites View or Applications View, or by using the Files
application.
Some applications are listed differently in Favorites and Applications views. For
example, the Photos & Videos entry in Favorites opens the Media application, which is listed as
Media in Applications View. The application icons are similar in both Favorites and Applications.
Using Favorites
Favorites View contains up to 32 items—four pages of eight items each—and can include
applications, specific files, folders, and even links to the web. Certain items are included in
Favorites by default, but you can customize the list to contain any items you want.
To access an item from Favorites, press Home and select an item from the list. Use the 5-way
navigator or tap the buttons in the upper-right corner of the screen to move to another page of
favorites.
Tip
Press Home once to open
Favorites; press Home
twice to open
Applications. Switch
between Favorites and
Applications by pressing
Home.
Did You Know?
You can use a favorite
photo as the background
for your Favorites or
Applications View.
Tip
Customize Favorites to
display folders—for
example, a project folder
that you access often.
Select the folder to view
its contents.
NOTE
Home
Tap to move to other pages of favorites
LifeDrive from palmOne 40
CHAPTER 3 Moving Around in Applications
Using Applications
Applications View shows all of the applications on your device, except those that are accessed
using the status bar. Use the category pick list in the upper-right corner of the screen to view
applications by category or to see all applications. From the pick list, you can also select to view
the contents of your device’s hard drive (it’s called LifeDrive on the pick list) or of an expansion
card (it’s called Card1 or whatever you’ve named the card) if one is inserted into the expansion
slot.
To access an item from Applications, press Home twice and select an icon. When you press
Home twice, it displays the same category of applications that was displayed the last time
Applications was open. Use the category pick list to view another category or to see all
applications, the contents of the hard drive, or the contents of an expansion card.
Tip
Also open Applications
by tapping the Home icon
on the status bar.
Tip
You can also open a
specific application using
one of the quick buttons
on the front of your
device.
Tip
When no item is selected,
press Right or Left on the
5-way to scroll through
application categories.
Did You Know?
Applications View
displays an icon for
opening Favorites.
Favorites View contains
an entry for opening
Applications.
Home
Category pick list
LifeDrive from palmOne 41
CHAPTER 3 Moving Around in Applications
Using Files
The Files application enables you to easily open, view, and move among the files and folders on
your device’s hard drive or on an expansion card inserted into your device’s expansion slot.
To open Files, press Files on the front of your device.
Tip
You can also open Files
by selecting Files in
Applications View.
Tip
If you have an expansion
card (sold separately)
inserted into your
device’s expansion slot,
select the card icon in
Files to view the contents
of the card.
Files
Card
icon
LifeDrive from palmOne 42
CHAPTER 3 Moving Around in Applications
Navigate within Files by doing any of the following:
• Select a file or folder to open it. The file opens in the corresponding application—for example,
Documents for Word, Excel, or PowerPoint files.
If your device contains an application that can open a file, a file-specific icon appears to
the left of the file name in the Files list. If a generic icon appears to the left of a file name, you
cannot open the file on your device.
• Select the Folder Up icon to move up one level of folders.
• Select the pick list at the top of the files screen to view and jump to the top-level folder and any
subfolders.
• Select the top-level folder on the files screen to move up one level of folders.
Files always displays these five folders at the top of the folder list: Applications,
Documents, Music, Photos & Videos, and VersaMail Attachments. Place your applications and files
in the correct folder so that you can easily locate them.
Did You Know?
If you select a file from
within Files, it
automatically opens in
the correct application on
your device. If there is no
application for that file, a
beep alert sounds.
Tip
Tap and hold the stylus
on a file or folder to open
a menu of actions you
can do with that item—
copy, delete, and so on.
Select folder
Folder up Folder pick list
Top-level folder
NOTE
NOTE
LifeDrive from palmOne 43
CHAPTER 3 Moving Around in Applications
Working with files and folders
You can work with the files and folders in the Files application—create new folders; copy, beam,
and delete files and folders; and more. You can work with one file or folder at a time.
0
1Open Files.
2Navigate to the file or folder you want.
3Work with the file or folder:
a. Tap and hold the item name to
open a menu that lets you
perform any of the following
tasks:
Open With Select the application
to use to open a file.
Rename Rename the selected item.
Details View details such as name, including extension for files; location on
the hard drive or expansion card; last date modified; and, for files only, size.
Check the box to make the selected item read-only, meaning that it cannot be
changed by a user. You can rename or delete a file or folder from the Details
dialog box.
Continued
Did You Know?
If you select Open With,
only applications that can
open the file you have
selected are displayed.
You can select one of the
applications displayed to
make it the default
application for opening
this file type. If no
application appears, that
means there is no
application on your
device that can open the
selected file.
Tip
You can also highlight a
file or folder and then
press Right on the 5-way
to open the menu of
tasks.
LifeDrive from palmOne 44
CHAPTER 3 Moving Around in Applications
Cont’d.
Copy Copy the item to another location on the drive or an expansion card.
Move Move the item to another location on the drive or an expansion card.
Delete Delete the current file or folder.
Beam Beam the file or folder.
Send Send the current file or folder using your device’s built-in Bluetooth®
wireless technology or as an attachment to a text message or email message.
b. Select the task you want to perform on the file or folder, and follow any
onscreen instructions.
Done
Did You Know?
If you select Delete, you
get a message asking you
to confirm the deletion.
LifeDrive from palmOne 45
CHAPTER 3 Moving Around in Applications
Sorting Files
You can sort your files and folders by icon, name, date, or size.
0
1Open Files.
2Select your sort options:
Sort display Select the column
you want to sort by. From the left
side of the screen, the columns
are icon, name, and size/date.
Sort in ascending or descending
order Select the column you
want to sort by to switch
between ascending and
descending sort order.
Switch between sorting by date
or by size Tap and hold the
rightmost column until the
heading you want appears.
Done
Sort by
icon
Sort by name
Sort by
date or
size
LifeDrive from palmOne 46
CHAPTER 3 Moving Around in Applications
Opening files and folders from within an application
In certain applications—for example, Documents, Media, and Pocket Tunes™—you can open a file
or folder directly from within the application. The application automatically displays files located
in the appropriate folder on your device’s hard drive—for example, when you open the Pocket
Tunes application, files in the Music folder on the drive are displayed—but you can browse for files
located elsewhere on the drive. See the application chapters for information on opening files.
Switching between applications
You can switch between applications at any time. Just press Home and select an icon from
Favorites or Applications, or press a quick button. Your device automatically saves your work in
the current application and switches to the other application.
Did You Know?
If you use a command to
open a file from within an
application, only files that
can be opened by that
application are displayed.
For example, in Pocket
Tunes, only music files
such as MP3 files are
displayed.
Tip
You must use the stylus
to tap icons in the input
area or on the status bar.
LifeDrive from palmOne 47
CHAPTER 3 Moving Around in Applications
Using the 5-way navigator
The 5-way navigator, located at the bottom of the front panel, lets you access information quickly
with one hand and without the stylus. To use the 5-way, press Up, Down, Right, Left, or Center.
The 5-way does various things based on which type of screen you’re viewing.
Moving around with the 5-way
On most screens, one item—a button, a list entry, or an entire screen—is highlighted by default.
The highlight identifies what element will be affected by your next action. On any screen, only one
item can be highlighted at a time. Use the 5-way to move the highlight from one item to another
onscreen.
Tip
In landscape view, not
only does screen
orientation change, but
so does the orientation of
the 5-way. For example,
in right-handed
landscape view, what was
Up in portrait view
becomes Right in
landscape view.
Up
Down
Right
Left
Center Up
Center
Left
Right
Down
Portrait view
Right-handed
landscape view
LifeDrive from palmOne 48
CHAPTER 3 Moving Around in Applications
The highlight can take one of three forms, depending on what is highlighted:
Individual applications may contain application-specific elements that can also be
highlighted by the 5-way, for example, the Quick Connect icon in a contact.
Blue glow This highlights elements of the user
interface like command buttons, pick lists, and
arrows.
Reverse type (white text on a dark background)
This highlights an entry on a list screen or a phone
number, email address, or web link on a web page
or in a message.
Blinking cursor The blinking cursor tells you that
you can enter text at that point.
Tip
When an entire screen is
highlighted, only the top
and bottom borders
acquire the glow; the
right and left borders do
not show the highlight.
Tip
A few onscreen elements
of your device can only
be activated by tapping
them with your stylus, for
example, icons in the
input area and the view
icons in the lower-left
corner of Day View in
Calendar.
NOTE
Button
highlighted
with blue
glow
Contact list
entry
highlighted
with reverse
type
Blinking
cursor
LifeDrive from palmOne 49
CHAPTER 3 Moving Around in Applications
Moving around in Favorites View
Moving around in Applications View
Up or Down Scrolls to the next favorite in the
corresponding direction.
Right or Left Displays the next or previous page of
favorites.
Center Opens the selected item.
Up or Down Scrolls up or down in Applications View.
Right or Left Scrolls to the next or previous application
category.
Center Inserts the highlight. When the selection
highlight is present:
Up, Down, Right, or Left Scrolls to the next
item in the corresponding direction.
Center Opens the selected item.
Pages of favorites
Tip
In Applications View, to
remove the selection
highlight without making
a selection, scroll to the
first icon (in the upper-left
corner) and then press
Left on the 5-way, or enter
the Backspace character
using Graffiti® 2 writing.
Category
LifeDrive from palmOne 50
CHAPTER 3 Moving Around in Applications
Moving around in list screens and entry screens
In list screens, use the 5-way to select and move between entries such as notes, memos, contacts,
or photos. In individual entry screens—such as a single photo or email message—use the 5-way to
move among the items on the screen or to move to another entry.
The behavior of the 5-way for list screens and entry screens varies according to application.
Follow the guidelines for moving around with the 5-way for general tips; as you become familiar
with each application, learning the specific behavior of the 5-way is easy.
Moving around in dialog boxes
Dialog boxes appear when you select a button or option that requires you to provide additional
information. In dialog boxes, use the 5-way to select a button or to make a selection from items
such as boxes and pick lists.
Read dialog boxes carefully. Selecting a button such as OK or Yes may cancel an
action or delete information.
Up, Down,
Right, or Left
Highlights the next item in the dialog box
(pick list, box, button) in the corresponding
direction.
Center • If highlight is on a box: Checks or
unchecks the box.
• If highlight is on a pick list: Opens the pick
list. When a pick list is open:
Up or Down Scrolls to the previous or
next entry.
Center Selects the highlighted entry.
• If highlight is on a button: Activates the
button, and then closes the dialog box.
Box
Pick list
Button with
highlight
IMPORTANT
[!]
LifeDrive from palmOne 51
CHAPTER 3 Moving Around in Applications
Moving around in menus
After you open the menus you can use the 5-way to move between menus and to select menu
items:
Up or Down Scrolls within the current menu list.
Right or Left Scrolls to the next or previous menu on the
menu bar.
Center Selects the highlighted menu item.
LifeDrive from palmOne 52
CHAPTER 3 Moving Around in Applications
Using menus
Menus let you access additional features and settings. They are easy to use, and once you master
them in one application, you know how to use them in all your applications.
0
1Open an application.
2Tap Menu on the status bar.
.
3Select an item from the leftmost menu, or use the 5-way to highlight and select
a different menu, and then select a menu item.
Done
Tip
You can also open the
device menus by tapping
the application title in the
upper-left corner of the
screen.
Tip
When the menus are
open, you can use the
5-way to select menus
and menu items.
Application
title
Menu
item
Menu
LifeDrive from palmOne 53
CHAPTER 3 Moving Around in Applications
Using the Command stroke
Most menu items also have a menu shortcut, which is similar to the keyboard shortcuts used on
computers. The menu shortcut appears to the right of the menu item.
To use a menu shortcut, first write the Graffiti® 2 Command stroke on the left side of the input area
or the full screen, and then write the shortcut letter. For example, to select Paste from the Edit
menu, write the Command stroke, followed by the letter p. You do not have to open a menu to use
the Command stroke.
When you write the Command stroke, the Command toolbar appears. See the next
section for info on using the Command toolbar.
Using the Command toolbar
The Command toolbar displays different icons based on the active screen. For example, if you
have text selected, the icons might be Cut, Copy, and Paste. If no text is selected, the icons might
be Beam, Undo, and Delete.
To use the Command toolbar, write the Command stroke to display the Command toolbar, and
then tap an icon to select its command.
Tip
Command mode is active
for just a few seconds, so
write the menu shortcut
or tap an icon on the
Command toolbar
quickly.
Menu shortcuts
Menu items
C
omman
d
stroke
NOTE
Cut UndoCopy Paste Beam Delete
C
omman
d
stroke
LifeDrive from palmOne 54
CHAPTER 3 Moving Around in Applications
Finding information
You can use Find to locate any word or phrase—either as part of a file name or within a file—in any
application in your device’s program memory. Find also locates words that begin a file name only
(not within a file) on your device’s hard drive or on an expansion card.
Find locates any words that begin with the text you enter and is not case-sensitive. For example,
searching for “plane” finds “planet” but not “airplane.” Searching for “bell” also finds “Bell.”
0
1Tap Find on the status bar.
2Enter the text that you want to find, and then select OK.
3Select the text that you want to review.
Done
Tip
If you select text in an
application before you
tap Find, the selected text
automatically appears in
the Find dialog box.
Tip
Open an application
before you tap Find to
display results from that
application at the top of
the results list.
Tip
Want to stop searching?
Select Stop at any time
during a search. To
continue the search,
select Find More.
Did You Know?
If you select a result that
is a file located on the
hard drive or on an
expansion card, the Files
application opens,
displaying the selected
file. Select the file name
to open it.
LifeDrive from palmOne 55
CHAPTER 3 Moving Around in Applications
Related topics
Click a link below to learn about these related topics:
Your Mobile
Manager
• Locating the controls on your device
• Discovering the built-in software on your device and the additional
software on the CD
• Getting familiar with the input area and onscreen application controls
Entering
Information
• Entering information with Graffiti 2 characters and shortcuts
• Entering contact information in other applications
Sharing • Beaming information and applications to other Palm Powered™ devices
• Sending information and applications to other Bluetooth® devices by
using Bluetooth technology on your device
Privacy Keeping information private by turning on security options
Categories Creating categories and organizing your applications and information
Managing
Info
• Adding and deleting applications on your device
• Viewing application information
Customizing • Using a photo as the background for Applications and Favorites views
• Displaying Applications View in list format
Maintaining Caring for your device
Common
Questions
Answers to frequently asked questions about using your device and its
applications
Tips & Tricks
Make your device uniquely
yours. For great tips,
software, accessories, and
more, visit
www.palmOne.com/
mylifedrive.
Support
If you’re having problems
with your device, go to
www.palmOne.com/
support.
LifeDrive from palmOne 56
CHAPTER 4
Entering Information on Your Device
Whether you’re scheduling a meeting
with your daughter’s teacher or adding
a new restaurant to your Contacts list,
you need to get that information into
your device. There are several ways to
do this.
You may find that you prefer one
method if you’re entering a small
amount of information, while another
works best for large amounts. Choose
the one that fits your situation. Benefits
• Quickly enter important information
• Choose the method that works best
for your situation
I
n t
hi
s c
h
apter
How can I enter information
on my device?
Entering information with
Graffiti® 2 writing
Entering information with
the onscreen keyboard
Entering info from Contacts
into another application
Editing information
Related topics
LifeDrive from palmOne 57
CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Device
How can I enter information on my device?
• Graffiti® 2 writing
•The onscreen keyboard
•Phone Lookup
•Note Pad
• An accessory keyboard (sold separately; visit www.palmOne.com/mylifedrive and click the
Accessories link)
The most popular methods are using Graffiti 2 writing and the onscreen keyboard.
You can also enter information on your computer and move and work with the
information between your device and your computer. Or you can send and receive information
from other devices, using beaming or your device’s built-in Bluetooth® wireless technology or
Wi-Fi® capabilities.
Entering information with Graffiti® 2 writing
You can enter info directly on your device with Graffiti 2 writing. Graffiti 2 writing includes any
character you can type on a standard keyboard. Entering these characters on your device is very
similar to the way you naturally write letters, numbers, and symbols. But instead of using a pen
and paper, you use the stylus and the input area on your device. With only a few minutes of
practice, you can learn to use Graffiti 2 writing.
Writing in the input area
You can write Graffiti 2 characters in the input area, or you can turn on full-screen writing and use
the entire screen to enter characters.
Tip
A blinking cursor on your
device screen indicates
where the information
you enter will appear. Tap
or use the 5-way to move
the cursor to the location
you want. In most cases,
if you do not see a
blinking cursor, you
cannot enter information
on that screen.
NOTE
LifeDrive from palmOne 58
CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Device
Your device has two different layouts—classic and wide—for the input area that you can use to
enter Graffiti 2 characters. To open them, tap and hold Input on the status bar, and then select
the icon of the input area you want.
In either layout, write lowercase letters, uppercase letters, and numbers in the sections shown. If
you write characters in the wrong area, they are not recognized correctly and an incorrect
character is written.
Using full-screen writing
When full-screen writing is turned on, you can write anywhere on the screen. When full-screen
writing is turned off, you must write character strokes in the Graffiti 2 input area for your device to
recognize them.
Tip
Select the top icon to
open the onscreen
keyboard.
Tip
You can choose whether
the Graffiti 2 strokes you
enter appear as white
characters in the input
area.
Uppercase letters
Lowercase letters
Numerals
Uppercase letters
straddling line
Lowercase letters
Numerals
Select
middle icon
Select
bottom icon
Classic Wide
LifeDrive from palmOne 59
CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Device
You can write letters or characters in the following areas:
Left side of the screen Write letters or characters that are assigned to the abc input area.
Right side of the screen Write numbers or characters that are assigned to the 123 input area.
Middle of the screen straddling the imaginary dividing line between the left and right sides
Write uppercase letters.
For a brief period of time after writing a character, a quick tap on the screen is
interpreted as a period character. Wait a second to tap buttons or place the cursor so that the
action is not interpreted as a period character.
Turn full-screen writing on and off by tapping full-screen writing on the status bar. When
full-screen writing is on, the icon turns from gray to white.
NOTE
Full-screen writing
Write numerals on
the right side
Write letters on
the left side
W
r
i
te cap
i
ta
l
or uppercase
letters in the middle
LifeDrive from palmOne 60
CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Device
Writing Graffiti 2 characters
0
1Open an application you use to enter information, like Calendar.
2Tap the screen where you want your character to appear.
3Position the stylus in the correct part of the input area, if selected, or in the
correct part of the screen if full-screen writing is on.
4Write the characters exactly as shown in the tables that follow these steps. Be
sure to start each stroke at the heavy dot.
5Lift the stylus at the end of the stroke.
When you lift the stylus from the screen, your device recognizes
the stroke immediately and prints the character at the insertion
point on the screen.
Did You Know?
Graffiti 2 writing
automatically capitalizes
the first letter of a
sentence or a new entry.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 61
CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Device
Keys to success with Graffiti 2 writing
Keep these guidelines in mind when using Graffiti 2 writing:
• Write the characters exactly as shown in the following tables. Don’t write the dot. It’s only there
to show you where to begin writing the character.
• The Graffiti 2 writing area, whether the input area or the full screen, has two sections. Write
lowercase letters on the left, numbers on the right, and capital letters across the middle.
• Write at a natural speed, and do not write on a slant.
• Press firmly.
• Write large characters.
If you’re already familiar with Graffiti writing from an older Palm Powered™ device, Graffiti 2
writing will be easy to master. Characters are entered in exactly the same way, except for i, t, k,
and the number 4. These letters are now made with two strokes, just the way you would write
them if you were using a pen and paper.
Also, you no longer have to use the Punctuation Shift stroke for common punctuation like periods
and commas or for @. Just write these characters on the correct side of the input area and your
device immediately recognizes them.
Did You Know?
Graffiti 2 characters made
with two strokes are
recognized after the
second stroke. Make the
second stroke quickly
after the first so that the
correct character is
recognized.
Did You Know?
Write uppercase letters
the same way you write
lowercase ones. The only
difference is where you
write them.
Tip
Your device has tables
displaying all of the
Graffiti 2 characters, short
cuts, and commands.
Customize your device so
you can display these
tables by drawing a line
from the bottom of the
screen to the top.
LifeDrive from palmOne 62
CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Device
Graffiti 2 alphabet
0
Write lowercase letters on LEFT side,
and capital letters across MIDDLE of input area
Letter Stroke Letter Stroke Letter Stroke Letter Stroke
ABCD
EFGH
IJKL
MNO P
QRST
UVWX
YZ
Tip
You can select alternate
ways to write some
Graffiti 2 characters.
Choose the method that’s
most natural for you.
LifeDrive from palmOne 63
CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Device
Graffiti 2 numbers
0
Write numbers on RIGHT side of input area
Number Stroke Number Stroke
01
23
45
67
89
LifeDrive from palmOne 64
CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Device
Graffiti 2 punctuation marks
0
0
Write these marks on LEFT side of input area
Mark Stroke Mark Stroke
Period
.
Ampersand
&
Comma
,
Carriage
return
Apostrophe
‘
At
@
Space Quotation mark
“
Question mark
?
Tab
Exclamation
point
!
LifeDrive from palmOne 65
CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Device
0
Write these marks on RIGHT side of input area
Mark Stroke Mark Stroke
Period
.
Backslash
\
Comma
,
Slash
/
Tilde
ñ
Left
parenthesis
(
Dash
–
Right
parenthesis
)
Plus
+
Equal sign
=
Asterisk
*
Tip
Having trouble with the
plus sign or asterisk
symbol? Use the
Punctuation Shift stroke
first and then make the
character.
LifeDrive from palmOne 66
CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Device
Graffiti 2 accented characters
For accented characters, write the letter on the left side of the input area, and then write the accent
on the right side of the input area.
0
Write these marks on RIGHT side of input area
Accent Stroke Accent Stroke
Acute
á
Dieresis
ä
Grave
à
Circumflex
â
Tilde
ã
Ring
å
Tip
Having trouble accenting
characters? You can
always open the onscreen
keyboard, tap int., and
then tap the character you
need.
Tip
Get help writing any of
the Graffiti 2 characters in
most applications. Open
the Edit menu and select
Graffiti 2 Help.
LifeDrive from palmOne 67
CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Device
Graffiti 2 gestures
0
Write gestures on LEFT side,
or across the middle of input area
Gesture Stroke Gesture Stroke
Cut Paste
Copy Undo
LifeDrive from palmOne 68
CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Device
Writing Graffiti 2 symbols and other special characters
Symbols and other special characters can be written on either side of the input area, using the
Punctuation Shift stroke.
0
0
1Enter the Punctuation Shift
stroke.
When Punctuation Shift is active,
an indicator appears in the lower-
right corner of the screen.
2Write the symbol or other special character shown in the following table.
You can write a symbol or special character anywhere in the input area.
3Enter another Punctuation Shift stroke to finish the character and to make it
appear more quickly.
Once the Punctuation Shift indicator disappears, you see the
character.
Tip
If you accidentally enter
the Punctuation Shift
stroke, enter it again to
cancel it, or wait a
moment and it
automatically disappears.
Did You Know?
Writing two Punctuation
Shift strokes cancels the
automatic capitalization
of the first letter of a new
entry or sentence. Punctuation
Shift indicator
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 69
CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Device
Graffiti 2 symbols and special characters
0
Write symbols on EITHER side of input area
LifeDrive from palmOne 70
CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Device
Writing Graffiti 2 ShortCuts
Graffiti 2 contains several ShortCuts to make entering common information easier. For example,
when you write the ShortCut stroke followed by dts, you automatically enter the current date and
time. You can also create your own ShortCuts.
0
0
1Write the ShortCut stroke .
This stroke appears at the
insertion point.
2Write the ShortCut character from the following table.
You can write ShortCuts on the left side of the input area, or across the middle.
The ShortCut stroke is replaced by the text the character
represents.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 71
CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Device
Graffiti 2 ShortCuts
0
Write ShortCuts on LEFT side, or across MIDDLE of input area
Entry ShortCut Entry ShortCut
Date stamp ds Time stamp ts
Date/time stamp dts Meeting me
Breakfast br Lunch lu
Dinner di
LifeDrive from palmOne 72
CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Device
Entering information with the onscreen keyboard
You can use the onscreen keyboard in any application where you need to enter text, numbers, or
symbols on your device.
0
1Open an entry:
a. Open an application.
b. Select an entry or select New.
2Tap Input on the status bar to open the input area.
3Tap abc or 123 to open the
alphabetic or numeric keyboard,
respectively.
Continued
»
Key Term
Entry An item in an
application such as a
contact in Contacts or an
appointment in Calendar.
Tip
You can enter text
whenever you see a
blinking cursor on the
screen.
Tap to open keyboards
LifeDrive from palmOne 73
CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Device
4[ & ] OPTIONAL Select from among five different keyboards.
Tap int. and then ABC to open the international uppercase keyboard.
5Tap the characters to enter text, numbers, and symbols.
Done
Backspace
Carriage return
Tab
Caps shift
Tap here to display
lowercase keyboard
Tap here to display
uppercase keyboard
Tap here to display
international keyboard
abc - lowercase
ABC - uppercase int. - international
123 - numeric
Tap here to display
numeric keyboard
NOTE
Tip
When a keyboard is open,
you can tap abc, 123, or
int. to open any of the
other keyboards. Tap the
icon in the lower right
corner (to the right of 123)
to return to the Graffiti 2
input area.
LifeDrive from palmOne 74
CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Device
Entering info from Contacts into another application
Having lunch with someone whose info you have in Contacts? Use Phone Lookup to quickly enter
the person’s name and primary contact info into the appointment you create in Calendar. This
feature is available in Calendar, Memos, Tasks, and Expense.
0
1Open an entry:
a. Open an application.
b. Select an entry or select New.
In Expense only: Select Details, and then select Attendees.
2Add the contact from Phone Lookup:
a. Tap where you want to enter the contact.
b. Open the menus.
c. Select Options, and then select Phone Lookup.
Continued
LifeDrive from palmOne 75
CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Device
Cont’d.
d. Select the contact, and then select Add.
3[ & ] OPTIONAL To add another contact, repeat step 2.
The name and phone number of the contact are automatically
entered.
Tip
You can also enter the
first few letters of the
contact’s name, and the
open Phone Lookup. The
first contact name
matching the letters you
entered is highlighted.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 76
CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Device
Editing information
Editing information on your device is similar to editing with word-processing applications on your
computer. Select the information, and then apply the correct command.
Selecting information
There are several ways to select information that you want to edit or delete.
Selecting text Place the cursor before or after the text you want to select, and drag
the cursor over all the text you want to select.
Selecting a word Tap twice on a word to select it.
Selecting a line Tap three times anywhere in a line to select it. This selects the final
return character or space as well as any text.
LifeDrive from palmOne 77
CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Device
Copying and pasting information
Copying and pasting information on your device is similar to editing with word-processing
applications on your computer.
0
1Select the information you want to copy.
2Copy the information:
a. Open the menus.
b. Select Edit, and then select Copy.
3Tap where you want to paste the information.
4Select Edit, and then select Paste.
Done
Tip
There are even faster
ways to copy and paste
information:
• Use Graffiti 2 gestures.
•Use the Graffiti 2
Command stroke and the
menu shortcut for cut,
copy, or paste (/X, /C, /P).
• Select the text, write the
command stroke, and
then tap the icon for cut
or copy from the
command toolbar that
appears.
LifeDrive from palmOne 78
CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Device
Deleting information
Delete all or part of an entry with the Cut command.
0
1Select the information you want to delete.
2Delete the information:
a. Open the menus.
b. Select Edit, and then select Cut.
Done
Tip
Delete information with
Graffiti 2 writing. Select
the information, and then
draw a line from right to
left in the input area.
LifeDrive from palmOne 79
CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Device
Related topics
Click a link below to learn about these related topics:
Moving Around • Opening applications
• Using menus
Sharing Beaming or sending information to another Palm Powered device
Customizing • Selecting alternate ways to write some Graffiti 2 characters
• Creating your own Graffiti 2 ShortCuts
Common
Questions
Answers to frequently asked questions about entering information
Tips & Tricks
Make your device uniquely
yours. For great tips,
software, accessories, and
more, visit
www.palmOne.com/
mylifedrive.
Support
If you’re having problems
entering information or with
anything else on your device,
go to www.palmOne.com/
support.
LifeDrive from palmOne 80
CHAPTER 5
Moving and Managing Info Between
Your Device and Your Computer
With its large hard drive, your device
becomes a four-gigabyte (4GB)
extension of your computer that you
can take with you on the go. This extra
capacity lets you carry many more of
your documents, folders, photos, and
music files with you.
But the drive offers more than just
storage capacity. With the LifeDrive™
Manager application, you can simply
drag and drop files and folders to
transfer them from your Windows
computer to the drive, organize them
the way you want, and work with them
directly on the device. Any time you
make changes, you can synchronize to
ensure that the most current version of
your information exists on both your
device and your computer.
Benefits
• Quickly enter and update information
on your device and your computer
• Transfer and work with applications,
files, and folders on your device
• Synchronize individual files or entire
folders with one button
• Protect your information by quickly
backing up and saving files and
folders to your computer
I
n t
hi
s c
h
apter
Program memory and the
hard drive
How can I work with
information?
LifeDrive™ Manager and
Drive Mode
Using LifeDrive Manager
Using Drive Mode
Synchronizing information
Other ways of managing
information
Removing information
Related topics
LifeDrive from palmOne 81
CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer
Program memory and the hard drive
Your device contains two types of storage: program memory and the 4GB hard drive.
0
The info for each Palm OS application—for example, individual contact entries—may be stored in
your device’s program memory. You can view and work with this information from within the
application itself. You cannot, however, view any info stored in program memory directly using
Files or LifeDrive Manager.
0
When you copy a file or folder from your computer to your device using LifeDrive Manager, you
can choose to synchronize that file or folder.
Another method of storage that you may already be familiar with is an expansion card. You can
view and access files or folders on an expansion card using the Files application on your device,
and manage your files on a card using LifeDrive Manager or Drive Mode.
Program memory Your device includes 64MB of program memory
for Palm OS® applications such as Contacts, Calendar, Tasks, and
Memos, as well as email messages. Information in program memory
is automatically updated when you do a full sync. For example, if
you enter contact information on your computer, you can
synchronize to update the info in Contacts on your device.
Hard drive The 4GB hard drive (approximately 3.85GB of memory
available to the user) works similarly to other standard USB drives.
You can store any type of file, folder, or application on this drive.
View and access the contents of the drive using the Files application
on your device, or view the contents using LifeDrive Manager
(Windows) or Drive Mode (Mac and Windows) on your computer.
You can manage items on the drive in various ways: copying,
moving, deleting, renaming, and so on, by using LifeDrive Manager
(Windows) or Drive Mode (Mac and Windows), or Files on your
device.
Did You Know?
Your device saves all
information, including
information on the drive
and in program memory,
even if the battery drains
completely; none of your
information is lost.
Simply recharge to
access the information
again.
Tip
Use Quick Install
(Windows) or the Send To
Handheld droplet (Mac)
to install applications to
program memory.
LifeDrive from palmOne 82
CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer
You can also access the files on the drive or on an expansion card by opening the corresponding
application and browsing to the file.
How can I work with information?
There are three main methods for moving and working with information between your device and
a computer. These methods are discussed in detail in this chapter.
LifeDrive Manager (Windows only) Use LifeDrive Manager to transfer files and folders to your
device’s drive. LifeDrive Manager instantly copies or moves the items you select. You can choose
whether to synchronize items you move using LifeDrive Manager, as well as whether to convert
photos and videos for best viewing on your device.
Drive Mode Use Drive Mode when your device is connected to a Mac computer to move files
between a computer and your device’s hard drive. Also use Drive Mode to open, move, or copy
files on your device when it’s connected to a Windows computer that does not have LifeDrive
Manager installed.
While you’re using Drive Mode, you cannot use any other feature of your device.
Synchronization Synchronization updates and backs up information between your device and
your computer. Information entered in one place is automatically updated in the other, and info in
your device’s program memory and on the hard drive is backed up on your computer.
You can synchronize in one of two ways: do a full sync of everything on your device using the sync
button on the USB sync cable, or sync selected items on the hard drive using LifeDrive Manager.
You can also synchronize to install applications to your program memory.
Tip
Be sure to take your USB
sync cable with you so
that you can connect your
device to another
computer to synchronize,
use LifeDrive Manager, or
use Drive Mode. It’s a
good idea to take your AC
charger with you as well,
especially if you plan to
use Drive Mode to
transfer files to another
computer. Be sure to keep
your device plugged into
the charger, and the
charger plugged into an
outlet, when using Drive
Mode for an extended
period of time or when
transferring large files.
Tip
Enter information for
applications such as
Calendar, Contacts,
Memos, and Tasks in
Palm®Desktop software
or Microsoft Outlook on
your computer, then do a
full sync to transfer the
information to your
device.
LifeDrive from palmOne 83
CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer
LifeDrive™ Manager and Drive Mode
Both LifeDrive Manager and Drive Mode let you work with files and folders between your device
and your computer. So when would you use one method or the other? Here are some common
situations in which you would choose LifeDrive Manager or Drive Mode.
LifeDrive Manager
LifeDrive Manager is available only on Windows computers. Use it in the following situations:
• You are transferring files or folders to your device and want to be able to synchronize them.
• You are transferring photos or videos and want to convert them for best viewing on your device.
• You are carrying a file that cannot be opened on your device and you want to work with it on
another computer.
• You want to work on your device during the transfer process. With LifeDrive Manager, you can
continue to work with information on your device as files or folders are being moved or copied.
You cannot use any of the features of your device when it is in Drive Mode.
Drive Mode
You can use Drive Mode on both Windows and Mac computers. Use it in the following situations:
• You are transferring files or folders to or from a Mac computer.
• You are transferring items using a Windows computer that does not have LifeDrive Manager.
• You have a file on your device that you want to work with using a computer, but you don't want
to copy the file to the computer. With LifeDrive Manager, you must first transfer a file or folder to
your computer before you can open or edit the item. With Drive Mode, you can use the
Windows Explorer or Finder window to open a file or folder directly from your device. So, for
example, if you are a guest at a computer and do not want to put a copy of a confidential file on
that computer, you can use Drive Mode to open and work with the file directly on your device.
Tip
If you are transferring a
large video file and
choose the Format for
device option, you can
interrupt the formatting
process if, for example,
you need to take your
device with you away
from you desk. When you
reconnect your device
and your computer, the
formatting process picks
up where it left off.
LifeDrive from palmOne 84
CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer
Using LifeDrive Manager
On a Mac computer, use Drive Mode to move files to your device’s hard drive.
WINDOWS ONLY
On a Windows computer, LifeDrive Manager provides a live window to your device’s hard drive.
Use LifeDrive Manager to copy, move, and manage files and folders on your device. LifeDrive
Manager copies and moves items instantly; you do not need to synchronize to transfer the
information. With LifeDrive Manager you can work on your device even while transferring files.
Using LifeDrive Manager, quickly move and carry large numbers of your important Office files,
photos, music, videos, and other files on your device. Use the Files application to access and edit
information on your device, or use Drive Mode to access and edit that information when you’re
connected to a computer that supports external flash drives.
LifeDrive Manager is installed automatically when you install Palm®Desktop software. When the
application is installed, an icon appears in the taskbar in the lower-right corner of your
computer screen. Right-click the icon and select menu commands to open LifeDrive Manager or to
synchronize all sync items on the drive.
When you connect your device to your computer and transfer one or more files or folders into the
LifeDrive Manager window, a dialog box appears, asking you how you want the item to be treated.
Select one of the following options:
Copy The items are simply copied to your device and are not updated during synchronization.
Format for device If you transfer photo or video files to your device, you can choose to convert
them to a format that works best on (is optimized for) your device. Converting a photo or video
does any or all of the following, if necessary: changes the item to a format that your device can
display; rotates the item so that it’s displayed correctly; and reduces the file to a size that fits your
device’s screen, resulting in a smaller file size. In some cases, conversion might result in a lower
resolution for the photo or video.
Tip
When you copy a photo
or video to your device,
select the option Format
for device if you plan to
view the item on your
device only. Formatting
reduces the file size and
fits the photo or video to
your device’s screen.
Use the Copy or Keep
Synchronized option if
you plan to transfer the
photo from your device to
another computer. This
keeps the original file
size, resolution, and file
type intact.
NOTE
LifeDrive from palmOne 85
CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer
If you choose the Format for device option, the original photo or video remains in its unchanged
format on your computer.
If you are transferring a group of photo and/or video files at once—for example, if you select and
drag them all together or if the files are all in one folder—your formatting choice applies to all of
the files. You cannot choose to format some files transferred as a group and not others.
Keep Synchronized You can choose to make the items you copy sync items—that is, items that
are updated when you synchronize your device with your computer. If you select this option, any
changes you make to the file or folder in one location (device or computer) are made automatically
in the other the next time you synchronize.
If you transfer multiple files or folders at once, your synchronization choice applies to all of the
items; you cannot choose to synchronize some but not others.
If you transfer a file or folder into a folder that displays the sync item icon , the item
becomes a sync item even if you choose Copy or Format for device. However, the item
synchronizes to the corresponding sync folder on your computer, not to the original file or folder.
So you have two versions of the file or folder on your computer: the original one in its original
location (which does not sync), and the new one in the sync folder (which does sync).
For example, suppose you copy a music file called MySong in the MyMusic folder on your
computer to the Music folder on your device, which you have set as a sync folder. You choose
Copy during the transfer. Because the Music folder is a sync folder, when you synchronize, a copy
of the Music folder containing the file MySong appears on your computer. However, the original
file MySong remains in the MyMusic folder on your computer and is not synchronized.
Transferring information using the LifeDrive Manager icon
If you want your files or folders to go to a default location on your device, you can simply drag the
items onto the LifeDrive Manager icon on your computer. LifeDrive Manager copies the items to a
specific location on your device’s drive depending on the file types.
NOTE
»
Key Term
Sync item A file or
folder on your device’s
hard drive that you
choose to synchronize. If
you create a sync folder,
all items in the folder—
including any
subfolders—are
automatically sync items.
LifeDrive from palmOne 86
CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer
Default folders: Applications, Documents, Music, Photos & Videos LifeDrive Manager copies the
items to one of these four folders if both of the following are true:
•All of the items you drag to the LifeDrive Manager icon are of a type associated with one of
these folders—for example, JPG, BMP, and ASF files that are associated with the Photos & Video
folder.
• You select the Copy or the Format for device option.
Root level of the drive LifeDrive Manager copies all of the items to the root level of the hard
drive—not to a specific folder—if any of the following are true:
•Any of the items you drag is not associated with a default folder—for example, you transfer
photos, videos, and also a graphic that is not a recognized file type for the Photos & Videos
folder.
• The items are associated with more than one default folder—for example, you are transferring
both photos and music files at the same time.
• You select the Keep Synchronized option.
0
1Connect the USB sync cable to the USB port on the back of your computer, and
then insert the other end into your device.
2Select the item or items you want to copy to your device’s drive.
3Drag the items onto the LifeDrive
Manager icon on your computer
desktop.
Continued
»
Key Term
Root level The “top”
level of the hard drive,
that is, the level of files
and folders you see when
you click the drive icon
itself.
Tip
If you copy a group of
files or folders to the root
level of your device’s
drive, you can then use
the LifeDrive Manager
window to move those
items to the locations you
want on the drive.
LifeDrive from palmOne 87
CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer
4Select one of the following options:
Copy The items are copied to the correct default folder or to the root level of
your device’s drive. With this option, photos and videos are transferred in their
original format.
Format for device Photos and videos are converted to a format that works best
on your device. This option is available only if the files or folders you are
transferring include one or more photos or videos.
Keep Synchronized The items are copied to the root level of your device’s
drive and are included in synchronization. This means that when an item is
updated on your device, it is automatically updated on your computer, and vice
versa, when you synchronize.
Done
Tip
If another task is running
that uses the USB sync
cable—such as
synchronizing or
transferring music files
with Pocket Tunes™—
LifeDrive Manager waits
until the task is complete
before the file transfer
takes place.
LifeDrive from palmOne 88
CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer
Transferring information using the LifeDrive Manager window
The LifeDrive Manager window lets you place files or folders anywhere on your device’s drive,
regardless of file type.
0f
1Open LifeDrive Manager:
a. Connect the USB sync cable to the USB port on the back of your computer,
and then insert the other end into your device.
b. Double-click the LifeDrive Manager icon on your computer desktop to
open the LifeDrive Manager window. The window opens to display the
contents of the drive on your device; if an expansion card is inserted into
your device’s expansion slot, the window displays the card’s contents as
well.
If your device is not connected to your computer or is unavailable,
a message appears.
Continued
Tip
You can also open the
LifeDrive Manager
window by right-clicking
the LifeDrive Manager
icon in the taskbar in the
lower-right corner of your
computer screen and
then selecting Open
LifeDrive Manager.
Did You Know?
Your device’s drive
appears in the LifeDrive
Manager window as an
icon named LifeDrive, but
you can rename it
anything you want. Right-
click the icon, click
Rename, and then enter a
new name for the drive.
Tip
If you do not see any files
or folders on the drive or
an expansion card, click
the plus-sign icon to the
left of the drive/card
name in the left pane of
the LifeDrive Manager
window.
NOTE
LifeDrive from palmOne 89
CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer
Cont’d.
LifeDrive Manager recognizes any security preferences you set for
your device. For example, if your device is locked, LifeDrive Manager displays
an alert message stating that you must unlock your device before using
LifeDrive Manager. A message also appears if your device is not connected to
your computer or is unavailable for any other reason.
2Drag, copy, or move files or folders from the desktop into the LifeDrive Manager
window to the location you want on your device’s drive. You can also open the
folder to which you want to move the files on your device’s drive, and then click
the Copy Files from PC or Copy Folder from PC button on the LifeDrive
Manager toolbar.
You can use LifeDrive Manager to install an application in the
Applications folder on your drive, but only some applications are designed to
run on your device from that location. To ensure that the application will run on
your device, install it to program memory.
Continued
NOTE
Did You Know?
You can work with files
and folders in the
LifeDrive Manager
window in many of the
same ways that you work
with files and folders in
Windows Explorer. For
example, click a plus sign
to the left of a folder
name to view the
contents of a folder;
select multiple items
using the Control or Shift
buttons on your
keyboard; or click the
Refresh button to view
updated contents of the
device’s drive or
expansion card.
You can also manage files
or folders by right-
clicking a file or folder
name to open a menu
that lets you rename,
move, copy, delete, and
perform other tasks on
the file or folder.
NOTE
LifeDrive from palmOne 90
CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer
3Select one of the following options:
Copy The items are copied to the location you specify. With this option,
photos and videos are transferred in their original format.
Format for device Photos and videos are converted to a format that works best
on your device. This option is available only if the files or folders you are
transferring include one or more photos or videos.
Keep Synchronized The items are copied to the root level of your device’s
drive and are included in synchronization. This means that when an item is
updated on your device, it is automatically updated on your computer, and vice
versa. This option is available only if you are transferring files or folders to the
root level of your device’s drive.
Done
Tip
You can also transfer files
or folders from your
device to your computer
by dragging the item
from the LifeDrive
Manager window onto
your computer desktop.
Likewise, you can drag an
item from folder to
another on your device’s
drive in the LifeDrive
Window to transfer it—or
right-click on an item and
select Copy, then right-
click on the destination
folder and click Paste.
Tip
You cannot double-click a
file in LifeDrive Manager
to open it, as you do in
Windows Explorer. If you
double-click a file in
LifeDrive Manager, you
are prompted to save the
file to your computer
before opening and
working on it on your
computer. After working
on the file on your
computer, use LifeDrive
Manager to move or copy
the file back to your
device.
LifeDrive from palmOne 91
CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer
Renaming a file or folder
You can use LifeDrive Manager to change the name of a file that is on your device. For example,
you may want to add the date or your initials at the end of a file that you have changed.
If you rename a sync item—either a file or a folder—on your device, the next time you synchronize,
the item is renamed on your computer and the two renamed items continue to synchronize. If you
rename a sync item on your computer, however, the next time you synchronize, the original item
remains as is on your device and is no longer a sync item.
You cannot rename the default folders on your device drive.
0
1Open the LifeDrive Manager window.
2Rename the item:
a. Right-click the item you want to rename.
b. Select Rename.
c. Type the new name, and then press Enter on your computer keyboard.
Done
NOTE
Tip
You can also select the
item you want to rename
and then press F2 on your
computer keyboard to
enter the new name.
LifeDrive from palmOne 92
CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer
Deleting a file or folder
When you delete a file or folder in the LifeDrive Manager window, you only delete it from your
device. If the file or folder is a sync item, however, and you don't want it to show up on your
device again the next time you synchronize, you need to turn on a setting to delete the item from
your computer as well.
You cannot delete the default folders on your device drive.
0
1Open the LifeDrive Manager window.
2Delete the item:
a. Right-click the item you want to delete.
b. Select Delete.
c. Select Yes to confirm that you want to delete the file.
Done
NOTE
LifeDrive from palmOne 93
CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer
Deleting sync items from your computer when they are deleted from
your device
When you turn on the setting to delete a sync item from your computer and then delete the item
from your device, the item is deleted from your computer the next time you synchronize.
0
1Open the LifeDrive Manager window.
2Set up automatic deletion:
a. Right-click a folder containing the item or items you want to delete. The
folder must be a sync item.
b. Select Properties, and then click the Synchronize tab.
c. Select Delete Files on Your PC, and then click OK.
Done
Tip
The Properties dialog box
contains a Properties tab
that displays information
about the selected files or
folders and lets you
change file or folder
attributes. See the
LifeDrive Manager online
Help for detailed
information. In the
LifeDrive Manager
window, open the Help
menu and select
LifeDrive Manager Help.
LifeDrive from palmOne 94
CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer
Using Drive Mode
On a Mac computer, use Drive Mode to move files between a computer and your device’s hard
drive.
If you are at a Windows computer that doesn’t have LifeDrive Manager installed—a computer at a
hotel or your friend’s house, for example—use Drive Mode to open, move, or copy files on your
device. With Drive Mode, your device connects to your computer like an external removable drive
such as a CD drive.
The computer must support external removable drives in order for you to use Drive Mode with the
computer. Most current operating systems such as Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Mac OS X
support external removable drives.
While you’re using Drive Mode, you cannot use any other feature of your device,
including LifeDrive Manager and synchronization. You can, however, continue to receive alerts
such as notifications of appointments or new email messages. If you select an alert or attempt to
use your device in some other way—for example, by pressing a quick button—a message appears,
asking if you want to continue using Drive Mode or disconnect from Drive Mode to use your
device.
NOTE
Tip
If you plan to use Drive
Mode, remember to bring
your USB sync cable and
AC charger with you, so
you can connect to other
computers.
LifeDrive from palmOne 95
CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer
0
1Prepare your device and your computer:
a. Connect the USB sync cable to the USB port on the back of the computer,
and then insert the other end into your device.
b. Connect the AC charger cable to the USB sync cable, and then plug it into a
power outlet.
You can use Drive Mode without plugging your device into a power
outlet, but we recommend that you keep it plugged in to avoid losing
information.
2Turn on Drive Mode:
a. Go to Applications and select
Drive Mode .
b. Select Turn Drive Mode On.
Continued
Tip
If you format your
device’s hard drive or an
expansion card while in
Drive Mode, be sure to
select the file system type
FAT32; do not select FAT
or any other file system
type. If you select any
other file system type,
your device cannot
recognize the information
on the drive or on the
card. Note that if you
reformat the hard drive,
all information on the
drive is deleted—and if
there are sync items and
you have selected the
Delete on PC option,
those items are deleted
on your computer as well
the next time you
synchronize.
NOTE
LifeDrive from palmOne 96
CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer
3Open My Computer or Windows Explorer on a Windows computer, or Finder on
a Mac computer. Look for the icon named LIFEDRIVE, representing your device
in the list of available drives on the computer. If there is an expansion card
inserted into your device’s expansion slot, it may appear as a drive named
CARD.
On a Windows computer, the expansion card icon may appear even if
there is no card inserted into your device’s expansion card slot. If you try to
work with the icon, an error message appears.
4Work with the files on your device as you would on any other external
removable drive.
Continued
Tip
You can work with files
and folders on your
device in Drive Mode in
exactly the same way that
you work with any other
file or folder in My
Computer, Windows
Explorer, or Finder.
Unlike in LifeDrive
Manager, you can
double-click a file from
the computer’s window
to open it from your
device in Drive Mode, as
long as your computer
has software that can
open the file.
NOTE
Device appears as
drive named
LIFEDRIVE
Expansion card
appears as drive
named CARD
LifeDrive from palmOne 97
CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer
5When you have finished working with Drive Mode, do the following:
To avoid losing any information that was transferred, be sure
to follow these steps to disconnect from Drive Mode before you unplug your
device from your computer.
a. Eject the device from your Windows computer by selecting the Safely
Remove Hardware icon in the taskbar in the lower-right corner of your
computer screen. Select the option Stop Mass Storage USB Device that
contains the drive letter for the device or the expansion card, and then wait
for the message that says you can safely remove your device from your
computer. On a Mac computer, select the Eject command from the File menu
or drag the drive icon to the Eject icon on the Dock. If a confirmation
message appears, click OK.
b. Select Turn Drive Mode Off on your device screen, and then select Turn Off.
Done
Tip
If you are working with an
expansion card, you must
eject the device from the
computer before
removing the card in
order to avoid losing info
on the card.
IMPORTANT
[!]
LifeDrive from palmOne 98
CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer
Synchronizing information
Synchronizing means that information that is entered or updated in one place (your device or your
computer) is automatically updated in the other. There’s no need to enter information twice.
You can synchronize in one of two ways:
Full sync Press the sync button on the USB sync cable to synchronize all information in your
device’s program memory, as well as all sync items on the hard drive, with info on your computer.
Full sync also backs up any files or folders on your hard drive that are not sync items to your
computer.
Folder sync (Windows only) Use the sync commands in the LifeDrive Manager window to
synchronize a single sync item, a group of sync items, or all sync items on your device’s drive, with
the corresponding info on your computer. Sync items can be individual files or entire folders,
including subfolders. All sync items must be located at the root level of the hard drive. You cannot
synchronize info in program memory using the LifeDrive Manager window.
Be sure to synchronize your device with your computer frequently so that you
always have an up-to-date backup copy of the info on your device on your computer.
Doing a full sync
When you perform a full sync, the following information is updated between your device and your
computer:
Program memory If you use the default settings, information from all the following applications
in program memory is transferred each time you synchronize your device with your computer
using the button:
If you choose to synchronize with Outlook, info from Contacts, Calendar, Tasks, and Memos is
synchronized with info in the same application in Outlook (Memos is called Notes in Outlook). You
can also set up the VersaMail® application to synchronize email on your device with email in
»
Key Term
HotSync®Techn olo gy
that allows you to
synchronize the
information in your
device’s program
memory and any files or
folders on the drive that
you selected to copy and
synchronize with the
information on your
computer.
Tip
Folder sync is faster than
a full sync, because it
only synchronizes the
items you select. IMPORTANT
[!]
LifeDrive from palmOne 99
CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer
Outlook. Other info, such as voice memos and notes, is synchronized with the corresponding info
in Palm Desktop software.
If you set up a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync® account so that you can synchronize email and
Calendar information with info in Microsoft Exchange Server 2003, info from those applications is
synchronized with info in Microsoft Exchange, while information from the other applications listed
previously is synchronized with info in Outlook or Palm Desktop.
Desktop software Any information you enter using desktop software is updated with info in
your device’s program memory.
Sync items Any sync items on your device’s hard drive are updated.
You can do a full sync in the following ways:
• Using the USB sync cable attached to your device and your computer
• Wirelessly using Wi-Fi® capabilities or Bluetooth® wireless technology on your device
• Using your device’s infrared (IR) port
• Connecting to your company’s network, either wirelessly or using a cable (Windows only)
The first time you synchronize, you must use the USB sync cable or your
device’s IR port; you cannot use any of the other methods in this list, such as synchronizing using
Wi-Fi or Bluetooth functionality. If you followed the instructions to synchronize during initial
setup, you’ve already covered this requirement.
To synchronize, HotSync® Manager must be active. HotSync Manager is installed when you install
Palm Desktop software from the software installation CD. If you haven’t run the install program
from the CD, you don't have HotSync Manager on your computer.
On a Windows computer, you know HotSync Manager is active when its icon appears in the
lower-right corner of your screen. If the icon is not there, turn it on by clicking Start and then
selecting Programs. Navigate to the palmOne program group, and select HotSync Manager.
»
Key Term
HotSync®
Manager Software you
use to select
synchronization settings
and that must be active
when you synchronize.
Did You Know?
Everybody in your family
can synchronize their
device with the same
copy of Palm Desktop
software. Just make sure
that each device has its
own username;
Palm Desktop software
reads the username and
recognizes the device
during synchronization.
Tip
When you synchronize,
any items on the hard
drive that are not sync
items are backed up to
your computer. Backing
up puts a copy of the file
or folder on your
computer, but it doesn't
keep the two versions in
sync.
IMPORTANT
[!]
LifeDrive from palmOne 100
CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer
Synchronizing using the cable
0
1Connect the USB sync cable to
the USB port on the back of your
computer, and then insert the
other end into your device.
2Synchronize your device with
your computer:
a. Press the sync button on the
USB sync cable.
b. When synchronization is
complete, a message appears
at the top of your device
screen, and you can
disconnect your device from
the cable.
Done
Tip
If the Select User dialog
box appears during
synchronization, select
the username of the
person whose
information you want to
synchronize, and then
click OK.
Tip
If you need help with
synchronizing, see I can’t
synchronize my device
with my computer.
LifeDrive from palmOne 101
CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer
Synchronizing using LifeDrive Manager
WINDOWS ONLY
When you transfer an item into the LifeDrive Manager window, you can identify whether you want
to keep the item synchronized with its original on the computer. When you’re ready to do a folder
sync, you can select whether to sync selected items, or all sync items on your device's hard drive.
LifeDrive Manager synchronizes only the items you select on the hard drive, not any of the
information in program memory. Do a full sync to synchronize both hard drive sync items and
program memory info.
If you selected the Keep Synchronized option when you transferred a file or folder to your device,
that item is already a sync item. However, you can turn off synchronization for any such folder or
file.
Creating sync items
0
1Open the LifeDrive Manager window.
2Select items to synchronize:
a. Navigate to the file or folder you want in the
LifeDrive Manager window.
b. Right-click the item’s icon, and then select Turn on
synchronization. The file or folder is now a sync
item.
Done
Tip
When you synchronize,
any items on the hard
drive that are not sync
items are backed up to
your computer. Backing
up puts a copy of the file
or folder on your
computer, but it doesn't
keep the two versions in
sync. You can manually
back up an item in
LifeDrive Manager by
right-clicking the file or
folder and selecting Save
to PC, or by clicking the
item and selecting the
Save to PC icon from the
LifeDrive Manager
toolbar.
Tip
To tu rn o ff
synchronization for a file
or folder, right-click the
item’s icon, and then
select Turn off
synchronization.
LifeDrive from palmOne 102
CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer
Doing a folder sync
0
1Open the LifeDrive Manager window.
2Select one of the following synchronization options:
Synchronize a single file or folder Right-click the item’s icon, select Sync
actions, and then select Synchronize this item now.
Synchronize multiple sync items Select the items you want, right-click any
item’s icon, select Sync actions, and then select Synchronize this item now.
Synchronize all sync items on the drive Click Sync All Now on the toolbar at
the top of the LifeDrive Manager window.
A synchronization progress screen appears.
Did You Know?
If you put a file or folder
that you chose not to
make a sync item into a
folder that is a sync
folder, the item is
synchronized regardless
of your choice. After the
next sync, a copy of the
sync folder appears on
both your device and
your computer, with the
sync version of the item
inside. The original file or
folder that you
transferred using the
Copy or Format for device
option remains in its
original location and is
not synchronized.
Tip
You can also synchronize
all sync items by right-
clicking the LifeDrive
Manager icon in the
taskbar in the lower-right
corner of your computer
screen and then selecting
Sync All Now.
c
ere
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 103
CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer
Locating sync items on your computer
LifeDrive Manager can quickly open the folder on your computer where a sync item is stored.
0
1Open the LifeDrive Manager window.
2Locate the item on your computer:
a. In the LifeDrive Manager window, right-click the item you want to locate on
your computer.
b. Select Sync Actions.
c. Select Locate on PC. LifeDrive Manager opens the folder where the item is
located.
Done
Tip
To check when an item
was last synchronized,
right-click the item, select
Sync Actions, and then
select Check Sync Status.
LifeDrive from palmOne 104
CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer
Entering information using desktop software
Use Palm Desktop or Outlook to enter information on your computer. When you do a full sync, the
information is updated on your device.
WINDOWS ONLY
0
1Open an application in Palm Desktop software:
a. Double-click the Palm Desktop icon on your computer desktop.
b. Click the icon in the Launch bar to open the application.
Continued
Tip
The Palm Desktop online
Help has lots of info
about how to use
Palm Desktop software.
Open the Help menu and
select Palm Desktop Help.
Launch bar
New
Edit
LifeDrive from palmOne 105
CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer
2Do one of the following:
• Click New in the lower-left corner of the screen to create a new entry.
• Click an existing entry, and then click Edit in the lower-left corner of the
screen.
3Enter the information, and then click OK.
4Do a full sync to transfer the information to your device.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 106
CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer
MAC ONLY
0
1Open an application:
a. Double-click the Palm Desktop icon in the Palm folder on your computer.
b. Click the icon in the toolbar to open the application.
2Do one of the following:
• Click New in the upper-left corner of the screen to create a new entry.
• Click an existing entry, and then click Edit in the upper-left corner of the
screen.
Continued
LifeDrive from palmOne 107
CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer
Customizing your synchronization settings
You can set the following options for synchronization:
• Choosing how your computer responds when you initiate synchronization on your device
(Windows only)
• Enabling or disabling synchronization on your computer, setting whether synchronization is
enabled automatically when you start your computer, and choosing how much information to
include in the synchronization troubleshooting log (Mac only)
• Choosing how application information is updated during a full sync
3Enter the information, and then click OK.
4Do a full sync to transfer the information to your device.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 108
CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer
Choosing how your computer responds to synchronization requests
WINDOWS ONLY
In order for your computer to respond when you initiate synchronization on your device, HotSync
Manager must be running. You can choose whether HotSync Manager always runs automatically,
or whether you must perform some action to start HotSync Manager.
0
1Open the synchronization options screen:
a. Click the HotSync Manager icon in the taskbar in the lower-right corner of
your screen.
b. Select Setup.
Continued
LifeDrive from palmOne 109
CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer
2Select how your computer responds when you initiate synchronization on your
device:
Always available HotSync Manager runs automatically every time you initiate
synchronization on your device.
Available only when the Palm Desktop is running You must open
Palm Desktop software in order for HotSync Manager to run.
Manual You must manually turn HotSync Manager on each time you want
your computer to respond to a synchronization request.
3Click OK.
Done
Tip
Use the default setting
Always available if you’re
not sure which option you
want.
Tip
If you select Manual, you
must turn off HotSync
Manager, which is always
on by default. Click the
HotSync Manager icon in
the taskbar in the lower-
right corner of your
screen, and then click
Exit. To start HotSync
Manager when you want
to synchronize, click Start,
and then select
Programs. Navigate to
the palmOne program
group, and select
HotSync Manager.
Note that if you turn
HotSync Manager on, it
stays on until you turn off
your computer.
LifeDrive from palmOne 110
CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer
Setting synchronization options
MAC ONLY
0
1Open the synchronization options screen:
a. Double-click the HotSync Manager icon in the Palm folder.
b. Click the HotSync Controls tab.
2Select the synchronization options you want:
Continued
LifeDrive from palmOne 111
CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer
Choosing whether application information is updated
By default, when information in each application included during a full sync is updated in one
place (your device or your computer), it is updated in the other. However, for each application, you
can choose whether information that has been updated in one place is updated in the other during
the next full sync.
Cont’d.
HotSync Enabled/Disabled Sets your computer to respond to synchronization
requests from your device.
Enable HotSync software at system startup Sets your computer to
automatically respond to synchronization requests each time you start your
computer. If this option is not selected, you must open HotSync Manager and
select the Enabled option before you can synchronize.
Show more detail in HotSync Log Includes more troubleshooting information
in the log that is generated when you synchronize.
3Close the HotSync Software Setup window.
Done
»
Key Term
Conduit The
synchronization software
that transfers information
between an application
on your computer and the
same application on your
device.
LifeDrive from palmOne 112
CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer
WINDOWS ONLY
0
1Select the application you want to customize:
a. Click the HotSync Manager icon in the taskbar in the lower-right corner of
your screen.
b. Select Custom.
c. Select the appropriate username from the drop-down list at the top of the
screen.
d. Select the application you want, and then click Change.
Continued
Tip
Windows For
information on choosing
whether application
information is updated if
you are synchronizing
your device with Outlook,
see the online Outlook
synchronization Help.
Click the HotSync
Manager icon in the
taskbar in the lower-right
corner of your screen,
select Custom, and then
select one of the Outlook
applications from the list.
Select Change, and then
select one of the
applications from the list.
LifeDrive from palmOne 113
CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer
2Select how information is updated during the next synchronization:
Synchronize the files Information that is changed in one place (your device or
computer) is updated in the other during synchronization.
Desktop overwrites handheld Information that has been changed on your
computer is updated on your device during synchronization. If information has
been changed on your device, it will be replaced by the information from your
computer, and you will lose the changes you made on your device.
Handheld overwrites Desktop Information that has been changed on your
device is updated on your computer during synchronization. If information has
been changed on your computer, it will be replaced by the information from
your device, and you will lose the changes you made on your computer.
Do Nothing No synchronization occurs, so any changes made on either your
device or your computer are not updated in the other location.
Continued
Tip
You should generally
keep the default setting
(Synchronize the files) for
all applications. Choose
an overwrite option only
if you have a specific
reason for sending
updates only one way.
Choose Do Nothing if you
never use an application.
LifeDrive from palmOne 114
CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer
MAC ONLY
0
3To use the option you select on an ongoing basis, check the Set as default box. If
you do not select this box, the option you select applies only the next time you
synchronize. Thereafter, information is updated according to the default setting
(Synchronize the files).
4Click OK, and then click Done.
Done
1Select the application you want to customize:
a. Double-click the Palm Desktop icon in the Palm folder.
b. From the HotSync menu, select Conduit Settings.
c. From the User pop-up menu, select the appropriate username.
d. Select an application.
e. Click Conduit Settings.
Continued
LifeDrive from palmOne 115
CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer
2Select how information is updated during the next synchronization:
Synchronize the files Information that is changed in one place (your device or
computer) is updated in the other during synchronization.
Macintosh overwrites handheld Information that has been changed on your
computer is updated on your device during synchronization. If information has
been changed on your device, it will be replaced by the information from your
computer, and you will lose the changes you made on your device.
Handheld overwrites Macintosh Information that has been changed on your
device is updated on your computer during synchronization. If information has
been changed on your computer, it will be replaced by the information from
your device, and you will lose the changes you made on your computer.
Do Nothing No synchronization occurs, so any changes made on either your
device or your computer are not updated in the other location.
Continued
Tip
You should generally
keep the default setting
(Synchronize the files) for
all applications. Choose
an overwrite option only
if you have a specific
reason for sending
updates only one way.
Choose Do Nothing if you
never use an application.
LifeDrive from palmOne 116
CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer
Installing applications to your device
Use Quick Install (Windows) or the Send To Handheld droplet (Mac) to install applications on your
device when you synchronize. The applications are stored in program memory and are optimized
for use on the device.
You can also use LifeDrive Manager to install applications to the Applications folder on
your hard drive. This is useful if your program memory becomes full and you cannot install any
more applications there. However, some applications are not designed to run from the
Applications folder and must be installed to program memory to run correctly.
3To use the option you select on an ongoing basis, click Make Default. If you do
not click this button, the option you select applies only the next time you
synchronize. Thereafter, information is updated according to the default setting
(Synchronize the files).
4Click OK, and then close the Conduit Settings window.
Done
Did You Know?
Most device application
files have the extension
PRC or PDB.
NOTE
LifeDrive from palmOne 117
CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer
Using Quick Install
When you install Palm Desktop software on your Windows computer, you also automatically
install Quick Install. This tool makes it easy to install applications when you synchronize.
WINDOWS ONLY
0
1Open Palm Desktop software.
2Copy the application:
a. Click the Quick Install icon in the Launch bar at the
left of the window.
b. Drag and drop the application onto the Quick Install
window.
c. When the confirmation dialog box appears, confirm
your username, the application name, and the
destination, and then click OK.
3Do a full sync to install the file on your device.
Done
Tip
A confirmation dialog
box shows whether the
items will be copied to
your device or to an
expansion card. You can
choose which device will
receive the items by
selecting the username in
the User drop-down box
in the upper-right corner.
Did You Know?
You can move multiple
applications into the
Quick Install window to
have them ready for
installation the next time
you synchronize.
LifeDrive from palmOne 118
CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer
Installing applications from a Mac computer
You can install applications from a Mac computer by dragging and dropping them onto the Send
To Handheld droplet, or by using the commands on the HotSync menu.
Using the Send To Handheld droplet
MAC ONLY
0
1Copy or download the application(s) you want to install on your computer.
2Drag and drop the files onto the Send To Handheld droplet:
a. Drag and drop the file(s) or folder onto the
Send To Handheld droplet in the Palm folder.
b. In the Send to Handheld dialog box, select
your username and click OK.
3Do a full sync to install the file on your device.
Done
Tip
In Mac OS X, you can make
the Send To Handheld
droplet a permanent part
of your desktop by
dragging the droplet to the
Dock. Then simply drag
files you want to transfer to
your device onto the
droplet in the Dock.
Tip
Use the Send To
Handheld droplet to
install music files, photos,
and videos to your
device.
LifeDrive from palmOne 119
CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer
Using commands in the HotSync menu
MAC ONLY
0
1Copy or download the application you want to install on your computer.
2Select the files to install on your
device:
a. In the Palm folder, double-
click the HotSync Manager.
b. Select the HotSync menu, and
then select Install Handheld
files.
c. In the User pop-up menu,
select the name that
corresponds to your device.
d. Click Add to List.
e. Select the file(s) you want to
install.
Continued
Tip
To move applications
between your device and
the expansion card, click
Change Destination. Use
the arrows to move the
files, and then click OK.
Tip
If you do not see the
application or file in the
folder, go to the folder
that contains the
application you want to
install.
LifeDrive from palmOne 120
CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer
Other ways of managing information
You can move and manage information on your device and your computer in the following
additional ways:
• Importing information from other applications into Palm Desktop software
• Restoring archived info on your computer
• Installing additional applications from the software installation CD
• Checking space and version numbers of applications on your device
3Install the files on your device:
a. Click Add File.
b. Close the Install Device Files window.
c. Synchronize your device with your computer.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 121
CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer
Importing information from other applications
Do you have information on your computer in spreadsheets or databases and want to transfer it to
your device? Don’t spend time retyping it. Instead, import the info into Palm Desktop software.
Palm Desktop software can import the following types of files:
Calendar vCal/iCal (VCS/ICS) and Calendar archive (DBA)
Contacts vCard (VCF), Contacts archive (ABA)
Memos Comma-delimited (CSV, TXT), tab-delimited (TAB, TSV, TXT), Memos archive (MPA),
Text ( TXT)
Ta s k s Tasks archive (TDA)
WINDOWS ONLY
0
1Save the file on your computer in one of the accepted formats.
2Import the file into Palm Desktop software:
a. Double-click the Palm Desktop icon on your computer desktop.
b. Click the icon in the launch bar for the application you want to import the
information into.
Continued
Tip
Palm Desktop Help has
lots of information about
importing from other
applications, including
step-by-step instructions.
Open the Help menu in
Palm Desktop software
and select Palm Desktop
Help for more details.
LifeDrive from palmOne 122
CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer
Cont’d.
c. Click File, and then click
Import.
d. Follow the onscreen
instructions to map the fields
in your file to the fields in
Palm Desktop software, and
import the file.
3Do a full sync.
Done
Imported
fields
LifeDrive from palmOne 123
CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer
MAC ONLY
0
Restoring archived items on your computer
In many applications, you can save a copy of an item that you deleted from your device or desktop
software to an archive folder on your computer. This frees up space on your device, while
ensuring the information is available if you need it in the future.
You can restore individual entries or an entire archive file to the related application in your desktop
software. The Palm Desktop online Help and the Microsoft Outlook online Help have lots of info
about how to restore archived files. Refer to these Help files for details.
1Save the file on your computer in one of the accepted formats.
2Import the file into Palm Desktop software:
a. Double-click the Palm Desktop icon in the Palm folder on your computer.
b. Click the icon on the toolbar for the application into which you want to
import information.
c. Click File, and then click Import.
d. Follow the onscreen instructions to import the file.
3Do a full sync.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 124
CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer
Installing the additional software from the CD
Your device comes with many applications that are already installed and ready to use. The CD that
came with your device includes lots of other applications to make your device even more useful
and more fun. You can install these applications at any time.
WINDOWS ONLY
0
1Insert the CD into your computer.
2On the Discover your device screen, click Add software to your device.
3Follow the onscreen instructions to install the applications you want.
4Do a full sync.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 125
CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer
MAC ONLY
0
Checking space and version numbers
Before you install a file or an application, it’s important to make sure you have enough space for it.
You may also want to check the version number of applications that are already on your device or
expansion card, in case you’re interested in upgrading them.
1Insert the CD into your computer.
2Double-click the Essential Software folder.
3Install the applications you want.
4Do a full sync.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 126
CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer
0
1Open the Info dialog box:
a. Go to Applications and select HotSync .
b. Open the menus.
c. Select Info on the App menu.
2View space info and version
numbers:
a. Select the Device pick list and
select one of these options:
Device Get information about
applications stored on your
device.
Expansion card name Get
information about applications
stored on your expansion card.
Continued
Pick list
LifeDrive from palmOne 127
CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer
Removing information
You can remove applications from your device, and remove Palm Desktop software from your
computer.
Removing an application from your device
If you run out of memory or decide that you no longer want some applications you installed, you
can remove them from your device or from an expansion card.
You can remove only add-on applications, patches, and extensions that you install. You
cannot remove the applications that are part of the operating system of your device.
0
Cont’d.
b. Select one of the following options, and then select Done:
Version Displays the version numbers of all of your applications.
Size Shows how much space each application occupies. The bar at the top
shows the total space currently in use on your device or expansion card.
Records Shows the number of records in an application.
Done
1Go to Applications.
Continued
NOTE
LifeDrive from palmOne 128
CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer
Removing Palm Desktop software from your computer
WINDOWS ONLY
Mac computers do not provide an option for uninstalling Palm Desktop software.
If you think you’ll never want to synchronize your device with your computer again, you can
remove Palm Desktop software from your computer. This process removes only the application
files. The information in your Users folder remains untouched.
If you remove Palm Desktop software, you also remove the synchronization
software and can no longer synchronize your information. Even if you want to synchronize with
another personal information manager, like Microsoft Outlook, you must leave Palm Desktop
software installed on your computer.
2Open the Delete dialog box:
a. Open the menus.
b. Select Delete from the App menu.
3Delete the application:
a. Select the Delete From pick list, and then select Device or an expansion card.
b. Select the application that you want to remove, and then select Delete.
c. Select Yes, and then select Done.
Done
NOTE
IMPORTANT
[!]
LifeDrive from palmOne 129
CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer
You may have to modify these steps to correspond with the operating system on your
computer.
0
1Open Add/Remove Programs:
a. From the Start menu, select Settings, and then select Control Panel.
b. Double-click the Add/Remove programs icon.
2Remove Palm Desktop software:
a. Click Change or Remove
Programs.
b. Select Palm Desktop software,
and then click Remove.
c. Click Yes in the Confirm File
Deletion box.
d. Click OK, and then click Close.
Done
NOTE
Change or Remove Programs
LifeDrive from palmOne 130
CHAPTER 5 Moving and Managing Info Between Your Device and Your Computer
Related topics
Click a link below to learn about these related topics:
0
Setting Up Switching between Palm Desktop software and Microsoft Outlook
Moving Around • Opening applications
• Using menus
Pocket Tunes • Transferring files from a CD to your device or to an expansion card
• Listening to audio files on your device
VersaMail Synchronizing email messages on your device with email messages on
your computer
Common
Questions
Answers to frequently asked questions about moving and managing
information between your device and your computer
Tips & Tricks
Make your device uniquely
yours. For great tips,
software, accessories, and
more, visit
www.palmOne.com/
mylifedrive.
Support
If you’re having problems
with moving and managing
information or with anything
else on your device, go to
www.palmOne.com/
support.
LifeDrive from palmOne 131
CHAPTER 6
Managing Your Contacts
Say good-bye to a paper address book
that you need to update manually
every time someone moves, changes
their email address, or gets a new work
extension. With Contacts, not only is it
easy to enter information such as
names, addresses, and phone
numbers, but it is just as quick to view,
update, and organize contact
information.
You can easily share info with other
devices and dial phone numbers or
send messages directly from a contact
by using your device’s built-in
Bluetooth® wireless technology and a
compatible mobile phone or by
beaming. You can even add photos of
your loved ones directly to their
contact information.
Benefits of Contacts
• Carry all your business and personal
contact information in your hand
• Keep track of who’s who
• Keep in touch
I
n t
hi
s c
h
apter
Adding a contact
Copying contact information
into multiple contacts
Locating a contact on your
list
Deleting a contact
Customizing the Contacts
list
Making connections from
Contacts
Working with Contacts on
your computer
Related topics
LifeDrive from palmOne 132
CHAPTER 6 Managing Your Contacts
Adding a contact
0
1Tap the Contacts icon in the input area.
2Add your contact information:
a. Select New.
b. Select each field where you want to enter information, and enter it. Select
the scroll arrows to view more fields.
Continued
Tip
If the first character you
enter in the Last Name or
Company field is an
asterisk (*) or another
symbol, that record
always appears at the top
of the Contacts list. That’s
useful for an entry like “If
Found Call [your phone
number].”
Did You Know?
Contacts info is stored in
program memory. This
means that you can view
the info only by looking at
it in the application and
you can synchronize the
information by pressing
the sync button on the
USB cable. Info in
contacts can be
synchronized with info in
either Palm®Desktop
software or Outlook.
LifeDrive from palmOne 133
CHAPTER 6 Managing Your Contacts
Cont’d.
The following fields contain features to help you enter information quickly:
All fields except numeric and email fields The first letter is automatically
capitalized.
Title, Company, City, and State As you enter letters, a match appears if you
have one on your Contacts list. For example, if you enter S, Sacramento might
appear, and if you then enter a and n, San Francisco might replace Sacramento.
When the word you want appears, select the next field.
Address You can enter up to three addresses, each containing five fields: Addr,
City, State, Zip Code, and Country. You can designate an address as work (W),
home (H), or other (O). By default, the first address is designated as work.
3[ & ] OPTIONAL Add a photo:
a. Tap the Picture box.
b. Select and add a photo from
palmOne™ Media.
Continued
Tip
If multiple contacts share
information, such as a
company name and
address, you can enter
the first contact, and then
copy the information into
other contacts.
Did You Know?
You can also enter one or
more contacts on your
desktop computer, and
then copy them to your
device by synchronizing.
Tap here
LifeDrive from palmOne 134
CHAPTER 6 Managing Your Contacts
4[ & ] OPTIONAL Add a
birthday:
a. Select the Birthday box.
b. Use the left and right arrows
to move to and select the birth
year. Hold down either arrow
to scroll quickly through the
years.
c. Select the month and date.
5After you finish entering all the information you want, select Done.
That's it. Your device automatically saves the contact. Make sure
you have a current backup. Synchronize often.
Tip
If you want a reminder
about a birthday, check
the Reminder box, enter
the number of days
before the birthday that
you want to see the
reminder, and then select
OK.
Did You Know?
Birthdays you enter in
Contacts appear as
untimed events in
Calendar. If you update
the birthday in Contacts,
it automatically updates
in Calendar as well.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 135
CHAPTER 6 Managing Your Contacts
Entering additional contact information
The Contact Edit screen displays certain fields by default. You can customize the Contact Edit
screen to display additional fields.
0
1Tap the Contacts icon in the input area.
2Display additional contact fields:
a. Select the contact you want, and then select Edit.
b. Select the plus button in the lower-right corner of the Contact Edit screen.
c. Select the field you want displayed from the list. The field appears in a preset
location on the Contact Edit screen.
Done
Tip
Additional fields appear
in a contact only if you
enter info into them. If
you leave a field blank, it
does not appear the next
time you open the
Contact Edit screen. Also,
additional fields apply
only to the current
contact; you can
duplicate contact
information if you need to
apply the same fields to
multiple contacts.
Did You Know?
Each field type can be
displayed a certain
number of times, up to a
preset maximum. Once
you reach this maximum,
the field type no longer
appears on the pop-up
list. For example, you can
display up to seven
Phone/Email fields.
Tip
Select the Note icon next
to the plus button to add a
note to the contact.
Select here
Note icon
LifeDrive from palmOne 136
CHAPTER 6 Managing Your Contacts
Selecting contact field types
You can select the types of phone numbers (work, home, mobile, pager, and so on), as well as
specify the instant messenger (IM) account, that you associate with a contact.
0
1Tap the Contacts icon in the input area.
2Customize the contact field type:
a. Select the contact you want, and then select Edit.
b. Select the pick list next to the field you want to change, and select the new
field type you want. Available fields include phone number, email address,
and instant messenger (IM) fields.
You must set up an instant messenger account with a service
provider and download instant messaging software to use instant messaging
on your device.
Done
Tip
Any changes you make to
field types apply only to
the current contact. You
can duplicate contact
information if you need to
apply the same contact
fields to multiple
contacts.
Did You Know?
The email address field
type is located on the
same pick list as the
phone number fields. IM
field types are located on
a separate pick list. NOTE
Select
triangle
LifeDrive from palmOne 137
CHAPTER 6 Managing Your Contacts
Defining custom fields
You can define the custom fields that appear at the end of the Contact Edit screen to display any
additional contact information you want, such as spouse’s or children’s names, favorite color, or
any other information. The new field is defined in all contacts, not just the current contact.
0
1Tap the Contacts icon in the input area.
2Define the custom fields:
a. Select the contact you want,
and then select Edit.
b. Open the menus.
c. Select Options, and then
select Rename Custom Fields.
d. Enter names for up to nine
custom fields, and then select
OK.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 138
CHAPTER 6 Managing Your Contacts
Selecting a contact as your business card
You can create a contact with your own information and select it as your business card by opening
the Record Menu and selecting Business Card. You can then beam or send your business card to
other devices. To beam your business card quickly, press and hold the Contacts application button
for approximately two seconds.
0
1Tap the Contacts icon in the input area.
2Create a business card:
a. Select the contact you want, or create a new contact with your own contact
information.
b. Open the menus.
c. Select Business Card on the Record menu.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 139
CHAPTER 6 Managing Your Contacts
Copying contact information into multiple contacts
You can quickly make a copy of a contact so that you can edit only the fields you need to change.
For example, if two of your contacts have the same work address or phone number, duplicating
the first contact simplifies entering information in the second.
0
1Tap the Contacts icon in the input area.
2Duplicate a contact:
a. Select the contact you want, and then select Edit.
b. Open the menus.
c. Select Record, and then select Duplicate Contact.
Done
Tip
You can also duplicate a
contact in the Contacts
desktop application by
highlighting a contact in
the Contacts list, and then
selecting Edit Copy.
Create a new contact,
select the Note icon, and
then paste the info into a
note. Then cut and paste
the text into the correct
field in the new contact.
Did You Know?
If you duplicate a contact
and do not edit the name,
the contact appears in the
Contacts list as “<Last
name>, <First name>
Copy.”
LifeDrive from palmOne 140
CHAPTER 6 Managing Your Contacts
Locating a contact on your list
0
1Tap the Contacts icon in the input area.
2Search for the contact:
a. Select the Look Up line at the
bottom of the screen and
enter the first letter of the
name you want to find.
b. Enter the second letter of the
name, and so on, until you
can easily scroll to the contact
you want.
3Select the contact to open it.
Done
Tip
You can also press Right
on the 5-way navigator
(or select the Quick Look
Up icon at the top of the
screen) to open the Quick
Look Up line. Press Up
and Down to select the
letter of the name you
want in each box, and
press Right to move to
the next box.
Did You Know?
The Phone Lookup
feature lets you add
contact information
directly into certain other
applications on your
device. For example, you
can add a name and
phone number to a
memo or task.
LifeDrive from palmOne 141
CHAPTER 6 Managing Your Contacts
Deleting a contact
0
1Tap the Contacts icon in the input area.
2Open the Delete Contact dialog
box:
a. Select the contact you want.
b. Open the menus.
c. Select Delete Contact on the
Record menu.
3[ & ] OPTIONAL Check the box to save an archive copy of the contact on your
computer.
4Select OK.
Done
Tip
You never know when
you’re going to need to
look up an old business
associate. If you save an
archive copy of your
deleted contacts, you can
refer to them later by
importing them.
LifeDrive from palmOne 142
CHAPTER 6 Managing Your Contacts
Customizing the Contacts list
By default, the Contacts list displays the work phone number for a contact; if no work phone
number is entered, another entry is displayed. You can customize a contact’s settings to display
different information on the Contacts list. You can also customize the appearance of the list.
0
1Tap the Contacts icon in the input area.
2Open the Contact Details dialog box:
a. Select the contact you want.
b. Select Edit, and then select Details.
3Specify the information
displayed with a contact:
a. Select the Show in List pick
list, and select the information
that you want to appear in the
Contacts list for this contact.
b. Select OK.
Continued
Did You Know?
If you select Work, Home,
Fax, Other, Main, Pager,
or Mobile from the pick
list, the first letter of your
selection appears next to
the contact in the
Contacts list—for
example, W for Work. If
you select email, no letter
appears next to the
contact.
Tip
You can also use the
Contact Details dialog
box to assign a contact to
a category or to mark a
contact as private.
LifeDrive from palmOne 143
CHAPTER 6 Managing Your Contacts
4Customize the appearance of the Contacts list:
a. From the Contacts list, open the menus.
b. Select Options, and then select Preferences.
c. Select the display options you want:
Remember last category Check the box if you want Contacts to display the
last category shown when you return to it from another application. If the
box is unchecked, Contacts opens to the All category.
List by Select whether to sort the Contacts list by last name and first name
or by company and last name.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 144
CHAPTER 6 Managing Your Contacts
Making connections from Contacts
You can set up your contacts so that you can do tasks like dialing a phone number, creating an
email or text message, accessing the web, or sending an instant message (requires additional
software, sold separately) directly from a contact screen. Contacts gives you two tools to perform
these tasks:
Quick Connect Lets you select a connection type and opens the application for making that type
of connection directly from a contact’s information screen.
Tap-to-Connect Opens the application to perform a connection task directly by selecting the
appropriate entry (phone number, email address, and so on) from a contact’s information screen.
Using Quick Connect
If you have a compatible mobile phone (sold separately) that includes Bluetooth wireless
technology, you can use Quick Connect to dial a phone number, address an email or a text
message, go to a website, or send an instant message (requires additional software, sold
separately) directly from a contact.
0
1Tap the Contacts icon in the input area.
Continued
Before You Begin
[!]
You must complete all the
prerequisites for the
email and messaging
applications.
To use Quick Connect
with your device’s built-in
Bluetooth® wireless
technology, you must set
up a phone connection.
To use it with your
device’s IR port, run
Phone Link Updater, and
then use the Phone Link
application to set up a
phone connection.
LifeDrive from palmOne 145
CHAPTER 6 Managing Your Contacts
2Make a connection using Quick Connect:
a. Select the contact you want.
b. In the Contact view, select the Quick Connect icon at the top of the
screen to open the Quick Connect dialog box.
c. Select the type of connection you want. For example, select a phone number
to dial the number on your mobile phone, or select an email address to open
the email application to a new message containing that address in the To
field.
Done
Tip
You can also open Quick
Connect from the Contact
List view by highlighting
the contact you want and
then pressing right on the
5-way navigator.
Tip
If you want to close the
Quick Connect dialog box
without making a
connection, press Left on
the 5-way.
LifeDrive from palmOne 146
CHAPTER 6 Managing Your Contacts
Customizing Quick Connect settings
You can specify which application opens when you choose a Contacts record field, and whether to
add a prefix to each phone number.
0
1Tap the Contacts icon in the input area.
2Customize Quick Connect settings:
a. Select the contact you want.
b. Select the Quick Connect icon
at the top of the screen
to open the Quick Connect
dialog box.
c. Select Settings and enter the
settings you want:
Number prefix Check the box and enter a prefix to add a prefix to all dialed
phone numbers.
A prefix is not added to any number that begins with a “+” character.
All other fields Select each pick list and select the application you want to use
to connect by that method.
d. Select OK.
Done
NOTE
LifeDrive from palmOne 147
CHAPTER 6 Managing Your Contacts
Using Tap-to-Connect
With Tap-to-Connect, you can select a contact and dial a phone number or address an email or text
message by selecting the appropriate entry on the contact screen. By default, Tap-to-Connect is
not enabled.
0
1Tap the Contacts icon in the input area.
2Enable Tap-to-Connect:
a. From the Contacts list, open the menus.
b. Select Options, and then select Preferences.
c. Select Enable Tap-to-Connect, and then select OK.
Continued
Before You Begin
[!]
You must have a
compatible mobile phone
(sold separately) that
includes Bluetooth
wireless technology, and
you must complete all the
prerequisites for the
email and messaging
applications.
To use Tap-to-Connect
with your device’s built-in
Bluetooth wireless
technology, you must set
up a phone connection.
To use it with your
device’s IR port, run
Phone Link Updater and
then use the Phone Link
application to set up a
phone connection.
LifeDrive from palmOne 148
CHAPTER 6 Managing Your Contacts
3Make a connection with Tap-to-Connect:
a. Select the contact you want.
b. Select the entry you want to use to connect. For example, to dial a phone
number, select the number you want to dial. To address an email message,
select an email address.
c. Select the entry to edit it if necessary. For example, you might need to add
an area code or country code to a phone number.
Done
Select to edit
LifeDrive from palmOne 149
CHAPTER 6 Managing Your Contacts
Working with Contacts on your computer
Use Contacts on your computer to view and manage the contacts you create on your device.
Check out the online Help in Palm®Desktop software to learn how to use Contacts on your
computer. The online Help includes info about the following topics:
• Viewing, copying, and deleting contacts
• Editing contact details
• Marking contacts private
• Showing, masking, and hiding private contacts
• Printing contacts
• Changing between the list, contact info, and Contact Edit views
• Adding notes to a contact
• Adding a date and time stamp to a contact
• Organizing contacts into categories
• Sharing contacts
WINDOWS ONLY
To open Contacts on your computer, double-click the Palm Desktop icon on the Windows desktop,
and then click Contacts on the launch bar.
MAC ONLY
To open Contacts on your computer, launch Palm Desktop software from the Palm folder, and then
click Addresses.
Tip
(Windows) If you chose to
synchronize with
Microsoft Outlook, check
out the online Help in
Outlook to learn how to
use Contacts on your
computer.
LifeDrive from palmOne 150
CHAPTER 6 Managing Your Contacts
Related topics
Click a link below to learn about these related topics:
Moving
Around
• Opening applications
• Using menus
• Synchronizing with Palm Desktop software and Outlook
Categories Organizing contacts by type and sorting them
Entering
Information
Transferring contact information from other applications such as databases,
spreadsheets, and other organizer software
Privacy Keeping contacts private by turning on security options
Sharing Sending contacts to other Bluetooth devices by using Bluetooth wireless
technology on your device
VersaMail®Sending contacts as attachments to email messages
SMS Sending contacts as part of a text message
Tips & Tricks
Make your device uniquely
yours. For great tips,
software, accessories, and
more, visit
www.palmOne.com/
mylifedrive.
Support
If you’re having problems
with Contacts or with
anything else on your device,
go to www.palmOne.com/
support.
LifeDrive from palmOne 151
CHAPTER 7
Managing Your Calendar
Stay on top of your schedule by
creating appointments, setting alarms,
and spotting conflicts in Calendar. You
can view your calendar by day, week,
or month, or as an agenda list that
combines your list of tasks and email
notifications with your appointments.
Schedule repeating meetings or block
out a vacation by creating one event
set to repeat at an interval you specify.
Color-code your appointments by
category and add notes with helpful
information.
You can synchronize your calendar
with Palm®Desktop software, Outlook,
or your corporate email system using
Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync®.
Benefits of Calendar
• Track current, future, and past
appointments
• Stay on top of deadlines
• Set reminders for appointments
• Spot schedule conflicts
I
n t
hi
s c
h
apter
Scheduling events
Color-coding your schedule
Setting an alarm
Rescheduling an event
Deleting events
Checking your schedule
Customizing your calendar
Working with Calendar on
your computer
Related topics
LifeDrive from palmOne 152
CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar
Scheduling events
Use Calendar to manage your schedule. You can enter appointments, events without a start time,
events that repeat at regular intervals, and events that span a period of time.
Scheduling an appointment
0
1Open Day View:
a. Tap the Calendar icon in
the input area.
b. Select the Day View icon .
2[ & ] OPTIONAL If the
appointment is not for today, select
the date of the appointment:
a. Tap G o To.
b. Select the year, month, and date.
Continued
»
Key Term
Event The name for an
entry in the Calendar
application, including
appointments, birthdays,
reminders, recurring
meetings, and so on.
Tip
You can also scroll to a
date by pressing Right or
Left on the 5-way or by
selecting the arrows at
the top of the Day View
screen.
Did You Know?
You can use more than
one line to describe an
appointment.
Day View icon
Go To
LifeDrive from palmOne 153
CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar
3Tap the line next to the time the appointment begins, and enter a description.
4If the appointment is longer or shorter than an hour, set the duration:
a. In Day View, tap the start time.
b. In the Set Time dialog box, tap End Time.
c. Tap the hour and minute lists to select the time the appointment ends.
d. Select OK.
That’s it. Your device automatically saves the appointment. Make
sure you have a current backup. Synchronize often.
Did You Know?
You can color-code your
calendar to file events in
categories. Each category
has its own color. You can
also mark events as
private to hide them from
prying eyes.
Did You Know?
If you are synchronizing
with Outlook on your
Windows computer, you
can select a time zone
when creating a new
event. Also, if you created
appointments in Outlook
that include more than
one person, these
person’s names appear
when you synchronize
with your device. You
cannot edit this
information on your
device.
Hour
list
Minute
list
Duration
Start time Description
Category marker
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 154
CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar
Scheduling an event without a start time
Keep track of events that take place on a particular date but not at a particular time. For example,
you may want to enter holidays, anniversaries, and deadlines.
0
1Open Day View:
a. Tap the Calendar icon in
the input area.
b. Select the Day View icon .
2Select the date of the event:
a. Select Go To.
b. Select the arrows to select the
year.
c. Select the month.
d. Select the date.
Continued
Did You Know?
If you need to reserve a
date before you know the
details of the
appointment, you can
schedule an event
without a start time.
Day View icon
Go To
LifeDrive from palmOne 155
CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar
3Add an unscheduled event line:
a. Select New.
b. Select No Time.
4Enter a description on the line
that appears at the top of the
screen.
A diamond appears in
the time column to show that the
event doesn’t start at a specific
time.
Done
Tip
You can change an event
without a time to a
scheduled appointment.
Select the event
description, select
Details, select the Time
box, and select the start
and end times.
NOTE
LifeDrive from palmOne 156
CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar
Scheduling a repeating event—standard interval
There’s no need to re-enter events that take place on a regular basis. Just set up a repeating event.
This is a great way to block out time for things like a daily walk with the dog, a weekly team
meeting, a monthly game night with friends, and annual events like anniversaries and holidays.
0
1Tap the Calendar icon in the input area.
2Enter the event you want to repeat, and then select the event description.
3Set the repeat interval:
a. Select Details.
b. Select the Repeat pick list and
select how often the event
repeats: Daily until, Every week,
Every other week, Every month,
or Every year.
If you select Daily, a dialog box appears for you to select the end
date.
c. Select OK.
Done
Tip
To select intervals such as
the 2nd Tuesday of every
month or the 3rd
Thursday in November of
every year, see
Scheduling a repeating
event—unusual interval.
NOTE
LifeDrive from palmOne 157
CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar
Scheduling a repeating event—unusual interval
Some events don’t fit neatly into the preset repeat intervals, so you need to set up your own
repeat intervals. For example, set aside time for a trip to the gym every other day, schedule a class
that meets on the 1st Wednesday of each month, or enter annual holidays that occur during a
particular time of month such as the 1st Monday in September or the 3rd week of November.
0
1Tap the Calendar icon in the input area.
2Enter the event you want to repeat, and then select the event description.
3Open the Change Repeat dialog box:
a. Select Details.
b. Select the Repeat pick list and select Other.
Continued
LifeDrive from palmOne 158
CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar
4Set the repeat interval:
a. Select Day, Week, Month, or Year as the repeat unit.
b. Select the Every line and enter the frequency at which the event repeats.
c. Select the End on pick list and select an end date, if needed.
d. If you selected Week in step c, select the day of the week the event repeats. If
you selected Month in step c, select Day to select the week within the month,
such as the 4th Thursday, or select Date to select the same date within the
month, such as the 15th.
e. Select OK.
Done
Tip
To enter holidays such as
Labor Day or
Thanksgiving, select
Month, enter 12 on the
Every line, and then
select Day as the Repeat
By setting.
LifeDrive from palmOne 159
CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar
Scheduling an event that is longer than a day
Reserve a block of time for events that span several days, such as a vacation, conference, training
class, or an extended project.
0
1Tap the Calendar icon in the input area.
2Enter the event, and then select the event description.
3Set the repeat interval:
a. Select Details.
b. Select the Repeat pick list and
select Daily until.
c. Select the year, month, and date
when the event ends.
d. Select OK.
Done
Did You Know?
You can reserve a specific
block of time during the
day or use events without
times to flag a series of
dates. For example, you
can reserve vacation time
from 6/23–6/30 using a
repeating event without a
time, and then schedule a
specific excursion from
9:00 to 3:00 on 6/24 and
dinner with a friend at
6:00 on 6/25.
Tip
Need to enter an event
that extends beyond
midnight? Enter an end
time that is earlier than
the start time.
LifeDrive from palmOne 160
CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar
Entering a location or a note for an event
Enter a description of the event’s location such as a restaurant, a conference room, or your friend’s
house. Enter a note such as dial-in info for a conference call or directions to a location.
0
1Tap the Calendar icon in the input area.
2Enter the event, and then select the event description.
3[ & ] OPTIONAL Enter the
location:
a. Select Details.
b. Select the Location field and
enter a description of the
location.
Continued
LifeDrive from palmOne 161
CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar
4[ & ] OPTIONAL Enter the note:
a. Select Note .
b. Enter the note text.
c. Select Done.
5Select OK.
The location name and a note icon appear next to the event
description in Agenda View and in Day View.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 162
CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar
Scheduling an event with a time zone
Do not use times zones if you are synchronizing with Palm Desktop software.
Time zones work only if you are synchronizing with Outlook or Exchange ActiveSync.
Palm Desktop software does not recognize time zones.
Selecting a time zone when creating a new event allows you to travel and have your events
automatically adjust to the time zone in your new location. When you schedule an event, set the
time zone and the time the event occurs in the location of the event. The event automatically
adjusts on your schedule based on the primary location you have set on your device.
When you travel, you can change the primary location on your device and the event automatically
adjusts on your schedule to the correct time according to the time zone of the new primary
location.
Only events that have a time zone setting adjust when you change the primary time
zone on your device. Events that do not have a time zone setting remain at their set time.
0
1Tap the Calendar icon in the input area.
Continued
IMPORTANT
[!]
Did You Know?
You can also set a
preference to
automatically include a
time zone whenever you
create a new event. Open
the Options menu and
select Preferences. Select
New events use time
zones. Only new events
created after the
preference is set are
affected.
NOTE
LifeDrive from palmOne 163
CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar
Color-coding your schedule
Use color-coding to quickly spot different types of events. For example, make all your family
appointments green, your work appointments blue, and your appointments with friends yellow.
2Set the time and the time zone:
a. Enter the event.
b. Set the time for the event as it is
scheduled at the location where
it occurs.
c. Select the time zone pick list and
select a city within the time zone
where the event is located.
d. Select OK.
Done
Time zone
pick list
LifeDrive from palmOne 164
CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar
Managing your color-codes
Each color code represents a category of events. You can assign each category a name and select
which color you want to assign to it.
0
1Open Day View:
a. Tap the Calendar icon in the
input area.
b. Select the Day View icon
2Open the Edit Categories dialog box:
a. From Day View, select the event
description.
b. Select Details.
c. Select the Category pick list and
select Edit Categories.
Continued
Day View icon
Category
marker
LifeDrive from palmOne 165
CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar
3Select the color code for the category:
a. Select New, or select a category, and then select Edit.
b. Enter or edit the category name.
c. Select the color you want to give this category.
d. Select OK, and then select OK two more times.
The category name and its color-coded marker appear on the
category list.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 166
CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar
Assigning a color code to an event
0
1Tap the Calendar icon in the input area.
2Enter the event you want to color-code.
3Select the category marker next to the description, and then select a category
from the list.
In Agenda View and Day View the category marker next to the
event is color-coded. In Week View and Month View the symbol
for the event is color-coded.
Did You Know?
In Day View and Month
View you can set the
Display Options to show
the category list so that
you can view all your
events or just the events
for a single color-code.
Category
marker
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 167
CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar
Setting an alarm
0
1Tap the Calendar icon in the input area.
2Enter the event you want to assign an alarm to, and then select the event
description.
3Set the alarm:
a. Select Details.
b. Check the Alarm box.
c. Select the pick list and select
Minutes, Hours, or Days.
d. Enter how many minutes,
hours, or days before the
event you want the alarm to
sound, and then select OK.
Done
Tip
You can customize your
alarm settings in the
Calendar Preferences
dialog box.
Did You Know?
If you set your alarms in
World Clock instead of
Calendar, you have
different alarm sound
choices. Keep in mind
that since World Clock
alarms aren’t tied to a
specific event, you won’t
see an event description
when a World Clock alarm
sounds.
Did You Know?
When you set an alarm, a
little alarm clock appears
to the right of the event
description.
LifeDrive from palmOne 168
CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar
Rescheduling an event
0
1Tap the Calendar icon in the input area.
2Go to the event you want to reschedule:
a. From Day View, select Go To.
b. Select the year, month, and date of the event.
c. Select the event description, and edit it if necessary.
If you edit the description of a repeating event, the new
description appears in all instances of the event.
3Change the date and time:
a. Select Details.
b. Select the Time box and
select the new start and end
times.
c. Select the Date box and select
the new date.
d. Select OK.
Continued
Tip
You can also use the
Event Details dialog box
to change the alarm,
location, category, repeat,
and privacy settings.
IMPORTANT
[!]
LifeDrive from palmOne 169
CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar
4If you’re changing a repeating
event, select one of the following
to select the event(s) you want to
apply the changes to:
Current Apply your changes to
only the selected instance of the
repeating event.
Future Apply your changes to the selected event and all instances of the
repeating event that occur at a later date.
All Apply your changes to the selected event and all past and future instances
of the repeating event.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 170
CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar
Deleting events
If an appointment is canceled, you can delete it from your schedule. When deleting a repeating
event, you can indicate you want to delete just the selected event, or to also delete other instances
of the event. You can also delete all your old events that are before a selected time frame.
Deleting a specific event
0
1Tap the Calendar icon in the input area.
2Go to the event you want to delete:
a. From Day View, select Go To.
b. Select the year, month, and date of the event.
c. Select the event description.
3Open the Delete Event dialog
box:
a. Open the menus.
b. Select Delete Event on the
Record menu.
Continued
Tip
You can also delete a
specific event by
selecting the event,
selecting Details, and
then selecting Delete.
Tip
Many people find it useful
to refer to old events for
tax purposes. If you save
an archive copy of your
deleted events, you can
refer to them later by
importing them.
LifeDrive from palmOne 171
CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar
4[ & ] OPTIONAL Check the box to save an archive copy of the event on your
computer.
5Select OK.
6If you’re deleting a repeating
event, select one of the following
to select the event(s) you want to
delete:
Current Delete only the selected
instance of the repeating event.
Future Delete the selected event
and all instances of the repeating event that occur at a later date.
All Delete the selected event and all past and future instances of the repeating
event.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 172
CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar
Deleting all your old events
When you need more space on your device, or you just want to do some “housekeeping,” you can
delete all your old events.
0
1Tap the Calendar icon in the input area.
2Open the Purge dialog box:
a. Open the menus.
b. Select Purge on the Record
menu.
3Select the events to purge:
a. Select the Delete events older than pick list and select a time frame.
b. Check the Save archive copy on PC box if you want to place a copy of the
deleted events in an archive file on your computer the next time you
synchronize.
c. Select OK.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 173
CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar
Checking your schedule
Sometimes you want to look at your schedule for a particular date, while other times you want to
see an overview of a week or month.
Viewing your appointments and tasks together
Agenda View shows your daily schedule and any items on your Tasks list that are overdue or due
today. If there’s room on the screen, Agenda View also shows your schedule for the next dates that
have events scheduled on them.
0
1Tap the Calendar icon in the input area.
If Calendar is already open, select the Agenda View icon instead.
Continued
Tip
Press the Calendar button
repeatedly to cycle
through the four different
views.
Did You Know?
Agenda View shows how
many unread messages
you have in the
VersaMail® application.
Did You Know?
You can use a favorite
photo as the background
for your Agenda View.
NOTE
LifeDrive from palmOne 174
CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar
2Do one of the following to view your schedule:
• Select an appointment to go to it in Day View.
• Select a task to go to it in Tasks.
Done
Agenda View icon
Location
No-time icon
Overdue task icon
Category marker
LifeDrive from palmOne 175
CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar
Viewing your daily schedule
Day View shows your daily schedule one day at a time. You can scroll between days in the current
week or jump to any other date.
0
1Open Day View:
a. Tap the Calendar icon in the input area.
b. Select the Day View icon .
Continued
Day View icon
Repeat icon
No-time icon
Alarm icon
Day selector
Note icon
Event duration
Birthday icon
Category marker
LifeDrive from palmOne 176
CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar
2Do any of the following to view your daily schedule:
• Select the day selector to view another day in the same week, select the
arrows to scroll to the previous or next week, or select Go To to choose a
specific date.
• Select the Repeat icon, the Alarm icon, or Details to open the Details dialog
box.
• Select the Note icon to view the note text.
• Select the Birthday icon to view the birthday entry.
• Select the category marker to assign the event to a color-code.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 177
CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar
Viewing your weekly schedule
Week View shows your schedule for an entire week. The time frames that appear on the screen are
based on the Start Time and End Time settings in Calendar Preferences.
0
1Open Week View:
a. Tap the Calendar icon in
the input area.
b. Select the Week View icon
.
2Do any of the following to view your weekly schedule:
• Select the week selector to scroll between weeks, or select Go To to choose a
week.
• Select a date to go to that day in Day View.
• Select an event to view the event description and location.
• Select the scroll arrows to view events scheduled earlier or later in the day
during the selected week.
Done
Tip
You can also press Right
and Left on the 5-way to
scroll to the next or
previous week. To go to
Day View for a particular
day, press Center on the
5-way to insert a
highlight, press Right or
Left to select a day, and
then press Center on the
5-way again.
Week View icon
Event
No-time icon
Week selector
After-hours event
Multi-day event
Scroll arrows
LifeDrive from palmOne 178
CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar
Viewing your monthly schedule
Month View shows your schedule for a whole month. You can scroll between months or jump to
any other month.
0
1Open Month View:
a. Tap the Calendar icon in
the input area.
b. Select the Month View
icon .
2Do any of the following to view your monthly schedule:
• Select the month selector to scroll to the previous or next month, or select Go
To to choose a specific month.
• Select a date to go to that day in Day View.
Done
Tip
You can also press Right
and Left on the 5-way to
scroll to the next or
previous month. To go to
Day View for a particular
date, press Center on the
5-way to insert a
highlight, press Right or
Left to select a date, and
then press Center on the
5-way again.
Month View icon
Event
No-time icon
Month selector
Multi-day event
LifeDrive from palmOne 179
CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar
Viewing a yearly calendar
Year View shows a calendar for an entire year. You can scroll between years or jump to any other
year.
0
1Open Year View:
a. Tap the Calendar icon in
the input area.
b. Select the Month View
icon .
c. Select Year.
2Do any of the following to view a yearly calendar:
• Select the year selector to scroll to the previous or next year, or select Go To
to choose a specific year.
• Select the scroll arrows to see months that don’t fit on the screen.
• Select a month to go to that month in Month View.
Done
Tip
You can also press Right
and Left on the 5-way to
scroll to the next or
previous month. To go to
Day View for a particular
date, press Center on the
5-way to insert a
highlight, press Right or
Left to select a date, and
then press Center on the
5-way again.
Month View icon
Scroll arrows
Year selector
LifeDrive from palmOne 180
CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar
Finding events that overlap
When an event starts before a previous event finishes, the events overlap. You can spot events
that overlap in Week View and in Day View.
Customizing your calendar
Control the appearance of your Calendar screens. Select display options for the Agenda View, Day
View, and Month View. The options you select for each view apply only to that view. You can also
choose alarm and start and end time settings.
Overlapping
events
LifeDrive from palmOne 181
CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar
Customizing display options for your calendar
0
1Tap the Calendar icon in the input area.
2Open the Display Options dialog
box:
a. Open the menus.
b. Select Options, and then
select Display Options.
3Select the Default View pick list and select the view you want to see when you
open Calendar.
Continued
LifeDrive from palmOne 182
CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar
4Set any of the following Agenda View display options:
Show Due Tasks Display tasks that are due today and tasks that are overdue.
Show Messages Display the number of read and unread email messages.
Background Use your favorite photo as the Agenda View background. Check
the Background box, select the photo thumbnail, and then select a photo.
Adjust the fade setting so that the text is easy to read against the photo.
5Select Day and set any of the
following Day View options:
Show Category List Display the
category pick list. By default, the
Category pick list doesn’t appear.
Show Time Bars Display the bars
that show the duration of an event
and event conflicts.
Compress Day View Avoid scrolling and display only the time period with
scheduled events.
Show Category Column Display the category marker between the time and
description. The color of the category marker indicates which category the
event is filed under.
Continued
Tip
If the text is difficult to see
against your new
background, select a
different Color Theme to
change the text color.
Tip
If you want to see the
hours when you have
nothing scheduled, as
well as your
appointments, deselect
Compress Day View. But
don’t forget to scroll
down to see the events at
the end of your day, or
hide the input area and
display as much of Day
View as possible.
LifeDrive from palmOne 183
CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar
6Select Month and set any of the
following Month View options:
Show Category List Display the
category pick list. By default, the
Category pick list doesn’t appear.
Timed Events Show events that
are scheduled for a specific time.
Untimed Events Show events
that are scheduled for a specific date, but not a specific time.
Daily Repeating Events Show events that repeat every day.
7Select OK.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 184
CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar
Setting alarm and time options
0.
1Tap the Calendar icon in the input area.
2Open the Preferences dialog box:
a. Open the menus.
b. Select Options, and then
select Preferences.
3Select the start and end times of your typical day. This time frame appears in
your Day View and Week View.
Continued
Tip
You can view and
schedule events in time
slots that are before or
after the start or end time.
You just need to scroll to
those time slots.
LifeDrive from palmOne 185
CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar
4Set any of the following alarm settings:
Alarm Preset Set an alarm for each new event. When you check this box, you
also need to enter the default number of minutes, days, or hours before the
event that the alarm sounds. For events without a time, the alarm settings are
based on midnight of the date of the event. The Alarm Preset settings appear as
defaults for each new event, but you can change these settings in the Details
dialog box for individual events. If you don’t want to use alarms for most of
your events, don’t check this box.
Alarm Sound Select the sound the alarm makes when it goes off.
Remind Me Select how many times the alarm sounds after the first time it
goes off: Once, Twice, 3 Times, 5 Times, and 10 Times.
Play Every Select how often the alarm sounds: Minute, 5 minutes, 10 minutes,
and 30 minutes.
5Select OK.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 186
CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar
Working with Calendar on your computer
If you use Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync your email and calendar information
synchronize directly with your info on your company's Exchange server. You must retrieve email
and calendar updates from the VersaMail® application; they do not update when you synchronize
your device with your computer.
• Scheduling events
• Rescheduling events
• Setting alarms
• Deleting events
• Marking events as private and hiding them
• Printing your schedule
• Working with Day View, Week View, Month View, and Year View
WINDOWS ONLY
To open Calendar on your computer, double-click the Palm Desktop icon on the Windows desktop,
and then click Calendar on the launch bar.
MAC ONLY
To open Calendar on your computer, double-click the Palm Desktop icon in the Palm folder, and
then click Date Book.
IMPORTANT
[!]
Tip
(Windows) If you chose to
synchronize with
Microsoft Outlook, check
out the online Help in
Outlook to learn how to
use Calendar on your
computer.
Did You Know?
Mac Check out the
Holiday Files folder in the
Palm folder. It contains
various holidays that you
can import into
Palm Desktop software
on your computer.
LifeDrive from palmOne 187
CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar
Related topics
Click a link below to learn about these related topics:
Sharing • Beaming events to other Palm Powered™ devices
• Sending events to other Bluetooth® devices by using Bluetooth wireless
technology on your device
• Synchronizing with Palm Desktop software and Outlook
VersaMail Sending events as attachments to email messages
Privacy Keeping events private by turning on security options
Categories • Editing and deleting categories
• Viewing events by category
Common
Questions
Answers to frequently asked questions about Calendar
Tips & Tricks
Make your device uniquely
yours. For great tips,
software, accessories, and
more, visit
www.palmOne.com/
mylifedrive.
Support
If you’re having problems
with Calendar or with
anything else on your device,
go to www.palmOne.com/
support.
LifeDrive from palmOne 188
CHAPTER 8
Your Microsoft Office Manager
With its ability to store large amounts
of important information, your device
lets you take your office with you—
including your Microsoft Office files.
With the Documents application, you
can carry, create, view, and edit
Microsoft Word and Excel files directly
on your device. You can also view,
carry, and manage PowerPoint files on
your device.
You can keep updated copies of the
files on both your device and your
computer so that you can work on
them in the most convenient location
any time.
Benefits
• Manage Word, Excel, and PowerPoint
files on your device
• Improve productivity by taking
important docs, spreadsheets, and
presentations with you on the go
I
n t
hi
s c
h
apter
Creating and managing
Office files
Opening files from within
Documents
Related topics
CHAPTER 8 Your Microsoft Office Manager
LifeDrive from palmOne 189
Creating and managing Office files
The Documents application provides powerful editing and file management features for Office
files on your device. What’s more, Documents makes it easy for you to share files between your
computer and your device.
Here are some of the capabilities of Documents:
• View Word, Excel, or PowerPoint files in their native format (DOC, XLS, or PPT).
• Create or edit a Word document or Excel spreadsheet on your device and save it in their native
format.
• Create or edit a PowerPoint-compatible presentation that is optimized for viewing on your
device.
• Open Office files received as attachments to incoming email messages, and attach files to
outgoing messages.
• Transfer Office files to a Bluetooth® or Wi-Fi® printer using your device’s built-in wireless
technology.
You can store and synchronize your Office files and folders in the Documents folder of your
device's hard drive. View and access the files and folders using the Files application on your
device. You can also view the files and folders using LifeDrive™ Manager (Windows) or Drive
Mode (Mac and Windows) on your computer. You can manage items on the hard drive in various
ways: copying, moving, deleting, renaming, and so on, using LifeDrive Manager (Windows) or
Drive Mode (Mac and Windows), or Files on your device.
If you drop Office files into the Documents folder in LifeDrive Manager, they are automatically set
to be synchronized.
Did You Know?
You can also choose to
manage the transfer of
your documents using
the Documents
companion application
called Documents To Go
located on your
computer. Documents To
Go allows you to move or
copy files to your device
when you synchronize.
For complete information
on this application, click
the Documents To Go
icon on your computer
and then click Help, or go
to www.dataviz.com.
CHAPTER 8 Your Microsoft Office Manager
LifeDrive from palmOne 190
Opening files from within Documents
In the Documents application, you can view and open any Word, Excel, or PowerPoint file on your
device.
0
1Go to Applications and select Documents.
2Select the file you want from the
list.
Done
Tip
When you are working on
a file, save it to your
device or your expansion
card by selecting Menu,
selecting Save As from
the File menu, and then
selecting the location
where you want to save
the file.
Tip
Do you have a file you are
always viewing? Add it to
your Favorites list for
easy access.
LifeDrive from palmOne 191
CHAPTER 8 Your Microsoft Office Manager
Related topics
Click the link below to learn about these related topics:
VersaMail®Sending and receiving Office files as attachments to email messages
Tips & Tricks
Make your device uniquely
yours. For great tips,
software, accessories, and
more, visit
www.palmOne.com/
mylifedrive.
Support
If you’re having problems
with Documents, click the
Documents To Go icon on
your computer, and then click
Help, or go to
www.dataviz.com.
LifeDrive from palmOne 192
CHAPTER 9
Viewing Your Photos and Videos
A picture may be worth a thousand
words, but what happens when you
have lots of pictures—or videos—that
you are trying to keep organized? Or
maybe just a few that are so
meaningful that you want to have
instant access to them at any time?
Solve both problems with palmOne™
Media. Easy viewing and organization
of still photos and videos are all
features of Media. You can keep your
favorite photos right on your device;
select photos as the background for
your Favorites and Applications views
and Agenda View in Calendar; even
add a photo to a Contacts entry.
Benefits
• Never be far from your favorite
people or places
• Simplify photo and video
organization
• Store multiple videos and hundreds
of photos
I
n t
hi
s c
h
apter
Reformatting files and
copying supported file types
Viewing photos or videos
Viewing and editing photo
or video details
Organizing photos and
videos
Personalizing a photo
Copying a photo or video
Deleting a photo or video
Sharing photos and videos
Related topics
LifeDrive from palmOne 193
CHAPTER 9 Viewing Your Photos and Videos
Reformatting files and copying supported file types
You can view photos in popular formats such as JPG, BMP, TIFF, and GIF on your device. You can
view videos in formats such as MPEG-1, ASF (MPEG4+ADPCM), and AVI (MJPEG+ADPCM) or
(MJPEG+PCM).
When you copy a photo or video from your computer to your device using LifeDrive™Manager
(Windows), you can choose to reformat the photo or video to a format and smaller file size that
works best for viewing on your device. There are numerous video formats, and not all types can
be converted to a format that’s viewable on your device.
On a Mac, you can use the Send to Handheld droplet to transfer files to your device. The files are
reformatted to a format that works best for viewing on your device.
If you choose to reformat the file, the reformatted version is renamed so that it does not overwrite
the original version on your computer when you synchronize. Only the new reformatted file is
copied; the original file is not copied.
In LifeDrive Manager, you can also choose Keep Synchronized, which allows you to keep the photo
or video in its original format and update it during synchronization.
You can store your photos and videos on your device in the Photos & Videos folder. View and
access the files using the Files application on your device. You can also manage the files using
LifeDrive Manager (Windows) or Drive Mode (Mac and Windows) on your computer. You can
manage items on the hard drive in various ways: copying, moving, deleting, renaming, and so on,
using LifeDrive Manager (Windows) or Drive Mode (Mac and Windows), or Files on your device.
Albums are subfolders located only in the Photos & Videos special folder on the hard drive and in
the DCIM special folder on an expansion card. Only first level subfolders in these special folders
are recognized as albums.
When you copy your media from your camera card using Camera Companion, the media is copied
to the DCIM folder on the hard drive. Since this is not a special folder, no albums can be created in
the folder. To access the media, you need to browse to the subfolders where the pictures are
located. If you want to add media from the DCIM folder to an album, you must use Files to copy
the media to a subfolder in the Photos & Videos special folder.
Did You Know?
You can carry a video or
photo on your device in
its native format with no
conversion, so you can
view it on the computer in
the format you prefer. On
your computer, use
LifeDrive Manager
(Windows); do not select
the Format for device
option. You can also use
Drive Mode (Mac and
Windows) on your
computer.
LifeDrive from palmOne 194
CHAPTER 9 Viewing Your Photos and Videos
Viewing photos or videos
You can view photos and videos in the following ways:
Thumbnail View miniature preview versions of your photos and videos.
List View names and dates of photos and videos on your device or an expansion card.
Slide show View all photos and videos in an album, automatically one after another.
You can easily see a full-screen view of a photo or play a video by selecting the photo or video
from the Thumbnail or List View. You can also rotate the orientation of the photo, zoom in to view
a magnified portion of a photo, and view or edit detailed information about a photo or video.
Viewing a photo or video in the Thumbnail and List View
0
1Press the Media button.
Continued
Tip
Use your camera’s editing
software to edit or
enhance your photos or
videos and copy them to
your device for viewing.
LifeDrive from palmOne 195
CHAPTER 9 Viewing Your Photos and Videos
2Go to the folder or album where
the photo or video is located:
a. Select Device or
Expansion Card .
b. Tap Location pick list in the
upper-right corner and select
the location of the photo or
video you want to view:
• If the photo or video is in the
Photos & Videos folder on your
device’s hard drive or on an
expansion card, select the
correct location from the list.
• If the photo or video is located
elsewhere on your device’s
hard drive, select Browse, and
then browse to the item.
Continued
Expansion card
Device
Location
pick list
Thumbnail
View
List View
Thumbnail view
List view
LifeDrive from palmOne 196
CHAPTER 9 Viewing Your Photos and Videos
3Select the photo or video you want to view. A video automatically starts playing
when you select it.
Continued
Tip
If a photo is larger than
your device’s screen—
either because of its
original size or because
you have zoomed in—tap
and drag with the stylus
to view different parts of
the photo. Select a photo or
video to view
Select a photo or
video to view
Thumbnail View
List View
Thumbnail view
List view
LifeDrive from palmOne 197
CHAPTER 9 Viewing Your Photos and Videos
4[ & ] OPTIONAL Access controls:
• For photos, press Up on the 5-way navigator to zoom in. Press Down to
access the photo controls.
• For videos, press Center to access video controls.
5Press Center or tap anywhere in the photo or video to return to the Thumbnail
View screen.
Done
Did You Know?
When viewing a video,
you can use your
navigator controls. Press
Up and Down to control
the volume. Press and
hold Left and Right to
move the video forward
and backward in 5-second
increments. You can also
press Left and Right to
move to the previous or
next media file.
Photo Video
Volume
Play or Pause
Rotate
Add audio
Progress indicator
Full-screen view
Send
Send
LifeDrive from palmOne 198
CHAPTER 9 Viewing Your Photos and Videos
Viewing a slide show
By default, both photos and videos in an album are displayed during a slide show.
0
1Press the Media button.
2[ & ] OPTIONAL Set the slide show settings:
a. Open the menus.
b. Select Options and then select
Slideshow.
c. Adjust the settings:
Show Videos Show videos during the
slide show.
Audio Add or remove audio. Play the photo audio clips and video sound or
background music.
Slide Delay Select the time each photo displays.
Transitions Select the type of transition between slides.
Auto Rotate Automatically rotate the photo or video for optimal viewing.
Continued
Did You Know?
In a slide show, videos
and photo audio clips
play through in their
entirety before the next
item appears.
LifeDrive from palmOne 199
CHAPTER 9 Viewing Your Photos and Videos
3Go to the folder or album where
the photos or videos are located:
a. Select Device or
Expansion Card .
b. Select the Location pick list in
the upper-right corner and
select the location of the photos
or videos you want to view.
4In the Thumbnail or List View,
select Slide Show .
5Press Center or tap a photo or video to stop the slide show and return to the
Thumbnail or List View.
Done
Did You Know?
When viewing a slide
show, you can use your
navigator controls. Press
Up and Down to control
the volume. Press Left
and Right to move to the
previous or next media
file. When viewing a
video, press and hold Left
and Right to move the
video forward and
backward in 5-second
increments.
Did You Know?
Once you have
positioned a photo, that
position is shown in the
slide show. This allows
you to focus on sections
of the photo you would
like to highlight. This
feature does not save the
zoom setting.
Expansion card
Device
Location
pick list
Slide Show
LifeDrive from palmOne 200
CHAPTER 9 Viewing Your Photos and Videos
Rotating a photo
0
0
1Press the Media button.
2Go to the folder or album where the photo is located:
a. Select Device or Expansion Card .
b. Select the Location pick list in the upper-right corner and select the location
of the photo or video you want to view:
• If the photo is in the Photos & Videos folder on your device’s hard drive or on
an expansion card, select the correct location from the list.
• If the photo is located elsewhere on your device’s hard drive, select Browse,
and then browse to the item.
Continued
Tip
You can also rotate a
photo by pressing Down
on the 5-way to zoom the
photo out and then
selecting Rotate at the
bottom of the screen.
LifeDrive from palmOne 201
CHAPTER 9 Viewing Your Photos and Videos
3Rotate the photo:
a. Select the photo you want in
the Thumbnail or List View.
b. Open the menus.
c. Select Rotate Picture from the
Media menu.
d. Select the rotation you want.
4Tap anywhere in the photo to return to the Thumbnail or List View.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 202
CHAPTER 9 Viewing Your Photos and Videos
Viewing and editing photo or video details
0
0
1Press the Media button.
2Go to the folder or album where the photo or video is located:
a. Select Device or Expansion Card .
b. Select the Location pick list in the upper-right corner and select the location
of the photo or video you want to view:
• If the photo or video is in the Photos & Videos folder on your device’s hard
drive or on an expansion card, select the correct location from the list.
• If the photo or video is located elsewhere on your device’s hard drive, select
Browse, and then browse to the item.
3Select the photo or video whose details you want to view.
Continued
Tip
You can also view details
for an entire album—
including last date
changed, number of
items in the album, and
size—by opening the
Album menu and
selecting Album Details.
LifeDrive from palmOne 203
CHAPTER 9 Viewing Your Photos and Videos
4View photo or video details:
a. Open the menus.
b. Select Edit Details from the
Media menu.
c. In addition to viewing photo or
video details, you can do the
following:
Change name Select the photo or video name and enter a new name.
Move to different album Select the Album pick list and select a new album
location for the photo or video.
Add notes Select the Notes field and enter a note for the photo or video.
Continued
Tip
Select the scroll arrows at
the bottom of the Media
Details screen to view
other photos in the
album.
»
Key Term
EXIF Exchangeable
Image File Format is a
standard for storing
interchange information
in image files. Most
digital cameras use the
EXIF format.
LifeDrive from palmOne 204
CHAPTER 9 Viewing Your Photos and Videos
5[ & ] OPTIONAL If the photo
was taken from a digital camera
that uses the EXIF format, you
can view the EXIF information
about the photo:
a. Select EXIF.
b. Select Done when finished
viewing the EXIF details.
6When finished editing and viewing details, select Done.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 205
CHAPTER 9 Viewing Your Photos and Videos
Organizing photos and videos
You can organize your photos and videos in the following ways:
• Create albums and place your photos and videos in those albums.
• Move photos and videos within or between albums.
• Sort photos and videos in the List View.
Organizing photos or videos into albums
0
1Press the Media button.
2Select Manage Albums .
Continued
Tip
Use the copy feature to
move a photo from your
device to a card and vice
versa. If a photo is stored
on your device, you can
add it only to an album
located on the device.
Likewise, if a photo is
stored on an expansion
card, you can add it only
to an album that is on the
same card.
Did You Know?
Albums are subfolders
located only in the Photos
& Videos special folder on
the hard drive and in the
DCIM special folder on an
expansion card. Only first
level subfolders in these
special folders are
recognized as albums.
LifeDrive from palmOne 206
CHAPTER 9 Viewing Your Photos and Videos
3[ & ] OPTIONAL Create an
album:
a. Select whether to create the
album on your device or on
an expansion card inserted
into the expansion slot.
b. Select New, enter the name of
the new album, and select OK.
c. Select OK on the Manage
Albums screen.
4Do one of the following:
To add photos or videos to a new
album Select the photos or videos
you want on the Organize Album
screen.
To add or remove photos or videos
from an existing album From the
Thumbnail or List View, select the
album you want from the pick list in
the upper-right corner, and then select Manage Albums . Select a photo or
video without a plus sign to add it to the album; select a photo or video with a
plus sign to remove it from the album.
Continued
Tip
Drag the stylus across
multiple photos and/or
videos to add or remove
them all at once.
Did You Know?
If you remove a photo or
video from an album, it is
moved to Photos and
Videos. The photo or
video is not deleted from
your device or the
expansion card.
Select to add
Select + to
remove
LifeDrive from palmOne 207
CHAPTER 9 Viewing Your Photos and Videos
Moving a photo or video within and between albums
0
5Move photos or videos within albums:
a. Tap the pick list in the upper-right corner and select the album in which you
want to move photos or videos.
b. Select the photo you want to move, and drag the stylus to move the photo or
video to the desired location.
Done
1Press the Media button.
2Move a photo or video within an album:
a. Select the pick list in the upper-right corner and select the album containing
the photo or video you want to move.
b. Use the stylus to drag the photo or video you want to its new position.
Continued
Tip
Move photos within
albums to easily put the
slide show of your child’s
birthday party in the
sequence you want.
LifeDrive from palmOne 208
CHAPTER 9 Viewing Your Photos and Videos
3Move a photo or video between
albums:
a. Select the pick list in the upper-
right corner and select the
album containing the photo or
video you want to move.
b. Open the menus.
c. Select Edit Details from the
Media menu, and then select the
photo or video you want to
move.
d. Select the Album pick list, and
then select the new album for
the photo.
e. Select Done.
Done
Tip
You can also move a
photo or video by adding
it to a different album.
The item is removed from
the original album. Select to
move photo
or video
LifeDrive from palmOne 209
CHAPTER 9 Viewing Your Photos and Videos
Sorting photos and videos
0
1Press the Media button.
2Sort photos and videos:
a. Select the pick list in the upper-
right corner and select the
album containing the photos
and/or videos you want to sort.
b. Open the menus.
c. Select Album, and then select
one of the following:
Sort by Date Lists photos and videos from the earliest to the most recent date.
Select Sort by Date again to list items from the most recent to the earliest date.
Sort by Name Lists photos and videos by name in ascending (A–Z) order.
Select Sort by Name again to list items by name in descending (Z–A) order.
Sort by Size Lists photos and videos from smallest to largest file size. Select
Sort by Size again to list items from largest to smallest file size.
Sort manually Lets you tap a photo or video and drag the stylus to where you
want the item to appear. A dotted black line indicates the position of the item.
Done
Before You Begin
[!]
You must be in an album
to sort manually. You
cannot sort when All
Albums is selected from
the pick list.
LifeDrive from palmOne 210
CHAPTER 9 Viewing Your Photos and Videos
Personalizing a photo
To add a personal touch to a photo, use the drawing tool or add a voice clip.
Drawing on a photo
1Press the Media button.
2Draw on a photo:
a. In the Thumbnail or List View,
select the photo you want.
b. Open the menus.
c. Select Draw on Picture from the
Media menu.
d. Draw on the photo using the
following tools:
Drawing tool Draw anywhere on the photo using the stylus.
Text tool Enter text in the field. Tap anywhere on the screen to open a text field
in a new location.
Color button Select a drawing color.
e. Select Done.
Continued
Did You Know?
Create multicolored art:
Select a color and draw
on a photo, and then
select a different color
and draw some more.
Each drawing keeps its
original color.
Tip
Select the drawing tool
button to change line size.
Select the text tool button
to change font size.
Tip
Use the eraser selection
on the drawing tool to
erase drawings only;
select Undo to delete text.
You can use Undo only
once to delete text for a
given photo. If you need
to delete text after using
Undo, select Done and do
not save the photo, and
then open the photo and
try again.
Text tool
Color button
Drawing tool
LifeDrive from palmOne 211
CHAPTER 9 Viewing Your Photos and Videos
3Select one of the following to save
or reject changes:
Replace Original Saves the photo
with the drawing in place of the
original photo with no drawing; the
original photo is lost.
Save as New Picture Saves both
the photo with the drawing and the
original photo with no drawing. You can enter a name for the new photo.
You can also select the pick list to save the updated photo to a different
album.
Don’t Save Changes Saves only the original photo with no drawing.
Cancel Returns to the Draw on Photo screen.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 212
CHAPTER 9 Viewing Your Photos and Videos
Adding audio to a photo
1Press the Media button.
2Access the photo controls:
a. In the Thumbnail or List View, select the photo you want.
b. Press Down to access the photo controls.
3Add sound to a photo:
a. Select the Audio button.
b. Select the Record button to
begin recording.
c. Select the Stop Recording
button to stop and close the
Record dialog box.
d. Select Done.
Continued
Did You Know?
When viewing a photo
that has audio, you can
tap the microphone
Record button
LifeDrive from palmOne 213
CHAPTER 9 Viewing Your Photos and Videos
4Listen to the sound clip:
• When the photo controls are
available, select the Audio
button and select the Play
button to listen to the audio
clip.
• When the photo controls are
not available, tap the Play icon
located in the photo.
5Select Done.
Done
Play button
Play icon
LifeDrive from palmOne 214
CHAPTER 9 Viewing Your Photos and Videos
Copying a photo or video
You can copy photos and videos from your device to an expansion card, and vice versa.
0
1Press the Media button.
2Select a photo or video to copy:
a. Select Device or Expansion Card .
b. Select the Location pick list in the upper-right corner and select the location
of the photos or videos you want to copy.
c. Select the photo or video.
3Copy the photo:
a. Open the menus.
b. Select Copy to Card (for photos or videos on your device) or Copy to Device
(for photos or videos on an expansion card) from the Media menu.
Done
Tip
Copy an entire album by
opening the Album
menu, selecting Album,
and then selecting Copy
Album to Card or Copy
Album to Device. Select
the album you want, and
then select Done when
copying is complete.
LifeDrive from palmOne 213
CHAPTER 9 Viewing Your Photos and Videos
4Listen to the sound clip:
• When the photo controls are
available, select the Audio
button and select the Play
button to listen to the audio
clip.
• When the photo controls are
not available, tap the Play icon
located in the photo.
5Select Done.
Done
Play button
Play icon
LifeDrive from palmOne 216
CHAPTER 9 Viewing Your Photos and Videos
Sharing photos and videos
You can easily share photos and videos with family and friends. Use your device’s built-in Wi-Fi
and Bluetooth® wireless technology to wirelessly send photos and videos to other Wi-Fi and
Bluetooth devices within range.
You can also share photos and videos using any of the following methods:
•Attach a photo or video to an email message.
•Beam a photo or video to other Palm Powered™ devices.
• Copy a photo or video from your device to your desktop computer, or from computer to device,
by using LifeDrive Manager (Windows). You can also copy a photo or video from your Mac to
your device using the Send to Handheld droplet.
Sending a large number of photos or videos using Bluetooth technology or beaming
can take a long time.
Tip
You can also beam or
send an entire album by
opening the Album menu
and selecting Beam
Album or Send Album.
NOTE
LifeDrive from palmOne 217
CHAPTER 9 Viewing Your Photos and Videos
Related topics
Click a link below to learn about these related topics:
Camera
Companion
• Copying photos and videos from your camera card
• Viewing photos and videos on your camera card
• Deleting all photos and videos on your camera card
Sharing Sending information using wireless technology on your device
VersaMail Sending photos and videos as attachments to email messages
Tips & Tricks
Make your device uniquely
yours. For great tips,
software, accessories, and
more, visit
www.palmOne.com/
mylifedrive.
Support
If you’re having problems
with Media or with anything
else on your device, go to
www.palmOne.com/
support.
LifeDrive from palmOne 218
CHAPTER 10
Managing Your Camera Card Media
Maybe you have just filled your digital
camera card and you want to keep
taking pictures. Do you want to review
your pictures on a larger screen? You
can do this and more with palmOne™
Camera Companion. You can quickly
transfer your digital camera card
contents to your device or computer so
that you can keep taking pictures. You
can also easily organize your photos
and videos with palmOne™Media. Benefits
• Transfer your camera card contents
to your device
• Store multiple videos and hundreds
of photos
• View camera card contents
I
n t
hi
s c
h
apter
Copying photos and videos
from your camera card
Viewing photos or videos
Related topics
LifeDrive from palmOne 219
CHAPTER 10 Managing Your Camera Card Media
Copying photos and videos from your camera card
To extend your battery life, connect your device to a power source when copying
media from your camera card.
You can copy your photos and videos to your computer or your device. When you use Copy to
Device, the program checks for files with the same file name and content. If found, those files are
not copied. Also, files with the same file name but different contents are automatically renamed
before copying onto the device.
Albums are subfolders located only in the Photos & Videos special folder on the hard drive and in
the DCIM special folder on an expansion card. Only first level subfolders in these special folders
are recognized as albums.
When you copy your media from your camera card using Camera Companion, the media is copied
to the DCIM folder on the hard drive. Since this is not a special folder, no albums can be created in
the folder. To access the media, you need to browse to the subfolders where the pictures are
located. If you want to add media from the DCIM folder to an album, you must use Files to copy
the media to a subfolder in the Photos & Videos special folder.
0.
1Insert your digital camera card into your device.
2Open Camera Companion:
• If auto-detect is enabled, the application automatically opens.
• If auto-detect is disabled, go to Favorites and select Camera
Companion .
Continued
IMPORTANT
[!]
Did You Know?
You can disable the
camera card auto-detect
feature by opening the
menu and selecting
Disable auto-detect under
the Options menu.
Did You Know?
(Windows only) When
copying files to your
computer using Drive
Mode, you can click the
Windows dialog box
selection Copy picture to
a folder on my computer
using Microsoft Scanner
and Camera Wizard to
automatically copy files
LifeDrive from palmOne 220
CHAPTER 10 Managing Your Camera Card Media
3Select the copy location:
Copy to Device Copies the
photos and videos from the
DCIM (Digital Camera Image)
folder on your camera card to the
DCIM folder on your hard drive.
Copy to Computer Opens Drive
Mode on your device and allows
you to copy files to your
computer. Your device must be
connected to your computer.
4[ & ] OPTIONAL If you selected
Copy to Device, you can select
the following:
Delete Media on Card Deletes
the contents of your camera card
so that your card is immediately
available for more photos or
videos.
View Copied Media View the
photos and videos that you
copied to your device.
5Remove your camera card.
Done
Tip
Always format your
camera cards on your
camera. Your device can
read SD and MMC cards
formatted by your
camera. However, your
camera may be unable to
read cards formatted by
your device.
LifeDrive from palmOne 221
CHAPTER 10 Managing Your Camera Card Media
Viewing photos or videos
Use your device’s large display as a picture viewer. You can view the contents of your camera
memory card without transferring the photos or videos to your device.
0
1Insert your digital camera card into your device.
2Open Camera Companion:
• If auto-detect is enabled, the application automatically opens.
• If auto-detect is disabled, go to Favorites and select Camera
Companion .
3Select View Photos and Video.
Continued
Tip
Use your camera’s editing
software to edit or
enhance your photos or
videos and copy them to
your device for viewing.
Did You Know?
Some cameras use a
video format that cannot
be viewed on your
device. You can store the
video file on your device
until you able to transfer
the file to your desktop
computer where you can
view the video.
LifeDrive from palmOne 222
CHAPTER 10 Managing Your Camera Card Media
4View your media:
a. Select the folder where the photos and videos are located.
b. View the photos and videos.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 223
CHAPTER 10 Managing Your Camera Card Media
Related topics
Click a link below to learn about these related topics:
Media • Viewing photos and videos as thumbnails, lists, albums, and slide shows
• Copying photos and videos to other applications or expansion cards
• Deleting photos and videos
Sharing Sending information using wireless technology on your device
VersaMail Sending photos and videos as attachments to email messages
Tips & Tricks
Make your device uniquely
yours. For great tips,
software, accessories, and
more, visit
www.palmOne.com/
mylifedrive.
Support
If you’re having problems
with Media or with anything
else on your device, go to
www.palmOne.com/
support.
LifeDrive from palmOne 224
CHAPTER 11
Listening to Music
Are you tired of listening to small talk
during that long commute on the bus
or train? Do you need something
smaller than a CD player when you’re
out for a walk or at the gym? There is
no need to buy an expensive MP3
player. Your device can carry
thousands of songs, and Pocket
TunesTM lets you play the music on
your device. Simply transfer songs
onto your device or an expansion card
and then listen through the built-in
speaker or stereo headphones (sold
separately).
Benefits
• Carry and listen to thousands of
songs in the popular MP3 format
• No separate MP3, CD, or mini-disc
player required
• Be your own DJ
I
n t
hi
s c
h
apter
Transferring MP3 files to your
device using Rhapsody
Transferring music from a CD
to your device using
Rhapsody
Playing music on your device
Managing playlists
Customizing your player
Working with Rhapsody on
your computer
Related topics
CHAPTER 11 Listening to Music
LifeDrive from palmOne 225
Setting up Rhapsody for MP3
Rhapsody settings must be changed to support MP3 to be compatible with Pocket Tunes.
WINDOWS ONLY
0
1Prepare your computer and your device:
a. Connect your device and your computer to the USB sync cable.
b. Go to Favorites and select Music .
2Set Rhapsody format setting on
your computer:
a. Open the Rhapsody
application on your computer.
b. Click Tools, and then click
Preferences.
c. Click CD Importing & Playing.
d. Click the Format (codec) pick
list, and then select MP3.
e. Click OK.
You now have set up Rhapsody to import and play MP3 files.
Before You Begin
[!]
(Windows only) Perform
the following:
• Install Rhapsody
desktop application on
your computer. Insert the
software installation CD
and follow the onscreen
instructions for installing
extra software. You must
install this software, even
if you already have a
version of Rhapsody
installed on your
computer. The version on
the CD contains all of the
components needed to
transfer music files to
your device.
• After you install the
software, you must
synchronize your device
with your computer in
order for Rhapsody to
recognize your device.
Select mp3
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 226
CHAPTER 11 Listening to Music
Transferring MP3 files to your device using Rhapsody
The Pocket Tunes software that comes with your device is compatible with the popular MP3 audio
file format. If your MP3 files are already on your computer’s hard drive, you need to transfer them
to your device’s hard drive to listen to them on your device.
WINDOWS ONLY
0
1Prepare your computer and your device:
a. Connect your device and your computer to the USB sync cable.
b. Go to Favorites and select Music .
Continued
Before You Begin
[!]
(Windows only) You must
set up Rhapsody to
support MP3 files.
Tip
You can also transfer MP3
files to the Audio folder
on your device using File
Transfer (Windows) or
Drive Mode (Mac and
Windows) on your
computer.
Tip
The Star quick button
opens the Pocket Tunes
music application by
default, but you can
customize it to open any
application you choose.
CHAPTER 11 Listening to Music
LifeDrive from palmOne 227
2Prepare Rhapsody on your computer:
a. Open the Rhapsody application.
b. Click the Transfer tab in the Mixer window.
c. Click the Device Preferences button and select your device from the pick
list.
d. Click the location, such as My Library, where the songs are stored on your
computer.
Continued
Device
Preference
button
Select your
device
Select song
location
LifeDrive from palmOne 228
CHAPTER 11 Listening to Music
3Transfer the files to your
device:
a. Drag the song files you
want from the song location
window into the Transfer
window.
b. Click Transfer. The files are
transferred to the Music
folder on your device’s
internal drive.
Do not press
the sync button on your cable.
Rhapsody is transferring the
files, so there’s no need to do
anything.
Done
IMPORTANT
[!]
LifeDrive from palmOne 229
CHAPTER 11 Listening to Music
MAC ONLY
0
1Prepare your computer and your device:
a. Go to Applications and select Drive Mode .
b. Connect your device and your computer to the USB sync cable.
2Open Finder, and then drag the music files you want onto the Music folder
under the device icon, which appears as an external drive on your desktop.
When you have finished transferring music files, be sure to
properly disconnect from Drive Mode.
Done
Tip
You can also use a card
reader accessory (sold
separately) to transfer
MP3 files from your
computer to your
expansion card.
Tip
You can also transfer MP3
files on a Mac computer by
dragging the music file to
the Send To Handheld
droplet. Select the
destination for the file, and
then
synchronize
to
transfer it.
IMPORTANT
[!]
LifeDrive from palmOne 230
CHAPTER 11 Listening to Music
Transferring music from a CD to your device using
Rhapsody
If your songs are on a CD and you want to listen to them on your device, use the Rhapsody
desktop application on your computer to convert and transfer the files.
Mac users can use iTunes, included with OS X, to transfer music from a CD to their
device. Music files should be imported in MP3 format.
WINDOWS ONLY
0
1Access the music CD from Rhapsody on your computer:
a. Open the Rhapsody application.
b. Insert the CD into your computer’s CD drive.
Continued
NOTE
Before You Begin
[!]
(Windows only) You must
set up Rhapsody to
support MP3 files.
CHAPTER 11 Listening to Music
LifeDrive from palmOne 231
2Transfer the songs you want to add to your library:
a. Select the titles you want to transfer from the CD.
b. Click Save Tracks.
3Transfer the MP3 files to your device.
Done
Did You Know?
An interactive tutorial on
the LifeDrive™ software
installation CD guides
you through adding
music. Insert the CD and
go to the My Music
section of the tutorial and
select Add music from a
CD.
Did You Know?
For tips on using Real
Rhapsody on your
computer, go to the Help
menu in Real Rhapsody™
or visit www.real.com.
Import
CD
Select
titles
LifeDrive from palmOne 232
CHAPTER 11 Listening to Music
Playing music on your device
0
1Go to Favorites and select Music .
2Select a song to play:
• To play the current song, tap the Play button.
• To play a different song, tap the Choose Song button and select a song from
the list.
3When you’ve finished listening, tap the Stop button.
Done
Tip
For tips on using Pocket
Tunes, open the Options
menu and select Help.
Did You Know?
Pocket Tunes continues
playing the songs in your
list until it reaches the end
of your list or until you
tap the Stop button, even
if your device screen is
off.
Tip
You can upgrade Pocket
Tunes to a version that
supports additional
music file formats, such
as WMA, supports
streaming MP3,
subscription music, and
includes additional
features such as graphic
equalizers and
bookmarks. For more
information, visit
www.pocket-tunes.com/
palmone.
Progress indicator
Play/Pause
Previous song
Next song
Volume
Choose song
Shuffle playlist
LifeDrive from palmOne 233
CHAPTER 11 Listening to Music
Managing playlists
You can create dozens of playlists with your favorite songs.
Creating a playlist
0
1Go to Favorites and select Music
2Open the Edit Playlist screen:
a. Open the menus.
b. Select Actions menu, and
then select Manage Playlists.
c. Select New.
Continued
LifeDrive from palmOne 234
CHAPTER 11 Listening to Music
3Create a playlist:
a. Enter a name for the playlist.
b. Select Add Song.
c. Select the songs you want to
include on the playlist.
d. Select OK.
4Put the songs in the order you want to hear them:
a. Select a song you want to move.
b. Select Up or Down to move the song up or down one slot.
c. Repeat this process until the songs are in the right order.
d. Select Save List.
Done
Did You Know?
The Add Songs to Playlist
screen displays all songs
on your device’s internal
drive and on your
expansion card.
Tip
To add all the songs in an
album to your playlist,
select Add Song, select
an album, and then select
Select All.
LifeDrive from palmOne 235
CHAPTER 11 Listening to Music
Playing songs from a playlist
0
1Go to Favorites and select Music
2Select a song from a playlist:
a. Select Choose Songs button.
b. Select the Files icon.
c. Select Playlists.
d. Select the playlist you want to
play.
e. Select All.
Your device plays the songs in the playlist beginning with the song
you selected. After it plays the last song in the list, it stops.
Tip
To quickly select all the
songs in the list, select
Select All. To quickly
deselect all the songs,
select Select None.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 236
CHAPTER 11 Listening to Music
Editing a playlist
0
1Go to Favorites and select Music
2Open the playlist you want to edit:
a. Open the menus.
b. Select Actions, and then select Manage Playlists.
c. Highlight a playlist.
d. Select Edit.
Continued
LifeDrive from palmOne 237
CHAPTER 11 Listening to Music
3Select Edit and do any of the
following:
Remove Select a song and
select Remove to delete the song
from the playlist.
Add Song Tap Add, check a
song’s box, and then tap Done.
Up or Down Select a song and
select Up or Down to move the
song up or down one slot.
4Select Save List.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 238
CHAPTER 11 Listening to Music
Deleting a playlist
0
1Go to Favorites and select Music
2Open the playlist you want to delete:
a. Open the menus.
b. Select Actions, and then select Manage Playlists.
c. Select Edit.
3Delete the list:
a. Select Delete List.
b. Select Yes in the confirmation
dialog box.
c. Select Done.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 239
CHAPTER 11 Listening to Music
Customizing your player
You can customize your MP3 player by setting preferences.
Tu rn i n g o f f t h e s c r e e n
Turning off the screen while playing music saves battery power.
0
1Go to Favorites and select Music
2Open the menus.
3Select General Preferences and set screen preferences:
Turn off screen while playing after
x seconds When you are playing
music and not using any of the other
device applications, you can set the
time period after which the screen
turns off.
unless the Palm is in its cradle The
screen will always remain on when the
device power cable is plugged in.
Power button turns off screen Pushing the power button turns off the screen
but the music keeps playing.
4Select OK.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 240
CHAPTER 11 Listening to Music
Setting background preferences
0
1Go to Favorites and select Music
2Open the menus.
3Select Background Prefs and set screen preferences:
Enable background play When you are playing music, you can continue using
any of the other device applications. This feature is not available when viewing
a slideshow in the Media application.
Bring up console with pen swipe A pen swipe between the selected icons in
the input area brings up the pTunes console.
4Select OK.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 241
CHAPTER 11 Listening to Music
Flashing the LED when the pTunes console is turned off
When you are playing music while the pTunes console is turned off, you can set the LED to flash to
remind you that pTunes is still on and is playing music. This can be a helpful reminder to extend
the devices’s battery life when you are not listening to music.
0
1Go to Favorites and select Music
2Open the menus.
3Set the preference:
a. Advanced Prefs
b. Check the Flash LED while
screen is off box.
4Select OK.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 242
CHAPTER 11 Listening to Music
Working with Rhapsody on your computer
WINDOWS ONLY
Use Rhapsody on your computer to play and manage your songs. Learn how to use Rhaspody on
your computer by using the online Help in Rhapsody. The online Help includes info about the
following topics:
• Learning about the parts of the Rhapsody window
• Finding media
• Playing media
• Saving and burning media
• Rhapsody premium services
•Preferences
• Troubleshooting
LifeDrive from palmOne 243
CHAPTER 11 Listening to Music
Related topics
Click the link below to learn about these related topics:
Expansion
Cards
• Inserting and removing expansion cards
• Naming expansion cards
• Viewing the contents of a card
Managing
Info
• Installing the Rhapsody software and plug-in on your device and computer
• Using palmOne™ Quick Install and the Send To Handheld droplet
Common
Questions
Answers to frequently asked questions about Rhapsody
Tips & Tricks
Make your device uniquely
yours. For great tips,
software, accessories, and
more, visit
www.palmOne.com/
mylifedrive.
Tip
Support
If you’re having problems
with Pocket Tunes, go to
www.pocket-tunes.com.
LifeDrive from palmOne 244
CHAPTER 12
Managing Your Tasks
Some of the most successful people in
the world are also the busiest. When
asked how they manage to do it all,
busy people usually say, “I make lists.”
The Tasks application on your device is
the perfect place to make a list of the
things you need to do.
Benefits of Tasks
• Set priorities
• Track deadlines
• Stay focused
I
n t
hi
s c
h
apter
Creating a task
Organizing your tasks
Marking a task as complete
Deleting tasks
Customizing your Tasks list
Working with Tasks on your
computer
Related topics
LifeDrive from palmOne 245
CHAPTER 12 Managing Your Tasks
Creating a task
0
1Tap the Tasks icon in the input area.
2Create a task:
a. Select New.
b. Enter a description of the task.
3[ & ] OPTIONAL Assign a priority and due date:
a. Tap the priority number and select a number (1 is the most important).
b. Tap the due date and select a date from the list, or select Choose Date to
select a date from the calendar.
That’s it. Your device automatically saves the task. Make sure you
have a current backup. Synchronize often.
Tip
If no task is currently
selected, you can create a
new task by writing
Graffiti® 2 characters in
the input area.
Tip
Add a note to a task.
Select the Note button,
enter the note text, and
then select Done.
Did You Know?
You can organize your
tasks by filing them into
categories. You can also
mark tasks as private to
hide them from prying
eyes.
New task
Priority number
Due date
Long description
Note button
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 246
CHAPTER 12 Managing Your Tasks
Setting an alarm
0
1Tap the Tasks icon in the input area.
2Open the Set Alarm dialog box:
a. Select the task you want to assign an alarm to.
b. Select Details.
c. Select the Alarm box.
Continued
Before You Begin
[!]
Create a task and assign it
a due date. A task must
have a due date before
you can set an alarm.
Tip
You can customize the
alarm sound for your
tasks in the Tasks
Preferences dialog box.
Did You Know?
When you set an alarm, a
little alarm clock appears
to the right of the task
description.
LifeDrive from palmOne 247
CHAPTER 12 Managing Your Tasks
Scheduling a repeating task—standard interval
Repeating tasks are a great way to add tasks that happen over and over again, like taking out the
trash every Thursday night or making monthly mortgage or rent payments.
0
3Set the alarm:
a. Check the Alarm box.
b. Enter how many days before the due date you want the alarm to sound.
c. Select the time columns to set the time the alarm sounds.
d. Select OK, and then select OK again.
Done
1Tap the Tasks icon in the input area.
2Enter the task you want to repeat, and assign it a due date.
Continued
Tip
To select intervals such as
the 2nd Tuesday of every
month or the 3rd
Thursday in November of
every year, see
Scheduling a repeating
task—unusual interval.
LifeDrive from palmOne 248
CHAPTER 12 Managing Your Tasks
3Set the repeat interval:
a. Select the task description, and
then select Details.
b. Select the Repeat pick list and
select how often the task
repeats: Daily until, Every week,
Every other week, Every month,
or Every year.
If you select Daily, a dialog box appears for you to select the end
date.
c. Select OK.
Done
NOTE
LifeDrive from palmOne 249
CHAPTER 12 Managing Your Tasks
Scheduling a repeating task—unusual interval
For tasks that don’t fit neatly into the preset repeat intervals, you can set up your own repeat
intervals. For example, enter tasks for paying a quarterly insurance bill or a credit card bill that is
due every 28 days, or changing your smoke detector battery every six months.
0
1Tap the Tasks icon in the input area.
2Enter the task you want to repeat, and assign it a due date.
3Open the Change Repeat dialog box:
a. Select Details.
b. Select the Repeat pick list and select Other.
Continued
LifeDrive from palmOne 250
CHAPTER 12 Managing Your Tasks
4Set the repeat interval:
a. Select Day, Week, Month, or Year as the repeat unit.
b. Select Fixed Schedule to base the due date on the due date of the current
task, or select After Completed to base the due date on the date you
complete this task. With this option if you complete this task early or late, the
due date for the next task adjusts accordingly.
c. Select the Every line and enter the frequency at which the task repeats.
d. Select the End on pick list and select an end date, if needed.
e. If you selected Fixed Schedule in step b and Week in step a, select the day of
the week the task repeats. If you selected Fixed Schedule in step b and
Month in step a, select Day to select the week within the month, such as the
4th Thursday, or select Date to select the same date within the month, such
as the 15th.
f. Select OK.
Done
Tip
To schedule an annual
task, such as decorating
for a holiday on the first
Sunday of a particular
month, select Month as
the repeat unit, enter 12
on the Every line, and
then select Day as the
Repeat By setting.
LifeDrive from palmOne 251
CHAPTER 12 Managing Your Tasks
Organizing your tasks
Sometimes you want to look at all the things you need to do, while at other times you want to see
only certain types of tasks.
0
1Tap the Tasks icon in the input area.
2In the Tasks list, select one of these options:
All Displays all your tasks.
Date Displays tasks that are due in a specific time frame. Select the pick list in
the upper-right corner of the screen to select Due Today, Last 7 Days, Next 7
Days, or Past Due.
Category Displays tasks that are assigned to the selected category. Select the
pick list in the upper-right corner to select a different category.
Done
Did You Know?
Overdue tasks have an
exclamation point (!) next
to the due date.
Tip
Your Tasks Preferences
settings control which
tasks appear in the Tasks
list, such as completed or
due tasks. To change
these settings, open the
Options menu and select
Preferences.
Tip
Create a new category for
tasks by selecting Edit
Categories in the
Category pick list.
LifeDrive from palmOne 252
CHAPTER 12 Managing Your Tasks
Marking a task as complete
You can check off a task to indicate that you’ve completed it.
0
Palm®Desktop software and Microsoft Outlook handle completed repeating tasks
differently. Palm Desktop software checks off all overdue instances of the task, and Microsoft
Outlook checks off only the oldest instance of the task.
1Tap the Tasks icon in the input area.
2Check the box on the left side of
the task.
Done
Tip
You can set Tasks
Preferences to record the
date that you finish your
tasks, and you can show
or hide finished tasks. To
change these settings,
open the Options menu
and select Preferences.
NOTE
LifeDrive from palmOne 253
CHAPTER 12 Managing Your Tasks
Deleting tasks
If a task is canceled, you can delete it from your Tasks list. When you delete a repeating task, you
delete all instances of the task. You can also delete all your completed tasks.
Deleting a specific task
0
1Tap the Tasks icon in the input area.
2Select the task you want to delete.
3Open the Delete Task dialog box:
a. Open the menus.
b. Select Delete Task on the
Record menu.
4[ & ] OPTIONAL Check the box to save an archive copy of the task on your
computer.
5Select OK.
Done
Tip
You can also delete a
specific task by selecting
the task, selecting Details,
and then selecting Delete.
Tip
If you save an archive
copy of your deleted
tasks, you can refer to
them later by importing
them.
LifeDrive from palmOne 254
CHAPTER 12 Managing Your Tasks
Deleting all your completed tasks
0
1Tap the Tasks icon in the input area.
2Open the Purge dialog box:
a. Open the menus.
b. Select Purge on the Record
menu.
3[ & ] OPTIONAL Check the box to save an archive copy of your completed
tasks on your computer.
4Select OK.
Done
Tip
Many people find it useful
to refer to old tasks for tax
purposes. If you save an
archive copy of your
deleted tasks, you can
refer to them later by
importing them.
LifeDrive from palmOne 255
CHAPTER 12 Managing Your Tasks
Customizing your Tasks list
Control which tasks show up in the Tasks list and how they are sorted. These settings also affect
tasks in Calendar’s Agenda View. You can also choose the alarm sound for your tasks.
0
1Tap the Tasks icon in the input area.
2Open the Preferences dialog box:
a. Open the menus.
b. Select Options, and then
select Preferences.
Continued
Did You Know?
Calendar’s Agenda View
also displays your tasks.
LifeDrive from palmOne 256
CHAPTER 12 Managing Your Tasks
3Change any of the following settings, and then select OK:
Sort by Select the order in which the tasks appear in the Tasks list.
Show Completed Tasks Display your finished tasks in the Tasks list. If you turn
off this setting, your finished tasks disappear from the list when you check them
off, but they stay in your device’s memory until you purge them.
Record Completion Date Replace the due date you assign to a task with the
date you really complete and check off the task. If you don’t assign a due date to
a task, the completion date still records when you complete the task.
Show Due Dates Display each task’s due date in the list (if you assigned one),
and display an exclamation point next to each task that is overdue.
Show Priorities Show the priority setting for each task in the list.
Show Categories Show the category for each task in the list.
Alarm Sound Select a sound for the alarms you assign to your tasks.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 257
CHAPTER 12 Managing Your Tasks
Working with Tasks on your computer
Use Tasks on your computer to view and manage your tasks. Check out the online Help in
Palm Desktop software to learn how to use Tasks on your computer. The online Help includes info
about the following topics:
• Learning about the parts of the Tasks window
• Entering, editing, and deleting tasks
• Creating repeating tasks
• Marking tasks as private
• Showing, masking, and hiding private tasks
• Assigning tasks to categories
• Printing your task list
• Selecting how to view tasks
• Sorting tasks by due date, priority level, or categories
WINDOWS ONLY
To open Tasks on your computer, double-click the Palm Desktop icon on the Windows desktop,
and then click Tasks on the launch bar.
MAC ONLY
To open Tasks on your computer, double-click the Palm Desktop icon in the Palm folder, and then
click To Dos.
Tip
(Windows) If you chose to
synchronize with
Microsoft Outlook, check
out the online Help in
Outlook to learn how to
use Tasks on your
computer.
LifeDrive from palmOne 258
CHAPTER 12 Managing Your Tasks
Related topics
Click a link below to learn about these related topics:
VersaMail Sending tasks as attachments to email messages
Sharing • Beaming tasks to other Palm Powered™ devices
• Sending tasks to other Bluetooth® devices by using Bluetooth wireless
technology on your device
• Synchronizing with Palm Desktop software and Outlook
Privacy Keeping task private by turning on security options
Categories Organizing tasks by type
Common
Questions
Answers to frequently asked questions about Tasks
Tips & Tricks
Make your device uniquely
yours. For great tips,
software, accessories, and
more, visit
www.palmOne.com/
mylifedrive.
Support
If you’re having problems
with Tasks or with anything
else on your device, go to
www.palmOne.com/
support.
LifeDrive from palmOne 259
CHAPTER 13
Writing Memos
Your device contains applications for
storing the most common types of
information: contact names and
numbers, appointments, and so on.
Memos is the tool to use for capturing
information that is meaningful to you
but does not fall into one of these
categories. From meeting notes to
recipes and favorite quotations,
Memos provides a quick and easy way
to enter, store, and share your
important information. Benefits of Memos
• Store essential but hard-to-remember
information
• Send memos to colleagues wirelessly
• Synchronize your information to back
it up on your computer
I
n t
hi
s c
h
apter
Creating a memo
Viewing and editing a memo
Moving memos in your
memos list
Deleting a memo
Working with Memos on
your computer
Related topics
LifeDrive from palmOne 260
CHAPTER 13 Writing Memos
Creating a memo
0
1Tap the Memos icon in the input area.
2Create a memo:
a. Select New.
b. Enter your memo. Tap Enter on the onscreen keyboard or draw the
Graffiti® 2 writing Return stroke to move to a new line in the memo.
c. Select Done.
That's it. Your device automatically saves the memo. Make sure
you have a current backup. Synchronize often.
Tip
In the Memos list, you
can also just start writing
to create a new memo.
The first letter is
automatically capitalized.
Tip
Use Phone Lookup to
quickly add a name and
phone number to a
memo.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 261
CHAPTER 13 Writing Memos
Viewing and editing a memo
0
1Tap the Memos icon in the input area.
2View or edit the memo:
a. In the Memos list, select the memo you want.
b. Read or edit the memo, and then select Done.
Done
Tip
The Memos list shows
the first line of each
memo, so make sure that
first line is something you
will recognize.
Did You Know?
You can connect your
device to a portable
keyboard and type your
memos on the go without
carrying around a heavy
laptop. You can purchase
a variety of portable
keyboards. Visit
www.palmOne.com/
mylifedrive and click the
Accessories link.
Tip
You can change the size
of the text in Memos to
enhance readability.
LifeDrive from palmOne 262
CHAPTER 13 Writing Memos
Moving memos in your memos list
You can move memos up or down in your memos list. For example, you might want to keep all
memos on a certain topic grouped together.
0
1Tap the Memos icon in the input area.
2Move a memo:
a. Locate the memo you want.
b. Move the memo up or down by dragging the stylus across the screen.
A black dotted line appears to represent the memo you are moving.
c. When the line is in the location you want for your memo, lift the stylus.
Done
Did You Know?
If you use Palm®Desktop
software for
synchronizing, you can
send a memo to your
computer by
synchronizing, and then
open the memo on your
computer in an
application such as
Microsoft Word for
further editing,
formatting, and so on.
Right-click the memo on
your computer, click Send
To, and then select the
application to which you
want to send the memo.
LifeDrive from palmOne 263
CHAPTER 13 Writing Memos
Deleting a memo
0
1Tap the Memos icon in the input area.
2Open the Delete Memo dialog
box:
a. Locate the memo you want.
b. Open the menus.
c. Select Delete Memo on the
Record menu.
3[ & ] OPTIONAL Check the box to save an archive copy of the memo on your
computer.
4Select OK.
Done
Tip
Need to retrieve that
holiday recipe you
stored? If you save an
archive copy of your
deleted memos, you can
refer to them later by
importing them.
LifeDrive from palmOne 264
CHAPTER 13 Writing Memos
Working with Memos on your computer
Use Memos on your computer to view and manage the memos you create on your device. Check
out the online Help in Palm®Desktop software to learn how to use Memos on your computer. The
online Help includes info about the following topics:
• Viewing, copying, and deleting memos
• Editing memo details
• Marking memos as private
• Showing, masking, and hiding private memos
• Printing memos
• Changing between the list and single memo views
• Adding a date and time stamp to a memo
• Organizing memos into categories
• Sorting memos
•Sharing memos
WINDOWS ONLY
To open Memos on your computer, double-click the Palm Desktop icon on the Windows desktop,
and then click Memos on the launch bar.
MAC ONLY
To open Memos on your computer, launch Palm Desktop software from the Palm folder, and then
select Memos.
Tip
(Windows) If you chose to
synchronize with
Microsoft Outlook, check
out the online Help in
Outlook to learn how to
use Notes on your
computer.
Tip
You can copy the text of a
memo and paste it into a
new Word file in
Documents on your
device. Edit the text in
Documents, save it as a
Microsoft Word file, and
then send the file to your
computer by
synchronizing so you can
view and edit it in Word.
LifeDrive from palmOne 265
CHAPTER 13 Writing Memos
Related topics
Click a link below to learn about these related topics:
Moving
Around
• Opening applications
• Using menus
Entering
Information
Adding a phone number or other contact information to a memo using Phone
Lookup
Categories Organizing memos by arranging them into categories and sorting them
Privacy Keeping memos private by turning on security options
Sharing • Beaming memos to other Palm Powered™ devices
• Sending memos to other Bluetooth® devices using the Bluetooth wireless
technology on your device
• Synchronizing with Palm Desktop software and Outlook
VersaMail®Sending memos as attachments to email messages
SMS Sending memos as part of a text message
Common
Questions
Answers to frequently asked questions about Memos
Tips & Tricks
Make your device uniquely
yours. For great tips,
software, accessories, and
more, visit
www.palmOne.com/
mylifedrive.
Support
If you’re having problems
with Memos or with anything
else on your device, go to
www.palmOne.com/
support.
LifeDrive from palmOne 266
CHAPTER 14
Writing Notes in Note Pad
Need to jot down a phone number or a
reminder to yourself? Avoid fumbling
for scraps of paper, and write
important reminders in Note Pad. You
can use Note Pad to do everything you
might do with a piece of paper and a
pencil, such as drawing a quick sketch.
Note Pad gives you a place to draw
freehand and take notes in your
personal handwriting, which is even
faster and more flexible than creating a
memo on your device.
Benefits of Note Pad
• Capture information in the moment
• A picture is worth a thousand words
• See reminders when you set alarms
• Send notes to colleagues wirelessly
I
n t
hi
s c
h
apter
Creating a note
Viewing and editing a note
Deleting a note
Working with Note Pad on
your computer
Related topics
LifeDrive from palmOne 267
CHAPTER 14 Writing Notes in Note Pad
Creating a note
0
1Go to Applications and select Note Pad .
2Create a note:
a. Use the stylus to write your
note directly on the device
screen.
b. Select the time at the top of
the screen and enter a title
using Graffiti® 2 writing or the
onscreen keyboard.
3[ & ] OPTIONAL Assign the note to a category by selecting the Category box
in the upper-right corner, and then selecting a category.
4Select Done.
That’s it. Your device automatically saves the note. Make sure you
have a current backup. Synchronize often.
Before You Begin
[!]
Make sure full-screen
writing is turned off. You
cannot create or edit
notes in Note Pad when
full-screen writing is on.
Tip
Select the pen selector to
change the pen width or
to select the eraser. To
clear the screen
completely, select the
note (anywhere but the
title), open the Edit menu,
and select Clear Note.
Did You Know?
Prevent others from
viewing your notes by
marking them as private.
Pen selector
Scroll bar
Time or title
Eraser
Category box
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 268
CHAPTER 14 Writing Notes in Note Pad
Choosing the pen and paper (background) colors
0
0
1Go to Applications and select Note Pad .
2Open the Select Colors dialog box:
a. Select Done to display the Note Pad list.
b. Open the menus.
c. Select Options, and then select Preferences.
d. Select Color.
3Select the pen and paper colors:
a. Select Pen, and then select the ink color you want to use.
b. Select Paper, and then select the background color you want to use.
c. Select OK, and then select OK again.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 269
CHAPTER 14 Writing Notes in Note Pad
Setting an alarm
To use a note as a reminder, set an alarm for that note.
0
1Go to Applications and select Note Pad .
2Open the note:
a. Select Done to display the Note Pad list.
b. Select the note you want to set an alarm for.
Continued
Tip
Change the alarm sound
by opening the Options
menu, selecting
Preferences, and then
selecting a sound from
the Alarm Sound pick list.
LifeDrive from palmOne 270
CHAPTER 14 Writing Notes in Note Pad
3Set the alarm:
a. Open the menus.
b. Select Options, and then select Alarm.
c. Select the Date box, and then select the year, month, and date you want the
alarm to sound.
d. Select the time you want the alarm to sound.
e. Select OK.
Done
Tip
You can also open the Set
Alarm dialog box by
selecting a note and
tapping the right edge of
the screen next to the
note title.
LifeDrive from palmOne 271
CHAPTER 14 Writing Notes in Note Pad
Viewing and editing a note
0
1Go to Applications and select Note Pad .
2Open the note:
a. Select Done to display the Note Pad list.
b. Select the note you want to view or edit.
3Read or edit the note, and then select Done.
Done
Tip
Sort the Note Pad list
alphabetically, by date, or
manually. Open the
Options menu, select
Preferences, and then
select the Sort by pick list.
If you sort manually, you
can rearrange the list by
dragging notes to
another position in the
list.
LifeDrive from palmOne 272
CHAPTER 14 Writing Notes in Note Pad
Deleting a note
0
1Go to Applications and select Note Pad .
2Open the note:
a. Select Done to display the Note Pad list.
b. Select the note you want to delete.
3Select Delete, and then select OK to confirm deletion.
Done
Tip
You can also delete a note
by opening the Record
menu and selecting
Delete Note.
Tip
Want to get rid of those
deletion confirmation
messages? Open the
Options menu, select
Preferences, and then
uncheck the Confirm note
delete box.
LifeDrive from palmOne 273
CHAPTER 14 Writing Notes in Note Pad
Working with Note Pad on your computer
Use Note Pad on your computer to view and manage the handwritten notes you create on your
device. Check out the online Help in Palm®Desktop software to learn how to use Note Pad on your
computer. The online Help includes info about the following topics:
• Learning about the parts of the Note Pad window
• Viewing, copying, and deleting notes
• Editing note details and titles
• Setting an alarm for a note
• Marking notes as private
• Showing, masking, and hiding private notes
• Printing notes
• Changing between the List and Preview views
• Sorting notes
• Sharing notes
WINDOWS ONLY
To open Note Pad on your computer, double-click the Palm Desktop icon on the Windows desktop,
and then click Note Pad on the launch bar.
MAC ONLY
To open Note Pad on your computer, double-click the Note Pad icon in the Palm folder.
LifeDrive from palmOne 274
CHAPTER 14 Writing Notes in Note Pad
Related topics
Click a link below to learn about these related topics:
Moving
Around
• Opening applications
• Using menus
Sharing • Beaming notes to other Palm Powered™ devices
• Sending notes to other Bluetooth® devices by using Bluetooth wireless
technology on your device
VersaMail® Sending notes as attachments to email messages
Privacy Keeping notes private by turning on security options
Categories Creating categories so you can organize notes
Common
Questions
Answers to frequently asked questions about Note Pad
Tips & Tricks
Make your device uniquely
yours. For great tips,
software, accessories, and
more, visit
www.palmOne.com/
mylifedrive.
Support
If you’re having problems
with Note Pad or with
anything else on your device,
go to www.palmOne.com/
support.
LifeDrive from palmOne 275
CHAPTER 15
Recording Voice Memos
An important idea pops into your head,
and you need to record it before you
forget it. If a brilliant marketing idea
hits when you’re away from your
office, Voice Memo is the tool you
need.
Voice Memo provides a place for you
to record and play back notes, agenda
items, and other important thoughts
directly on your handheld. Record
client meeting notes on the way to the
office, and then send them to your
assistant in an email to transcribe
them. Or use a voice memo with an
alarm as a reminder message for that
errand you promised not to forget.
Benefits of Voice Memo
• Capture thoughts on the fly
• Send recorded memos to colleagues
• Synchronize voice memos to back
them up on your computer
I
n t
hi
s c
h
apter
Creating a voice memo
Listening to a voice memo
Setting an alarm for a voice
memo
Storing voice memos
LifeDrive from palmOne 276
CHAPTER 15 Recording Voice Memos
Creating a voice memo
You can create a quick voice memo using the application button on the side of your device, or you
can use the pause control for a longer memo that you can pause and restart as your ideas flow.
Creating a quick voice memo using the application button
0
1Hold down the Voice Memo application button on the side of your device. A
tone indicates that recording has started.
2Record your voice memo:
a. Face your device and begin speaking. Continue holding the Voice Memo
button while recording.
b. When you have finished recording, release the Voice Memo button. A tone
indicates that recording has stopped and the memo is finished.
Pressing the Voice Memo application button again starts a new
memo.
3Select Done.
Continued
Tip
For best results, hold
your device within about
one foot of your mouth
while recording.
Tip
To pause your recording,
you must keep the Voice
Memo button held down
and then tap Pause. For
longer recordings where
you want to pause
multiple times, use the
onscreen control.
Did You Know?
Voice Memo remembers
the last storage location
and stores all new
memos to that location
unless you change it. Tap
the category pick list in
the upper-right corner
and select a category or a
location.
NOTE
LifeDrive from palmOne 277
CHAPTER 15 Recording Voice Memos
That's it. Your device automatically saves the voice memo to the
storage location set in the category pick list. If you are storing
memos in program memory, make sure you have a current backup
by synchronizing often.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 278
CHAPTER 15 Recording Voice Memos
Creating a longer voice memo using the pause control
Pause and resume recording as many times as you want to make sure you capture all of your
thoughts.
0
1Go to Applications and select Voice Memo .
Alternately, you can press and quickly release the Voice Memo application
button .
2Record your voice memo:
a. Select New.
b. Select Record. A tone
indicates that recording has
started.
c. Face your device and begin
speaking.
Continued
Record Stop
LifeDrive from palmOne 279
CHAPTER 15 Recording Voice Memos
3Pause and restart recording:
a. Select Pause to stop
recording. A tone indicates
that recording has paused.
b. Select Record. A tone
indicates that recording has
restarted.
Pause and restart recording as
many times as you want. You
can use other applications
while the voice memo is
paused.
4Select Stop. A tone sounds to
indicate that recording has
stopped.
Continued
Tip
Once you pause your
recording, you can use
other applications and
come back later to
resume recording. To
resume recording, just
tap the Voice Memo icon
or press and release the
Voice Memo application
button, and then tap
Record.
Tip
You can organize your
voice memos by storing
them into categories,
such as personal or
marketing ideas.
Pause
Recording status
LifeDrive from palmOne 280
CHAPTER 15 Recording Voice Memos
5[ & ] OPTIONAL Tap on the title
line and enter a title for your
memo. You can choose to leave
the time as part of the title or
remove it. You can also select a
category to store your memo. If
you want to listen to your memo,
tap the Play button.
6[ & ] OPTIONAL Select the category pick list in the upper-right corner and
select a category or a location.
7Select Done
Done
Select to select
a category
Select the title line
and enter a name
Play
LifeDrive from palmOne 281
CHAPTER 15 Recording Voice Memos
Listening to a voice memo
0
1Go to Applications and select Voice Memo .
2Select the category pick list in the upper-right corner and select All, or a
category or location where the memo is located.
3In the Voice Memo list, select the voice memo title. The voice memo begins to
play after a few seconds.
Continued
Tip
You can sort the Voice
Memo list by date,
alphabetically, by length
of memo, or manually.
Go to the Preferences
menu and tap the Sort by
pick list to select a sorting
scheme.
Tip
Press Right or Left on the
navigator to listen to the
next or previous voice
memo.
Speaker
icon
Pause
LifeDrive from palmOne 282
CHAPTER 15 Recording Voice Memos
4[ & ] OPTIONAL Set the volume
level:
a. Select the Speaker icon.
b. Press Up or Down on the
5-way to adjust the volume.
c. Select Done.
5Select Done.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 283
CHAPTER 15 Recording Voice Memos
Setting an alarm for a voice memo
0
1Go to Applications and select Voice Memo .
2Select the voice memo to which you want to assign an alarm.
3Open the Alarm dialog box:
a. Open the menus.
b. Select Options, and then select Alarm.
4Set the alarm:
a. Select the Date box and select
the year, month, and date you
want the alarm to sound.
b. Select the Time box and
select the hour and minute
you want the alarm to sound.
Continued
Tip
You can use a concerto or
a bird chirp or to a
number of other sounds
for your alarm. Open the
menus, select Options,
and then select
Preferences. Tap the
Alarm pick list to select a
sound.
Did You Know?
You cannot set an alarm if
the memo is stored on an
expansion card or the
internal drive.
LifeDrive from palmOne 284
CHAPTER 15 Recording Voice Memos
5[ & ] OPTIONAL Check the Auto-play box to automatically play the voice
memo when the alarm goes off.
6Select OK.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 285
CHAPTER 15 Recording Voice Memos
Storing voice memos
By default, voice memos are stored in program memory. When you store memos in categories
such as Unfiled, Business, or Personal, you are storing the memos in program memory. This
means that you can view and listen to memos only in the Voice Memo application and you can
synchronize the memos. You can also mark memos as private and set alarms.
You can change your voice memo storage location to the internal drive or an expansion card.
When you store voice memos on the internal drive or an expansion card, they do not appear in the
Voice Memo portion of Palm®Desktop software after a HotSync® operation and are not backed up.
Also, you cannot mark voice memos as private or attach alarms.
You can still beam memos and send memos from any storage location.
Voice Memo remembers the last storage location and stores all new memos to that location
unless you change it. You can configure your device to always store voice memos on an
expansion card when one is present.
Saving a voice memo to another location
You can change your voice memo storage location to program memory, the internal drive, or an
expansion card. Storing your voice memos on an expansion card allows you to share voice
memos with others.
0
1Go to Applications and select Voice Memo .
2Highlight a voice memo.
Continued
Before You Begin
[!]
If you are storing voice
memos on an expansion
card, you must have an
expansion card inserted
in your device’s
expansion card slot.
LifeDrive from palmOne 286
CHAPTER 15 Recording Voice Memos
3Select the category pick list in the
upper-right corner and select a
category or location:
• To store memos in your
program memory, select a
category or Unfiled.
• To store memos on your hard
drive, select LifeDrive.
• To store memos on your
expansion card, select the card
name.
4Select Done.
Done
Icon indicates
memo is stored
on internal drive
or expansion card
Category
pick list
LifeDrive from palmOne 287
CHAPTER 15 Recording Voice Memos
Automatically storing all voice memos on an expansion card
0
1Go to Applications and select Voice Memo .
2Open the Alarm dialog box:
a. Open the menus.
b. Select Options, and then select Preferences.
3Check the Record automatically
to expansion card, if present box.
4Select OK.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 288
CHAPTER 15 Recording Voice Memos
Related topics
Click a link below to learn about these related topics:
Moving
Around
• Opening applications
• Using menus
Categories Organizing voice memos by arranging them into categories and sorting them
Privacy Keeping voice memos private by turning on security options
Sharing • Exchanging voice memos with other palmOne™ device users by beaming
them
• Sending voice memos to other palmOne Bluetooth® devices by using
Bluetooth technology on your device
VersaMail®Sending voice memos as attachments to email messages
Common
Questions
Answers to frequently asked questions about Voice Memo
My Handheld
Make your device uniquely
yours. For great tips,
software, accessories, and
more, visit
www.palmOne.com/
mylifedrive.
Support
If you’re having problems
with Voice Memo or with
anything else on your device,
go to www.palmOne.com/
support.
LifeDrive from palmOne 289
CHAPTER 16
Making Wi-Fi® Wireless Connections
Staying connected means you have
the latest wireless technology at your
fingertips at all times. Now your device
can actually connect you to the
wireless world using either Wi-Fi® or
Bluetooth® wireless technology.
During the day, you need Wi-Fi to
access your corporate network. During
the evening, connect to the Wi-Fi
wireless network at your home or the
local coffee shop to access your
personal email or browse the Internet.
Benefits
• Connect to your corporate network
wirelessly
• Stay up-to-date by connecting
wirelessly anywhere
• Transfer documents wirelessly
I
n t
hi
s c
h
apter
What can I do with the built-
in Wi-Fi® wireless
technology?
What types of connections
can I make?
Wi-Fi signal strength
indicator
Setting up a Wi-Fi network
connection
Setting up a connection for
Wi-Fi synchronization
Setting up a Wi-Fi device-to-
device network
Related topics
LifeDrive from palmOne 290
CHAPTER 16 Making Wi-Fi® Wireless Connections
What can I do with the built-in Wi-Fi® wireless
technology?
Access your corporate network. Whether you are attending a meeting or roaming the hallway,
you can stay connected to the information you need.
Send email messages. Whether you send email messages once a week or constantly throughout
the day, wireless connectivity means that you can share information.
Access the web. Connect to the Internet for news and information in a café or in a meeting.
Reduce cable clutter by synchronizing wirelessly. Imagine your desk and workstation without
cable clutter. Wireless technology on your device replaces many of the connecting cables with a
wireless connection for tasks such as synchronizing.
Connect to other devices to share files wirelessly. Transfer a document wirelessly from your
desktop computer to your handheld for review when you are away from your desk.
What types of connections can I make?
With built-in Wi-Fi wireless technology, you can make connections at the following times:
• When you are in range of WI-Fi access points for private networks in a corporation or home. If
these networks are secure, you must have the necessary keys to access the network. Once you
are on the network, you can browse the Internet, send and receive email, or even access network
devices such as your computer.
• When you are in range of Wi-Fi access points for public networks, such as wireless cafés and city
networks, you can use the networks to browse the Internet or to send and receive email. Some
public networks require a subscription fee. Check with the public network provider for details.
• When you in range of other Wi-Fi devices, such as printers or projectors, create a device-to-
device network between your handheld and the other device. Also, check the user guide for the
other Wi-Fi device to enable device-to-device networking.
»
Key Term
Wi-Fi Wireless
technology that enables
networks with access
points to allow devices
such as handhelds,
computers, and printers
to connect wirelessly to
the Internet and
corporate networks.
Did You Know?
If you are out of range of
a Wi-Fi access point, you
can remain connected
using Bluetooth wireless
technology.
LifeDrive from palmOne 291
CHAPTER 16 Making Wi-Fi® Wireless Connections
Wi-Fi signal strength indicator
You can easily check Wi-Fi status and signal strength any time by viewing the Wi-Fi icon on the
status bar. You can tap the Wi-Fi icon and open the Preferences screen to also view status, signal
strength, and other Wi-Fi information.
0
Status ...Icons
Wi-Fi off
Wi-Fi on
Connected to a network
Signal strength:
Full strength decreasing to
minimum signal
Wi-Fi on
Connected to a network
No signal
Wi-Fi on
Not connected to a network
Wi-Fi
control
LifeDrive from palmOne 292
CHAPTER 16 Making Wi-Fi® Wireless Connections
Setting up a Wi-Fi network connection
0O
1Tap Wi-Fi controls on the status bar.
2Select the Wi-Fi pick list, and
then select On. Go to step 3.
If Wi-Fi is already on, select Scan.
Go to step 4.
3Select the Network pick list, and
then do one of the following:
• If the network is listed and
does not require an encryption
key, select the network. Wait
for the connection to finish,
and then select Done. You are
now connected and this
procedure is done.
• If the network is not listed or if
the network requires an
encryption key, select Edit
Networks and go to step 4.
Continued
Before You Begin
[!]
Contact the network
administrator to get the
name of the network, also
known as an SSID, and
the security information,
such as WEP or WPA-PSK
keys. If your computer is
behind an Internet
firewall, you may need
VPN access information
to connect.
»
Key Term
Encryption key
A series of letters and
numbers that enables
data to be encrypted and
then decrypted so it can
be safely shared within a
network. Your handheld
supports two encryption
systems: WEP and
WPA-PSK.
LifeDrive from palmOne 293
CHAPTER 16 Making Wi-Fi® Wireless Connections
4Add or edit a network:
• If the network appears on the
list, select the network and
then select Edit to add
encryption key information.Go
to step 6.
• If the network does not appear
on the list, select Add. The
network may be hidden for
security purposes.
5Add the network name or SSID if
it does not appear. An SSID is
required for hidden networks.
Continued
LifeDrive from palmOne 294
CHAPTER 16 Making Wi-Fi® Wireless Connections
6Select the Security pick list, and
then select a security option:
• If your network does not
require any encryption
settings, select None and go to
step 9.
• If your network requires WEP
encryption, select WEP and go
to step 7.
• If your network requires
WPA-PSK encryption, select
WPA-PSK and go to step 8.
Continued
LifeDrive from palmOne 295
CHAPTER 16 Making Wi-Fi® Wireless Connections
7If you selected WEP in step 6, enter the WEP encryption information:
a. Select the Key box.
b. Select the Key Type pick list and select a key type:
40-bit hex Creates a 10-digit hexadecimal number.
40-bit ASCII Creates a five-character string.
40-bit passphase Creates a variable-length string.
104-bit hex Creates a 26-digit hexadecimal number.
104-bit ASCII Creates a 13-character string.
104-bit passphrase Creates a variable-length string.
Continued
Did You Know?
64-bit WEP keys are
commonly called 40-bit
keys and 128-bit keys are
commonly called 104-bit
keys because the other 24
bits are automatically
assigned.
Tip
You can use a passphrase
to generate the keys. If
you have problems, ask
your network
administrator for the hex
equivalent, and use that
instead.
LifeDrive from palmOne 296
CHAPTER 16 Making Wi-Fi® Wireless Connections
Cont’d c. If you want to enter more than one WEP key, or you want to generate four
WEP keys from a passphrase, check the Four keys box.
d. Enter the WEP key(s).
e. If you checked the Four keys box, select an index number from the Key Index
pick list.
f. Select OK and go to step 9.
8If you selected WPA-PSK in step 6:
a. Select the Key box.
b. Assign a passphrase.
c. Select OK.
Continued
»
Key Term
Key index
Specifies which of the
four keys to use at a given
time. Some access points
automatically broadcast
their key index.
LifeDrive from palmOne 297
CHAPTER 16 Making Wi-Fi® Wireless Connections
9[ & ] OPTIONAL Manually set your IP or DNS addresses:
a. Select Details.
b. Select the Connect to pick list, and then select Access Point (infrastructure).
c. Select Advanced.
d. Select the IP Address or DNS Server pick list, and then select Manual.
e. Enter the IP address or DNS server information.
f. If you want to use a preamble, check the Use short preamble box.
g. Select OK.
10 Select OK and then select Done.
You can now connect to the network any time you are within
range of the access point.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 298
CHAPTER 16 Making Wi-Fi® Wireless Connections
Setting up a connection for Wi-Fi synchronization
0
1Go to Applications and select HotSync .
2Select Network.
3Make sure the network service
box is set to Wi-Fi.
If your network service is not set
to Wi-Fi, change the network
service to Wi-Fi:
a. Tap the network service box.
b. Select Wi-Fi from the Service
pick list, and then select Done.
Continued
Before You Begin
[!]
You need to perform the
following:
• You must synchronize
at least once with your
computer using the sync
cable.
• You must set up a Wi-Fi
network connection.
• You must turn on Wi-Fi
on your device and
connect to a Wi-Fi
network.
• If your computer is
behind your company’s
Internet firewall, you may
need to set up a virtual
private network (VPN).
Check with your system
administrator for
information.
Network
service box
LifeDrive from palmOne 299
CHAPTER 16 Making Wi-Fi® Wireless Connections
4Select HotSync to synchronize your device with your computer.
If your device does not synchronize with your computer, go to step 5.
5On your computer, set your HotSync Manager for Network synchronization:
a. Click the HotSync Manager icon on the taskbar in the lower-right corner
of your computer screen.
b. Select Network.
6On your device, go to Applications and select HotSync .
7Set the ModemSync preference:
a. Open the menus.
b. Select ModemSync Prefs on
the Options menu, and then
select Network.
Continued
Tip
If your Wi-Fi network is
unavailable, you can still
synchronize wirelessly
using Bluetooth wireless
technology.
Did You Know?
If you use Microsoft
Exchange ActiveSync
your email and calendar
information synchronize
directly with your info on
your company's
Exchange server.
Did You Know?
You can change the
conduits that are run
during Wi-Fi
synchronization by
opening the menu,
selecting Conduit Setup
from the Options menu,
and then checking or
unchecking the conduit
boxes.
LifeDrive from palmOne 300
CHAPTER 16 Making Wi-Fi® Wireless Connections
8Set the LANSync preferences:
a. Open the menus.
b. Select LANSync Prefs on the
Options menu, and then
select LANSync.
9Make sure your computer and
device settings match:
a. On your device, open the
menus.
b. Select Primary PC Setup on
the Options menu.
c. On your computer, click the
HotSync Manager icon on
the taskbar in the lower-right
corner of your computer
screen.
Continued
LifeDrive from palmOne 301
CHAPTER 16 Making Wi-Fi® Wireless Connections
Cont’d d. Click Setup, and then click the Network tab.
e. Click TCP/IP Settings.
f. Make sure that the Primary PC Address and Subnet Mask settings match the
settings on your device. If the settings don’t match, change the settings on
your device.
10 Select HotSync to synchronize your device with your computer.
If your device still does not synchronize with your computer, go to step 11.
11 Delete Subnet Mask fields on your device:
a. Open the menus.
b. Select Primary PC Setup on the Options menu.
c. Delete the entry in the Subnet Mask field.
12 Select HotSync to synchronize your device with your computer.
If you still can’t synchronize your device with your computer, contact your Wi-Fi
system administrator for assistance. You can also check the support website at
www.palmOne.com/support.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 302
CHAPTER 16 Making Wi-Fi® Wireless Connections
Accessing email and the web with Wi-Fi
After you set up a connection with a Wi-Fi network, you can send and receive email or browse the
web wirelessly using this connection.
0
1Open the email application or the web browser.
2Select the Wi-Fi pick list, and
then select On. Go to step 3.
If Wi-Fi is already on, select Scan.
Go to step 4.
3Select the Network pick list, then
select the network. Wait for the
connection to finish, and then
select Done. You are now ready
to send and receive email
messages or to browse the web.
Continued
Before You Begin
[!]
You need to perform the
following:
• You must set up a Wi-Fi
network connection.
• You must set up an
email account on your
device before you can
send or receive email
messages.
Tip
If Wi-Fi is already on, you
can change to another
network by tapping the
Wi-Fi controls on the
status bar, and then
selecting Scan. Your
device scans for available
networks. Select the
network you want to from
the available networks
list.
Tip
When you enter a URL in
the web browser or select
Get & Send in the
VersaMail® application,
a connection is
automatically initiated
with the last used service.
LifeDrive from palmOne 303
CHAPTER 16 Making Wi-Fi® Wireless Connections
4Select a network, and then select
OK.
You are now ready to send and receive email messages or to
browse the web.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 304
CHAPTER 16 Making Wi-Fi® Wireless Connections
Setting up a Wi-Fi device-to-device network
0O
1Tap the Wi-Fi controls on the status bar.
2Select the Wi-Fi pick list, and
then select On.
If Wi-Fi is already on, select Scan.
Go to step 4.
3Select the Network pick list, and
then do one of the following:
• If the network is listed and
does not require an encryption
key, select the network. Wait
for the connection to finish,
and then select Done. You are
now connected and this
procedure is done.
• If the network is not listed or if
the network requires an
encryption key, select Edit
Networks and go to step 4.
Continued
Before You Begin
[!]
You need to know the
following information:
• Name of the network,
also known as an SSID
• Security information,
such as WEP keys
• Channel number
You may also need to
know the IP address and
DNS server information.
»
Key Term
Encryption key
A series of letters and
numbers that enables
data to be encrypted and
then decrypted so it can
be safely shared within a
network. Your handheld
supports two encryption
systems: WEP and
WPA-PSK.
LifeDrive from palmOne 305
CHAPTER 16 Making Wi-Fi® Wireless Connections
4Select Add.
5Add the network name or SSID.
Continued
LifeDrive from palmOne 306
CHAPTER 16 Making Wi-Fi® Wireless Connections
6Select the Security pick list and
then select a security option:
• If your network does not
require any encryption
settings, select None and go to
step 8.
• If your network requires WEP
encryption, select WEP and go
to step 7.
Continued
LifeDrive from palmOne 307
CHAPTER 16 Making Wi-Fi® Wireless Connections
7If you selected WEP in step 6, enter the WEP encryption information:
a. Select the Key box.
b. Select the Key Type pick list and select a key type:
40-bit hex Creates a 10-digit hexadecimal number.
40-bit ASCII Creates a five-character string.
40-bit passphase Creates a variable-length string.
104-bit hex Creates a 26-digit hexadecimal number.
104-bit ASCII Creates a 13-character string.
104-bit passphrase Creates a variable-length string.
Continued
Did You Know?
64-bit WEP keys are
commonly called 40-bit
keys and 128-bit keys are
commonly called 104-bit
keys because the other 24
bits are automatically
assigned.
Tip
You can use a passphrase
to generate the keys. If
you have problems, ask
your network
administrator for the hex
equivalent, and use that
instead.
LifeDrive from palmOne 308
CHAPTER 16 Making Wi-Fi® Wireless Connections
Cont’d c. If you want to enter more than one WEP key, or you want to generate four
WEP keys from a passphrase, check the Four keys box.
d. Enter the WEP key(s).
e. If you checked the Four keys box, select an index number from the Key Index
pick list.
f. Select OK and go to step 9.
8Set the connection:
a. Select Details.
b. Select Peer-to-Peer (ad hoc)
from the Connect to pick list.
c. Select the channel number
from the Channel pick list.
Continued
»
Key Term
Key index
Specifies which of the
four keys to use at a given
time. Some access points
automatically broadcast
their key index.
LifeDrive from palmOne 309
CHAPTER 16 Making Wi-Fi® Wireless Connections
9[ & ] OPTIONAL Manually set your IP or DNS address:
a. Select the IP Address or DNS Server pick list, and then select Manual.
b. Enter the IP address or DNS server information.
c. If you want to use a preamble, check the Use short preamble box.
d. Select OK.
10 Select OK three times and then select Done.
You can now connect to the device any time you are within range.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 310
CHAPTER 16 Making Wi-Fi® Wireless Connections
Related topics
Click a link below to learn about these related topics:
Moving
Around
• Opening applications
• Using menus
Synchronizing Synchronizing your device with your desktop computer
Contacts Connecting to telephone numbers in your list of contacts
VersaMail Sending and receiving email messages wirelessly using your device’s Wi-Fi
technology
Bluetooth Using your device’s Bluetooth wireless technology
Common
Questions
Answers to frequently asked questions about Wi-Fi wireless technology
Tips & Tricks
Make your device uniquely
yours. For great tips,
software, accessories, and
more, visit
www.palmOne.com/
mylifedrive.
Support
If you’re having problems
with your device’s wireless
capabilities or with anything
else on your device, go to
www.palmOne.com/
support.
LifeDrive from palmOne 311
CHAPTER 17
Making Bluetooth® Wireless Connections
Staying connected in the world means
you have the latest wireless technology
at your fingertips at all times. Now
your device can actually connect you to
the wireless world using either Wi-Fi or
Bluetooth wireless technology. Your
device’s built-in Bluetooth functionality
helps you easily set up wireless
connections to a number of devices so
you can enjoy the convenience of
cable-free connectivity.
With Bluetooth connections, you can
share contacts or your favorite photos
with other people. You choose who
you share with by managing your
wireless privacy through trusted
connections to other devices, and
setting levels of visibility.
Benefits of your device’s
Bluetooth wireless technology
• Connect to your Bluetooth phone to
send text or email messages or to
access the web
• Reduce cable clutter by synchronizing
wirelessly
• Connect to other devices to share
files wirelessly
I
n t
hi
s c
h
apter
What can I do with the built-
in Bluetooth® wireless
technology?
Entering basic Bluetooth
settings
Setting up a Bluetooth
phone connection
Accessing email and the web
with Bluetooth
Setting up a connection for
Bluetooth synchronization
Setting up a connection to a
Bluetooth network
Creating trusted devices
Setting advanced Bluetooth
features
Related topics
LifeDrive from palmOne 312
CHAPTER 17 Making Bluetooth® Wireless Connections
What can I do with the built-in Bluetooth® wireless
technology?
Connect to your Bluetooth phone to send text or email messages or to access the web.
Whether you access the Internet or send text or email messages once a week or constantly
throughout the day, wireless connectivity means that you can go online anytime by connecting by
means of your mobile phone or your laptop connected to the Internet. For a list of compatible
phones, go to http://www.palmOne.com/us/support/downloads/phonelink.html.
Reduce cable clutter by synchronizing wirelessly. Imagine your desk and workstation without
cable clutter. Bluetooth wireless technology on your device replaces many of the connecting
cables with a wireless connection for tasks such as synchronizing.
Connect to other devices to share files wirelessly. Wouldn’t it be great if you could send files
such as photos wirelessly or print wirelessly on a Bluetooth printer? You can also find your way
using a Bluetooth GPS navigator. Use the built-in Bluetooth wireless technology to set up
connections to devices within approximately thirty feet of your device.
What types of connections can I make?
With Bluetooth wireless technology, you can make connections using the following types of
devices:
• To browse the Internet or access your email account, link through your desktop computer’s
network connection or establish a connection to a Bluetooth LAN Access Point.
• To access the Internet or an email account, connect to your mobile phone. To use a mobile
phone, you must dial your ISP or sign up for an account with a high-speed wireless carrier.
• To send and receive text messages, connect to your mobile phone.
• To synchronize your device with your computer wirelessly, connect to your computer.
• To share files with another Bluetooth device such as a device or printer, form a trusted pair with
that device.
»
Key Term
Bluetooth®Tech no logy
that enables devices such
as devices, mobile
phones, and computers
to connect wirelessly to
each other.
Before You Begin
[!]
Any device you connect
to must also be a
Bluetooth device with
Bluetooth features
enabled. Check the user
guide that came with the
device for information on
how to enable the
Bluetooth features.
LifeDrive from palmOne 313
CHAPTER 17 Making Bluetooth® Wireless Connections
What is device discovery?
Discovery is the process in which your device searches for other Bluetooth devices within its range
(approximately thirty feet). As each device is discovered, it shows up in your discovery results.
After you find the devices you are looking for, you can select the devices with which you want to
connect.
The Bluetooth application on your device can be turned on and off, and the application has a
Discoverable setting that can also be turned on and off. The following is a description of setting
combinations and the resulting discovery states:
Bluetooth Off: When the Bluetooth setting is off, other users cannot discover your device. This is
similar to locking your door with a dead bolt and a security chain, and disabling the doorbell.
When Bluetooth is off, you cannot access the Discoverable setting.
Bluetooth On and Discoverable No: When your device and Bluetooth are on and the
Discoverable setting is set to No, you can receive connections only from devices with which you
have previously formed a trusted pair. This is similar to locking your door with a dead bolt and
disabling the doorbell, but any friends who already have the key can enter. By default, the
Discoverable setting is enabled when Bluetooth is on.
Bluetooth On and Discoverable Yes: When your device is on, Bluetooth is on, and the
Discoverable setting is set to Yes, you can receive connections from any Bluetooth device. You are
automatically connected with devices with which you have previously communicated, but you can
refuse invitations to connect with unrecognized devices. This is similar to locking your front door
with a dead bolt and enabling the doorbell. Friends who already have the key can enter freely, and
if someone without a key rings the bell to request a connection, you can choose to open the door
or ignore the request.
LifeDrive from palmOne 314
CHAPTER 17 Making Bluetooth® Wireless Connections
Entering basic Bluetooth settings
0
1Tap Bluetooth controls on the status bar.
2Enter the basic Bluetooth
settings:
a. Select Prefs.
b. Select ON.
c. Tap the Device Name field and
enter a name for your device.
This is the name that other
Bluetooth devices see when
they connect to your device.
By default it is the username
you use during
synchronization, but you can
change it.
d. Select the Discoverable pick
list and select Yes or No.
Done
»
Key Term
Discoverable Setting
that allows other devices
to find and connect with
your device using
Bluetooth wireless
technology. If your device
is not discoverable, other
devices cannot find it to
make a connection. Your
device must be on in
order to be discoverable.
»
Key Term
When the Bluetooth icon
on the status bar is
dimmed, Bluetooth is off
and your device is not
discoverable.
LifeDrive from palmOne 315
CHAPTER 17 Making Bluetooth® Wireless Connections
Setting up a Bluetooth phone connection
To set up a phone connection, you must have a GSM or GPRS mobile phone
enabled with data services.
You can form a trusted pair between your device and your mobile phone. Once you have set up
the trusted pair connection, you automatically connect to your phone when you want a Bluetooth
connection.
0O
1Tap Bluetooth controls on the status bar.
2Open the Phone Setup dialog
box.
a. Select Prefs.
b. Select Setup Devices.
c. Select Phone Setup.
d. Select Phone Connection.
e. Select Next.
Continued
Before You Begin
[!]
If you have an IR phone,
you must download the
Phone Link application
from the web. Go to
http://
www.palmOne.com/us/
support/downloads/
phonelink.html to
download the software.
»
Key Term
Trusted pair Two
devices—for example,
your device and your
mobile phone—that can
connect to each other
because each device can
find the same passkey on
the other device. Once
you form a trusted pair
with a device, you do not
need to enter a passkey to
connect with that device
again.
IMPORTANT
[!]
LifeDrive from palmOne 316
CHAPTER 17 Making Bluetooth® Wireless Connections
3Select the phone you want to connect to:
a. Select the Manufacturer and Model pick lists, select the correct entries for
your phone, and then select Next.
If the phone does not appear on the list, check for phone compatibility at
http://www.palmOne.com/us/support/downloads/phonelink.html.
b. The Discovery Results displays all Bluetooth phones within range. Select the
phone you want, select OK, and then select Next.
If your phone is not listed in the discovery results, check whether your phone
is discoverable using Bluetooth wireless technology. Select Find More to
search again.
Not all features are available if your specific phone model is not in
the pick list.
Continued
Tip
If you receive a message
that your phone is not
ready to accept a
connection, check to
make sure that your
phone is prepared to
make a Bluetooth
connection. See the
instructions included with
your phone.
NOTE
Select phone
Select if your phone
does not appear
LifeDrive from palmOne 317
CHAPTER 17 Making Bluetooth® Wireless Connections
4Enter a passkey:
a. Enter a passkey number. This
can be any number you
choose; it does not, for
example, have to be a
password you use to access a
network or an email account.
You must enter
the same passkey on your device
and your mobile phone in order
to connect to your phone.
Select OK, and then select Done
to finish phone connection setup.
5Do one of the following:
• Select Yes to begin network
setup. Go to step 6.
• Select No to use your phone
connection only to dial phone
numbers from your device or
send text messages. You
cannot use the phone
connection to access the
Internet or send email. You
are done with this procedure.
Continued
»
Key Term
Passkey Like a
password, the passkey is
a security measure.
Connections can happen
only between your device
and a device that has the
same passkey. For
example, to connect to
your mobile phone, you
need to enter the same
passkey on your device
and on your phone.
IMPORTANT
[!]
LifeDrive from palmOne 318
CHAPTER 17 Making Bluetooth® Wireless Connections
6Begin network setup:
a. Select Yes, and then select
Next. Go to step 7.
b. If you select No, and then
select Next. Go to step 8.
7Select the service area and
carrier:
a. Select the pick lists and select
the correct information for
your cellular carrier.
b. Select Next, and then select
Done.
Continued
»
Key Term
GPRS Acronym for
General Packet Radio
Service, a method of
sending information
wirelessly at high speeds.
Select Yes in step 6 only if
you have a GPRS account
for your mobile phone.
Tip
Contact your ISP (for
example, AOL or
Earthlink) if you are not
sure about one or more of
the items to enter in
step 7.
LifeDrive from palmOne 319
CHAPTER 17 Making Bluetooth® Wireless Connections
8If you selected No in step 6, enter your dial-up information:
a. Select Next.
b. Enter the phone number you use to dial in to your ISP and the username for
your dial-up account.
c. Select the Password box, enter your account password, and select OK. This
is the password you use to access your dial-up account.
d. Select Next, and then select Done.
You now have set up your phone connection to browse the web
and send and receive email messages.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 320
CHAPTER 17 Making Bluetooth® Wireless Connections
Accessing email and the web with Bluetooth
After you set up a connection with a mobile phone, you can send and receive email or browse the
web wirelessly using this connection.
0
1Open the email application or the web browser.
2Verify Bluetooth status:
a. Tap Bluetooth controls on
the status bar.
b. Make sure On is selected.
Continued
Before You Begin
[!]
You must perform the
following:
• Set up a Bluetooth
phone connection with
network service.
•set up an email account
on your device before
you can send or receive
email messages.
Tip
You can select Bluetooth
controls on the status bar
to quickly check Bluetooth
status and make a
connection from any
application on your
device.
LifeDrive from palmOne 321
CHAPTER 17 Making Bluetooth® Wireless Connections
3Connect to your phone:
a. Select the Network Service pick list and select the service that you want to
use to connect to the Internet. If you set up a phone connection, the name of
the service you configured is listed.
b. Select Connect.
You are now ready to send and receive email messages or to
browse the web.
»
Key Term
Service Way of
connecting to a mobile
phone to send
information wirelessly,
for example, through a
high-speed (GPRS)
carrier or a dial-up
account with an Internet
service provider (ISP).
Tip
When you enter a URL in
the web browser or select
Get & Send in the
VersaMail® application,
a connection is
automatically initiated
with the last used service.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 322
CHAPTER 17 Making Bluetooth® Wireless Connections
Setting up a connection for Bluetooth synchronization
WINDOWS ONLY
0
1Tap Bluetooth controls on the status bar.
2Open the PC Setup wizard:
a. Select Prefs.
b. Select Setup Devices.
c. Select PC Setup.
d. Select Bluetooth HotSync.
e. Select Next.
.
Continued
Tip
After the first time you set
up a connection and
wirelessly synchronize
with a computer, you can
synchronize with that
computer at any time by
choosing its device name
from the Service pick list
and tapping Connect.
LifeDrive from palmOne 323
CHAPTER 17 Making Bluetooth® Wireless Connections
3Select a computer and select OK.
The Discovery icon
appears to indicate that the
discovery process is active.
If your computer did not show up
on the discovery results, select
Find More to search again.
4Set up a connection for wireless synchronization:
a. Follow the onscreen instructions for steps 1–3, selecting Next after each step.
b. Select Launch HotSync® Manager in step 4.
c. Select HotSync to synchronize your device with your computer.
Now you can easily synchronize your device with your computer
wirelessly.
Tip
To open HotSync®
Manager on your
computer in the onscreen
instructions (see step 4 in
this procedure), click the
HotSync Manager icon on
the taskbar in the lower-
right corner of your
computer screen.
Tip
Remember that Bluetooth
devices generally must be
within 30 feet of each
other to communicate.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 324
CHAPTER 17 Making Bluetooth® Wireless Connections
MAC ONLY
0
1Go to Applications and select Prefs .
2Open the Edit Connection screen:
a. From the Communications
Preferences list, select
Connection.
b. Select New.
3Set up the connection to your
computer:
a. Enter a name for the
connection, such as BT to Mac.
b. Select the Connect to pick list
and select PC.
c. Select the Via pick list and
select Bluetooth.
Continued
LifeDrive from palmOne 325
CHAPTER 17 Making Bluetooth® Wireless Connections
Cont’d.
d. Make sure the computer is ready to accept a Bluetooth connection.
See the documentation included with the computer for information on
how to prepare it to accept a Bluetooth connection. The documentation might
refer to a Bluetooth connection as a Bluetooth pairing or a Bluetooth link.
e. Select the Device box.
4Select the computer:
a. When the Discovery Results screen appears, select your computer. If your
computer does not appear on the list, select Find More.
b. Select OK.
5[ & ] OPTIONAL If prompted, enter a passkey:
a. Enter a passkey number. This can be any number you choose; it does not
have to be, for example, a password you use to access a network or an email
account.
You must enter the same passkey on your device and your
computer in order to wirelessly synchronize with your computer.
b. Select OK.
Continued
Tip
Just as it is safer to use
different personal
identification numbers
(PINs) for different bank
accounts, your passkeys
are more secure if you use
a different passkey for
each device with which
you want to connect—one
passkey for a connection
to a phone, a different one
for a connection to a
computer, and so on. Just
remember that you must
enter the same passkey
on your device and on the
device with which you
want to connect.
NOTE
IMPORTANT
[!]
LifeDrive from palmOne 326
CHAPTER 17 Making Bluetooth® Wireless Connections
6Synchronize your device with your computer:
a. Go to Applications and select HotSync .
b. Make sure that Local is selected, and then select the connection you created
in step 3 from the pick list.
c. Select HotSync .
Now you can easily synchronize with your computer wirelessly.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 327
CHAPTER 17 Making Bluetooth® Wireless Connections
Setting up a connection to a Bluetooth network
0
1Tap Bluetooth controls on the status bar.
2Open the PC Setup wizard:
a. Select Prefs.
b. Select Setup Devices.
c. Select LAN Setup.
d. Select Next.
3Select a LAN and select OK.
The Discovery icon
appears to indicate that the
discovery process is active.
If the LAN did not show up on
the discovery results, select Find
More to search again.
Continued
Before You Begin
[!]
You must get the passkey,
username, and password
for the LAN from the
system administrator.
»
Key Term
LAN Acronym for local
area network. LAN refers
to a local network that
connects computers
located in your home or
business.
LifeDrive from palmOne 328
CHAPTER 17 Making Bluetooth® Wireless Connections
4Create a trusted connection.
a. Select Yes to add the LAN as a
trusted device.
b. Select Next.
c. Enter the passkey number for
the LAN and select OK.
5Enter the username and
password for the LAN and select
Next.
6Select Done.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 329
CHAPTER 17 Making Bluetooth® Wireless Connections
Creating trusted devices
After you have set up your
phone
and
computer
as trusted devices, you may want to set up other
trusted devices, such as a friend’s device. When your device recognizes a trusted device, your device
automatically accepts communication, bypassing the discovery and authentication process.
0
1Tap Bluetooth controls on the status bar.
2Begin the discovery process:
a. Select Prefs.
b. Select Setup Devices.
c. Select Trusted Devices.
d. Select Add Device.
e. Select Trusted Devices to begin the discovery process. The Discovery icon
appears to indicate that the discovery process is active.
3Select the device you want to
add as a trusted device, and then
select OK.
If the device you want to add
does not appear on the discovery
results list, select Find More to
search again.
Continued
Did You Know?
When your device and
Bluetooth are on and the
Discoverable setting is set
to No, you can receive
connections only from
devices with which you
have previously
communicated.
LifeDrive from palmOne 330
CHAPTER 17 Making Bluetooth® Wireless Connections
4Enter the same passkey on your device and the other device and select OK.
Some Bluetooth devices have a built-in passkey; others
enable you to choose the passkey; see the documentation included with your
Bluetooth device for information. In either case you must use the same passkey
on both the device and your device.
Many phones also require you to put the phone into a mode where it can
accept a key exchange for bonding in a trusted pair. See the documentation
included with your phone for information.
5Select Done.
Done
Tip
You can delete a trusted
device or view the details
about a trusted device,
such as the device
address and your most
recent connection. In
Bluetooth Manager, select
Setup Devices, and then
select Trusted Devices.
Select the appropriate
device and select Details.
IMPORTANT
[!]
LifeDrive from palmOne 331
CHAPTER 17 Making Bluetooth® Wireless Connections
Setting advanced Bluetooth features
These advanced settings are used in special circumstances.
Storing recently found device names
When you enable or disable the device name cache you control whether or not your device
retrieves the names of remote devices each time the discovery process takes place. By default, the
device name cache is enabled, which means the names of devices that are found are stored in
cache. The next time the device is discovered, the name appears very quickly.
0
1Tap Bluetooth controls on the status bar.
2Open the menus.
3Select Options, and then select Disable device name cache.
The selection on the Options menu toggles to Enable device name cache. This
indicates that the cache is disabled.
Done
Tip
If the remote device name
has changed, disabling
and then enabling the
device name cache forces
your device to retrieve the
new device name.
LifeDrive from palmOne 332
CHAPTER 17 Making Bluetooth® Wireless Connections
Allowing your device to wake up when it is turned off
You can set your device to receive information through Bluetooth connections when your device is
turned off. The radio remains on, but your device is not discoverable. For another Bluetooth device
or application to wake up your device, it must know your device name. This limits the connections
to devices that are trusted or that have connected with you before.
0
1Tap Bluetooth controls on the status bar.
2Open the menus.
3Select Options, and then select Allow wakeup.
The selection on the Options menu toggles to Do not allow wakeup indicating
that Allow Wakeup is enabled.
Enabling the Allow Wakeup setting uses battery power even
when your device is turned off. Be sure to monitor your battery level.
Done
IMPORTANT
[!]
LifeDrive from palmOne 333
CHAPTER 17 Making Bluetooth® Wireless Connections
Related topics
Click a link below to learn about these related topics:
Moving
Around
• Opening applications
• Using menus
Synchronizing Synchronizing your device with your desktop computer
Contacts Connecting to telephone numbers in your list of contacts
VersaMail Sending and receiving email messages wirelessly using your device’s
Bluetooth technology
SMS Sending and receiving text messages wirelessly using your device’s
Bluetooth technology
Wi-Fi Using your device’s Wi-Fi wireless technology
Common
Questions
Answers to frequently asked questions about Bluetooth wireless
technology
Tips & Tricks
Make your device uniquely
yours. For great tips,
software, accessories, and
more, visit
www.palmOne.com/
mylifedrive.
Support
If you’re having problems
with your device’s wireless
capabilities or with anything
else on your device, go to
www.palmOne.com/support
LifeDrive from palmOne 334
CHAPTER 18
Sending and Receiving Email Messages
You already know how efficient email
is for staying in touch with personal
and business contacts. Now the
VersaMail® application brings you a
new level of convenience: email on the
go. Enjoy the ease and speed of
communicating with friends, family,
and colleagues anywhere you can
make an Internet connection.
You can email photos to your friends
and family, or create Microsoft Word or
Excel files and send them to your
colleagues. You can also receive
attachments to view and edit at your
convenience. If your corporate mail
system uses Microsoft Exchange
Server 2003, you may be able to set up
an account that uses Microsoft
Exchange ActiveSync® on your device.
Benefits
• Access email on the go
• Send and receive photos, sound files,
Word and Excel files, and more
• Save messages from your computer
to view at a convenient time
I
n t
hi
s c
h
apter
Upgrading an existing email
account
About email accounts
Creating an account
Getting and reading
messages
Sending an email message
Working with email folders
Working with email
messages
Working with attachments
Advanced VersaMail
application features
Working with Microsoft
Exchange ActiveSync
Related topics
LifeDrive from palmOne 335
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
Upgrading an existing email account
If you already use the VersaMail application on a different device and want to keep your username,
you can upgrade your existing email account for use on your new device.
0
1Synchronize your new device
with your computer. When
prompted, select the username
associated with your old device;
this contains your existing
account information.
2On your device, go to Favorites and select VersaMail .
3Select Yes to accept the upgrade.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 336
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
About email accounts
The VersaMail application is software that lets you use your device to access email from an
account with an email provider (either an Internet service provider, or ISP, such as Earthlink or
Yahoo!, or a wireless carrier) or from your corporate email account. For each email account you
want to access, you must set up an account in VersaMail. For example, if you have an Earthlink
account and a corporate account, set up one account for each in VersaMail.
After you set up an account, you can send and receive email directly to and from your device
wirelessly. Or you can download new messages from your computer to your device—and upload
messages from your device to be sent from your computer’s email program—when you
synchronize.
You must have an account with an email provider or a corporate account.
VersaMail works with these accounts to transfer messages to and from your device. The
application is not an email service provider.
Using an email provider
If you are setting up a new email account and have a well-known email provider (ISP or wireless
carrier) such as Earthlink or Yahoo!, many of the settings you need during account setup are
automatically filled in.
For other ISPs, you need the following information:
• Your email address and password
• The protocol used for incoming mail, such as Post Office Protocol (POP) or Internet Message
Access Protocol (IMAP)
Some free web-based email providers such as Hotmail do not support either the POP or
the IMAP protocol. You cannot use VersaMail to download messages to your device from an
account with one of these providers.
• The name of the incoming mail server
Did You Know?
You can create up to eight
email accounts.
Did You Know?
The VersaMail application
provides strong 128-bit
AES encryption for your
password.
Tip
Go to your email
provider’s website or
contact their customer
support to obtain the
setup information you
need.
IMPORTANT
[!]
NOTE
LifeDrive from palmOne 337
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
• The name of the outgoing mail (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol, or SMTP) server
• Your account’s security feature (if it has one), such as Secure Sockets Layer (SSL), Authenticated
Post Office Protocol (APOP), or Extended Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (ESMTP)
Using a corporate email account
If you want to access email on your device using your corporate email account, you create this
account in exactly the same way that you would with any other account, with one exception: For a
corporate email account, you may need to set up a virtual private network (VPN).
If your company has a Wi-Fi® wireless technology network or a Bluetooth® wireless technology
access point located behind the corporate firewall, you may not need to set up a VPN to access
your corporate email account. See the next section for details.
To set up a corporate email account, you need certain information. Check with your company’s
server administrator to obtain the following:
Username and password This might be your Windows username and password, your Lotus
Notes ID username and password, or something else.
Protocol Most corporate mail servers use the IMAP protocol for retrieving mail. In rare cases,
your company server may use the POP protocol.
Some corporate mail servers do not use either protocol. In this case, you cannot send
and receive email wirelessly using VersaMail. You can, however, synchronize email on your device
with email in Outlook or Lotus Notes on your computer (Windows only).
Incoming and outgoing mail server settings Check with your company’s server administrator to
obtain these settings.
If your corporate mail system uses Microsoft Exchange Server 2003, you may be able to
set up an account that uses Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync on your device. For more information,
see Working with Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync.
»
Key Term
Firewall A system set up
to protect against
unauthorized access into
a private network.
Did You Know?
With a corporate email
account, you may be able
to access Microsoft
Exchange, IBM Lotus
Domino, or Sun iPlanet
mail servers, among
others.
NOTE
NOTE
LifeDrive from palmOne 338
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
VPNs
If you want to access email on your device using your corporate email account, you may need to
set up a virtual private network (VPN) on your device. A VPN enables you to log in to your
corporate mail server through the company’s firewall (security layer). Without a VPN, you cannot
pass through the firewall to gain access to the mail server.
You need to set up a VPN to access corporate email in either of the following situations:
• Your company’s wireless local area network (LAN) is located outside the firewall.
• Your company’s wireless LAN is located inside the firewall, but you are trying to access the
network from outside the firewall (for example, from a public location or at home).
Check with your company’s server administrator to see if a VPN is required for you to access the
corporate network.
The Auto Sync feature in VersaMail may not work with a VPN connection. Also, you
cannot use scheduled sending retry of email with accounts that use a VPN connection.
The Enterprise Software link on your device software installation CD contains a link to purchase
and download VPN software for the device. Once you purchase and download the software, you
set up a VPN connection in Preferences on your device. If you are using a VPN connection, make
sure the connection is on in VersaMail. In the message list, open the Options menu, and then
select Connect VPN.
If your corporate mail system uses Microsoft Exchange Server 2003, you may be able to
set up an account that uses Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync® on your device. For more
information, see Working with Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync.
NOTE
NOTE
LifeDrive from palmOne 339
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
Connecting to a VPN
After you set up a VPN, you need to connect to it in order to retrieve email messages from your
corporate mail server. You may need to connect to the VPN each time you open VersaMail to
retrieve messages from the server.
0
1Go to Favorites and select VersaMail .
2Connect to your VPN:
a. Open the menus.
b. Select Options, and then select Connect VPN.
c. Enter the username and password you use to log in to the VPN.
d. Select OK.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 340
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
Creating an account
Before you can use the VersaMail application with a given email account, you need to set up the
account in VersaMail. If you have multiple email accounts, you must set up a VersaMail account
for each one. You have three setup options:
• On a Windows computer, if the email account is already set up on your computer—for example,
if you use Outlook Express on your computer to access your Earthlink account—you can transfer
the account settings to your device in just a few steps.
• On a Windows computer, if this is a new account, you can quickly set up the account on your
computer and synchronize to transfer the information to your device. The steps for setting up an
account on your computer depend on whether you are using a common email provider such as
Earthlink or Yahoo! or you are using a less common provider.
• For either a new or an existing account on a Windows or Mac computer, you can set up the
account directly on your device.
If you are setting up a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account to synchronize email and Calendar
information with info in Microsoft Exchange Server 2003, see Working with Microsoft Exchange
ActiveSync for setup instructions.
You can open VersaMail account setup on a Windows computer in one of two ways:
• During software CD installation, select the option to set up your email software on the final
installation screen.
• From the Start menu, select Programs, navigate to the palmOne program group, and then select
VersaMail Setup.
If you plan to synchronize your new device using an existing username from
another device, you must do so before you enter your email account information in VersaMail. If
you enter the email account information first and then synchronize your device with your
computer using an existing username, the email account information you entered is overwritten.
IMPORTANT
[!]
LifeDrive from palmOne 341
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
Transferring settings from an existing account
WINDOWS ONLY
0
1Open VersaMail account setup.
2Select your username from the drop-down list at the top of the screen, and then
select the option to create a new VersaMail email account. Click Next.
3Select the option to synchronize with an email account detected on your PC,
and then select the account from the list. Click Next.
4Enter the basic account
information:
a. In the Name this account field,
enter a descriptive name or
use the one shown.
b. In the Enter your Password
field, enter your email
account password.
c. Click Next.
5Click Next on the mail servers screen. This information is already filled in based
on the account whose settings you are transferring to your device.
Continued
Did You Know?
Your username and email
address are already
entered on the Account
Settings screen based on
the account settings that
VersaMail finds on your
computer.
LifeDrive from palmOne 342
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
6[ & ] OPTIONAL Set up other
accounts:
a. Select the option to set up
another account, and then
click Next.
b. Repeat steps 2 through 5 for
each account you want to set
up. When you have set up the
last account, go to the next
step.
7Finish setting up accounts:
a. Select the option to
synchronize information for
this account, and then click
Next.
b. Click Finish.
8Do a full sync to transfer all account information to your device.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 343
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
Setting up an account on your computer: Common providers
WINDOWS ONLY
The settings for many common providers are already included in VersaMail. If you have an
account with one of these providers, you just need to enter your username and password during
account setup.
0
0
1Open VersaMail account setup.
2Select your username from the drop-down list at the top of the screen, and then
select the option to create a new VersaMail email account. Click Next.
3Select the option to synchronize with a mail service from this list, and then
select your mail service from the list. Click Next.
Continued
LifeDrive from palmOne 344
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
4Enter the basic account
information:
a. Enter a descriptive name for
the account or use the one
shown.
b. Enter your account username
and password. Your email
address is entered
automatically based on the
username you enter.
5Click Next on the mail servers screen. This information is already filled in based
on the mail service you selected.
6[ & ] OPTIONAL Do one of the following:
•To enter advanced settings for this account, click Advanced Settings.
• To test the account settings you have entered, click Test My Settings. Click OK
after settings have been tested.
7Click Next.
Continued
Did You Know?
Your incoming and
outgoing server settings
and whether the account
needs ESMTP
authentication are
already entered based on
the account type you
select.
LifeDrive from palmOne 345
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
8[ & ] OPTIONAL Set up other
accounts:
a. Select the option to set up
another account, and then
click Next.
b. Repeat steps 2 through 5 for
each account you want to set
up. When you have set up the
last account, go to step 9.
9Finish setting up accounts:
a. Select the option to
synchronize information for
this account, and then click
Next.
b. Click Finish.
10 Do a full sync to transfer all account information to your device.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 346
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
Setting up an account on your computer: Other providers
WINDOWS ONLY
0
1Open VersaMail account setup.
2Select your username from the drop-down list at the top of the screen, and then
select the option to create a new VersaMail email account. Click Next.
3Select the option to synchronize with a mail service from this list, and then
select Other. Click Next.
4Select the protocol for this account. Check with your system administrator if
you do not know which protocol is used.
Continued
»
Key Term
Protocol Settings your
email provider uses to
receive email messages.
Most providers use the
Post Office Protocol
(POP); a few use the
Internet Message Access
Protocol (IMAP).
LifeDrive from palmOne 347
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
5Enter the basic account information:
a. Enter a descriptive name for the account.
b. Enter your account username and password.
c. Enter your email address for this account.
d. Click Next.
6Enter the names of the incoming and outgoing mail servers for this account,
whether the account requires Extended Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (ESMTP),
and, if so, the username and password required for ESMTP. Check with your
email service provider for this information.
7[ & ] OPTIONAL Do one of the following:
•To enter advanced settings for this account, click Advanced Settings.
• To test the account settings you have entered, click Test My Settings. Click OK
after settings have been tested.
8Click Next.
Continued
Did You Know?
Your incoming mail
server is also called your
POP or IMAP server; your
outgoing mail server is
also called your SMTP
server.
LifeDrive from palmOne 348
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
9[ & ] OPTIONAL Set up other accounts:
a. Select the option to set up another account, and then click Next.
b. Repeat steps 2 through 5 for each account you want to set up. When you
have set up the last account, go to step 10.
10 Finish setting up accounts:
a. Select the option to synchronize information for this account, and then click
Next.
b. Click Finish.
11 Do a full sync to transfer all account information to your device.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 349
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
Entering advanced account settings on your computer
When you set up an account, VersaMail automatically enters advanced settings such as incoming
and outgoing server names, any authentication required, maximum message size, and so on. You
can check the advanced settings either to verify that VersaMail entered the information you want
or to change a default entry—for example, to change the maximum message size.
0
1During account setup on your computer, click Advanced Settings on the
Account Information screen.
2Click the General tab and verify
or edit any of the following settings:
Synchronize Local Notes (Lotus
Notes accounts only) Check the box
to synchronize email on your device
with email in the local copy of Notes
on your computer. You are prompted
to enter your Lotus Notes ID and
password. Click Browse if you need
to locate your Notes ID.
Enable HotSync synchronization
By default, this box is checked,
meaning you can both send and
receive email wirelessly and
transfer messages to your device
from your computer when you
synchronize. If you uncheck the box, you can send and receive email
wirelessly only.
Continued
Did You Know?
The Desktop Connection
field displays the mail
client you use to
download messages to
your computer—for
example, Microsoft
Outlook or Lotus Notes—
based on the settings
VersaMail detects. If no
client is detected,
VersaMail displays Direct
POP or Direct IMAP
connection to server,
depending on your
account protocol.
LifeDrive from palmOne 350
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
Cont’d
Unread Messages Only For IMAP accounts only, select whether to download
all messages to your device, or unread messages only. By default, the box is
unchecked, meaning that all messages are downloaded. For POP accounts, this
box does not appear on the screen.
Download Attachments Select whether to download attachments when you
retrieve new messages. By default, the box is checked; if you uncheck it, only
the body text of any message containing an attachment is downloaded to your
device.
Mail from the last X Days Set how many days’ worth of email should be
downloaded.
Max Message Size (KB) Enter the maximum message size that can be
downloaded to your device—from 1 to 5000KB. The smaller the maximum size,
the faster the download, but you must use the More button to download any
messages over that size. On the other hand, choosing a larger size means that
more messages can be completely downloaded automatically, but
downloading takes longer.
Format of Incoming Messages Select HTML or Plain Text. If you select HTML,
any email messages sent as HTML are displayed on your device with basic
HTML formatting intact. If you select plain text, all messages are received as
plain text only, regardless of the format in which they were sent. The default is
HTML.
Synchronize Outbox Folder Check the box to synchronize messages in your
device’s Outbox with messages on your computer during the next
synchronization. If the box is unchecked, your Outbox is not included when you
synchronize, so messages in your device’s Outbox are not sent.
Continued
Did You Know?
The POP protocol does
not support retrieval of
unread mail only from the
server. If you have a POP
email account, VersaMail
downloads all messages
from the server
regardless of whether
you have read them (for
example, on your desktop
or on the web).
Did You Know?
The actual message size
you can download may
be smaller than 5000KB,
because some message
space is necessary for
transferring the message
over the Internet.
LifeDrive from palmOne 351
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
Cont’d
Synchronize Inbox Folder Check the box to synchronize messages in your
device’s Inbox with messages on your computer during the next
synchronization. The box is checked by default; if unchecked, your Inbox is not
included when you synchronize, so new messages in your computer’s Inbox are
not downloaded to your device.
3Click the Incoming Mail tab and
verify or edit any of the following
settings:
Display Name Enter the name you
want to appear on email messages.
User Name Enter the username
you use to access email for this
account.
Password Enter your email
account password.
E-mail Enter the email address for
this account.
Incoming Server Enter the
address of your incoming mail server.
Mail Server Protocol Select the protocol for this account.
Continued
Tip
Check with your email
provider or your system
administrator for any
incoming or outgoing
mail settings you do not
know. Also check to see if
your account uses SSL,
APOP, or ESMTP; or
whether you need to
change the default port
number.
LifeDrive from palmOne 352
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
Cont’d
Port Number By default, the port number setting is 110 for POP and 143 for
IMAP servers. You may need to change the port number if you choose to
retrieve incoming mail over a secure connection (see the next item).
Secure connection To retrieve incoming mail over a secure (Secure Sockets
Layer, or SSL) connection, check the box. The port number for incoming mail
then changes to 995.
APOP (POP accounts only) To encrypt your username and password when
they travel over the network, check this box. Some services work properly only
if APOP is used, while others do not work properly if APOP is used.
4Click the Outgoing Mail tab and
verify or edit any of the following
settings:
Outgoing Server Enter the
address of your outgoing mail
server.
Port Number The default is 25,
the port number most SMTP
servers use.
Secure connection To se nd
outgoing mail over a secure (Secure
Sockets Layer, or SSL) connection,
check the box. This server requires
a secure connection (SSL).
Continued
Tip
Do not check the Secure
connection box if
VersaMail displays Direct
POP or Direct IMAP
connection to server in
the Desktop Connection
field. If you check the box,
you cannot receive
incoming messages
correctly. To use SSL with
your account, set up the
account on your device
and check the Use Secure
Connection box on the
appropriate screen.
LifeDrive from palmOne 353
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
Cont’d
Authentication Check the box if the outgoing server (SMTP) requires ESMTP
authentication. If you select this option, username and password fields appear.
These fields are already filled in based on the account information you entered.
In most cases, the information displayed is correct; however, occasionally your
authentication username and/or password is different from your account
username or password.
5(IMAP accounts only) Click the Folders tab and verify or edit any of the following
settings:
Sent Folder Shows the name of your Sent Mail folder on the server.
Tr a s h F o l d e r Stores deleted email in the folder you specify on the server.
Server Folder Synchronization To synchronize messages on your device with
messages on a server folder, click in the Synchronize column to the right of the
folder name to select Yes.
6When you have finished entering or verifying advanced settings, click OK.
Done
Did You Know?
If you synchronize a
folder, any changes you
make to a folder on your
device—for example,
moving or deleting
messages—are
automatically updated on
the mail server, and vice
versa.
LifeDrive from palmOne 354
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
Setting up an account on your device
If you have already set up an account on your computer, you don’t need to set up the account on
your device. Just do a full sync to transfer the account settings to your device.
If you are setting up a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account on your device to synchronize
email and Calendar information on your device with the info in Microsoft Exchange Server 2003,
see Working with Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync for setup instructions.
0
0
1Go to Favorites and select VersaMail .
2Open the Account Setup screen:
a. Open the menus.
b. Select Accounts, and then
select Account Setup.
c. Select New.
Continued
»
Key Term
Protocol Settings your
email provider uses to
receive email messages.
Most providers use the
Post Office Protocol
(POP); a few use the
Internet Message Access
Protocol (IMAP).
Tip
If your email provider
appears on the Mail
Service pick list, you don’t
need to select a protocol.
The correct protocol is
automatically displayed.
LifeDrive from palmOne 355
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
3Enter the basic account information:
a. In the Account Name field, enter
a descriptive name.
b. Select the Mail Service pick list,
and then select your email
provider. Select Other if your
provider is not listed.
c. If you chose Other, select the
Protocol pick list, and then select POP or IMAP.
d. Select Next.
4Enter the account username and
password:
a. Enter the username you use
to access your email.
b. Select the Password box,
enter your email account
password, and then select OK.
c. Select Next.
Continued
Did You Know?
Your incoming mail
server is also called your
POP or IMAP server; your
outgoing mail server is
also called your SMTP
server.
LifeDrive from palmOne 356
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
5If you chose a common email
provider in step 3b, this screen is
already filled in. If not, enter the
names of the incoming and
outgoing mail servers:
a. Enter your email address.
b. Enter the names of your mail
servers.
c. Select Next.
6Do one of the following:
Finish setup Select Done to
finish setup and go to the Inbox
of the account you set up, where
you can begin getting and
sending email.
Set additional mail options
Select Advanced to set advanced
mail options.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 357
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
Setting advanced mail options on your device
0
1Set incoming mail server options
for the account:
a. Select any of the following:
Port Number By default, the port
number setting is 110 for POP and
143 for IMAP servers. You may need
to change the port number if you
choose to retrieve incoming mail
over a secure connection.
Use Secure Connection (SSL) To retrieve incoming mail over a secure (Secure
Sockets Layer, or SSL) connection, check the Use Secure Connection box. If you
check the box, the port number for incoming mail changes to 995.
Use Authentication (APOP) (POP accounts only) Encrypts your username and
password when they travel over the network. Some services do not work
properly without APOP, while others do not work properly if APOP is used.
b. Select Next.
Continued
Tip
Check with your email
provider or your system
administrator for any
incoming or outgoing
mail settings you do not
know. Also check to see if
your account uses SSL,
APOP, or ESMTP, or
whether you need to
change the default port
number.
LifeDrive from palmOne 358
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
Testing your new account
After you finish setting up a new email account, the Inbox of the account you just created is
displayed. You can test whether the email account is set up and working properly by getting
messages.
2Set outgoing mail options:
a. Select any of the following:
Port Number The default is 25,
the port number most SMTP
servers use.
Use Secure Connection (SSL)
Check the box to send outgoing
mail over a secure (Secure Sockets
Layer, or SSL) connection.
Use authentication (ESMTP) Check the box if the outgoing server (SMTP)
requires ESMTP authentication. If you select this option, username and
password fields appear. These fields are already filled in based on the account
information you entered. In most cases, the information displayed is correct;
however, occasionally your authentication username and/or password is
different from your account username or password.
b. Select Done.
Done
Tip
If you need to enter new
authentication
information, enter your
username, select the
Password box, enter a
password, and then
select OK. Check with
your email service
provider for
authentication username
and password
information.
LifeDrive from palmOne 359
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
Editing an account
As with setup, you can edit an account either on your computer or on your device.
Editing an account on your computer
WINDOWS ONLY
0
1Select the account to edit:
a. Select HotSync® Manager in the taskbar in the lower-right corner of your
computer screen.
b. Select Custom, and then select VersaMail.
c. Click Change, and then select the name of the account to edit in the pane on
the left of the screen.
2Select one of the following:
Delete Account Click the button and click to confirm the deletion.
Edit Account Click the button and edit the account settings on the following
screens.
Advanced Click the button and edit the advanced account settings on the
following screens.
Done
Tip
You can also edit an
account by selecting Start
in the lower-left corner of
your computer screen,
selecting Programs,
navigating to palmOne,
and then selecting
VersaMail Setup. Select
the username associated
with the account, click the
Edit an existing account
button, and then click
Next. Edit the information
on the account
information screens.
LifeDrive from palmOne 360
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
Editing an account on your device
0
1Select the account you want to
edit:
a. Open the menus.
b. Select Accounts, and then
select Account Setup.
c. Select the name of the
account to edit, and then
select Edit.
2The same series of screens appears for editing an account as for creating an
account. Go through the screens by selecting Next, and change the entries you
want to edit on the appropriate screens.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 361
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
Deleting an account
When you delete an account in the VersaMail application, the account is removed from your
device. The account still exists on the server, however. For example, deleting your Yahoo! account
from the VersaMail application deletes the account only from your device. Your email account still
exists at Yahoo.com.
You can delete all but one of your email accounts; you must have at least one account.
0
1Select the account you want to
delete:
a. Open the menus.
b. Select Accounts, and then
select Account Setup.
c. Select the name of the
account that you want to
delete, and then select Delete.
2Delete the account:
a. Select Yes in the Delete
Account dialog box to delete
the account and all associated
email messages.
b. Select OK.
Done
Tip
On a Windows computer,
do a full sync to free up
the memory associated
with an account after you
delete it.
Tip
You can also delete an
account on a Windows
computer by selecting
HotSync Manager in the
taskbar in the lower-right
corner of your computer
screen, selecting Custom,
selecting VersaMail, and
then selecting Change.
Select the account you
want, and then click
Delete Account.
LifeDrive from palmOne 362
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
Adding ESMTP to an account
Some services require ESMTP authentication to validate your username and password on an
SMTP server. If you aren’t sure if your ISP or web email provider supports ESMTP, check with your
email provider.
0
1Select the account to which you
want to add ESMTP:
a. Open the menus.
b. Select Accounts, and then
select Account Setup.
c. Select the name of the
account, and then select Edit.
2The same series of screens appears for editing an account as for creating an
account. Go through the screens by selecting Next, and check the
Authentication box on the advanced outgoing mail options screen.
Done
»
Key Term
ESMTP Acronym for
Extended Simple Mail
Transfer Protocol.
A method for
authenticating outgoing
email messages.
Tip
If you need to enter new
authentication
information, enter your
username, select the
Password box, enter a
password, and then
select OK. Check with
your email service
provider for
authentication username
and password
information.
LifeDrive from palmOne 363
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
Getting and reading messages
When you get messages, you can choose to see only the subjects of your email (which include
message size, sender, and subject), so that you can decide if you want to download the entire
message. Or you can choose to get the entire message for all of your incoming email.
See Working with Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync for special considerations when
using a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account to synchronize email and Calendar information on
your device with info in Microsoft Exchange Server 2003.
0
1Go to Favorites and select VersaMail .
2[ & ] OPTIONAL If you are using a VPN connection, connect to your VPN.
3Choose whether to get message
subjects only or full messages:
a. Open the menus.
b. Select Accounts, and then
select the account you want.
c. Select Get or Get & Send.
Continued
Tip
To get and view
messages for a different
account, open the
Accounts menu and
select the account you
want. Select the folders
pick list in the upper-right
corner of the screen, and
then select Inbox to
display messages in the
Inbox.
Tip
For IMAP accounts, you
have the option of
wirelessly synchronizing
mail folders if the Get
Mail Options dialog box
is displayed.
NOTE
LifeDrive from palmOne 364
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
Auto Sync with notification
Some email service providers, such as CompuServe and AOL, do not support the Auto
Sync feature. Check with your provider to see if Auto Sync is supported.
You can set up VersaMail to automatically download new email messages to your device with the
Auto Sync feature.
If Auto Sync downloads any new messages, your device lets you know with a sound or vibration.
A list with the number of new messages retrieved appears on the Reminders screen.
The Auto Sync feature downloads only the first 3KB of each message. You can select the More
button on the message screen to download the entire message.
Auto Sync recognizes any filter criteria you set up for downloading messages. Messages that
don’t meet these filter criteria are not downloaded during Auto Sync. You need to turn off all filters
and manually retrieve these messages.
See Working with Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync for special considerations when
using Auto Sync with a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account to synchronize email and
Calendar information with info in Microsoft Exchange Server 2003.
4[ & ] OPTIONAL If you have selected Ask Every Time in VersaMail
Preferences, select whether to download subjects only or entire messages.
A list of your messages appears in the Inbox.
Done
NOTE
NOTE
LifeDrive from palmOne 365
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
Scheduling Auto Sync
You can set up different schedules for each of your email accounts, but you can set up only one
schedule for each account. For example, if you set up a schedule to get mail on weekdays for your
Yahoo! account, you can’t set up a separate schedule for weekends for that account.
Auto Sync may not work with your specific VPN connection. It also doesn’t work if your security
preferences include encrypting databases on the device.
0
1Select Auto Sync for a given
account:
a. Open the menus.
b. Select Options, and then
select Preferences.
c. Select Auto Sync, and then
check the Sync automatically
box.
Continued
Did You Know?
If more than one
scheduled Auto Sync
happens at the same time
(for example, for two
separate email accounts),
Auto Sync performs any
past-due Auto Sync first,
and then performs
current Auto Sync
retrievals according to
the order of email
accounts in the Accounts
menu list.
LifeDrive from palmOne 366
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
Auto Sync notifications
The Auto Sync feature provides two types of notifications during and after it gets messages:
Alerts You can choose to have your device alert you with a beep or other sound when a new
message arrives in your account.
2Set schedule options:
Interval Select the Every pick list and select the time interval, from 5 minutes
to 12 hours. Note that if you set a more frequent interval, you may need to
recharge your device’s battery more often.
Start/End Time Select the Start and End Time boxes, and then select the hour,
the minute, and AM or PM to enter the time for the first and last Auto Sync to
take place. Select OK.
Days Select the days you want the schedule to be active. You can choose any
number of days, but you can set up only one schedule for each email account.
3Select OK.
4[ & ] OPTIONAL Select Get or Get & Send.
Done
Tip
Be sure to manually
retrieve any messages
using Get or Get & Send
after setting up a
scheduled Auto Sync.
Then only new messages
are retrieved during Auto
Sync.
LifeDrive from palmOne 367
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
Reminders screen If Auto Sync discovers and downloads new messages for an email account,
a notification appears on the Reminders screen, telling you the account name and the number of
new messages. If Auto Sync is scheduled for more than one account, a separate notification
appears for each account.
Setting alert options
You can choose an alert—such as a bird, a phone, or an alarm—to let you know when new email
arrives.
0
1Open the Alerts screen:
a. From the Inbox or another
folder, open the menus.
b. Select Options, and then
select Preferences.
c. Select Auto Sync, and then
select Alerts.
Continued
Did You Know?
Any custom sound you
install on your device
appears on the Alert
Sound pick list.
Tip
You can also adjust the
volume of the alert
sound.
LifeDrive from palmOne 368
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
Viewing and using the Reminders screen
The Reminders screen on your device shows info about new email messages. It also shows alerts
from other applications, such as Calendar appointments.
To view the Reminders screen, tap Alert on the status bar when it is blinking.
You can do any of the following:
• Check the box to clear a reminder from the list.
• Select the reminder (either the mail icon or the text description) to go to the Inbox of that
account or to read a detailed error message.
2Select alert options:
a. Check the Alert me of new mail
box.
b. Select the Alert Sound pick
list, and then select a sound.
The device plays a brief demo
of the sound.
c. To receive alerts of successful Auto Sync retrievals only, uncheck the Alert
me of failures box. Leave the box checked if you want to receive alerts for
both successful and failed Auto Sync retrievals.
d. Select OK.
Done
Did You Know?
If you are viewing the
Inbox and an Auto Sync
downloads new
messages, those
messages do not appear
on the Reminders screen,
because you can already
view them in the Inbox.
LifeDrive from palmOne 369
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
• Select Done to close the Reminders screen and return to whatever you were doing on your
device before the Reminders screen appeared.
• Select Clear All to delete all reminders on the Reminders screen.
When a notification appears on the Reminders screen, select it to go to the Inbox of that account,
or open the VersaMail application and go to that account. Once you open the Inbox, any new
messages are removed from the Reminders screen, even if you don’t open them. Auto Sync then
starts at the next scheduled interval, with the Reminders screen counter reset to 1.
Auto Sync retries
If the interval for a scheduled Auto Sync is set at “Every 1 hour” or less frequently, and an Auto
Sync fails for any reason, the VersaMail application tries to retrieve email every 30 minutes until
either the next scheduled Auto Sync occurs or the end time for scheduled email retrieval is
reached. If the interval is set for more frequently than “Every 1 hour,” the VersaMail application
waits until the next scheduled Auto Sync.
Resource issues with Auto Sync
The Auto Sync feature can cause the following resource constraints:
Decreased battery life If you set the Auto Sync interval for more often than once per hour, your
device’s battery charge may drain more quickly, and you may need to recharge the battery more
frequently.
Increased monthly charges Some wireless providers charge a fee for data transactions. If you
use one of these providers, using the Auto Sync feature can substantially add to your monthly
charges. This is especially true for POP accounts, because POP messages take longer to download
than IMAP messages.
Tip
If the Reminders screen
shows an Auto Sync error
message for an account,
select the message to
view more detailed
information about the
error. You can choose to
disable notifications for
Auto Sync failures.
LifeDrive from palmOne 370
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
Inbox icons in the VersaMail application
The icons to the left of a message in the Inbox tell you the message’s status.
Only the subject header information is downloaded.
Part or all of the message text is downloaded.
Part or all of the message text and attachment information is downloaded.
Downloaded message has been marked high priority by the sender.
Setting preferences for getting messages
0
1Open the Delivery Options preferences:
a. In the Inbox or on another folder screen, open the menus.
b. Select Options, and then select Preferences.
c. Select Delivery Options.
Continued
LifeDrive from palmOne 371
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
2Select preferences:
Get Select whether to get
message subjects only or entire
messages.
Ask Every Time Check to display
a dialog box for choosing subjects
only or entire messages each time
you retrieve email. Leave
unchecked to retrieve messages
according to the option you select
in the Get pick list.
Get only Unread messages (IMAP account only) Check the box to download
only unread mail to your device. If you don’t select this option and you select
Get & Send, all of your messages on your provider’s mail server are
downloaded to your Inbox, including messages you have already read.
For POP accounts, the Unread messages box does not appear on the
Delivery Options screen.
Mail from last X days Get messages sent within the number of days you
specify (default is 7).
Download attachments Check the box to automatically download files
attached to email messages to your device. Attachments that exceed the
maximum message size cannot be downloaded.
Continued
Did You Know?
The POP protocol does
not support retrieval of
unread mail only from the
server. If you have a POP
email account, the
VersaMail application
downloads all messages
from the server
regardless of whether
you have read them (for
example, on your desktop
or on the web).
NOTE
LifeDrive from palmOne 372
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
Cont’d
Maximum message size Enter the maximum size of an incoming email
message in kilobytes (KB). The maximum size of an incoming message is 5KB
by default, but you can enter any size up to 5000KB (approximately
5 megabytes, or 5MB), including attachments. The maximum message size that
you can retrieve is 60KB for the body text and approximately 5MB of total data
for any attachments.
Message Format Select to retrieve messages in HTML or plain text format. If
you select HTML, any messages sent to you in HTML format are displayed with
basic HTML formatting intact. Other messages are displayed as plain text. If you
select Plain Text, all messages are displayed as plain text, regardless of the
format in which they were sent. The default setting is HTML.
The VersaMail application sends all messages as plain text only, with
all HTML tags stripped, even if you are forwarding or replying to a message that
was originally received as HTML.
Done
Did You Know?
Basic HTML includes
bold, italics (small font
only), colored words,
bulleted and numbered
lists, and so on.
In an HTML message,
certain types of graphics
(for example, JPEG or GIF
files) may be displayed as
a URL in the body of the
email message. In some
cases, you can select the
URL to open the graphic.
Tip
Because downloading
large messages can
consume device
resources, the VersaMail
application displays the
size of the message and
asks if you want to
continue downloading
any message that
exceeds your maximum
message size, up to a
total size of 5MB.
NOTE
LifeDrive from palmOne 373
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
Reading email messages
To read email, select the email message in the Inbox or the folder where the message is located.
If you chose to get messages by subjects only, select the More button on the message screen
to view the body of the email message, plus any attachments, up to the maximum message size
you select. If the downloaded message exceeds your maximum message size, only a partial
message is displayed. Select the More button to view the entire message.
If you chose to get entire messages, the body of the message is displayed. However, if the
downloaded message exceeds your maximum message size, only part of the message is
displayed. Select the More button to view the entire message.
Tip
If you use the 5-way
navigator to select and
open a message, press
Center after reading the
message to close it and
return to the folder where
you started.
Tip
Highlight a message and
press Right on the 5-way
to open a menu of
message commands such
as Forward, Reply, and
Delete.
Tip
Change the font size of a
message you are reading
by opening the Options
menu and selecting Use
smaller font or Use
standard font.
Tip
Use landscape mode to
see more of the message
on a single screen.
Select to read
Select More to view
the entire message
LifeDrive from palmOne 374
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
Adding or updating a contact directly from a message
You can add an email address to Contacts directly from the body of a received email message.
0
1Open the Add Contact dialog box:
a. Open the message you want.
b. On the message screen, open the menus.
c. Select Options, and then select Add to Contacts.
2[ & ] OPTIONAL If a display name exists for this Contacts record, the dialog
box displays the name in the Last name and First name fields.
If the Last name and First name fields are blank, enter the first and last name
associated with the “From” email address.
3Select OK to add the email address to Contacts, and then select OK in the
confirmation dialog box.
Done
Tip
You can also update an
existing Contacts record
with a new email address,
or create a second
Contacts record for a
name that has an existing
record. The procedure is
the same as for adding a
new Contacts record. If
you select Add to
Contacts from an email
message and a record
already exists for the
recipient name, you are
prompted either to
update the email address
for the recipient or to
create a new record for
the recipient.
LifeDrive from palmOne 375
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
Sending an email message
0
1Go to Favorites and select VersaMail .
2Open a new message:
a. Open the menus.
b. Select Accounts, select the account you want, and then select New.
Continued
Tip
To mark an outgoing
message as high priority,
on the message screen,
open the Options menu
and select Set Priority To
High.
Did You Know?
You can set up your
device to automatically
try resending any
messages that are not
sent correctly the first
time.
LifeDrive from palmOne 376
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
3Address and compose your
message:
a. Enter the recipient’s email
address.
b. In the Subject field, enter the
subject of your email.
c. In the area below the Subject line,
enter the text of your email.
4[ & ] OPTIONAL Attach one or more files to send with your message.
5Select one of the following options to send your message:
Send Sends the email immediately. If the message is not sent successfully on
the first attempt, it is moved to the Outbox.
Outbox Stores email so you can compose email offline and then send it all
during one connection with the server. To send your email, select Get & Send.
Drafts Saves your message so you can work on it at another time.
Done
Tip
You can’t see the whole
list of addresses in a field
if the list is longer than
two lines. To see the
whole list, select the word
To, cc, or bcc.
LifeDrive from palmOne 377
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
Entering an address using Smart Addressing
Smart Addressing completes a recognized email address.
0
1On the New Message screen, navigate to or tap in the To field.
2Start entering the person’s name.
Smart Addressing displays
matching names and email
addresses from Contacts.
3When the name you want appears, select it to enter it on the To line.
Done
Tip
You can also type the first
initial and last name of
the person you want.
Smart Addressing
displays any entries
matching the initial and
last name.
Tip
Tap the email header icon
in the upper-right corner
of the screen to display
the cc: and bcc: fields.
Email header
LifeDrive from palmOne 378
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
Entering an address directly in the To field
0
1On the New Message screen, select or navigate to the To field.
2Enter an address using one of
the following methods:
To f i e l d Enter the address, and
then select Done. For multiple
addresses, enter a semicolon (;)
and then a space between
recipient names.
Recipient List Select To and
enter the name or address on the
Recipient List screen, and then
select Done. Use the shortcut
buttons at the bottom of the
screen for quick address entry.
For multiple recipients, enter a
semicolon (;) and then a space
between recipient names.
Done
Did You Know?
When you put addresses
in the copies (cc:) field,
they are visible to all
other recipients.
Addresses in the blind
copies (bcc:) field are
hidden from all other
recipients.
Tip
As with Smart
Addressing, when you
begin to enter a name or
address on the Recipient
List screen, VersaMail
displays any matching
entries from Contacts.
Select a match to
automatically enter it in
the Recipient List.
Tip
It’s OK to enter commas
instead of semicolons
between addresses,
because they’re changed
to semicolons. But you
can’t use other
punctuation or no
punctuation between
addresses.
LifeDrive from palmOne 379
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
Entering an address using Contacts
You can enter a recipient’s address by using the Lookup screen to select the address. The names
and addresses on the Lookup screen come from Contacts.
0
1Open the Lookup screen:
a. On the New Message screen, select the word To.
b. On the Recipient List screen, select Lookup.
2Enter the address:
a. On the Address Lookup
screen, select the address you
want, and then select Add.
b. Select Lookup and repeat step
“a” for each address you want
to add.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 380
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
Attaching a personal signature
You can attach a personal signature, with info like your company's address and telephone number,
to the bottom of all messages you send.
0
1Open the VersaMail Preferences:
a. From the Inbox or on another folder screen, open the menus.
b. Select Options, and then select Preferences.
c. Select Signature.
2Add a signature:
a. Check the Attach Signature
box.
b. Enter your signature
information, and then select
OK.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 381
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
Send retry
If a send attempt fails for any reason after you select Send (for example, your device is out of
range, or the application cannot connect to the mail server), you can choose to have the
application move the message to the Outbox and keep trying to send the message every 30
minutes, a maximum of three times.
If you put a message in the Outbox, you must select Send to send the message on the first try. The
VersaMail application attempts automatic send retry only after the first send attempt fails. Keep in
mind the following regarding automatic send retry:
• Automatic send retry occurs only if you select Send to send the message manually. It doesn’t
work if you select Get & Send.
• To select automatic send retry, select Yes in the dialog box notifying you that manual send has
failed.
• If automatic send retry succeeds, the message is moved to the Sent folder.
• If automatic send retry fails after the third try, you must send the message manually.
Send retry notifications
If automatic send retry fails after the third try, a notification appears on the Reminders screen.
Send retry notification features include the following:
• A broken envelope icon shows that automatic send retry has failed. A separate notification
appears for each email account.
• You can choose to disable notifications for send retry failures.
• The Reminders screen shows only the most recent notification for an email account, no matter
how many automatic send retries have been attempted for that account.
Did You Know?
Send retry doesn’t work
for VPN connections, or
for accounts for which
your ISP requires you to
log in to the mail server
before sending mail. It
also doesn’t work if you
have configured the
security preferences on
your device to encrypt
databases on the device.
Tip
Select the notification to
view a detailed error
message. Viewing the
error message deletes the
notification from the
Reminders screen.
LifeDrive from palmOne 382
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
Modifying messages in the Outbox
A message in the Outbox waiting for the next automatic send retry can be edited, moved, or
deleted. However, if you edit the message, you must manually send the message. If the manual
send fails, you can choose to store the message in the Outbox to wait for the next automatic send
retry.
During automatic send retry, any message that the VersaMail application is trying to send is in a
locked state. You cannot edit, move, or delete these messages. If you try to modify a message in
the locked state, an error message appears.
If a send retry fails after the third try, the message is stored in the Outbox in the error state. You
can send the message again manually, or edit, move, or delete the message. However, if you edit
the message, you must send the message manually. If the manual send fails, you can choose to
store the message in the Outbox to wait for the next automatic send retry.
Outbox icons in the VersaMail applications
The icons to the left of a message in the Outbox show the message’s status.
Message is waiting either to be manually sent or to be sent during the next send retry. You
can edit, move, or delete a message in this state.
Send retry is currently in process; you cannot edit, move, or delete a message in this state.
Third automatic send retry has failed. You must manually send a message in this state by
selecting Get & Send.
Tip
If you perform a soft reset
or synchronize during a
send retry, the retry is
canceled. You must
manually send any
messages in the Outbox.
LifeDrive from palmOne 383
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
Working with email folders
By default, the VersaMail application displays the messages in an account’s Inbox folder. You can
easily view the messages in a different folder. You can also customize the appearance of the
message list in your email folders, move messages between folders, and create and edit folders.
Viewing another folder
0
1On a folder screen, select the
folders pick list in the upper-right
corner of the screen.
2Select the folder you want to view.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 384
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
Customizing the appearance of the message list
You can change display options on the message list, as well as the size of columns in the list.
Changing column size is available for one-line message view only.
0
1In the Inbox or on another folder screen, select Display.
2Customize any of the following:
Sort by Select the Sort by pick list,
and then select the column name.
Default is Date.
Sort order Select Descend or
Ascend. Default is Descend.
One- or two-line column view
Select the Show pick list, and then
select 1 line or 2 line view. Default is 2 line.
Columns shown Check the box under the Show pick list for each column you
want to show. The column options change depending on whether you choose a
one-line or a two-line view. Defaults are Sender, Date, and Subject.
Font Select the Font field. Select each pick list in the Select Font dialog box
(Font, Size, Style) and select the option you want. Default is Palm 9 Plain.
Unread and read message color Select the Read and Unread pick lists, and
then select the color you want for each type of message. Default is black.
Continued
Did You Know?
The customization
options you choose apply
to all email folders, not
just the one you are in.
Tip
Select Sort on the
message list to quickly
sort the list by date,
subject, or sender.
NOTE
LifeDrive from palmOne 385
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
3Select OK.
4If you selected 1 line view in step
2, change the size of columns in
the message list:
a. Tap on the column divider.
b. Drag the column divider to
change the width of the
column.
Done
Column divider
LifeDrive from palmOne 386
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
Moving messages between folders
You can move one or more email messages between folders.
0
1In the Inbox or on another folder
screen, select the folder pick list
in the upper-right corner and
select the folder containing the
message(s) you want to move.
Continued
Tip
You can use the 5-way to
move a single message.
Select the message you
want to move, press Right
to open the Message
menu, and then select
Move To. Then select the
folder you want from the
folders list.
Tip
You can also open the
menus, select Message,
and then select Move To.
LifeDrive from palmOne 387
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
2Move a single message:
a. Tap the envelope icon to the left of the message you want to move, and then
select Move To from the list.
b. From the folders list, select the destination folder you want.
3Move multiple messages:
a. Tap to the left of the icon for each message you want to move. A checkmark
appears next to each selected message.
b. Tap a message icon next to a selected message, and then select Move To
from the list.
c. From the folders list, select the destination folder you want.
4Select OK.
Done
Tip
To select a group of
adjacent messages, drag
the stylus to the left of the
message icons.
LifeDrive from palmOne 388
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
Creating and editing mail folders
The VersaMail application has certain preset folders, such as Inbox, Outbox, Sent, Drafts, and
Trash. You can create new folders so that you can store email messages by subject, person, or
project.
0
1In the Inbox or on another folder screen, select the folder pick list in the upper-
right corner, and then select Edit Folders.
2Do one of the following:
Create a new folder Select New,
and then enter the new folder name.
Rename a folder Select the
folder name from the list on the
screen, select Rename, and then
enter the new folder name.
Delete a folder Select the folder
name from the list on the screen, and
then select Delete.
For IMAP accounts only, check the box if you want the change (create,
rename, or delete) to take place on the server as well as on your device.
3Select Done.
Done
NOTE
LifeDrive from palmOne 389
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
Working with email messages
When you receive an email message, you can reply to it or forward it to someone else. You can
also open web addresses (URLs) within messages.
Forwarding an email message
0
1On a folder screen, select the folder pick list in the upper-right corner, and then
select the folder that contains the message you want to forward.
2Select the message you want to
forward:
a. Select the email message to
open it.
b. Select Fwd (Forward).
3[ & ] OPTIONAL Add any desired text to the message beneath the subject line.
4Address and send the message.
Done
Did You Know?
You can forward email
messages from any
folder other than the
Outbox folder.
Did You Know?
Forwarded messages are
always sent as text only,
even if you received the
original message in
HTML format.
Select Fwd
LifeDrive from palmOne 390
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
Replying to an email message
You can reply to an email message as you are reading it, or you can reply to messages in the
message list.
0
1Select the message you want to reply to.
2Create the reply:
a. Select Reply.
b. Select whether to reply to the sender only or to all message recipients listed
in the menu.
c. Enter a reply.
3Select Send to send the reply now, Outbox to send it later, or Drafts to work on
it later.
Done
Did You Know?
Replies are always sent as
text only, even if you
received the original
message in HTML format.
Tip
On the message screen,
you can also select Reply
from the Options menu.
Tip
To reply to a message
from the message list, tap
the envelope icon next to
the message you want,
and then select Reply
from the list. Or open the
Options menu and select
Reply.
LifeDrive from palmOne 391
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
Setting reply preferences
You can set reply preferences, including whether to include the original message text in a reply, as
well as the name and email address to show on your reply. The preferences you set apply to all
reply messages you send.
0
1Open Reply Options preferences:
a. In the Inbox or on another folder screen, open the menus.
b. Select Options, and then select Preferences.
c. Select Reply Options.
Continued
LifeDrive from palmOne 392
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
2Set the preferences you want:
Message text Select whether to
include original message text with
a reply.
Your name Enter the name you
want to appear on your outgoing
messages, such as “Joe Smith.”
Reply to Address with Enter the
email address that you want
recipients to see and reply to on your email messages, only if this is different
from the email address from which you are sending the message. For example,
if you are sending a message from me@yahoo.com but you want recipients to
reply to me@earthlink.net, enter the reply-to address here. A reply-to address
makes it look as though the email came from the address you entered.
BCC Check the BCC box to send a blind copy of any email message you send
to another email address. The blind copy email address is not seen by the other
recipients of the message. For example, if you want a copy of all messages you
send from your device to be sent to your corporate email account, enter that
email address.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 393
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
Working with URLs, email addresses, and phone numbers in a
message
In email messages you receive, you can do the following:
• Select a URL to view the web page or file associated with the URL. Selecting the URL opens the
web browser on your device so that you can view the page or file.
• Select an email address to open a new message screen with the address in the To field.
• Select a phone number to dial that number.
Deleting a message
You can delete email messages from any folder. For example, you can delete old messages in the
Inbox or messages that you were working on in the Drafts folder. When you delete a message, it is
placed in the Tr a s h folder.
0
1On a folder screen, select the folders pick list, and then select the folder that
contains the message you want to delete.
2Select the bullet next to the icon of each message that you want to delete. To
select adjacent messages, drag the stylus across the bullet to the left of each
message. Lift the stylus and drag again to select additional adjacent messages.
Continued
Tip
URLs, email addresses,
and phone numbers in
HTML messages appear
as blue underlined text. In
text messages, most
URLs begin with “http://”
or “www.” To view a page
or file associated with a
URL that does not begin
with “http://” or “www,”
select the URL, copy it,
and paste it into the
address bar in the web
browser.
Tip
To receive an alert
confirming that you want
to delete a message,
open the Preferences
menu, select Deletion,
and check the Confirm
deletions box.
LifeDrive from palmOne 394
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
Deleting old messages
0
3Delete the message or messages:
a. Open the menus.
b. Select Delete in the Message menu.
c. Select Also delete message(s) on server if you want to delete the messages
from the server now.
If you delete a message from the server, you cannot retrieve it
and view it again later.
d. Select OK.
Done
1Open the Delete Old Messages dialog box:
a. On a folder screen, open the menus.
b. Select Delete Old on the Message menu.
Continued
IMPORTANT
[!]
Tip
You can also select the
message icon next to a
message and select
Delete in the menu to
delete a message.
Tip
To delete messages on
the server when you
empty the trash on your
device, select the Delete
Msgs on Server setting in
VersaMail Preferences.
Many email providers
have size restrictions for
mail storage. If your
mailbox on the server
becomes full, messages
are returned to the
senders.
LifeDrive from palmOne 395
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
2Choose settings for deleting old
messages:
a. Select the Folder pick list, and
then select the folder that
contains the messages you
want to delete.
b. Select the Older than pick list,
and then select One Week,
One Month, or Choose Date. If
you select Choose Date, select
a date from the calendar.
3Delete messages:
a. Select Delete.
b. Select Also delete message(s) on
server if you want to delete the
messages from the server now.
If you delete a message from the server, you cannot retrieve it
and view it again later.
c. Select OK.
Done
Did You Know?
Messages you delete
from a folder are moved
to the Trash folder and
remain there until you
empty the trash.
IMPORTANT
[!]
LifeDrive from palmOne 396
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
Emptying the trash
When you delete a message, it is moved to the Trash folder. Deleted email accumulates in the
Trash folder and takes up space on your device. To increase memory, you should empty the trash
regularly.
0
1Open the Empty Trash dialog box:
a. On a folder screen, open the menus.
b. Select Empty Trash on the Message menu.
If you select to automatically empty the trash, a message asks if you
want to delete the trash.
2[ & ] OPTIONAL Select Details to see how many messages are in the trash and
whether the messages are set to be deleted from the server.
3Select one of the following options for emptying the trash:
To delete messages from your device as well as from the server Select Both.
Select Yes if you want to update the server now.
To delete the message from only your device now Select Device.
Done
Tip
You can set a preference
to automatically empty
the trash.
Did You Know?
Many email providers,
such as Yahoo!, have size
restrictions for mail
storage. If your mailbox
on the server becomes
full, messages are
returned to the senders. NOTE
LifeDrive from palmOne 397
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
Setting the trash to be emptied automatically
0
1Open the Deletion preferences:
a. Open the menus.
b. Select Options, and then select Preferences.
c. Select Deletion.
2Select the settings for automatically
emptying the trash:
a. Check the Auto-Empty Mail from
Trash box if it is not checked.
b. Select the pick list, and then select
one of the following:
• Select Immediately if you want the
trash emptied automatically each
time you delete messages.
• Select a time period if you want messages emptied from the trash
periodically.
c. Select OK.
Done
Did You Know?
By default, trash is set to
be emptied automatically,
and the time interval is
set at Older Than 1 Day.
LifeDrive from palmOne 398
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
Marking messages as read or unread
When you select a message to read it, it is automatically marked as read. You can also manually
mark messages as read or unread.
0
1Select the message or messages to mark:
a. In the Inbox or on another folders screen, select the folders pick list, and then
select the folder containing the message you want to mark.
b. Select the icon next to the message you want to mark. To mark multiple
messages, select the bullets next to the messages you want to mark.
2Do one of the following to mark
the message or messages:
Single message Select Mark
Read or Mark Unread from the
list.
Multiple messages Open the
menus, select Message, and then
select Mark Read or Mark
Unread.
Continued
Did You Know?
In one-line view, read
messages appear in plain
text in the message list;
unread messages appear
in bold text.
Did You Know?
POP mail servers do not
support the read or
unread message feature.
For POP accounts,
messages that you mark
appear in plain or bold
text on your device, but
the difference is not
recognized on the server.
LifeDrive from palmOne 399
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
Working with attachments
Email may contain attached files, such as Microsoft Word documents, photos, or videos, that you
want to save, view, or install on your device. When you receive a message that has an attachment,
the VersaMail application scans your device to see if you have an application that can open the
attachment.
Attachment file types you can download and open include photos and videos; Microsoft Word,
Excel, and PowerPoint files; HTML pages; text files; and information from applications on your
device such as Contacts, Calendar, and Tasks.
You can also work with attached Palm OS® applications and related files (PRC and PDB files), as
well as compressed ZIP files that contain other files.
3For IMAP accounts only, select one
of the following:
To mark the messages as read or
unread on your device only
Select Device.
To mark the messages on both your
device and the server and have the
messages marked on the server immediately Select Both, and then select OK
on the confirmation screen.
To mark the messages on both the device and the server and have the
messages marked on the server the next time you synchronize or connect to
the server Select Both, and then select Cancel on the confirmation screen.
Done
Tip
Selecting Both and then
OK also processes any
other pending actions on
the server, such as
deleting messages in the
Trash folder.
LifeDrive from palmOne 400
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
For other types of files, your device may contain a viewer that can open and view attachments for
that file type. You can open the attachment only if your device has such a viewer. Among the file
types that may be supported are MP3 and AAC files.
Working with a downloaded attachment
In the message list, a paper clip on a message’s envelope icon indicates that the message has an
attachment that has been downloaded. You can save an attached file or view, edit, or install the
file, depending on the file type.
0
1In the Inbox, select the message
with the attachment.
2[ & ] OPTIONAL If you choose to get messages by subject only, or if you
choose to get entire messages but the message plus any attachments exceeds
your maximum message size, select More to view the body of the email
message plus any attachments. If prompted, select Yes if you want to download
an attachment that exceeds your maximum message size.
Continued
Tip
If an attachment is not
downloaded, the paper
clip does not appear on
the envelope icon. You
need to open the
message and download
the complete message to
see if there are any
attachments.
Did You Know?
You can download a
maximum of ten
attachments for any
received messages.
Paper clip
LifeDrive from palmOne 401
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
3Select the attachment you want
from the list at the bottom of the
screen, and then do one of the
following:
To open the attachment in the
default viewer Ta p t he
attachment name.
To open the attachment menu
Tap the folder icon to the left of
the attachment name.
4[ & ] OPTIONAL If you open the
attachment menu, select Save to
card to save the attachment to the
hard drive or to an expansion card,
or do one of the following,
depending on the attachment file
type:
Viewable file: text, Word document,
task, HTML, graphic, and so on
Select View to view the attachment,
or select Select Viewer to choose a
viewer for that attachment. For example, if you have two photo-viewing
applications on your device and you select a photo attachment from the list, you
can select which application to use to view the photo.
Continued
Did You Know?
Because downloading
large messages can
consume device
resources, the VersaMail
application displays the
size and asks if you want
to continue downloading
any message that
exceeds your maximum
message size, up to a
total size of 5MB.
Tip
Downloaded attachments
are automatically saved
to the VersaMail
Attachments folder on the
hard drive. Select Save if
you want to also save the
attachment to a specific
location on the drive or to
an expansion card.
Tip
Tap and hold the stylus
on the line above the
attachment name and
drag the line up to view
more downloaded
attachments.
LifeDrive from palmOne 402
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
Cont’d
Palm OS application or database file (PRC or PDB) Select View. The file is
installed automatically.
Compressed Zip file Select Unzip. The file decompresses, and the files it
contains are listed. Select the name of the file you want, and then select Save,
View, or Install.
5When you finish with the attachment, do one of the following:
Done button appears on screen Select Done. This returns you to the list of
attachments, where you can select another attachment.
No Done button appears Go to Favorites and select VersaMail to return
to the Inbox of the account you were viewing.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 403
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
Saving attachments
Downloaded attachments are saved automatically to a default location on your device’s hard
drive; in addition, you can manually save them to a location you choose.
You cannot create any subfolders in the VersaMail Attachments folder. You can
manually save attachments to any other folder or subfolder on the hard drive.
Automatic By default, whenever an attachment is downloaded, it is saved in the VersaMail
Attachments folder on your drive. The email message containing the attachment is saved in your
device’s program memory; only the attachment is saved on the drive.
Items in the VersaMail Attachments folder remain linked to the message to which they were
attached. For example, if you delete the message in VersaMail, the attachment is deleted from the
folder. Or, if the message is automatically deleted after a certain number of days, the attachment is
deleted from the folder at that time.
You can view and work with attachments in the VersaMail Attachments folder in the same way that
you can view and work with any other file on your drive. Use Files to open, edit, or move the
attachment, or use LifeDrive™ Manager to copy the attachment to your computer or to identify it
as a sync item.
If you edit an attachment in the VersaMail Attachments folder, you are prompted to save
the attachment to a different location on the drive so that the original attachment stays unchanged.
Manual When an attachment is downloaded, you can choose to save the attachment to a
location you specify on your drive or to an expansion card. If you choose this option, the
attachment is saved both in the VersaMail Attachments folder and to the selected location, where
you can work with it as you do with any other file on the drive or on an expansion card.
Attachments you manually save are no longer linked to the original message. If you delete the
message in VersaMail, the attachment remains on the drive or on the card.
Did You Know?
Attachments must be
fully downloaded before
they appear in the
VersaMail Attachments
folder. This may take a
few minutes for large
attachments.
NOTE
NOTE
LifeDrive from palmOne 404
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
Attaching files to outgoing messages
You can attach files on your device to email messages you send. For example, you can attach
photos or videos; Word, Excel, and PowerPoint files; and entries from Contacts, Calendar, Memos,
and Tasks.
The maximum size message you can send is 60KB for the body text and approximately 5MB of
total data for any attachments. The maximum number of attachments for any email message is
ten, regardless of the attachments’ total size.
0
1On the New Message screen, tap
the red paper clip icon in the
upper-right corner.
Continued
Tip
If you open a message
from the Drafts folder,
you must first select Edit
before you can add an
attachment.
Did You Know?
You can attach a file to
forwarded messages and
replies as well as to
messages you create.
Tip
You can attach files from
any location on the hard
drive or from an
expansion card inserted
into your device’s
expansion card slot.
Tap here
LifeDrive from palmOne 405
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
0
2Attach the file:
a. Select the Type pick list, and then select the file type. The VersaMail
application displays all file types on your device that you can attach to an
email message. Or select to browse files on your device’s hard drive or on an
expansion card.
b. Select the file that you want to attach, select Add or Attach, and then select
Done. For photos and videos, check the box next to the items you want, and
then select Done.
For some file types—for example, addresses or memos—the files to
attach appear in the box at the top of the Attachments screen. For others—for
example, Word or Excel files—a new screen appears from which you can select
the file to attach.
c. Repeat steps a and b for each attachment you want to add, and then select
Done.
Done
Did You Know?
If you select Files on Card,
the VersaMail application
displays all file types on
the card. You can select a
particular file type, or
select All Files to view all
files on the card.
Tip
To remove an attachment
from an email message,
select the attached file in
the Attachments box, and
then select Delete.
NOTE
LifeDrive from palmOne 406
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
Advanced VersaMail application features
You can customize and optimize your experience using the VersaMail application in any of the
following ways:
• Creating and using filters to determine the types of email messages that are downloaded to your
device
• Managing settings for incoming and outgoing mail
• Adding APOP to an account
• Setting advanced account preferences
• Changing email header details
• Backing up mail databases
• Synchronizing IMAP mail folders wirelessly
• Working with root folders
• Using Secure Sockets Layer (SSL)
Creating and using filters
Filters provide efficient ways to manage email retrieval and storage. When you select Get or Get &
Send, filters determine which email messages are downloaded to your device and in which folder
the downloaded messages are stored.
If you create a filter, only messages that meet the filter criteria are downloaded
to your device. You don’t see any other messages that have been sent to you, even in your Inbox.
To avoid this, you must set up two filters. For example, suppose you create a filter to have all
messages with “onlinebroker” in the From field moved to your Finance folder. You must then
create a second filter specifying that all mail not containing “onlinebroker” in the From field
should be moved to the Inbox (or other folder you designate). If you don’t create this second filter,
only messages containing “onlinebroker” in the From field are downloaded to your device.
IMPORTANT
[!]
LifeDrive from palmOne 407
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
0
1Go to Favorites and select VersaMail .
2Open the Filters dialog box:
a. In the Inbox or on another folder screen, open the menus.
b. Select Options, and then select Preferences.
c. Select Filters.
d. Select New.
Continued
Tip
Use filters to organize
your incoming messages.
For example, create a
filter so that whenever
you receive email about
sales meetings, it goes
immediately into a folder
you create called Sales.
Or create a filter so that
stock quotes sent to you
by your online brokerage
service go to a folder you
create called Finance.
LifeDrive from palmOne 408
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
3Enter the filter information:
a. Enter a short description of the
filter in the Name field.
b. Enter filter criteria:
To p i c k l i s t Select the message
header field with the information
contained in the edit line: To,
From, Subject, cc, Size.
For example, you might select
From to download only messages from a particular sender.
Contains pick list Select a filter action: Contains, Starts with, Does NOT
Contain.
Edit line Enter the text that must be found in the header field. For example, if
you want to sort email with the subject Sales, enter “Sales.” If you enter more
than one criteria, separate each with a comma—for example, Sales, New York.
Then get mail and move to pick list Select the folder or mailbox into which
you want your filtered email to go. You can also create a new folder for storing
the incoming email. Select Edit Folders, and then create a new folder or delete
or rename existing ones.
c. Select OK. The filter appears in the Filters list.
Done
Did You Know?
Filters you create on your
device also apply when
you synchronize
email on your device with
email on your computer.
LifeDrive from palmOne 409
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
Turning filters on and off
A filter that is turned on applies to all subsequent downloads of email until you deselect it. More
than one filter can be in effect at once. Before you download email, be sure to turn on the filters
you want and turn off those you don’t want.
0
1Open the Filters dialog box:
a. In the Inbox or on another
folder screen, open the
menus.
b. Select Options, and then
select Preferences.
c. Select Filters. The Filters
dialog box appears with the
filters you created.
Continued
Tip
Filters that are turned on
execute in the order in
which they appear on the
Filters list. To ensure that
filters execute in the
correct order, move them
up and down the list by
selecting the pick list to
the left of the filter name.
LifeDrive from palmOne 410
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
2Turn filters on or off:
a. Select the pick list in the upper-left
corner and select one of the
following:
Connected Applies a filter to
messages downloaded to your
handheld over a network connection.
Synchronize Applies a filter to
messages downloaded to your handheld when you synchronize.
b. Check or uncheck the filter boxes to select the filters you do and don’t want
to use for subsequent email transactions.
c. Select OK.
Done
Tip
If you don’t want a filter to
apply to any downloads
at all, be sure to deselect
the filter under both
Connected and
Synchronize.
LifeDrive from palmOne 411
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
Editing or deleting a filter
0
1Select the filter to edit or delete:
a. In the Inbox or on another folder screen, open the menus.
b. Select Options, and then select Preferences.
c. Select Filters, and then select the name of the filter.
2Do one of the following:
Edit Revise your entry in the Name field, your selections in the pick lists, or the
text in the edit line. Select OK.
Delete Select Delete, select Yes to confirm the deletion, and then select OK.
3Select OK.
Done
Tip
Edit a filter to change
either its name or any of
its criteria.
LifeDrive from palmOne 412
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
Setting connection preferences
0
1Open the Connection Preferences screen:
a. In the Inbox or on another folder screen, open the menus.
b. Select Options, and then select Preferences.
c. Select Connection.
2Select any of the following
preferences:
Timeout Sets the number of
seconds to try to connect before
timing out. To change the timeout
period, select the Timeout field
and enter a new value.
Auto-disconnect Automatically
disconnects your remote
connections after each command.
Each command you perform initiates a new call to your ISP. This setting is not
recommended if you plan to perform multiple email transactions in a short
amount of time.
Continued
Tip
Any connection
preferences you set are
account-specific; they
apply only to the account
you are currently in.
Did You Know?
The default Timeout
setting is 45 seconds. It
can be any number
greater than 0 seconds;
however, if you set the
number too low, your
connection attempt may
time out before you make
a connection with the
email service provider.
LifeDrive from palmOne 413
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
Setting server preferences
Server preferences differ for POP and IMAP email accounts.
0
Cont’d
Disconnect on Exit Disconnects from the network only after you leave
VersaMail. This feature is an alternative to Auto-disconnect. This option keeps
your connection active while you perform multiple transactions in the
VersaMail application, but automatically disconnects when you move on to a
different application on your device. If this option is not selected, you must
manually disconnect from your ISP.
Modem wait Displays the number of seconds that the modem takes to
initialize itself. If you have a modem, select and enter a number of seconds for
the wait. The typical setting for a wireless modem is 3, and the typical setting
for most normal modems is 0.
Done
1Open the Server Preferences screen:
a. In the Inbox or on another folder screen, open the menus.
b. Select Options, and then select Preferences.
c. Select Server.
Continued
LifeDrive from palmOne 414
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
2Select any of the following
preferences:
Leave mail on server (POP
accounts only) To get email on
your device but leave it on the
server so you can view it later on
your computer, check the Leave
mail on server box.
Root Folders (IMAP accounts
only) Defines the root folder on
your IMAP server.
Deleted Mail (IMAP accounts only) Stores deleted email in the folder you
specify on the server.
Sent Mail (IMAP accounts only) Shows the name of your Sent Mail folder on
the server.
Delete mail on the server Check this box to delete messages on your
provider’s mail server when they are deleted in the VersaMail application.
Done
Tip
Any server preferences
you set are account-
specific; they apply only
to the account you are
currently viewing.
LifeDrive from palmOne 415
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
Changing email header details
When viewing a message in any folder, you can change the view of the message header. The
email header options are as follows:
Short header Shows sender’s name or address (From field) and subject line (Subj field).
Full header Shows the following:
• Sender’s name or email address (From field)
• Subject line (Subj field)
• Date message was composed, sent, or received (Date field)
• Size of message including any attachments (Size field)
• Recipient’s name or email address (To field)
Select icon to switch to full
header
Select icon to switch to short
header
LifeDrive from palmOne 416
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
You can also switch between a short header and a full header for a message you are composing.
Short header shows the To and Subject fields only; full header shows the To, cc:, bcc:, and Subject
fields.
To switch between short and full headers on either a folder screen or a message screen, select the
header icon in the upper-right corner of the screen.
Synchronizing IMAP mail folders wirelessly
If you create an IMAP folder in an account on your device that matches a folder on the mail server,
you can wirelessly synchronize email messages that you move into or out of the IMAP folder or
that you delete in the folder with messages on your device.
When you synchronize a folder with your device, any email messages in the selected folder on the
mail server are downloaded to the same folder on your device. Any messages moved out of the
selected folder on your device or deleted on your device are moved or deleted in the folder on the
mail server.
Select to switch to
full header
Select to switch
to short header
LifeDrive from palmOne 417
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
Prerequisites for wireless IMAP folder synchronization
Depending on how you have set up IMAP folders on your device and/or the mail server, you may
need to do one of the following before you can wirelessly synchronize email messages on your
device with messages on the server:
• If you need to create a folder on both your device and the server, create the folder on your
device and check the Also create on server box.
• If there is a folder on the mail server but you need to create it on your device, you do not need to
check the Also create on server box.
You can turn folder synchronization on or off when getting mail, or you can set synchronization
options from a menu.
Turning IMAP folder synchronization on or off
If you choose to display the Get Mail Options dialog box, you can turn IMAP folder
synchronization on or off in the box.
0
1From within an IMAP email account, select Get or Get & Send.
2Check or uncheck the Sync IMAP
Folders box, and then select OK.
Done
Did You Know?
You can synchronize
folders whose names are
up to 16 characters in
length. You can
synchronize up to 11
custom folders you
create, in addition to the
default folders Inbox,
Outbox, Drafts, Sent, and
Trash.
Tip
If you have a folder on
your handheld that
matches a folder on the
mail server, you do not
need to do anything
before synchronizing
wirelessly.
LifeDrive from palmOne 418
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
Synchronizing device and mail server IMAP folders from the
Options menu
0
Working with root folders
For IMAP accounts, if you want to synchronize email messages on your device with messages on
the mail server folder, you need to enter the root folder for the account on your device.
Check with your email provider to find out the root folder for your IMAP account.
Using Secure Sockets Layer (SSL)
Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a protocol designed to ensure that data you send or receive over a
network or the Internet is secure and authentic. The VersaMail application uses SSL to help
guarantee the secure transmission of email messages that you send or receive. When you set up
an account in the VersaMail application, you are given the option of selecting SSL for incoming
and outgoing mail.
1Open the Sync IMAP Folders screen:
a. In the Inbox or on another folder screen of an IMAP account, open the
menus.
b. Select Options, and then select Sync IMAP Folders.
2Select the folder or folders you want to synchronize from the pick list.
Done
Did You Know?
After you select the
folders to synchronize, a
connection is made to
your email service
provider to update the
server with changes from
your handheld, and to
update your device with
changes from the server.
LifeDrive from palmOne 419
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
For most email providers that support SSL, you must select SSL for both
incoming and outgoing mail. If you select just one or the other, your messages cannot be sent or
received successfully.
If you set up an account that uses an SSL connection on Outlook, Outlook Express, or Eudora, then
SSL is supported in the VersaMail conduit when you synchronize with that account as well.
Working with Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync
If your corporate email system uses Microsoft Exchange Server 2003, you may be able to use
Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync® on your device. Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync works with the
VersaMail and Calendar applications on your device to directly download email and calendar
information from the server—without going through your desktop computer.
When you create a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account in the VersaMail application, both your
email and calendar info synchronize directly with info on the Exchange server; they do not
synchronize with info in your desktop software application, such as Palm®Desktop software or
Microsoft Outlook. Other information on your device, such as contacts, tasks, and memos,
continues to synchronize with information in your desktop software application.
What do I need to use Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync?
To use Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync on your device, you must obtain the following information
from your system administrator:
• Whether the corporate mail system uses a Microsoft Exchange 2003 mail server. If it does not,
you cannot use Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync.
• The name of the mail server that provides wireless access to your mail system. Some
companies do not give out this information because they do not want wireless access to the
system. If you cannot obtain the server name, you cannot use Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync.
• Whether a proxy server is used, and, if so, the name of the server.
• Whether a virtual private network (VPN) is required to access the server.
IMPORTANT
[!]
LifeDrive from palmOne 420
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
How does a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync email account differ from
other accounts?
An email account that uses Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync differs from other accounts in the
following areas:
• Setting up an account
• Getting messages
• Sending messages
• Downloading attachments
• Receiving and working with meeting invitations
• Receiving and working with Calendar events
These features are discussed in this chapter. Most other features of a Microsoft Exchange
ActiveSync account, such as attaching files to messages, work like the features of any other
account.
Email accounts that use Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync do not support mail filters.
Also, you cannot set server preferences from the VersaMail Preferences screen for this type of
account.
Setting up a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account
Although Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync works with both the VersaMail and Calendar
applications, you must set up a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account in VersaMail.
On a Windows computer, you can quickly set up a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account on
your computer and then synchronize the settings to your device. On a Mac computer, you must set
up the account on your device. You can set up only one Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account.
NOTE
Did You Know?
When you set up a
Microsoft Exchange
ActiveSync account, all
existing Calendar events
are purged from your
device. Then, when you
synchronize your device
with your Exchange
server, events from the
past seven days are
downloaded to your
device. So you don’t end
up with duplicate events.
Tip
Another way an account
that uses Microsoft
Exchange ActiveSync
differs from other
accounts is that there is
no bcc option when you
send a message.
LifeDrive from palmOne 421
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
If you set up an email account to use Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync, Calendar
events on your device automatically synchronize directly with info on the Exchange server, along
with email messages. You cannot choose to synchronize Calendar events with info in
Palm Desktop software or Outlook once you set up a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync email
account. If you do not want to synchronize Calendar events with info on the server, do not set up
a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account in VersaMail.
Setting up a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account on your
computer
WINDOWS ONLY
0
1Open VersaMail account setup.
2Select your username from the drop-down list at the top of the screen, and then
select the option to create a new VersaMail email account. Click Next.
3Select the option to synchronize with a mail service from this list, and then
select Exchange ActiveSync. Click Next.
Continued
IMPORTANT
[!]
Did You Know?
If you set up a Microsoft
Exchange ActiveSync
account on your
computer, you cannot
synchronize email
messages and Calendar
events on your computer
with messages and
events on your device by
doing a full sync. You
must select Sync within
VersaMail to synchronize
messages and events on
your computer with
messages and events on
your device.
LifeDrive from palmOne 422
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
4Enter the basic account information:
a. Enter a descriptive name for the
account.
b. Enter your account username
and password.
c. Enter your email address for
this account.
d. Click Next.
5Enter the name of the Exchange
server, the port number for the
server, and the maximum
message size you want to
download. Check one or both
boxes if the server requires
authentication and/or if you are
using a proxy server. Check with
your system administrator to
obtain this information.
Continued
LifeDrive from palmOne 423
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
6[ & ] OPTIONAL If you are using a proxy server, enter the server name. Click
Next.
7[ & ] OPTIONAL To test the account settings you have entered, click Test My
Settings. Click OK after settings have been tested.
8Click Finish.
9Do one of the following:
a. To synchronize the account information to your device, click the top button.
b. To set up another email account, click the bottom button.
You can set up only one Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account. If
you choose to set up another email account, it must be a different type.
10 Click Next.
11 When you have finished setting up all accounts, click Finish on the Transfer
Settings screen.
Done
NOTE
LifeDrive from palmOne 424
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
Setting up an account on your device
0
1Go to Favorites and select VersaMail .
2Open the Account Setup screen:
a. Open the menus.
b. Select Accounts, and then
select Account Setup.
c. Select New.
3Enter the basic account information:
a. In the Account Name field, enter
a descriptive name.
b. Select the Mail Service pick list,
and then select Exchange
ActiveSync.
c. Select Next.
Continued
LifeDrive from palmOne 425
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
4Enter the account username and
password:
a. Enter the username you use
to access your email.
b. Select the Password box,
enter your email account
password, and then select OK.
c. Select Next.
5Enter your email address and
Exchange mail server name.
Select Next.
Continued
LifeDrive from palmOne 426
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
6Do one of the following:
Finish setup Select Done to
finish setup and go to the Inbox
of the account you set up, where
you can begin getting and
sending email.
Set additional mail options
Select Advanced to set advanced
mail options.
Test settings Select Test My
Settings to test settings for this
account, and then select Done.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 427
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
Setting advanced mail options on your device
0
1Set incoming mail server
options:
a. Select any of the following:
Port Number By default, the port
number setting is 443. You may need
to change the port number if you
choose not to retrieve incoming mail
over a secure connection.
Use Secure Connection (SSL) By default, this box is checked, meaning you
can retrieve incoming mail over a secure (Secure Sockets Layer, or SSL)
connection. Uncheck the box if you do not want to receive email over an SSL
connection.
b. Select Next.
2If you use a proxy server, enter the
proxy server name and port
number, and check the box if your
server requires authentication.
Check with your system
administrator for this information.
When you have finished, select
Done.
Done
Tip
In most cases, you do not
need to change the
default advanced mail
options. Check with your
system administrator to
see if you need to change
the port number, uncheck
the Use Secure
Connection box, or enter
proxy server information.
LifeDrive from palmOne 428
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
Getting email messages
The steps you take for manually getting messages in a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account
are the same as for all other accounts, with one exception: You select Sync instead of Get or Get &
Send.
However, what takes place during message retrieval for this type of account is different from that
of other accounts. Here are the important differences:
These differences apply to an account that uses Microsoft Exchange AutoSync whether
you manually retrieve messages or set up an Auto Sync schedule.
Message retrieval When you get messages manually or through Auto Sync, Microsoft Exchange
ActiveSync not only retrieves email messages directly from the server for the time interval set on
your device (default is seven days); it also retrieves all Calendar events directly from the server for
the preceding seven days. The interval for Calendar event retrieval is always seven days,
regardless of the interval you set on your device.
Wireless synchronization Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync supports wireless synchronization
with the server only. To retrieve email messages and Calendar events, you must select Sync in
VersaMail to make a wireless connection to the server. If you synchronize your device with your
computer, info from other applications—Contacts, Memos, and so on—is synchronized, but email
messages and Calendar events are not.
Message removal Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync removes any email messages from your
device that fall outside the time interval set on the device. For example, if the time interval is set at
seven days, any email messages that are eight days old are removed from your device. This info is
not removed from the Exchange server.
Tip
Increase the time interval
for how many days’
worth of email to retrieve
so that recent messages
are not removed from
your device. Note that the
interval for Calendar
event retrieval is always
seven days.
Did You Know?
When you set
preferences for getting
messages for a Microsoft
Exchange ActiveSync
account, the Ask Every
Time option does not
appear.
NOTE
LifeDrive from palmOne 429
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
0
Sending messages
You manually send messages from a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account in the same way
that you send messages from any other type of account. However, Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync
accounts feature a “Live Outbox”: If a message isn’t sent successfully the first time, the message
is stored in the Outbox and VersaMail keeps trying to send the message until it is successful.
1Go to Favorites and select VersaMail .
2[ & ] OPTIONAL If you are using a VPN connection, connect to your VPN.
3Get messages:
a. Open the menus.
b. Select Accounts, and then
select your Microsoft
Exchange ActiveSync
account.
c. Select Sync. This updates
your Calendar events also.
A list of your messages appears in the Inbox. To see downloaded
Calendar events, tap Calendar .
Did You Know?
When you synchronize a
Microsoft Exchange
ActiveSync account,
a copy of any messages
sent from your device is
placed in the Sent Items
folder on the Exchange
server. A copy of any
messages deleted from
your device is placed in
the Deleted Items folder
on the server.
Did You Know?
When you forward or
reply to a message, the
text is sent from the
server copy of the
message, not from the
copy on your device. This
is faster and may save on
data charges. Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 430
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
Because of the Live Outbox feature, you do not need to set up scheduled sending retry for a
Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account.
Previewing attachments
0
Working with meeting invitations
For Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync accounts only, each time you retrieve messages either
manually or through Auto Sync, Exchange meeting invitations are downloaded to your Inbox.
You cannot create meeting invitations on your device. You can only receive meeting
invitations sent to you.
Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync accounts let you view a list of
all attachments to a message, with approximate file size, so
you can decide which ones you want to download. Unlike
with other accounts, you do not need to fully download a
message to view the list of attachments; it appears dimmed at
the bottom of the message screen whether or not the
message is fully downloaded. Also unlike other accounts, a
paper clip icon appears next to a message with an attachment
in the Inbox whether or not the attachment is fully
downloaded.
Select an attachment from the list to download it. Once the
message is downloaded, you can work with it just like any
you work with other attachment.
Did You Know?
For Microsoft Exchange
ActiveSync accounts, if
you turn off your device
or go outside a coverage
area while a message is
still in the Outbox, the
VersaMail® application
will try to send the
message when you turn
your device back on or re-
enter a coverage area.
Tip
You can add names and
email addresses directly
to Contacts from the To
field of an invitation.
Did You Know?
If you receive meeting
invitations, the
Reminders screen
displays both the number
of new email messages
and the number of new
meeting invitations for
that account—for
example, 5 new
messages/2 new
meetings.
NOTE
LifeDrive from palmOne 431
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
0
1Go to Favorites and select VersaMail .
2Get messages.
3Select a meeting invitation to
open it. Meeting invitations are
displayed with a unique icon .
4[ & ] OPTIONAL If the invitation contains an attachment, open the attachment
and view or save it before responding to the invitation. Once you respond to the
invitation the attachment is removed.
Continued
Tip
After opening an
invitation, you can switch
between full and concise
meeting details by
switching between full
header view and short
header view.
Did You Know?
You can forward meeting
invitations in the same
way that you forward
email messages. The
recipient receives the
message as a meeting
invitation.
LifeDrive from palmOne 432
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
5Respond to the invitation:
a. After reading the invitation,
select Accept , Decline ,
or Tentative (tentatively
accept).
b. Select the response option you
want from the dialog box:
Respond without comments Sends
an immediate email response to the
meeting organizer by means of the Exchange server.
Respond with comments Opens an email response form to which you can
add comments before sending your response. Select Send to send the response
to the meeting organizer by means of the Exchange server.
Don’t respond Updates the server with your reply, but does not send a
response to the meeting organizer.
If you decline an invitation, the invitation is automatically put into the
Trash folder.
Done
Did You Know?
When you send your
response, the server is
updated with the new
meeting event and
immediately
synchronizes the event to
the Calendar application
on your device. If you
select Accept, the event
appears as a confirmed
appointment.
Tip
If you receive an updated
meeting invitation, you
can again choose to
accept, decline, or
tentatively accept. If you
receive a meeting
cancellation, you don’t
need to do anything. NOTE
LifeDrive from palmOne 433
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
Working with Calendar events
When you set up an account in VersaMail that uses Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync, the Calendar
application is synchronized directly with the info on the Exchange server as well. Any new
Calendar events on the server for the preceding seven days are downloaded to your device. The
interval for synchronizing Calendar events is always seven days, even if you set a different interval
on your device for synchronizing email messages.
You cannot choose to synchronize Calendar events with info in Palm Desktop
software or Outlook once you set up a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync email account. If you want
to stop synchronizing Calendar events with the server, you must delete the Microsoft Exchange
ActiveSync email account.
Only Calendar and VersaMail information is synchronized directly with info on the Exchange
server. Other information on your device, such as contacts, tasks, and memos, continues to be
synchronized with information in your desktop software application—either Palm Desktop or
Outlook.
When using Calendar with Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync, note the following important features:
Time zones Time zones are always included for Calendar events when you use Microsoft
Exchange ActiveSync. When you synchronize your device with the Exchange server and download
new events, the time zone information is included with each event. If you travel to a different time
zone, the event times are automatically adjusted in Calendar on your device when you update
your location on your device.
Attendees For meetings, you can see a full list of attendees to the meeting. From the Day View,
select the event, and then select Details. Select the With field.
The Attendees field does not appear if the event is not a meeting. It is not available for
events you create on your device.
IMPORTANT
[!]
NOTE
LifeDrive from palmOne 434
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
Synchronizing Calendar events using Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync
When you synchronize Calendar events with the info on Exchange server, all of the following take
place:
• Any events you create on your device are synchronized with info on the server.
You cannot create meeting invitations on your device. You can only receive meeting
invitations sent to you.
• Any events you create or change in Outlook on your computer that are on the Exchange server
are synchronized to your device.
• Any meeting invitations are displayed in the Inbox of your Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync
account in VersaMail. When you respond to an invitation, your device is synchronized with the
server to transfer the response to the server, and then the server is synchronized with your
device to transfer the response to Calendar on your device.
Updating Calendar events when you delete a Microsoft Exchange
ActiveSync account
You cannot choose to synchronize Calendar events with info in Palm Desktop software or Outlook
once you set up a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync email account. If you want to stop synchronizing
Calendar events with info on the server, you must delete the Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync email
account.
When you delete a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account, all Calendar events are purged from
your device. Then, when you synchronize Calendar with your desktop software application—
Palm Desktop or Outlook—the events synchronize to your device, so you don’t end up with
duplicate events.
Did You Know?
All Calendar events are
also purged from your
device when you change
the time interval for
retrieving email for a
Microsoft Exchange
ActiveSync account, or
when you change the
username, password, or
server name for this type
of account. The next time
you synchronize your
device with the Exchange
server, all events are
downloaded to your
device, so you don’t end
up with duplicate events.
NOTE
LifeDrive from palmOne 435
CHAPTER 18 Sending and Receiving Email Messages
Related topics
Click a link below to learn about these related topics:
Moving
Around
Using the Graffiti® 2 command stroke in email messages
Entering Info Cutting, copying, and pasting text from an email message
Managing Info Downloading email messages from your computer to your device
Connecting Setting up a phone connection for sending and receiving email wirelessly
Customizing Setting preferences for connecting to a network
Common
Questions
Answers to frequently asked questions about the VersaMail application
Tips & Tricks
Make your device uniquely
yours. For great tips,
software, accessories, and
more, visit
www.palmOne.com/
mylifedrive.
Support
If you’re having problems
with the VersaMail
application or with anything
else on your device, go to
www.palmOne.com/
support.
LifeDrive from palmOne 436
CHAPTER 19
Sending and Receiving Text Messages
If you need to get a short message to a
friend or co-worker fast, send a text
message from your device by means of
your mobile phone (GSM phone with
IR or Bluetooth® wireless technology
required; sold separately) to their
mobile phone. Messaging is a popular
way for people to stay connected using
the text messaging features of their
mobile phone.
Benefits
• Enjoy quick communication
• Use text messaging to chat with
friends
I
n t
hi
s c
h
apter
Creating and sending a text
message
Receiving and viewing a text
message
Editing a draft text message
Setting advanced messaging
features
Related Topics
CHAPTER 19 Sending and Receiving Text Messages
LifeDrive from palmOne 437
Creating and sending a text message
Many SMS service providers charge per text message or part of a text message.
Each message or part is 160 characters. If you create a text message under 161 characters, you are
charged for one message. If you create a message that is 161 to 320 characters, you may be
charged for two messages, and so forth. A counter appears at the top of the page to indicate the
number of characters. Even though a message has more than 160 characters, the message
appears as one message to the person receiving the message.
0
1Go to Applications and select SMS .
2Select New.
Continued
Before You Begin
[!]
Before you can send and
receive text messages,
you must set up a phone
connection on your
device to send and
receive information
wirelessly.
»
Key Term
SMS More commonly
known as text messages,
Short Message Service
messages can be
received by most mobile
phones.
IMPORTANT
[!]
Unread
message
Read
message
LifeDrive from palmOne 438
CHAPTER 19 Sending and Receiving Text Messages
3Enter the recipient’s address using one of the following methods:
Select To Select the recipient’s name on the Mobile Number Lookup list, and
then select Add.
Enter directly Enter the recipient’s mobile phone number on the To line.
4In the area below the To line,
enter the text of your message.
5[ & ] OPTIONAL You can store your message in your Draft category and work
on it later:
a. Open the menus.
b. Select Draft on the Message menu.
Continued
Tip
If you are concerned
about the length of your
messages, you can have
a warning appear when
multipart messages
exceed the specified
number of parts. Open
the Options menu and
select Preferences. Select
Details and then select
the number of parts from
the Warn over pick list.
Did You Know?
You can create a
signature that you use to
sign your messages by
opening the Options
menu and selecting
Preferences. Enter a
signature on the lines.
You can add your
signature to your
message by opening the
Options menu and
selecting Add Signature.
Number of characters
CHAPTER 19 Sending and Receiving Text Messages
LifeDrive from palmOne 439
6Send your message:
Select Send Sends the current message now. Selecting Send does not send
any of the other messages in your Outbox.
Select Outbox Sends your message to the Outbox to be sent later.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 440
CHAPTER 19 Sending and Receiving Text Messages
Receiving and viewing a text message
0
1Go to Applications and select SMS .
2Select Send & Check.
3Select the message to open and read it.
Continued
Tip
If you want to check your
messages but you don’t
want to send the
messages stored in your
Outbox, open the
Messages menu and
select Check.
Tip
You can also send all the
messages in your Outbox
by opening the Messages
menu and selecting Send.
Did You Know?
You can set an alert that
lets you know a new
message has arrived.
Open the Preferences
menu and check the Alert
sound box. Select the
Alarm pick list to choose a
sound.
LifeDrive from palmOne 441
CHAPTER 19 Sending and Receiving Text Messages
4Store, delete, or reply to the message:
Select Done The message is kept in the Inbox.
Select Reply A new message is created with the sender’s phone number in the
To line. Any selected text is copied into the new message.
Select Delete The message is sent to the Trash category.
Archive the message You can store your message in the Archive category:
a. Open the menus.
b. Select Archive on the Message menu.
Done
Did You Know?
You can change how your
messages are listed. You
can sort the messages in
order of one of the
following: Alphabetic,
Date, Phone Number, and
Status. You can also
choose to display the date
the message was
received. Open the
Options menu and select
Preferences. Select from
the Sort by pick list and
select Show date.
LifeDrive from palmOne 442
CHAPTER 19 Sending and Receiving Text Messages
Editing a draft text message
0
1Go to Applications and select SMS .
2Edit the message:
a. Select Draft from the categories pick list.
b. Select the message you want to edit.
c. In the message view, select Edit and edit your message.
3Send or store the draft message:
Select Send Sends the current message now. Selecting Send does not send
any of the other messages in your Outbox.
Select Outbox Sends your message to the Outbox to be sent later.
Select Cancel Opens a dialog box that asks if you want to save the message in
the Draft category. Select Yes to keep your changes and return the message to
the Draft category. Select No to discard your changes and return the message to
the Draft category.
Done
Did You Know?
You can store your
message in your Draft
folder and work on it later
by opening the Message
menu and selecting Draft.
LifeDrive from palmOne 443
CHAPTER 19 Sending and Receiving Text Messages
Setting advanced messaging features
0
1Go to Applications and select SMS .
2Go to the Preferences menu:
a. Open the menus.
b. Select Options, and then select Preferences.
elect
3[ & ] OPTIONAL Set the following parameters:
Confirm Deleted Message Indicates whether a confirmation message appears
each time you delete a message or you select the Empty Trash option from the
Message menu. To display confirmation messages, check this box.
Delete After Transfer Indicates whether data messages are deleted after you
accept the data in the appropriate application. To keep data messages after you
transfer them to the application, uncheck this box.
Continued
LifeDrive from palmOne 444
CHAPTER 19 Sending and Receiving Text Messages
4[ & ] OPTIONAL Select Details and set the following parameters:
Leave Messages on Phone Indicates whether messages are deleted from your
phone after you download them to your device. To keep messages on your
phone after you transfer them to your device, select this box.
Return Receipt Determines whether you receive receipt confirmation notices.
To receive receipt confirmation notices, select Requested.
Expires Indicates how long unsent messages remain in your Outbox. Select
from the following options: 4 Hours, 1 Day, 1 Week, 2 Weeks, 1 Month, and
Max. Time.
Message Center Indicates whether your device obtains your mobile phone
service provider’s Message Center number directly from the phone, or whether
you need to enter the number manually. If your phone is already configured to
use SMS, you do not need to change this setting.
5Select OK twice.
Done
Did You Know?
Outgoing SMS message
settings may depend on
the service offered by
your SMS carrier.
LifeDrive from palmOne 445
CHAPTER 19 Sending and Receiving Text Messages
Related Topics
Click the link below to learn about these related topics:
Moving
Around
• Opening applications
• Using menus
Categories Organizing messages by arranging them into categories and sorting them
Privacy Keeping messages private by turning on security options
Sharing • Exchanging messages with other palmOne™ device users by beaming
them
• Sending messages to other Bluetooth® devices by using Bluetooth
wireless technology on your device
Connecting Setting up a phone connection using the Bluetooth technology on your
device to send and receive messages wirelessly
Tips & Tricks
Make your device uniquely
yours. For great tips,
software, accessories, and
more, visit
www.palmOne.com/
mylifedrive.
Support
If you’re having problems
with SMS or with anything
else on your device, go to
www.palmOne.com/
support.
LifeDrive from palmOne 446
CHAPTER 20
Browsing the Web
You use the web for so many things:
checking email, finding driving
directions, getting news, buying gifts.
Now you can take the web with you
almost anywhere you go. Use your
device to make a Wi-Fi® or Bluetooth®
wireless Internet connection through a
network, computer, or even your
mobile phone, and the web browser
opens the entire web to you.
Benefits of the web browser
• Carry the web with you
• View web pages in device-friendly
format
• Store pages for offline viewing
I
n t
hi
s c
h
apter
Accessing a web page
Quickly jumping to a page
Changing how you view a
page
Bookmarking your favorite
pages
Disconnecting from and
connecting to the Internet
Downloading files and pages
Communicating with other
users
Changing your home and
start pages
Setting advanced browser
options
Related topics
LifeDrive from palmOne 447
CHAPTER 20 Browsing the Web
Accessing a web page
You can open web pages, navigate the pages, and do the same things you can do with a desktop
browser.
Accessing a web page using the action bar
1Go to Favorites and select Web .
2Go to the web page you want to view:
a. Select Go to Web Page .
b. Enter the address of the web page you want to visit. Use the buttons in the
Go to Web Page dialog box for quick entry of characters commonly used in
web addresses. If the web browser recognizes the address that you are
entering due to a previous entry and autofill is enabled, autofill
automatically completes the address.
c. Select OK.
Done
Before You Begin
[!]
To browse the web, you
must set up a connection
to the Internet from your
device.
If you are accessing a
VPN network, you need to
install VPN software and
set up VPN access. You
can turn on VPN from the
web browser by opening
the Options menu and
selecting Connect VPN.
»
Key Term
URL Stands for uniform
resource locator, the
technical name for a web
address. For example, the
URL for palmOne is http://
www.palmone.com.
LifeDrive from palmOne 448
CHAPTER 20 Browsing the Web
Accessing a web page using the address field
0
1Go to Favorites and select Web .
2Go to the web page you want to
view:
• Enter the address of the web
page in the address field, and
then select Go.
• If you are going to a web page
you recently visited, select the
Address field pick list, and then
select Go.
Done
Tip
You can also hide the
address field to show
more of the web page.
Open the Options menu
and select Preferences.
Uncheck the Show
Address Bar box.
Tip
Create a bookmark to
save the location, or
create a saved page to
save the content of a web
page indefinitely.
Address field
Address field
pick list of
recently visited
web pages
LifeDrive from palmOne 449
CHAPTER 20 Browsing the Web
Using a password to access a web page
Some websites require you to use a password to gain access to information.
0
1Go to Favorites and select Web .
2Go to the web page where you must enter the password.
3Enter your password to access the web page:
a. Enter your sign-in name in the appropriate field.
b. Tap in the password box, enter your password, and then select OK.
c. Select the button that lets you view the page (Sign In, Enter, Go, and so on).
Done
Tip
Some websites allow you
to check a box to have
your sign-in name
automatically entered
each time you visit a
particular web page.
LifeDrive from palmOne 450
CHAPTER 20 Browsing the Web
Finding information on a web page
0
1Go to Favorites and select Web .
2Open the Find field:
a. Go to the web page you want to search.
b. Open the menus.
c. Select Page, and then select Find Text on Page.
3Search the web page:
a. Type the text you want to find.
b. Select Find.
Done
Did You Know?
Find locates any text,
whether it is letters or
numbers. Find is not
case-sensitive.
Tip
Because of the limited
space on the device
screen, sometimes the
current web address
(URL) is not fully visible.
Use the Page Properties
dialog box to view the full
URL. Open the Page
menu, select Page, and
then select Page Info.
LifeDrive from palmOne 451
CHAPTER 20 Browsing the Web
Quickly jumping to a page
The action bar icons allow you to quickly move from page to page.
Following a link
Many web pages contain underlined links, which are text or pictures that, when selected, take you
to another web page or to another part of the same page.
Returning to your home page or a page you recently visited
No matter where you navigate on the Internet, you can always return to your home page quickly or
return to a page you have recently visited.
Select the link to go to
another web page
Select the Home icon to go
to your home page
Select the back and forward
arrows to go to previous pages
LifeDrive from palmOne 452
CHAPTER 20 Browsing the Web
Changing how you view a page
You can change how you view web pages by selecting different display views and dragging the
screen to view different parts.
0
1Go to Favorites and select Web .
2Go to the web page you want to view.
3Select the Display View icon in the action bar.
4Select from one of the following views:
Optimized Displays a modified version of the web page so that it is optimized
for device viewing.
Wide Page Displays the web page as it would appear in a desktop computer
web browser.
Continued
Tip
You can change your font
size for easier viewing.
Did You Know?
In the Optimized mode,
use the navigator to
browse the web page.
Press Left or Right to
jump to the previous or
next link. When a link is
highlighted, press Center
to go to the link. Press Up
and Down to scroll
through the web page. Display View icon
LifeDrive from palmOne 453
CHAPTER 20 Browsing the Web
5[ & ] OPTIONAL If the web
page is larger than your screen,
you can tap and drag the stylus
to move the web page in any
direction to view different parts
of the web page.
To activate the Tap and Drag
scrolling, you must set the Tap
and Drag setting in the General
Preferences tab under the
Options menu.
This feature is disabled when
you turn on Writing Area
Preferences and use the full
screen for Graffiti® 2 writing.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 454
CHAPTER 20 Browsing the Web
Bookmarking your favorite pages
Bookmarking your favorite web pages allows you to quickly return to those pages.
Adding a bookmark
0
1Go to Favorites and select Web .
2Go to the web page that you want to bookmark.
3Open the Bookmark Page dialog box:
a. Open the menus.
b. Select Page, and then select Add Bookmark.
4[ & ] OPTIONAL Change the
bookmark name, description, or
URL.
Continued
»
Key Term
Bookmark A pointer to a
web page. The actual
page is not stored, only
the URL. Also called a
Favorite in some
browsers.
Tip
You can set your
bookmark list as your
start page.
LifeDrive from palmOne 455
CHAPTER 20 Browsing the Web
Viewing a bookmarked or saved page
Bookmarks and saved pages both appear in the Bookmarks View. Saved pages are indicated by a
small triangle in the upper-right corner of the bookmark.
0
5Select OK.
Done
1Go to Favorites and select Web .
2Select the Bookmark icon .
3Select the name of the
bookmarked or saved page you
want to visit.
On the bottom right of the screen
are five icons representing the
first five Bookmarks pages.
Select a Bookmarks page icon to
display the page. You can also
tap the arrow to go to the next
page.
Done
Tip
You can also view your
list of bookmarks by
selecting View
Bookmarks from the Page
menu.
Did You Know?
A saved page is displayed
like a bookmarked page,
except that at the top of
the page appears the text
“Page saved on date -
size k.”
Bookmark
page arrow
Bookmark page icons
LifeDrive from palmOne 456
CHAPTER 20 Browsing the Web
Editing information about a bookmark or saved page
0
1Go to Favorites and select Web .
2Select the Bookmark icon .
3Go to the Edit Bookmarks List dialog box:
a. Open the menus.
b. Select Bookmarks, and then select Edit Bookmarks.
4Edit the bookmark information:
a. Select the name of the bookmarked or saved page that you want to edit.
b. Change the bookmark or saved page name, description, or address (URL) by
selecting the appropriate option.
5Select OK.
Done
Tip
You can clean up your
bookmark list by deleting
old bookmarks or saved
pages you no longer use.
Select the bookmark,
select Edit, and then
select Delete.
LifeDrive from palmOne 457
CHAPTER 20 Browsing the Web
Arranging the bookmark list
The web browser includes ten pages so that you can arrange bookmarks and saved pages in a
logical fashion. For example, you can store travel links on one page, stock links on another, and
business links on a third page.
0
1Go to Favorites and select Web .
2Go to the Edit Bookmarks List dialog box:
a. Select the Bookmark icon .
b. Open the menus.
c. Select Edit Bookmarks in the Bookmarks menu.
Continued
LifeDrive from palmOne 458
CHAPTER 20 Browsing the Web
3Arrange the bookmarks:
a. Use the stylus to drag and
drop bookmarks into different
slots on the current page to
organize them.
b. Move a bookmark to a
different page by dragging
and dropping it onto the Page
icon. Ten page icons at the
bottom of the dialog box
represent the pages on each
of which you can add ten
bookmarks.
4Select OK.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 459
CHAPTER 20 Browsing the Web
Disconnecting from and connecting to the Internet
While you’re working with stored information in the web browser, such as saved pages, stored
versions of pages, and so forth, you can disconnect from the Internet to reduce usage charges.
You can connect to the Internet again when you need access.
Disconnecting from the Internet
0
1Go to Favorites and select Web .
2Disconnect from the Internet:
a. Open the menus.
b. Select Page, and then select Disconnect.
Done
Did You Know?
Generally, if you are
using a GPRS service,
you are charged only for
the data sent. If you are
using a GSM service, you
are charged for the time
you are connected. If you
are using Wi-Fi, any
charges depend on your
service contract.
Tip
When you are in another
application and you tap a
URL, the web browser
connects to the Internet
and displays the page.
The web browser also
opens when you select an
HTML file that you
receive as an email
attachment.
LifeDrive from palmOne 460
CHAPTER 20 Browsing the Web
Connecting to the Internet
0
1Go to Favorites and select Web .
2Connect to the Internet:
a. Open the menus.
b. Select Page, and then select Connect.
Alternately, you can enter a URL on the address line and select Go.
Done
Tip
If the connection is not
established, do one of the
following:
Select Cancel to stop the
connection process.
Select Change Network to
select a different service
to connect to.
LifeDrive from palmOne 461
CHAPTER 20 Browsing the Web
Downloading files and pages
You can download files or save files for viewing when you are not connected to the Internet.
Downloading a file
0
1Go to Favorites and select Web .
2Go to the web page you want to view.
3Select the link of the file you want to download.
4Select a download option:
Application name Downloads the file to an application. For example, if you
are downloading a Word document, the file downloads into Documents To Go.
Card If you have an expansion card installed, the file downloads onto the card.
If you don’t have an expansion card installed, the file is downloaded into the
default folder for that file type on the device’s internal drive. If that file type does
not have a default folder, it downloads into a folder called Blazer Downloads.
5Select Yes.
Done
Tip
If you decide that the
download process is
taking too long, you can
stop it. To stop a web
page from downloading,
select the Stop icon in the
action bar. To stop a file
from downloading, select
Cancel in the Download
dialog box.
LifeDrive from palmOne 462
CHAPTER 20 Browsing the Web
Saving a web page
If you want to save a web page (such as a travel itinerary or Internet order receipt) indefinitely, you
can create a saved page. The copy is stored on the device until you delete it.
1Go to Favorites and select Web .
2Go to the web page you want to save.
3Go to the Save Page dialog box:
a. Open the menus.
b. Select Page, and then select Save Page.
4Save the web page:
a. Change the page name or
description if you want.
b. Select OK.
Done
Did You Know?
Saved pages are listed
with the bookmarks in the
Bookmark List. The saved
pages have an orange
corner.
Did You Know?
The web browser also
functions as a viewer,
enabling you to quickly
view certain files while
working in other
applications. For
example, if you read an
email message that has a
file attached in HTML
format, select the file and
the web browser opens
so that you can view the
file.
Tip
Saving a web page on
your device allows you to
view a web page without
being online.
LifeDrive from palmOne 463
CHAPTER 20 Browsing the Web
Viewing a saved file
You can use the web browser to view web pages or image files that are on the device’s internal
drive or an expansion card. The types of files that can be viewed include HTML, HTM, GIF, and
JPG.
0
1Go to Favorites and select Web .
2Select a file or folder to open it.
A web browser icon appears to the left of the file name in the Files list if it is a
file that is automatically opened in web browser.
3Enter the file name using the format file://<cardname>/<path>.
Done
Tip
Suppose you have an
HTML file on your
desktop computer that
you want to carry with
you. Download the file
onto the device’s internal
drive or expansion card
and use the web browser
to view the page on your
device.
LifeDrive from palmOne 464
CHAPTER 20 Browsing the Web
Communicating with other users
You can communicate with others by means of email or beaming.
Sending email by means of an Internet email account
You can use your Internet email account to send an email message and attachments.
0
1Go to Favorites and select Web .
2Log in to your Internet email account.
3Compose your email message.
4Send or save the email message.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 465
CHAPTER 20 Browsing the Web
Changing your home and start pages
You can change the page that your Home Page icon goes to, or change the page that the web
browser starts with when it is first opened.
Changing your home page
You can choose a home page from any web address.
0C
1Go to Favorites and select Web .
2Open the Preferences Page dialog box:
a. Open the menus.
b. Select Options, and then select Preferences.
c. Select the Page tab.
Continued
LifeDrive from palmOne 466
CHAPTER 20 Browsing the Web
3Select the Home Page box.
4Enter a URL on the Address line.
5Select OK twice.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 467
CHAPTER 20 Browsing the Web
Changing your start page
You can select the start page you want your device to open to when you first open the web
browser.
0
1Go to Favorites and select Web .
2Open the Preferences Page dialog box:
a. Open the menus.
b. Select Options, and then select Preferences.
c. Select Page tab.
3Select the Start with pick list, and select the page you want to start with when
you first open the web browser:
Home Page The page you have set as your home page.
Last Page Viewed The last page you viewed before exiting the web browser.
Bookmarks The Bookmarks dialog box opens. The web browser does not
connect to the Internet.
Blank Page An empty page with no URL or dialog box
4Select OK.
Done
0
LifeDrive from palmOne 468
CHAPTER 20 Browsing the Web
Setting advanced browser options
You can change options on your device to improve the speed, ease of use, and security of your
browsing experience.
Changing how images are downloaded
Images in web pages can be very large. You can set an option to make web pages download faster
by removing images altogether.
0
1Go to Favorites and select Web .
2Open the General Preferences dialog box:
a. Open the menus.
b. Select Options, and then select Preferences.
c. Select General tab.
3Check or uncheck the Disable Images box to disable or enable images.
4Select OK.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 469
CHAPTER 20 Browsing the Web
Setting whether to automatically complete web addresses and
form fields
Your device can store information, such as web addresses and form fields. If autofill is enabled,
when you enter the first few letters of a URL you’ve entered before in the URL Entry field, your
device completes the URL for you. Also, when you are filling out forms and applications, your
device can complete the information for you.
0
1Go to Favorites and select Web .
2Open the General Preferences
dialog box:
a. Open the menus.
b. Select Options, and then
select Preferences.
c. Select General tab.
3Check or uncheck the Disable Auto Complete box to disable or enable autofill.
4Select OK.
Done
Tip
Filling out an order form
or application on the web
usually requires entering
several pieces of
information: your name,
address, phone number,
and so on. When you
enable autofill, your
device stores the
information you entered
in these fields. The next
time you use that order
form and type the first
few letters in a field, your
device remembers the
last item you entered in
that field that started with
those letters, and fills in
the field.
LifeDrive from palmOne 470
CHAPTER 20 Browsing the Web
Allowing websites to remember personal information
By default, your device saves the cookies it receives. If you want more privacy, you can tell your
device not to accept cookies.
0
1Go to Favorites and select Web .
2Open the General Preferences
dialog box:
a. Open the menus.
b. Select Options, and then
select Preferences.
c. Select General tab.
3Check or uncheck the Disable Cookies box.
4Select OK.
Done
»
Key Term
Cookie Some websites
store information in a
small text file, called a
cookie, that is saved on
your device. A cookie
usually stores
information about you
and your preferences for
that website. A site can
use this information to
customize the pages you
see the next time you
visit. Allowing a website
to create a cookie does
not give the site access to
the rest of your device. A
cookie stores only the
information you provide
while visiting the website.
LifeDrive from palmOne 471
CHAPTER 20 Browsing the Web
Clear Cookies and cache preferences
1Go to Favorites and select Web .
2Open the Advanced Preferences dialog box:
a. Open the menus.
b. Select Options, and then select Preferences.
c. Select Advanced tab.
Continued
LifeDrive from palmOne 472
CHAPTER 20 Browsing the Web
3Clear Cookies and the cache by
using the following options:
Cookies Indicates how much
memory is being used by
cookies.
Clear Cache Clears the cache
immediately and frees the
memory.
Clear cache on exit Check the
box to clear the cache each time
you exit the web browser.
Uncheck the box to keep the
cache from session to session.
4Select OK.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 473
CHAPTER 20 Browsing the Web
Setting preferences for using a proxy server
Your device comes with the proxy server turned off. You can turn the proxy server on and
configure a proxy server.
0
1Go to Favorites and select Web .
2Open the Advanced Preferences dialog box:
a. Open the menus.
b. Select Options, and then select Preferences.
c. Select Advanced tab.
Continued
»
Key Term
Proxy server A server
that provides access to
files from other servers
by retrieving them either
from its local cache or
from the remote server.
LifeDrive from palmOne 474
CHAPTER 20 Browsing the Web
3Set your proxy server preferences:
a. Select Set Proxy.
b. Check or uncheck the Use Proxy box to use or not use a proxy server.
c. If you want to use a proxy server, select the Use Proxy box and enter the
appropriate server address and port number.
d. Select OK.
4Select OK.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 475
CHAPTER 20 Browsing the Web
Setting whether to accept JavaScript
You can choose to bypass JavaScript elements on the web pages you view. JavaScript is often
used on web pages for interactive content.
0
1Go to Favorites and select Web .
2Open the General Preferences dialog box:
a. Open the menus.
b. Select Options, and then select Preferences.
c. Select General tab.
3Check or uncheck the Disable JavaScript box to disable or enable JavaScript.
4Select OK.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 476
CHAPTER 20 Browsing the Web
Related topics
Click a link below to learn about these related topics:
Moving
Around
• Opening applications
• Using menus
Categories Organizing messages by arranging them into categories and sorting them
Bluetooth®Setting up a phone connection using the Bluetooth wireless technology on
your device
Wi-Fi®Setting up a network connection using Wi-Fi wireless technology on your
device
VersaMail®Sending email messages.
Tips & Tricks
Make your device uniquely
yours. For great tips,
software, accessories, and
more, visit
www.palmOne.com/
mylifedrive.
Support
If you’re having problems
with the web browser or with
anything else on your device,
go to www.palmOne.com/
support.
LifeDrive from palmOne 477
CHAPTER 21
Dialing Phone Numbers from Your Device
Need to dial a number? You can dial
phone numbers directly from a contact
using Quick Connect. If you don’t have
the number listed as a contact, you can
tap out the number on the Dialer
keypad, tap Dial. Your mobile phone
begins dialing (GSM phone required;
sold separately). Your call history stays
on your device for easy access later.
Benefits of Dialer
• Easily dial numbers that are not in
Contacts by using the keypad on your
device screen
• Keep your call history on your device
• Quickly dial numbers using speed
dial
I
n t
hi
s c
h
apter
Dialing a number
Using speed dial
Related topics
LifeDrive from palmOne 478
CHAPTER 21 Dialing Phone Numbers from Your Device
Dialing a number
Tapping out a number on your device is sometimes easier than using your mobile phone.
Entering a number
0
1Go to Applications and select Dialer .
2Tap the telephone number on the keypad.
3Tap D ial.
Done
Before You Begin
[!]
Before you can dial a
number, you must set up
a phone connection on
your device.
Tap and hold the 0 key to add a + (plus) to the
number sequence
Digits appear in the numeric display
Enter phone number and tap Dial
Tap Clear to delete last digit from numeric display.
Tap and hold to clear entire numeric display
LifeDrive from palmOne 479
CHAPTER 21 Dialing Phone Numbers from Your Device
Redialing the most recently used number
0
1Go to Applications and select Dialer .
2Dial the most recently used number:
a. Tap Dial to display the most recently used number.
b. Tap Dial again to dial the number.
Done
Tap Dial
The most recently dialed number is displayed
LifeDrive from palmOne 480
CHAPTER 21 Dialing Phone Numbers from Your Device
Dialing a number from the Call History List
0
1Go to Applications and select Dialer .
2Dial the number from the list:
a. Tap History.
b. Tap an entry from the History list.
c. Tap Dial.
Done
Did You Know?
Dialer keeps a list of 11 of
the most recently dialed
numbers.
Did You Know?
If the number is a speed-
dial entry, the name from
the speed dial entry
appears in the Call
History list.
Tap entry to enter number on Dialer view
LifeDrive from palmOne 481
CHAPTER 21 Dialing Phone Numbers from Your Device
Using speed dial
Speed dial allows you to store ten of your most commonly used numbers and to dial one with a
single tap.
Adding a speed-dial entry
0
1Go to Applications and select Dialer .
2Add a speed-dial entry:
a. Tap Speed.
b. Tap an empty speed-dial button.
c. Enter a name and telephone number.
d. Tap OK.
Done
Tap empty
speed-dial button
LifeDrive from palmOne 482
CHAPTER 21 Dialing Phone Numbers from Your Device
Dialing a number using speed dial
0
1Go to Applications and select Dialer .
2Dial the number:
a. Tap Speed.
b. Tap one of the named speed-
dial buttons.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 483
CHAPTER 21 Dialing Phone Numbers from Your Device
Editing a speed-dial entry
0
1Go to Applications and select Dialer .
2Edit an entry:
a. Tap Speed.
b. Tap Edit.
c. Tap an entry.
d. Edit the entry.
e. Tap OK, and then tap Done.
Done
Tip
You can go directly to the
Edit Entry dialog box by
tapping and holding a
speed dial button.
Tap Edit
LifeDrive from palmOne 484
CHAPTER 21 Dialing Phone Numbers from Your Device
Related topics
Click a link below to learn about these related topics:
Moving
Around
Opening applications
Connecting Connecting your device to a mobile phone
Contacts Using Quick Connect and Tap-to-Connect in Contacts to dial phone numbers
Tips & Tricks
Make your device uniquely
yours. For great tips,
software, accessories, and
more, visit
www.palmOne.com/
mylifedrive.
Support
If you’re having problems
with Dialer or with anything
else on your device, go to
www.palmOne.com/
support.
LifeDrive from palmOne 485
CHAPTER 22
Sharing Information
You have to get this memo to your
boss—now. Or the photo of the
grandkids in their Halloween costumes
to your mom. After you’ve used your
device to create or capture that
important business and personal
information, it’s time to share it with
others.
Your device comes equipped with a
variety of options for sharing
information, so that you can choose
the quickest, most convenient way of
sending your info.
Benefits of sharing
• Keep others up-to-date with
meaningful business and personal
information
• Choose the most convenient sharing
method from a variety of options
• Create an informal backup copy of
important info
I
n t
hi
s c
h
apter
Using the Send command
Beaming
Other ways of sharing
information
Related topics
LifeDrive from palmOne 486
CHAPTER 22 Sharing Information
Using the Send command
You can send information from within an application—such as a photo or video, a contact, or an
appointment—to other Palm OS® device users. You can also send a category of information or
even an entire application.
You can use the Send command in many applications to send information wirelessly using one of
the following methods:
• Using the built-in Bluetooth® wireless technology on your device
• As an attachment to an email message
• As part of a text message
Sending information from within an application using Bluetooth®
technology
You can use your device’s built-in Bluetooth technology to send information directly to another
device that includes Bluetooth technology. You must be within range of the receiving device to
send information using Bluetooth technology. The maximum range is approximately 25–30 feet
(8–10 meters); however, the shorter the range, the more quickly and accurately you can send
information.
Before You Begin
[!]
You must complete all the
prerequisites for the
messaging application.
To use your device’s built-
in Bluetooth wireless
technology, you must set
up a phone connection. To
use it with your device’s IR
port, run Phone Link
Updater, and then use the
Phone Link application to
set up a phone connection.
Did You Know?
You can also easily send
information from the
desktop component of
many applications. For
example, you can send
photos from the
palmOne™ Media desktop
application. See the online
desktop help for
information.
Tip
If you are unable to send
information to another
device, try moving closer to
the receiving device.
LifeDrive from palmOne 487
CHAPTER 22 Sharing Information
0
1Select the information you want to send:
a. Open an application.
b. Select the entry you want.
2Select a sending method:
a. Open the menus.
b. Select the Send menu item in
the leftmost menu. In most
applications, the leftmost menu
is named Record.
c. Select Bluetooth, and then
select OK.
3Select the receiving device on the Discovery Results screen, and then select OK.
The information is sent to the receiving device.
Did You Know?
In most applications, the
leftmost menu is named
Record.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 488
CHAPTER 22 Sharing Information
Sending a category using Bluetooth technology
0
1Select the category you want to send:
a. Open an application.
b. From the list view, select the pick list in the upper-right corner and select the
category you want. This takes you to the list view within the selected
category.
2Send the category:
a. Open the menus.
b. Select the Send Category menu item in the leftmost menu.
c. Select Bluetooth, and then select OK.
3Select the receiving device on the Discovery Results screen, and then select OK.
The information is sent to the receiving device.
Tip
Create a category of
Calendar events such as
your child’s soccer
schedule, and then send
the entire category to
your spouse’s device.
Tip
When you send a
category, the individual
entries within the
category (contacts,
memos, photos, and so
on) appear as unfiled
items on the receiving
device.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 489
CHAPTER 22 Sharing Information
Sending an application using Bluetooth technology
0
1Select the application you want
to send:
a. Go to Applications.
b. Open the menus.
c. Select Send on the App menu.
d. Select the application you
want to send.
You cannot send an
application that has a lock icon
next to the application size.
2Send the application:
a. Select Send.
b. Select Bluetooth, and then select OK.
3Select the receiving device on the Discovery Results screen, and then select OK.
The information is sent to the receiving device.
Tip
Select the Send From pick
list to send an application
from an expansion card
inserted into the
expansion slot.
NOTE
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 490
CHAPTER 22 Sharing Information
Using the Send command with the VersaMail® application
You can send information as an attachment to an email message using the Send command.
Follow the procedures for sending information, a category, or an application. Select VersaMail in
the Send With dialog box. The VersaMail® application opens, displaying a blank message with the
information you want to send as an attachment. Address the message, enter a subject line, and
then select Send or Get & Send.
Using the Send command with SMS
You cannot send a category or an application with SMS.
You can send information as part of a text message using the Send command. Follow the
procedure for sending information. Select SMS in the Send With dialog box. The SMS application
opens, displaying a new text message with the information you want to send as the body of the
message. Address the message, and then select Send.
NOTE
LifeDrive from palmOne 491
CHAPTER 22 Sharing Information
Beaming
Using the IR port on your device, you can beam information from within an application, such as a
photo or video, a contact, an appointment, or a task, to other Palm Powered™ devices. You can
also beam a category of information or even an entire application.
The receiving device must be turned on. Depending on the receiving device model, not
all information may be sent correctly.
Beaming information from within an application
0
1Select the information you want to beam:
a. Open an application.
b. Select the entry you want.
Continued
Tip
For best results when
beaming, the devices
should be between 4 and
39 inches (10 centimeters
and one meter) apart, and
there should be a clear
path between them.
Tip
Beaming works best for
smaller items. If you have
larger items, you can use
Bluetooth® wireless
technology. Expansion
cards are convenient for
sharing very large items.
NOTE
LifeDrive from palmOne 492
CHAPTER 22 Sharing Information
2Beam the information:
a. Open the menus.
b. Select the Beam menu item in the leftmost menu. The leftmost menu in most
applications is named Record.
c. When the Beam dialog box appears, point your device’s IR port directly at
the IR port of the other device.
3Wait for the Beam dialog box to indicate that beaming is complete.
Done
Tip
The leftmost menu in
most applications is
named Record.
Tip
In Contacts, you can
create a contact with your
own information and
select it as your business
card by opening the
Record Menu and
selecting Business Card.
Beam your business card
to other devices by
holding down the
Contacts Quick button
until the Beam dialog box
appears.
IR port
LifeDrive from palmOne 493
CHAPTER 22 Sharing Information
Beaming a category
0
1Select the category you want to beam:
a. Open an application.
b. From the list view, select the pick list in the upper-right corner and select the
category you want. This takes you to the list view within the selected
category.
2Beam the category:
a. Open the menus.
b. Select the Beam Category menu item in the leftmost menu.
c. When the Beam dialog box appears, point your device’s IR port directly at
the IR port of the other device.
3Wait for the Beam dialog box to indicate that beaming is complete.
Done
Tip
Create a category of
Calendar events such as
your meeting schedule,
and then beam the entire
category to your business
partner’s device.
Tip
When you receive a
beamed item, you can file
the item in a category
using the Receive dialog
box.
IR port
LifeDrive from palmOne 494
CHAPTER 22 Sharing Information
Beaming an application
0
1Select the application you want
to beam:
a. Go to Applications.
b. Open the menus.
c. Select Beam in the App menu.
d. Select the location of the app
from the Beam From pick list.
e. Select the application you
want to beam.
You cannot beam an
application that has a lock icon
next to the application size.
Continued
Tip
Select the Beam From
pick list to beam an
application from an
expansion card inserted
into the expansion slot.
NOTE
LifeDrive from palmOne 495
CHAPTER 22 Sharing Information
Other ways of sharing information
Here are some other ways of sharing information:
• Copy information or an application onto an expansion card inserted into the expansion slot, and
view the information by inserting the card into the slot on another Palm Powered device.
• Copy information such as a photo or video from your device to your computer, or from your
computer to your device by synchronizing.
2Beam the application:
a. Select Beam.
b. When the Beam dialog box appears, point your device’s IR port directly at
the IR port of the other device.
3Wait for the Beam dialog box to indicate that beaming is complete.
Done
IR port
LifeDrive from palmOne 496
CHAPTER 22 Sharing Information
Related topics
Click a link below to learn about these related topics:
Moving Info Sharing information by synchronizing your device with your computer
Expansion Sharing information by saving it to an expansion card that can be viewed
from another device
Connecting Setting up a connection with a phone to share information wirelessly
VersaMail Sending information as an attachment to an email message
SMS Sending information as part of a text message
Common
Questions
Answers to frequently asked questions about sharing information
Tips & Tricks
Make your device uniquely
yours. For great tips,
software, accessories, and
more, visit
www.palmOne.com/
mylifedrive.
Support
If you’re having problems
with sharing information or
with anything else on your
device, go to
www.palmOne.com/
support.
LifeDrive from palmOne 497
CHAPTER 23
Managing Your Expenses
Tired of trying to re-create your
business trip when you return?
Expense makes it easy to keep track of
what you paid for that dinner in New
York with your new sales group.
You can track costs for meals, lodging,
transportation, entertainment, and
more, and save all of the information in
one convenient place. You can even
transfer the information to a
spreadsheet on your computer. Benefits of Expense
• Monitor your business and personal
expenses
• Easily retrieve expense information
• Create expense reports faster
I
n t
hi
s c
h
apter
Adding an expense
Choosing currency options
Deleting expenses
Customizing the expense list
Working with Expense on
your computer
Related topics
LifeDrive from palmOne 498
CHAPTER 23 Managing Your Expenses
Adding an expense
0
1Go to Applications and select Expense .
2Enter the expense:
a. Tap New.
b. Enter the amount of the expense.
c. Tap the Expense type pick list and select a type.
You must select an Expense type if you want to save the item.
Continued
Did You Know?
Expense is not just for
business. Use it to help
plan your budget by
figuring out how much
you spend each month on
things like entertainment
and dining out.
Tip
Add an expense simply
by entering the first letter
of the expense type. For
example, entering D
opens a dinner item with
today’s date.
To enable this feature on
your device, open the
Options menu and select
Preferences. Check the
automatic fill box.
Tip
Change the date of an
expense by selecting the
date of the item.
NOTE
Expense
type pick list
LifeDrive from palmOne 499
CHAPTER 23 Managing Your Expenses
3Enter the details of the expense:
a. Tap Details.
b. Select each field where you want
to enter information, and enter it.
Category Select a category to sort
your expenses.
Ty p e Enter the expense type.
Payment Select how you paid for the expense.
Currency Select the currency used to pay the expense. You can preset this
symbol.
Vendor and City Enter the vendor and city associated with the expense. For
example, a business lunch might be at Rosie’s Cafe in San Francisco.
Attendees Enter the people associated with the expense.
c. Select OK.
That’s it. Your device automatically saves the expense. Make sure
you have a current backup. Synchronize often.
Tip
Add extra information to
your expense items.
Select the item and select
Details. Then select Note
and enter the
information.
Tip
Select Lookup in the
Attendees list to pull
names from Contacts.
Did You Know?
After you synchronize,
you can send your
expense information to a
spreadsheet on your
computer.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 500
CHAPTER 23 Managing Your Expenses
Choosing currency options
Expense is even easier to use when you customize the currency list. You can choose what
currencies appear in the pick list, and what symbol automatically appears in new expenses, and
you can even create your own currency symbol.
Customizing the currency pick list
Place the currency symbols that you use most often in the currency pick list.
0
1Go to Applications and select Expense .
2Open the Receipt Details dialog box:
a. Tap an expense item.
b. Tap Details.
3Select the currency symbol(s)
that you want to see in the pick
list:
a. Select the Currency pick list,
and then select Edit
currencies.
Continued
Tip
If you travel a lot, update
the currency pick list, so
that you can quickly get to
the symbols you need.
Did You Know?
Use separate categories
for related expenses. For
example, create a London
category for a trip to
London. After you file
your expense report for
the London trip, you can
easily delete the related
expenses with the Purge
command.
LifeDrive from palmOne 501
CHAPTER 23 Managing Your Expenses
Presetting the currency symbol
Choose which currency symbols appear when you add a new expense.
0S
Cont’d.
b. Select one of the Currency
pick lists and select the name
of the country whose currency
symbol you want to display.
c. Select OK, and then select OK
again.
The expense list now displays the currencies you selected.
1Go to Applications and select Expense .
2Open Expense Preferences dialog box:
a. Open the menus.
b. Select Options, and then select Preferences.
Continued
Currency
pick list
Done
Tip
If you’re entering several
expenses that all use the
same currency, change
the preset currency to
that symbol to save time.
When you’re finished
with those expenses,
change it again to the
next one you’ll use.
LifeDrive from palmOne 502
CHAPTER 23 Managing Your Expenses
Creating a currency symbol
If the currency you want to use is not in the pick list of countries, you can create your own symbol.
0
3Choose the default currency:
a. Select the Default Currency
pick list.
b. Select the symbol you want to
appear when you add new
expenses.
c. Select OK.
0
Done
1Go to Applications and select Expense .
2Open the Custom Currencies dialog box:
a. Open the menus.
b. Select Options, and then select Custom Currencies.
Continued
LifeDrive from palmOne 503
CHAPTER 23 Managing Your Expenses
3Create the custom symbol:
a. Select a Country box.
b. Enter the name of the country
and the symbol that you want.
c. Select OK, and then select OK
again.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 504
CHAPTER 23 Managing Your Expenses
Deleting expenses
Delete individual expenses, or an entire category of expenses at once.
Deleting an individual expense
0
1Go to Applications and select Expense .
2Tap the expense you want to delete.
3Delete the item:
a. Open the menus.
b. Select Delete Item in the Record menu.
4[ & ] OPTIONAL Check the box to save an archive copy of the expense on your
computer.
5Select OK.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 505
CHAPTER 23 Managing Your Expenses
Deleting an entire category of expenses
0
1Go to Applications and select Expense .
2Open the Purge Categories
dialog box:
a. Open the menus.
b. Select Purge on the Record
menu.
3Delete the category and all of its items:
a. Select the category you want to delete.
b. Select Purge.
c. Select Done.
Done
Tip
To combine expenses
from different categories,
rename one category to
match the other
category’s name.
Did You Know?
There is another way to
delete a category. Select
the Category pick list and
select Edit Categories.
Select the Delete
command to delete the
selected category and
move all of its entries to
the Unfiled category.
LifeDrive from palmOne 506
CHAPTER 23 Managing Your Expenses
Customizing the expense list
You can change the appearance of the expense list.
0
1Go to Applications and select Expense .
2Select Show.
3Select the pick lists to change any of the
following items, and then select OK:
Sort by Sort expenses by date or type.
Distance Show distance in miles or
kilometers.
Show currency Show or hide the
currency symbol in the expense list.
Done
Did You Know?
Customizing the expense
list makes it easy to see
how much you spent on
each type of expense. For
example, to see how
much you spent on taxis,
sort your expenses by
type so that all your taxi
expenses appear
together in the list.
Use categories to further
refine your list.
LifeDrive from palmOne 507
CHAPTER 23 Managing Your Expenses
Working with Expense on your computer
WINDOWS ONLY
Use Expense on your computer to view and manage the expenses you create on your device.
Check out the online Help in Palm®Desktop software to learn how to use Expense on your
computer. The online Help includes info about the following topics:
• Adding, editing and deleting expense items
• Organizing your expenses by date, type, amount, notes, or category
• Viewing expense items as a list, large icons, or small icons
• Converting a list of expenses to a single currency
• Printing expense reports
• Transferring expense information to other applications, such as Microsoft Excel, using the Send
or Export command in Palm Desktop software
To open Expense on your computer, double-click the Palm Desktop icon on the Windows desktop,
and then click Expense on the Launch bar.
LifeDrive from palmOne 508
CHAPTER 23 Managing Your Expenses
Related topics
Click a link below to learn about these related topics:
Moving Around • Opening applications
• Using menus
Entering
Information
• Adding contacts to the attendees list with Lookup
• Entering information with Graffiti®2 characters and ShortCuts
Calculator Performing basic math calculations associated with your expenses
Categories • Creating and editing categories
• Organizing expenses by type and sorting them
Customizing Setting number formats
Tips & Tricks
Make your device uniquely
yours. For great tips,
software, accessories, and
more, visit
www.palmOne.com/
mylifedrive.
Support
If you’re having problems
with Expense or anything
else on your device, go to
www.palmOne.com/
support.
LifeDrive from palmOne 509
CHAPTER 24
Performing Calculations
Whether you’re figuring the tip on a
restaurant bill or balancing your
checkbook, it’s always nice to have a
calculator on hand. And because it’s
part of your device, there’s no need to
carry a separate calculator.
Benefits of Calculator
• Always have a calculator with you
• Store calculations for later use
I
n t
hi
s c
h
apter
Calculator buttons
Viewing recent calculations
Related topics
LifeDrive from palmOne 510
CHAPTER 24 Performing Calculations
Calculator buttons
0
Clear any value in the Calculator memory.
Recall the stored value from the memory and enter it into the current
calculation.
Place the current number into memory. The current number is added
to the total that is already in the memory. Tapping this button does
not affect the current calculation; it just places the value in memory.
Clear the last number you entered.
Clear the entire calculation so that you can start over.
Enter a number, and then select this button to change it to a
percentage.
Enter a number, and then select this button to calculate the square
root of the number.
Enter a number, and then select this button to make it negative.
Tip
Use the memory buttons
to store and recall a
number you enter in
multiple calculations.
Tip
If you make a mistake
entering a number in the
middle of a calculation,
use the CE button to
re-enter the number
without starting the
calculation over.
Tip
Open the Options menu
and select Advanced
Mode to display a
scientific calculator.
LifeDrive from palmOne 511
CHAPTER 24 Performing Calculations
Viewing recent calculations
View recent calculations to confirm that you entered everything correctly.
0
1Go to Applications and select Calculator .
2Open the History dialog box:
a. Open the menus.
b. Select Edit, and then select
Show History.
c. Select OK.
Done
Did You Know?
Viewing recent
calculations is helpful
when double-checking
the math in your
checkbook register.
Did You Know?
Calculator History also
has these functions:
Clear Select to clear the
calculator’s history.
Copy Select to copy the
history of calculations.
Then paste them into
another application by
opening the Edit menu
and selecting Paste in the
other application.
LifeDrive from palmOne 512
CHAPTER 24 Performing Calculations
Accessing different calculators
Do you need a scientific or financial calculator? Your calculator has a variety of modes that can
help you calculate formulas in a number of different areas.
0
1Go to Applications and select Calculator .
2Access the advanced mode calculators:
a. Open the menus.
b. Select Options, and then select Advanced Mode. You can now use the
scientific calculator.
c. If you want to use other calculators, such as finance, logic, statistics, or area,
open the menus, select Options, and then select a mode from the list.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 513
CHAPTER 24 Performing Calculations
Related topics
Click the links below to learn about these related topics:
Moving Around • Opening applications
• Using menus
Entering
Information
Entering numbers with Graffiti® 2 characters
Tips & Tricks
Make your device uniquely
yours. For great tips,
software, accessories, and
more, visit
www.palmOne.com/
mylifedrive.
Support
If you’re having problems
with Calculator or anything
else on your device, go to
www.palmOne.com/
support.
LifeDrive from palmOne 514
CHAPTER 25
Keeping Your Information Private
You probably wouldn’t leave your door
unlocked at night, so why should it be
any different with your device? When
you think about the amount of
personal and private information
stored there, you’ll definitely want to
protect it.
Benefits of privacy
• Protect information if your device is
misplaced
• Hide private information
• Unlock your device using only one
hand
I
n t
hi
s c
h
apter
Choosing a security level
Marking information as
private
Setting the level of privacy
Using a password
Locking your device
Using Quick Unlock
Encrypting your information
Limiting the number of
password attempts
Related topics
LifeDrive from palmOne 515
CHAPTER 25 Keeping Your Information Private
Choosing a security level
There are a variety of security levels available for your device. Choose the level that provides the
best mix of security and convenience.
Activating no security features All entries are accessible to anyone who has your device. This
includes entries that are marked private but are not masked or hidden.
Masking private entries without creating a password Masked entries are displayed when
selected. This provides some degree of privacy for private entries, but anyone can view the info by
simply selecting it.
Hiding private entries and creating a password Private entries are displayed when the password
is entered. This is the basic level of security.
Encrypting entries (requires assigning a password) Entries are scrambled whenever your device
locks, and are only displayed when the password is entered. Choose to encrypt all information, or
just private entries. This feature provides better security than hiding private entries and assigning
a password.
Limiting the number of password attempts Selected information is deleted after a specified
number of incorrect password attempts. Use this feature along with encryption for the highest
level of security.
Tip
Use the Enterprise
Software link to
download software to
create a secure wireless
connection to your
corporate network and
encrypt individual files
and folders to protect
your critical information.
LifeDrive from palmOne 516
CHAPTER 25 Keeping Your Information Private
Marking information as private
Marking an entry as private is the first step in protecting your info.
0
1Open an application.
2Create a new entry, or select the entry that you want to make private.
3Mark it as private:
a. For existing Contacts, select Edit.
b. Select Details.
c. Check the Private box.
d. Select OK.
e. In Contacts and Memos, select
Done.
Done
Private box
LifeDrive from palmOne 517
CHAPTER 25 Keeping Your Information Private
Setting the level of privacy
Add further protection to your private entries by setting the privacy level (hidden/masked).
Hiding or masking private entries
0
1Open Security:
a. Go to Applications, and then select Prefs .
b. Select Security.
2Select the display option for private entries:
a. Select the Private Records pick list.
b. Select one of these options, and then select Done.
Show Display private entries.
Mask Cover entries with a gray mask; you can see the mask onscreen, but you
can't see the content of the entry.
Hide Make private entries invisible.
Continued
Tip
You can also set the level
of privacy from within
certain applications.
Open the Options menu,
select Security, and then
select the level of privacy
from the Privacy pick list.
LifeDrive from palmOne 518
CHAPTER 25 Keeping Your Information Private
Viewing an entry that is masked
To open a masked entry, select the entry. If you have a password, enter it in the Show Private
Records dialog box, and then select OK. When you close a masked entry, it remains masked.
Using a password
Further protect your hidden or masked entries by creating a password, which is needed to display
the contents of hidden/masked entries.
Cont’d.
Done
Masked entry
Tip
Use a password to
protect confidential work
or personal information.
If your device is lost or
stolen, this information
will be safe.
LifeDrive from palmOne 519
CHAPTER 25 Keeping Your Information Private
Creating a password
0
1Open Security:
a. Go to Applications, and then
select Prefs .
b. Select Security.
2Create a password:
a. Select the Password box.
b. Enter a password with
Graffiti® 2 writing, the
numeric keypad, or the
onscreen keyboard.
c. Select OK.
Continued
Tip
The best passwords
consist of a mix of letters,
characters, and numbers.
Longer passwords are
better than short ones.
Any password you create
is case-sensitive.
Password box
LifeDrive from palmOne 520
CHAPTER 25 Keeping Your Information Private
Changing a password
You can change your password at any time. You must enter the current password before you can
change it.
0
3Confirm the password and enter a hint:
a. Enter the password again, and then select OK.
b. Enter a hint to help you remember the password if you forget it, and then
select Done.
4Select Done.
Done
1Open Security:
a. Go to Applications, and then
select Prefs .
b. Select Security.
Continued
Tip
In Palm®Desktop
software, you can require
password entry for
private info to display.
Open the Tools menu and
click Options, and then
click Security. The
password is the same one
used by your device.
Password box
LifeDrive from palmOne 521
CHAPTER 25 Keeping Your Information Private
2Enter your current password:
a. Select the Password box.
b. Enter the current password,
and then select OK.
3Change your password:
a. Select OK.
b. Enter a new password, and
then select OK.
4Confirm the password and enter a hint:
a. Enter the password again, and then select OK.
b. Enter a hint to help you remember the password if you forget it, and then
select Done.
5Select Done.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 522
CHAPTER 25 Keeping Your Information Private
Deleting a password
You can delete your password at any time. You must enter the current password before you can
delete it.
0
1Enter your password:
a. Select the Password box.
b. Enter the current password,
and then select OK.
2Delete your password:
a. Select Unassign.
b. Select Done.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 523
CHAPTER 25 Keeping Your Information Private
Deleting a forgotten password
If you forget your password, your device displays the password hint (if you entered one) to help
you remember the password. If you still can’t remember the password, you can delete it from your
device. Deleting a forgotten password also deletes all entries marked as private.
Be sure to synchronize your device with your computer before and after this
procedure, so you can restore any private entries that were deleted along with the password.
0
1Open Security:
a. Go to Applications, and then
select Prefs .
b. Select Security.
2Open the Incorrect Password
dialog box:
a. Select the Password box.
b. Tap any number on the
keypad, and then select OK.
Continued
IMPORTANT
[!]
Password box
LifeDrive from palmOne 524
CHAPTER 25 Keeping Your Information Private
Locking your device
Protect the entire contents of your device, whether marked private or not, by using your password
to lock your device. You can set your device to lock automatically, or you can lock it manually.
If you lock your device, you must enter the exact password to unlock it. If you
forget the password, your device will show you the hint you entered to help you remember the
password. If you still cannot remember the password, you must do a hard reset to resume using
your device. A hard reset deletes all of the information on your device, including your password.
You can restore the information by synchronizing your device with your computer.
3Delete the forgotten password:
a. Select Lost Password.
b. Select Delete Password.
4Synchronize your device with your computer to restore any private entries that
were deleted.
5[ & ] OPTIONAL Create a new password.
Done
Before You Begin
[!]
To use the locking feature,
you must first create a
password for your device.
Tip
To start your device when
it is locked, turn it on.
Enter your password, and
then select Done.
IMPORTANT
[!]
LifeDrive from palmOne 525
CHAPTER 25 Keeping Your Information Private
Locking your device automatically
0
1Open Security:
a. Go to Applications, and then
select Prefs .
b. Select Security.
2Open the Lock Device dialog box:
a. Select the Auto Lock box.
b. If necessary, enter your password, and then select OK.
Continued
Auto Lock box
LifeDrive from palmOne 526
CHAPTER 25 Keeping Your Information Private
3Select one of these lock options:
Never Always leave your
device unlocked.
When power is off
Automatically lock your device
whenever you turn it off.
At a preset time Set a time
when your device will
automatically lock.
After a preset delay Set a
period of inactivity after which
your device will automatically
lock.
4Select OK, and then select Done.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 527
CHAPTER 25 Keeping Your Information Private
Locking your device manually
0
1Open Security:
a. Go to Applications, and then
select Prefs .
b. Select Security.
2Select Lock.
3Select Lock Device.
Done
Lock
LifeDrive from palmOne 528
CHAPTER 25 Keeping Your Information Private
Using Quick Unlock
You can unlock your device by creating a special combination sequence with the 5-way
navigator—similar to the combination you use to open a padlock. Use this sequence in place of
your password to quickly unlock your device. Quick Unlock works only with your first three
attempts to unlock your device. After three attempts, you must use your password to unlock your
device.
Creating a Quick Unlock combination
0
1Open Security:
a. Go to Applications, and then
select Prefs .
b. Select Security.
2Open the Quick Unlock dialog box:
a. Select the Quick Unlock box.
b. If necessary, enter your password, and then select OK.
Continued
Before You Begin
[!]
To use Quick Unlock, you
must first create a
password for your device.
Tip
You can change a Quick
Unlock combination at
any time. Follow the
same steps you used to
create the combination.
Quick Unlock box
LifeDrive from palmOne 529
CHAPTER 25 Keeping Your Information Private
3Create a Quick Unlock
combination sequence:
a. Use the 5-way or tap the
onscreen navigator to create a
combination.
For example, you might
choose Left-Right-Left as a
combination.
b. Select OK.
4Select Done.
When your device is locked, you can now unlock it by using the
Quick Unlock combination. If you forget your combination, you are
asked to enter your password.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 530
CHAPTER 25 Keeping Your Information Private
Deleting your Quick Unlock combination
0
1Open Security:
a. Go to Applications, and then
select Prefs .
b. Select Security.
2Open the Quick Unlock dialog box:
a. Select the Quick Unlock box.
b. If necessary, enter your password, and then select OK.
3Delete the Quick Unlock
combination:
a. Select Unassign.
b. Select Done.
Done
Quick Unlock box
LifeDrive from palmOne 531
CHAPTER 25 Keeping Your Information Private
Encrypting your information
You can encrypt selected information whenever your device locks. This means that your
information is scrambled so that it cannot be read. When you unlock your device and enter your
password or Quick Unlock combination, the encrypted information is unscrambled.
The more information you select for encryption, the longer your device takes to scramble (and
unscramble) the information. Also, applications that use large files, such as palmOne™ Media,
take a long time to encrypt. In these cases, consider the trade-off between security and
convenience.
0
1Open Security:
a. Go to Applications, and then
select Prefs .
b. Select Security.
Continued
Before You Begin
[!]
To use encryption, you
must first create a
password for your device.
LifeDrive from palmOne 532
CHAPTER 25 Keeping Your Information Private
2Open the Encrypt Data dialog
box:
a. Select Options and then select
Security Options.
b. If necessary, enter your
password, and then select OK.
c. Check the Encrypt data when
locked box.
d. Select Choose Applications.
3Select the applications you want
to encrypt, and then select OK.
Continued
LifeDrive from palmOne 533
CHAPTER 25 Keeping Your Information Private
Limiting the number of password attempts
You can set the number of incorrect password attempts that are allowed before selected
information is deleted from your device. This feature, called intrusion protection, protects
sensitive information from an intruder who uses an automated means to try every possible
combination until the password is found. Use intrusion protection if you keep highly confidential
information on your device.
If you limit the number of password attempts, be sure to use Quick Unlock to
prevent accidental password attempts while your device is in a purse or pocket.
4[ & ] OPTIONAL To encrypt
only the private entries in the
applications you selected, check
the Encrypt private records only
box.
5Select OK, and then select Done.
Done
Tip
Synchronize your device
with your computer
frequently to prevent loss
of information if intrusion
protection is triggered.
Did You Know?
Incorrect Quick Unlock
attempts are not included
in the intrusion protection
counter.
IMPORTANT
[!]
LifeDrive from palmOne 534
CHAPTER 25 Keeping Your Information Private
0
1Open Security:
a. Go to Applications, and then
select Prefs .
b. Select Security.
2Set the number of password
attempts:
a. Select Options and then select
Security Options.
b. If necessary, enter your
password, and then select OK.
c. Select the Intrusion Protection
box.
d. Enter the number of
password attempts that are
allowed before selected
information on your device is
deleted.
Continued
Intrusion
Protection box
LifeDrive from palmOne 535
CHAPTER 25 Keeping Your Information Private
3Select the information that is
deleted after the set number of
failed attempts:
a. Select the Delete pick list and
select one of these options:
No Data No information is
deleted after the set number of
failed attempts.
Private Records All entries
marked private are deleted after
the set number of failed
attempts.
All Data All information you
entered and all applications you
installed on your device are
deleted after the set number of
failed attempts.
b. Select OK.
4Select OK two more times, and then select Done.
Done
Tip
The number of password
attempts must be
between 5 and 99.
LifeDrive from palmOne 536
CHAPTER 25 Keeping Your Information Private
Related topics
Click a link below to learn about these related topics:
Moving Around • Opening applications
• Using menus
Managing Info Creating a backup of your information
Customizing Entering your owner information in case your device is lost or stolen
Maintaining Doing a hard reset
Common
Questions
Answers to frequently asked questions about privacy
Tips & Tricks
Make your device uniquely
yours. For great tips,
software, accessories, and
more, visit
www.palmOne.com/
mylifedrive.
Support
If you’re having problems
with private entries or
anything else on your device,
go to www.palmOne.com/
support.
LifeDrive from palmOne 537
CHAPTER 26
Using Categories to Organize Information
If you’re like most people, you use your
device to manage your work life and
your personal life. Yet these two areas
contain so many details: your children’s
after-school activities, your conference
schedule, your shopping list for the
week, and entertainment.
Categories help you organize different
aspects of your life, no matter how you
choose to group them.
Benefits of categories
• Better organize your information
• Easily retrieve the information you
need
I
n t
hi
s c
h
apter
Adding a category
Renaming a category
Deleting a category
Placing information in a
category
Viewing information by
category
Related topics
LifeDrive from palmOne 538
CHAPTER 26 Using Categories to Organize Information
Adding a category
You can add categories in many applications: Contacts, Expense, Memos, Note Pad, Tasks, and
palmOne™ Media. (In palmOne Media, categories are called albums.) Place individual entries in
these categories to easily get to a group of related items.
In addition to putting individual entries into a category, you can also put entire applications into
categories. For instance, you may find it convenient to put Expense and Calculator into a category
called Money.
0
1Do one of the following:
• To add a category for individual entries in one of the applications above, open
that application.
• To add a category for applications, go to Applications.
2Add a new category:
a. Select the pick list in the
upper-right corner, and then
select Edit Categories.
b. Select New and enter the
name of the new category.
c. Select OK, and then select OK
again.
Done
Did You Know?
You can have up to
15 categories in an
application.
Tip
Colors make it easy to
find the info you need in
Calendar.
Tip
Add a category in
Contacts that contains all
of your medical numbers
for quick access.
Other useful categories in
Contacts are Emergency,
for fire, ambulance, and
police; Children, for your
children’s school and
friends; and
Entertainment, for
restaurants or theaters
that you visit often.
LifeDrive from palmOne 539
CHAPTER 26 Using Categories to Organize Information
Renaming a category
0
1Do one of the following:
• To rename a category within an application, open that application.
• To rename a category for applications, go to Applications.
2Rename the category:
a. Select the pick list in the upper-right corner, and then select Edit Categories.
b. Select the name of the category you want to change, and then select
Rename.
c. Enter a new category name, and then select OK.
d. Select OK again.
Done
Tip
If you want to combine
items in different
categories, rename one
category to the other
category name.
Did You Know?
Some categories, like All
and Unfiled, come with
your device and cannot
be changed.
LifeDrive from palmOne 540
CHAPTER 26 Using Categories to Organize Information
Deleting a category
If you delete a category, the items in that category will move to the Unfiled category.
0
1Do one of the following:
• To delete a category within an application, open that application.
• To delete a category for applications, go to Applications.
2Go to the Edit Categories dialog box:
Calendar Select an event, select Details, select the Category pick list, and then
select Edit Categories.
All other applications Select the pick list in the upper-right corner, and then
select Edit Categories.
3Delete the category:
a. Select the name of the category you want to delete.
b. Select Delete.
c. Select Yes
d. Select OK.
Done
Tip
In Expense, you can
delete a category,
including its contents,
with the Purge command.
Tip
To display the category
pick list in Calendar Day
View, open the Options
menu, select Display
Options, tap Day, and
then check the Show
Category List box.
LifeDrive from palmOne 541
CHAPTER 26 Using Categories to Organize Information
Placing information in a category
You can place individual entries into categories within an application. For example, you may want
to place some of your contacts in a category called Medical.
You may also find it convenient to view applications in groups. You may want all of your games in
one category, or all of your multimedia applications in another. Then you can go right to the group
of applications you need.
An entry or application cannot be placed in more than one category.
Placing an entry in a category
0
1Open an application that contains a category option. In Calendar, go to Day
View.
2Open an entry.
3In Note Pad only: skip to step 5.
4Open the Details dialog box:
Contacts Select Edit, and then select Details.
All other applications Select Details.
Continued
Tip
You can also enter new
information into a
category by opening the
application, and then
selecting the category
from the upper-right
corner. Select New and
enter the information. NOTE
LifeDrive from palmOne 542
CHAPTER 26 Using Categories to Organize Information
5Place the entry in a category:
a. Select a category from the Category pick list.
b. If necessary, select OK.
c. If necessary, select Done.
Done
Tip
To place an entry in a
different category, simply
select a different category
from the Category pick
list. Category
LifeDrive from palmOne 543
CHAPTER 26 Using Categories to Organize Information
Placing an application in a category
0
1Go to Applications.
2Open the Category dialog box:
a. Open the menus.
b. Select Category in the App menu.
3Place the application in a
category:
a. Select the pick list next to the
application you want to place
in a category.
b. Select a category, and then
select Done.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 544
CHAPTER 26 Using Categories to Organize Information
Viewing information by category
0
1Do one of the following:
• To view entries by category, open an application that contains categories.
• To view applications by category, go to Applications.
2Display the category you want to view:
Calendar Select Show Category List, and then select the category you want to
view from the pick list.
All other applications Select the category you want to view from the pick list
in the upper-right corner.
Done
Tip
In Applications view,
scroll through the
categories by pressing
Right or Left on the 5-way
navigator. To view all of
the applications on your
device, select the All
category.
Tip
Scroll through the
categories in Contacts by
repeatedly pressing the
Contacts button.
Pick list
LifeDrive from palmOne 545
CHAPTER 26 Using Categories to Organize Information
Related topics
Click a link below to learn about these related topics:
Moving Around • Opening applications
• Using menus
Calendar Color-coding your events in Calendar
Media Organizing photos or videos into albums
Sharing Beaming a category to another Palm Powered™ device
Tips & Tricks
Make your device uniquely
yours. For great tips,
software, accessories, and
more, visit
www.palmOne.com/
mylifedrive.
Support
If you’re having problems
with categories or anything
else on your device, go to
www.palmOne.com/
support.
LifeDrive from palmOne 546
CHAPTER 27
Managing Clock Settings
Forget your watch? Or just forget to
reset it when you landed in Toronto?
Neither matters, as long as you have
your device. Not only can you rely on it
for the correct time, but you can even
set an alarm so you don’t miss that
early flight back home.
Benefits of World Clock
• Always have the correct time, no
matter where you are
• No need to carry a separate alarm
clock
I
n t
hi
s c
h
apter
Checking the current date
and time
Setting the primary location
Choosing secondary
locations for other time
zones
Modifying the locations list
Setting the alarm clock
Changing the clock display
Related topics
LifeDrive from palmOne 547
CHAPTER 27 Managing Clock Settings
Checking the current date and time
You can easily check the current date and time:
a. Go to Applications and select World Clock .
b. Tap the Calendar icon in the input area, and select the Agenda View icon .
c. Tap the System Info icon on the status bar.
Setting the primary location
In World Clock, you can set the location, date, and time for a primary location. The settings for this
primary location are used by all of the applications on your device.
0.
1Go to Applications and select World Clock .
2Select the primary location:
a. Select the primary location
pick list.
b. Select the location you want
to be the primary location.
If you need more choices,
modify the locations list.
Done
»
Key Term
Primary location
Typically a city in the time
zone in which you live.
Primary location
pick list
LifeDrive from palmOne 548
CHAPTER 27 Managing Clock Settings
Setting the date and time for the primary location
You can set the date and time in Preferences, as you did during the initial setup of your device, or
in World Clock. When you change the date and time in one application, it is automatically changed
in the other.
0
1Go to Applications and select World Clock .
2Select Set Date & Time.
3Set the date:
a. Select the Set Date box.
b. Select the arrows to select the
current year.
c. Select the current month.
d. Select the current day.
Continued
Did You Know?
When the Daylight
Savings settings are
active, the time changes
according to the rule for
the primary location. For
example, in North
America, the time
changes at 2:00 a.m.; in
Europe, it changes at
1:00 a.m.
Year
Month
Day
LifeDrive from palmOne 549
CHAPTER 27 Managing Clock Settings
4Set the time:
a. Select the Set Time box.
b. Select the hour and minute
boxes, and then select the
arrows to change them.
c. Select AM or PM, and then
select OK.
5Select Done.
Done
Tip
Selecting a time zone
when creating a new
event in Calendar allows
you to travel and have
your events automatically
adjust to the time zone in
your new location. Time
zones in Calendar work
only if you are
synchronizing with Outlook
or Exchange ActiveSync.
Hour
Minute
LifeDrive from palmOne 550
CHAPTER 27 Managing Clock Settings
Choosing secondary locations for other time zones
Set World Clock to display the date and time for two other locations.
0
1Go to Applications and select World Clock .
2Select the pick list next to one of
the secondary locations.
3Select the location you want to use as the new secondary location.
If you need more choices, modify the locations list.
Done
Tip
If you have friends,
family, or colleagues in
another time zone, select
a city in their zone as your
secondary location.
When you need to
contact them, you can
easily check to see what
time it is where they are.
Pick list
LifeDrive from palmOne 551
CHAPTER 27 Managing Clock Settings
Modifying the locations list
You can edit the locations list so that the locations you use most often are easy to find.
Adding new locations
0
1Go to Applications and select World Clock .
2Open the Edit List dialog box:
a. Select a location pick list.
b. Select Edit List.
3Add the new location:
a. Select Add.
b. Scroll through the list to
select a location that is in the
same time zone as the city
you want to add.
c. Select OK.
Continued
Tip
If you know what you’re
looking for in a long pick
list, use Graffiti® 2
writing to find it faster.
Enter the first letter of the
word, and then locate
your item.
LifeDrive from palmOne 552
CHAPTER 27 Managing Clock Settings
4[ & ] OPTIONAL Select each
setting you want to change.
Name Enter the name of the
location.
Time Zone Select the time
zone for the location.
Daylight Saving Time box
Check for your device to
automatically adjust the date and
time for Daylight Saving Time in
this location.
Start and End dates Select the
boxes to change the start and
end dates of Daylight Saving
Time, if necessary.
5Select OK, and then select Done.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 553
CHAPTER 27 Managing Clock Settings
Deleting a location
0
1Go to Applications and select World Clock .
2Select the location you want to
delete:
a. Select a location pick list.
b. Select Edit List.
c. Select a location, and then
select Remove.
3Select OK, and then select Done.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 554
CHAPTER 27 Managing Clock Settings
Setting the alarm clock
0
1Go to Applications and select World Clock .
2Set the alarm:
a. Select the Alarm box.
b. Select the time columns to set the hour and minute, and then select OK.
Alarms set in World Clock use the time set for the primary location.
Continued
Did You Know?
Use World Clock to set an
alarm within the next 24
hours. Set alarms outside
of this time frame in
Calendar.
Did You Know?
Remember to put your
device on local time. If
you travel from
San Francisco to London,
make London your
primary location so that
all your alarms ring on
time, instead of eight
hours late.
Tip
Set an alarm while you’re
working to remind you
when to leave to get to
your appointment on
time.
NOTE
Alarm box
LifeDrive from palmOne 555
CHAPTER 27 Managing Clock Settings
Responding to the alarm clock
When the World Clock alarm sounds, select one of these three options:
OK Cancel the reminder message and return to the current screen.
Snooze Close the alarm reminder message and return to the current screen. The message
appears again in five minutes. In the meantime, an indicator blinks in the upper-left corner of the
screen to remind you of the upcoming alarm.
Go To Cancel the reminder message and open World Clock.
3[ & ] OPTIONAL Select the alarm sound and volume:
a. Open the menus.
b. Select Options, and then select Alarm Preferences.
c. Select the pick lists to select the alarm sound and volume.
This volume setting does not affect the other sounds on your
device, including the alarms you set in Calendar. You can change the volume of
these other sounds in Preferences.
d. Select OK.
Done
Tip
To turn off an alarm
before it sounds, select
the Alarm box, and then
select Alarm Off.
NOTE
LifeDrive from palmOne 556
CHAPTER 27 Managing Clock Settings
Changing the clock display
0
1Go to Applications and select World Clock .
2Open the Display Options dialog box:
a. Open the menus.
b. Select Options, and then select Display Options.
3Select any of the following options, and then select OK:
Show Multiple Locations Display the secondary locations. Uncheck it to
display only the primary location.
Show Date Display the date in World Clock.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 557
CHAPTER 27 Managing Clock Settings
Related topics
Click a link below to learn about these related topics:
Moving Around • Opening applications
• Using menus
Calendar Setting an alarm outside of the next 24 hours
Customizing Changing the volume of other system sounds
Tips & Tricks
Make your device uniquely
yours. For great tips,
software, accessories, and
more, visit
www.palmOne.com/
mylifedrive.
Support
If you’re having problems
with World Clock or anything
else on your device, go to
www.palmOne.com/
support.
LifeDrive from palmOne 558
CHAPTER 28
Customizing Your Device
Although customizing your device is
optional, it’s like changing the preset
radio stations in your car. Since you’re
probably not driving around with the
dealer’s preset radio stations, why not
personalize your device, too?
You can easily customize the sound
levels, fonts, and screen colors on your
device by using preferences and
menus. Or customize the Star button to
open your most important application
with one press. Preference settings can
even help extend the life of your
device’s battery.
Benefits of customizing
• Access applications quickly
• Conserve power
• Enjoy your device more
• Make your screen easy to read
I
n t
hi
s c
h
apter
Customizing Favorites View
Customizing Applications View
Making the screen easier to read
Assigning a button to your
frequently used applications
Setting the date and time
Customizing the way you enter
information
Selecting sound settings
Entering your owner
information
Conserving battery power
Connecting your device to other
devices
Customizing network settings
Setting up a VPN
Related topics
LifeDrive from palmOne 559
CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device
Customizing Favorites View
You can personalize Favorites View by changing the background image to your favorite photo. You
can also change the entries to those you use most often.
Changing the background photo in Favorites View
Use your favorite photo as the background in Favorites View.
0
1Go to Favorites.
Continued
LifeDrive from palmOne 560
CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device
Changing entries in Favorites
Change the entries in Favorites View to include the applications, files, folders, or web links you use
most often.
2Open the Display Options dialog box:
a. Open the menus.
b. Select Options, and then select Display Options.
3Select a photo for the
background:
a. Check the Background box.
b. Select the picture box.
c. Select a picture.
d. Select Done.
4Adjust the fade setting so that the text is easy to read against the photo, and
select OK.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 561
CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device
0
1Go to Favorites.
2Open the Edit Favorites dialog box:
a. Using the 5-way, highlight the favorite you want to change.
b. Tap Menu on the status bar.
c. Select Edit Favorite.
Continued
Did You Know?
You can move a favorite
to a different location on
the Favorites list by
opening the Favorite
menu and then selecting
Rearrange Favorites.
Drag the favorite you
want to the new location.
Tip
You can also tap and hold
on the favorite you want
to change.
LifeDrive from palmOne 562
CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device
3Change the favorite:
a. Select the favorite type from
the Type pick list: application,
file/folder, or web link.
b. Select the application from the Original pick list, select to browse to the file or
folder, or select to enter the web address you want.
c. Enter a name for your new favorite and select OK.
Done
Tip
You can also add a new
favorite to any of the four
Favorites pages. Tap and
hold the stylus on any
blank favorite space to
open the Edit Favorite
dialog box, and then
select and enter the
information for the new
favorite.
LifeDrive from palmOne 563
CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device
Customizing Applications View
Use your favorite photo as the background in Applications View. You can also display your
application icons in list format with small icons so that you can see more applications without
scrolling.
0
1Go to Applications.
2Open the Display Options dialog
box:
a. Open the menus.
b. Select Options, and then
select Display Options.
3Select the View By pick list and select List or Icon as the display format.
4If you want the last category you viewed to reappear the next time you go to
Applications, check the Remember Last Category box.
Continued
LifeDrive from palmOne 564
CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device
5Select a photo for the background:
a. Check the Background box.
b. Select the picture box.
c. Select a picture.
d. Select Done.
e. Adjust the fade setting so that the text is easy to read against the photo.
f. Select OK.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 565
CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device
Making the screen easier to read
In many applications, you can change the font style to make text easier to read. There are four font
styles available.
In certain lighting conditions, you may also need to adjust the brightness to read the information
on the screen.
Changing the screen fonts
Small font Large font
Small bold
font Large bold
font
LifeDrive from palmOne 566
CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device
0
1Open an application.
2Open the Select Font dialog box:
a. Open the menus.
b. Select Options, and then select Font.
3Select the font style you want to use, and then select OK.
Done
Small
Small bold
Large bold
Large
LifeDrive from palmOne 567
CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device
Adjusting the brightness
0
1Tap System Info , which shows the current time, on the status bar.
2Drag the slider to adjust the
brightness level, and then tap
outside the dialog box.
Done
Brightness
slider
LifeDrive from palmOne 568
CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device
Changing screen colors
Choose a new set of text and background colors for all your applications.
0
1Open Color Theme Preferences:
a. Go to Applications.
b. Select Prefs .
c. Select Color Theme.
2Select a theme, and then select Done.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 569
CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device
Changing handedness orientation of the screen
The Handedness preferences enable you to select right-hand or left-hand orientation when you
rotate the screen into landscape mode.
0
1Open Handedness Preferences:
a. Go to Applications.
b. Select Prefs .
c. Select Handedness.
2Select your orientation, and then
select Done.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 570
CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device
Assigning a button to your frequently used
applications
Tired of going to Applications View to open an application you use frequently? Use the Buttons
Preferences screen to reassign the applications associated with the buttons on the front of your
device and the sync button. Customize the Star button so that it opens your most important
application, and then reassign the other buttons as needed.
For example, if you use Documents often, you can assign Documents to a button so that you don’t
have to scroll through Applications View whenever you want to use that application.
0
1Open Buttons Preferences:
a. Go to Applications.
b. Select Prefs .
c. Select Buttons.
2Select the pick list next to the button you want to reassign, and select the
application that you want to assign to that button.
Continued
Tip
To restore all the buttons
to the original palmOne
settings, select Default.
Did You Know?
You can assign input area
icons to different
applications also. Tap and
hold the input area icon
and select an application
from the dialog box.
Select pick
list
LifeDrive from palmOne 571
CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device
3Assign the full-screen pen stroke:
a. Select More.
b. Select the pick list and select
the action you want to assign
to the full-screen pen stroke.
c. Select OK.
4Assign the sync button:
a. Select HotSync.
b. Select the pick list next to the
icon labeled Cradle and select
the application you want to
assign to the button.
c. Select OK.
5Select Done.
Done
»
Key Term
Full-screen pen stroke A
stroke that is drawn from
the bottom of the input
area to the top of the
screen. You can use this
stroke as a quick way to
do a selected task, such
as opening the Graffiti® 2
Help screen.
Tip
If you have purchased an
external modem
accessory (sold
separately), you can also
assign the sync button on
the modem by selecting
the second pick list.
Pick list
LifeDrive from palmOne 572
CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device
Setting the date and time
You can set the date, time, and location for all the applications on your device that require this
information. You can also select the format in which the date, time, and numbers appear.
Selecting a location
You can set the current date and time based on your location. When you travel to a new time zone,
change the Location setting to quickly reset the date and time. Your appointments stay at the time
you entered them—no adjustments for time zones. So always enter your schedule based on the
time zone you will be in on the day of the event.
0.
1Open Date & Time Preferences:
a. Go to Applications.
b. Select Prefs .
c. Select Date & Time.
Continued
Did You Know?
The location you select
also appears as the
primary location in World
Clock.
LifeDrive from palmOne 573
CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device
2Select the location:
a. Select the Location pick list, and
select a city in your time zone. If
you found a city in the list, go to
step 3.
No nearby city? Select Edit List,
and do steps b through e.
b. Select Add.
c. Select a city in your time zone, and then select OK.
d. Select OK again, and then select Done.
e. Select the Location pick list, and select the city you just added.
3Select Done.
Done
Tip
You can rename the
location to the city where
you live. Select the Name
field, and then modify the
location name.
Tip
If you are synchronizing
with Outlook on your
computer, you can also
select a time zone when
creating a new event in
Calendar
Name field
LifeDrive from palmOne 574
CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device
Resetting the date and time
In most cases you won’t need to reset the date and time. However, you may need to do this if you
do a hard reset on your device.
0
1Open Date & Time Preferences:
a. Go to Applications.
b. Select Prefs .
c. Select Date & Time.
2Select the location.
Continued
LifeDrive from palmOne 575
CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device
3Set the date:
a. Select the Set Date box.
b. Select the arrows to select the
current year.
c. Select the current month.
d. Select the current date.
4Set the time:
a. Select the Set Time box.
b. Select the hour and minute
boxes, and then select the
arrows to change them.
c. Select AM or PM, and then
select OK.
If you’re using a
24-hour clock format, you won’t
see the AM and PM options.
5Select Done.
Done
Year
arrows
NOTE
LifeDrive from palmOne 576
CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device
Selecting formats for dates, times, and numbers
Would you rather see the time displayed in a 24-hour format, or dates that begin with the month or
year? Use the Formats Preferences screen to change these settings and to apply them to all the
applications on your device.
You can quickly choose the preset formats based on geographic regions where you might use
your device. For example, in the United Kingdom, time often is expressed using a 24-hour clock. In
the United States, time is expressed using a 12-hour clock with an AM or PM suffix. You can use
the original preset formats or change them based on your personal preferences.
0
1Open Formats Preferences:
a. Go to Applications.
b. Select Prefs .
c. Select Formats.
Continued
LifeDrive from palmOne 577
CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device
2Select a country:
a. Select the Preset to box to
open the Set Country dialog
box.
b. Select a country.
c. Select OK.
3[ & ] OPTIONAL Customize any of the following preset formats:
Time Controls whether the time is displayed in 12-hour or 24-hour format and
which symbol separates the numbers.
Date Controls the sequence in which the day, month, and year appear and
which symbol separates the segments.
Week starts Controls whether applications treat Sunday or Monday as the first
day of the week.
Numbers Controls the decimal and thousands separator symbols.
4Select Done.
Done
Tip
The country setting
changes only the way the
date and time look. It
doesn’t change your
device’s time to that
country’s time. To do that,
go to Date & Time
Preferences or to World
Clock.
LifeDrive from palmOne 578
CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device
Customizing the way you enter information
Your device lets you choose how you enter information. You can choose the input area—the area
where you write Graffiti® 2 characters—choose Graffiti 2 strokes, and create ShortCuts to make
entering information faster.
Customizing the input area
You can configure your input area with preferences for keyboards or for Graffiti® 2 writing. You
can also choose to see your strokes as you write.
0
1Open Input Preferences:
a. Go to Applications.
b. Select Prefs .
c. Select Input.
2Select the type of input area you
want:
•Keyboard
•Wide
•Classic
Continued
Did You Know?
You can change the input
area anytime by tapping
and holding Input on the
status bar.
LifeDrive from palmOne 579
CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device
Customizing Graffiti® 2 strokes
There is more than one way to write certain Graffiti 2 characters. Use the Graffiti 2 Preferences
screen to select an alternate stroke shape for these characters.
0
3[ & ] OPTIONAL Uncheck the Show Graffiti Strokes box if you don’t want to
have the Graffiti strokes shown as you write a character in the input area.
Done
1Open Graffiti 2 Preferences:
a. Go to Applications.
b. Select Prefs .
c. Select Graffiti 2.
Continued
Tip
Right after you write a
character, your device
interprets a quick tap on
the screen as a period
character. If you want to
tap a button, either wait a
few seconds or tap the
Full-screen writing icon
on the status bar.
LifeDrive from palmOne 580
CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device
2Select alternate strokes:
a. Tap a character to view its
alternate stroke.
b. Check the box to use the
alternate stroke, and then
select Done.
3Repeat step 2 for each stroke you want to reassign, and then select Done.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 581
CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device
Setting up ShortCuts
Are you looking for a quicker way to enter information on your device? Use ShortCuts to define
abbreviations for any words, letters, or numbers that you enter often. You can use your ShortCuts
anywhere you enter info with Graffiti 2 writing.
0
1Open ShortCuts Preferences:
a. Go to Applications.
b. Select Prefs .
c. Select ShortCuts.
Continued
Tip
You may want to add a
space character after the
last word in your
ShortCut text. This way, a
space automatically
follows the ShortCut text.
Tip
To learn how to use
ShortCuts while entering
information, see Writing
Graffiti 2 ShortCuts.
Did You Know?
Your ShortCuts are
backed up on your
computer when you
synchronize.
LifeDrive from palmOne 582
CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device
2Create a ShortCut:
a. Select New.
b. On the ShortCut Name line,
enter the abbreviation.
c. On the ShortCut Text line(s),
enter the text you want to insert
when you write the
abbreviation.
d. Select OK, and then select Done.
Done
Tip
The ShortCut Text can be
45 characters long. That’s
long enough for a name
whose spelling you
always forget or a
complex email address.
LifeDrive from palmOne 583
CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device
Changing ShortCuts
After you create a ShortCut, you can modify it at any time.
0
1Open ShortCuts Preferences:
a. Go to Applications.
b. Select Prefs .
c. Select Shortcuts.
2Edit the ShortCut:
a. Select the ShortCut you want to change.
b. Select Edit.
c. Make your changes.
d. Select OK, and then select Done.
Done
Tip
To delete a ShortCut,
open ShortCuts
Preferences and select
the ShortCut. Select
Delete, select Yes, and
then select Done.
LifeDrive from palmOne 584
CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device
Correcting problems with tapping
Is your screen not responding to taps? Are you getting unexpected results when you tap? For
example, when you tap the number keyboard icon, does the Bluetooth® dialog box open instead?
If this happens, it’s time to align the screen.
0
1Open Touchscreen Preferences:
a. Go to Applications.
b. Select Prefs .
c. Select Touchscreen.
2Tap the targets on the screen as precisely as possible, and then select Done.
You need to tap at least three targets—maybe more if you don’t tap
carefully.
Done
»
Key Term
Touchscreen Another
name for your device’s
screen and the internal
circuitry that enables it to
respond appropriately to
taps.
Tip
If your screen is not
responding to taps, use
the 5-way navigator to
open Touchscreen
Preferences.
»
Key Term
Calibration The process
of aligning your device’s
touch-sensitive screen so
that when you tap an
element on the screen,
your device detects
exactly what you want it
to do.
NOTE
LifeDrive from palmOne 585
CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device
Selecting sound settings
Are sounds too soft or too loud? Set the volume levels for the system, game, and alarm tones, or
turn sounds off altogether with the Silent profile.
0
0
1Open Sounds & Alerts
Preferences:
a. Go to Applications.
b. Select Prefs .
c. Select Sounds & Alerts.
2Select Custom, Silent, or All Off.
3If you selected Silent or All Off in step 2, select Done.
If you selected Custom in step 2, select the System Sound, Game Sound, Alarm
Sound, and Alarm LED pick lists and select the volume level for each sound;
then select Done.
Done
Tip
You can choose different
types of sounds for
Calendar, Tasks, and
World Clock. Go to the
application, open the
Options menu, and then
select Preferences.
Did You Know?
When you connect
headphones to your
device, the external
speaker is automatically
silenced, the Sounds &
Alerts settings are
maintained, and all
volume levels are
automatically adjusted
for use with headphones.
Profile boxes
LifeDrive from palmOne 586
CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device
Entering your owner information
It’s a good idea to enter information that could help someone contact you if you ever lose your
device (if there’s enough battery power to turn it on). By default, the Owner Preferences screen
contains the information you entered when you installed the software installation CD and set up
your device, but you can update or add to this information. Owner information does not include
your username or passwords.
0
1Open Owner Preferences:
a. Go to Applications.
b. Select Prefs .
c. Select Owner.
2Modify or enter the text, and then select Done.
Done
Tip
In addition to entering
owner information, you
can assign a name to
your device for Bluetooth
communication.
Did You Know?
If you use Security
Preferences to turn off
and lock your device with
a password, your owner
info appears when you
select the Owner button
the next time you turn on
your device.
Tip
If you assigned a
password in Security
Preferences, you must
select Unlock and enter
your password to change
your owner info.
LifeDrive from palmOne 587
CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device
Conserving battery power
You can save battery power by adjusting the Power Preferences settings.
The memory on your device is designed to store your information even if the battery
becomes drained to the point that you cannot turn on your device. When you recharge your
device, all of your existing information in program memory and on the drive reappears.
Selecting power-saving settings
The Power Preferences screen enables you to set power consumption options.
0
1Open Power Preferences:
a. Go to Applications.
b. Select Prefs .
c. Select Power.
Continued
Tip
You can also save battery
power by turning Keylock
on to prevent your device
from turning on
accidentally.
NOTE
LifeDrive from palmOne 588
CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device
2Select the pick lists to change any of the following settings, and then select
Done.
Auto-off after Select how quickly your device automatically turns off after a
period of inactivity: 30 seconds, 1 minute, 2 minutes, or 3 minutes.
On while charging Select whether your device stays on continuously when it
is connected to the AC charger. When this option is off, you can still turn on
your device to view your info while your device charges, but it turns off
automatically after a period of inactivity.
Beam Receive Select whether you can receive beamed information on your
device. Turn this setting on to receive beamed info, or turn it off to prevent
receiving beamed info.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 589
CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device
Connecting your device to other devices
You do not need to use Connection Preferences if you are using the built-in Bluetooth
wireless technology to connect your device to another device or using the Wi-Fi® functionality to
connect your device to a Wi-Fi network. See the Bluetooth and Wi-Fi chapters for connection setup
instructions. Use Connection Preferences for other connection types.
Connection Preferences let you connect your device to other devices. You can use preset
connection settings, modify the preset settings, or create your own connection settings from
scratch. The list of preset connections varies depending on the applications you’ve added to your
device.
For example, you can create a connection between the IR port
of your device and a modem so that you can dial in to your ISP
or corporate network. The modem can be attached to or within
a mobile phone or other device containing an IR port. (Some
infrared phones can act as modems. To set up a phone
connection, you must have a GSM or GPRS mobile phone
enabled with data services and a driver for your phone. Check
www.palmOne.com for available phone drivers or contact the
phone manufacturer.)
Changing the preset connection settings
The following steps show you how to adjust the communication speed in the preset IR to
a PC/Handheld connection setting. You can similarly edit other connections or settings.
»
Key Term
ISP Acronym for
Internet service provider.
This is the service you
use to connect to the
Internet, such as AOL,
CompuServe, or
Earthlink.
Did You Know?
You cannot rename or
delete the preset
connection settings.
NOTE
LifeDrive from palmOne 590
CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device
0
1Open Connection Preferences:
a. Go to Applications.
b. Select Prefs .
c. Select Connection.
2Open the Edit Connection dialog
box:
a. Select the IR to PC/device
connection.
b. Select Edit.
Continued
LifeDrive from palmOne 591
CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device
3Change the speed setting:
a. Select Details.
b. Select the Speed pick list and
select the appropriate speed.
c. Select OK.
d. Select OK again, and then
select Done.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 592
CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device
Creating your own connection settings
If none of the preset connection settings are close to what you need, or if you’re already using all
the connections as they are, you can create a new connection.
See the Bluetooth and Wi-Fi chapters for instructions on setting up a new connection
using the built-in Bluetooth wireless technology or Wi-Fi functionality on your device.
0
1Open Connection Preferences:
a. Go to Applications.
b. Select Prefs .
c. Select Connection.
Continued
Tip
To delete a connection
that you created, select it
on the Connection
Preferences screen, and
then select Delete.
NOTE
LifeDrive from palmOne 593
CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device
2From the Connection Preferences screen, select New.
Continued
LifeDrive from palmOne 594
CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device
3Enter the basic settings:
Name Enter a name for your connection settings. This name will appear on
the Connection Preferences screen so that you can select your connection later.
Connect to Select the type of device you want to connect to: PC, Modem, or
Local Area Network.
Via Select the method you want to use to connect to the device you selected:
Bluetooth—the Bluetooth radio on your device; Cradle/Cable—the USB sync
cable that came with your device; Infrared—the IR port on your device.
The Dialing and Volume settings won’t appear unless you select
Modem as the Connect to setting.
Dialing Select whether your modem uses TouchTone™ or Rotary dialing.
Volume Select the volume level for your modem’s speaker: Off, Low, Medium,
or High.
Continued
NOTE
LifeDrive from palmOne 595
CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device
4Enter the details settings:
a. Select Details.
b. Select the Speed pick list and
select the appropriate speed.
c. Select the Flow Ctl pick list and
select whether the connection
uses flow control:
Automatic Your device determines when to use flow control.
On Flow control is always on.
Off Flow control is always off.
d. For a modem connection, enter the initialization string.
e. Select OK.
5Select OK, and then select Done.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 596
CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device
Connecting your device to a mobile phone
You do not need to use Phone Preferences if you are using the built-in Bluetooth
wireless technology to connect your device to a mobile phone enabled with Bluetooth technology.
See the Bluetooth chapter for connection setup instructions.
Phone Preferences let you configure your device to exchange messages and dial phone numbers
when your device is connected to a GSM mobile phone (sold separately). The GSM mobile phone
account must also include data services.
0
1Open Phone Preferences:
a. Go to Applications.
b. Select Prefs .
c. Select Phone.
2Select the connection:
a. Select the Connection pick list and select your mobile phone from the list.
b. Select Test to make sure the settings work with your phone.
c. Select Done.
Done
NOTE
Tip
If your phone doesn’t
appear on the list, you
need to install the phone
settings for your phone
onto your device.
LifeDrive from palmOne 597
CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device
Customizing network settings
Your device includes software that lets you connect your device to your Internet service provider
(ISP) or to a dial-in (remote access) server using a mobile phone. After you configure your network
settings, you can establish a connection either by using the menus from the Network Preferences
screen or by using a third-party application.
Setting up a service profile
Service profiles store the network settings for your ISP or dial-in server. You can create, save, and
reuse service profiles. You can create additional service profiles from scratch or by duplicating an
existing profile and editing the information.
0
1Open Network Preferences:
a. Go to Applications.
b. Select Prefs .
c. Select Network.
Continued
Before You Begin
[!]
You need the following:
• A mobile phone with a
Bluetooth radio or an IR
port (sold separately)
• A wireless service
provider account that
includes high-speed data
services or that supports
dial-up connections
(additional fees may
apply)
• An ISP account or a
corporate remote access
account (additional fees
may apply)
• Connection Preferences
settings for your mobile
phone enabled with IR or
Bluetooth wireless
technology
LifeDrive from palmOne 598
CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device
2Enter the basic settings:
Service Select the Service pick list and select your ISP or your dial-in server
type from the list. If your ISP or server type isn’t on the list, select New and
enter a name for the service profile.
User Name Enter your username. This is the part of your email address that’s
before the @ sign and it’s the name that you use when you log in to your ISP or
your dial-in server. This field can contain multiple lines of text, but only two
lines appear onscreen.
Password Enter the password you use to log in to your ISP or dial-in server,
and then select OK. The word “Assigned” appears in this box and you don’t
need to enter a password when you log in.
Connection Select the Connection pick list and select the method you want to
use to connect to your ISP or to a dial-in server. See Connecting your device to
other devices for info on creating and configuring connection settings.
3If you’re using a phone or modem
connection, enter the phone
settings:
a. Select the Phone box.
Continued
Tip
Instead of creating a new
profile, you can copy an
existing profile and
change the settings.
Select the profile you
want to copy, and then
open the Service menu
and select Duplicate.
Did You Know?
Most dial-in servers do
not accept spaces in the
username.
Tip
If you’re concerned about
security, don’t enter a
password. Just leave the
word “Prompt” in the
Password box and your
device will ask you to
enter a password each
time you log in.
LifeDrive from palmOne 599
CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device
Cont’d
. b. Enter any of the following settings, and then select OK:
Phone # Enter the phone number for your ISP or dial-in server.
Dial prefix Check the Dial prefix box, and then enter the number that you dial
before the telephone number to access an outside line. For example, many
offices require that you first dial 9 to dial a number outside the building.
Disable call waiting If your phone has Call Waiting, check the Disable call
waiting box, and then enter the code to disable Call Waiting. Call Waiting can
cause your session to end if you receive a call while you are connected. Contact
your local phone company for the code that is appropriate for you.
Use calling card If you want to use your calling card when dialing your ISP or
dial-in server, check the Use calling box to select it. Enter your calling card
number on the Use calling card line.
Because MCI works differently, enter the MCI calling card
number in the Phone # field and the phone number in the Use calling card field.
4Select Done.
Done
Tip
It’s a good idea to add at
least three commas
before your calling card
number to allow for the
cue delay. Each comma
delays transmission of
your calling card number
for two seconds.
IMPORTANT
[!]
LifeDrive from palmOne 600
CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device
Connecting to your service
After you set up your Connection and Network Preferences, establishing a connection to your ISP
or your company’s network (dial-in server) is easy.
0
1Open Network Preferences:
a. Go to Applications.
b. Select Prefs .
c. Select Network.
2Make the connection:
a. Make sure the service profile you want to use appears in the Service field.
If not, select it.
b. Select Connect.
3End the connection when you’ve finished using it:
a. Select Disconnect.
b. Select Done.
Done
Tip
To see expanded Service
Connection Progress
messages, press Down
on the 5-way. To see more
information, open the
Options menu and select
View Log.
LifeDrive from palmOne 601
CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device
Adding details to a service profile
If you’re using one of the predefined service profiles, you probably need to enter only your
username, password, and telephone number. If you’re creating a new service profile, you may
need to use the Details dialog box to add more information to your service profile.
0
1Open Network Preferences:
a. Go to Applications.
b. Select Prefs .
c. Select Network.
2Open the Details dialog box:
a. Select the Service pick list and
select the service you want to
add details to.
b. Select Details.
Continued
LifeDrive from palmOne 602
CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device
3Adjust any of the following settings:
Ask your ISP or system administrator if you need information on any
of these settings.
Connection type Select the pick list and choose the communication protocol
for this service: PPP, SLIP, or CSLIP. Most email applications use the PPP or SLIP
protocols.
Idle timeout Select the pick list and select how long your device waits before
dropping the connection with your ISP or dial-in server when you switch out of
an application that requires a connection: 1 Minute, 2 Minutes, 3 Minutes, or
Never.
Query DNS Check the Query DNS box if you’re not sure whether you need to
enter DNS addresses. Many systems do not require that you enter DNS
addresses. If you do need DNS addresses, uncheck the DNS box, tap the space
to the left of each period in the Primary and Secondary DNS fields, and then
enter the appropriate sections of each address.
IP Address Check the IP Address box to use a temporary IP address. Uncheck
the IP Address box to enter a permanently assigned address.
4Select OK, and then select Done.
Done
»
Key Term
DNS Domain name
system. The Internet uses
this system to translate
the names of host
computers into IP
addresses. A DNS
number identifies the
server that handles the
translation.
Each IP address has four
numbers (from 0 to 255)
that are separated by
periods.
»
Key Term
IP Internet protocol.
Everyone who logs in to
the Internet needs a
unique identifier (an
IP address). Some
networks dynamically
assign a temporary IP
address upon login while
others assign a
permanent IP address.
NOTE
LifeDrive from palmOne 603
CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device
Deleting a service profile
0
1Open Network Preferences:
a. Go to Applications.
b. Select Prefs .
c. Select Network.
2Delete the service you want to delete:
a. Select the Service pick list and select the service you want to delete.
b. Open the menus.
c. Select Delete in the Service menu.
d. Select OK, and then select Done.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 604
CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device
Creating login scripts
A login script is a series of commands that automates logging in to a network server—for
example, your corporate network or your ISP. A login script is associated with a specific service
profile created in Network Preferences.
A login script is something that you are likely to receive from your system administrator if you log
in to the corporate servers from your device using a phone/modem or network connection. The
script is generally prepared by the system administrator and distributed to users who need it. It
automates the events that must take place to establish a connection between your device and the
corporate servers.
You can create login scripts by selecting commands from the Command pick list in the Login
Script dialog box. Some commands, such as Send, require you to supply additional information. If
the command requires additional info, a field appears to the right of the command where you can
enter the info.
0
1Open Network Preferences:
a. Go to Applications.
b. Select Prefs .
c. Select Network.
Continued
Tip
Windows You can also
create login scripts with a
text editor on your
desktop computer. Create
a file with the extension
PNC, and then install the
file on your device using
Quick Install.
Did You Know?
Your login scripts can
also use non-ASCII and
literal characters.
LifeDrive from palmOne 605
CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device
2Open the Login Script dialog box:
a. Select the Service pick list and select the service you want to add a script to.
b. Select Details.
c. Select Script.
3Select the End pick list and select one of the following commands from the list:
Wait For Tells your device to wait for specific characters from the server before
executing the next command.
Wait For Prompt Detects a challenge-response prompt coming from the
server, and then displays the dynamically generated challenge value. You then
enter the challenge value into your token card, which in turn generates a
response value for you to enter on your device. This is a two-part command that
is separated by a vertical bar (|) on the input line.
Continued
LifeDrive from palmOne 606
CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device
Cont’d.
Send Transmits specific characters to the server that you’re connecting to.
Send CR Transmits a carriage return or line feed (LF) character to the server.
Send User ID Transmits the User Name field from Network Preferences.
Send Password Transmits the Password field from Network Preferences. If you
didn’t enter a password, this command prompts you to enter one. The Password
command is usually followed by a Send CR command.
Delay Tells your device to wait a specific number of seconds before going to
the next command in the login script.
Get IP Reads an IP address and uses it as the IP address for your device. This
command is used with SLIP connections.
Prompt Opens a dialog box and prompts you to enter certain text (for
example, a password or a security code).
End Identifies the last line in the login script.
4Complete the script:
a. Repeat step 3 until the login script is complete.
b. Select OK, and then select OK again.
c. Select Done.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 607
CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device
Adding plug-in applications
You can create plug-in applications containing script commands that extend the functionality of
the built-in script commands. A plug-in application is a standard PRC application that you install
on your device just like any other application. After you install the plug-in application, you can use
the new script commands in a login script.
For example, you might use a plug-in application in the following situations:
• You need the login script to properly respond to different connection scenarios defined by the
authentication server.
• You want to perform conditional tests and branching as part of the login process.
Plug-in applications have the following characteristics:
• Written in C language
• Compiled into a device executable
• Called properly from a login script
• Able to return control to a login script after it terminates
• Created using a development environment that supports Palm OS® software, such as
Metrowerks CodeWarrior tools.
Tip
For more info on creating
plug-in applications,
contact Developer
Support at PalmSource.
LifeDrive from palmOne 608
CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device
Setting up a VPN
If you want to use your device to access your corporate email account or other files on your
corporate server, you may need to set up a virtual private network (VPN) on your device. A VPN
enables you to log in to your corporate server through the company’s firewall (security layer).
Without a VPN, you cannot pass through the firewall to gain access to the server. You need to set
up a VPN to access a corporate server in either of the following situations:
• Your company’s wireless local area network (LAN) is located outside the firewall.
• Your company’s wireless LAN is located inside the firewall, but you are trying to access the
network from outside the firewall (for example, from a public location or at home).
Check with your company’s system administrator to see if a VPN is required to access the
corporate network. If you need a VPN, you must either use the Enterprise Software link on the
software installation CD to download and purchase a VPN client, or purchase and install a third-
party VPN client, to use this feature.
Setting up a VPN account on your device
0
1Open VPN Preferences:
a. Go to Applications.
b. Select Prefs .
c. Select VPN.
Continued
Before You Begin
[!]
You must purchase and
install a compatible VPN
client onto your device.
You also need the VPN
settings from your
corporate system
administrator.
Did You Know?
Once you have installed
and set up a VPN, you can
connect or disconnect
VPN from within the web
browser.
LifeDrive from palmOne 609
CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device
2Set up a VPN account on your device:
a. Select the Add Account box.
b. Follow the instructions to enter the settings provided by your corporate
system administrator.
c. Select Done.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 610
CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device
Establishing a VPN connection
0
1Open VPN Preferences:
a. Go to Applications.
b. Select Prefs .
c. Select VPN.
2Establish a VPN connection:
a. Select a VPN account from the VPN Account pick list.
b. Select Connect VPN.
c. If prompted, enter your VPN username and password.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 611
CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device
Ending a VPN connection
0
1Open VPN Preferences:
a. Go to Applications.
b. Select Prefs .
c. Select VPN.
2Select Disconnect VPN.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 612
CHAPTER 28 Customizing Your Device
Related topics
Click a link below to learn about these related topics:
Your Mobile
Manager
Locating the input area and other controls on your device
Moving
Around
• Opening applications
• Using menus
Entering
Information
• Using Graffiti 2 writing to enter information
• Using ShortCuts to quickly enter text phrases
Connecting Customizing Bluetooth communication settings
Privacy Keeping information private by locking your device with a password
Categories Creating categories so you can organize your applications and information
World Clock Viewing the date and time in other cities
Tips & Tricks
Make your device uniquely
yours. For great tips,
software, accessories, and
more, visit
www.palmOne.com/
mylifedrive.
Support
If you’re having problems
with customization or with
anything else on your device,
go to www.palmOne.com/
support.
LifeDrive from palmOne 613
CHAPTER 29
Expanding Your Device
A Chinese proverb says, “Life just
gives you time and space; it's up to
you to fill it.” But doesn’t it always
seem that no matter how much space
you have, you still need more?
Expansion cards (sold separately)
provide a compact and limitless
answer to the storage dilemma. When
one card becomes full, simply use
another card. Use the Camera
Companion application on your device
to work with photos and videos from a
digital camera card. Also use
expansion cards to install and run cool
games and other types of software,
from dictionaries to travel guides, on
your device.
Benefits of expansion cards
• Import photos and videos from a
digital camera card, and then delete
them from the card to use it again
• Back up info
• Add more games and other software
• Add accessories
• Store, carry, and exchange info
I
n t
hi
s c
h
apter
What type of expansion
cards can I use?
How can expansion cards
help me?
Removing an expansion card
Inserting an expansion card
Opening an application on
an expansion card
Opening files on an
expansion card
Viewing card information
Renaming a card
Copying applications to an
expansion card
Removing all information
from a card
Related topics
LifeDrive from palmOne 614
CHAPTER 29 Expanding Your Device
What type of expansion cards can I use?
Your device is compatible with SDIO, SD, and MultiMediaCard expansion cards. SDIO expansion
cards let you add accessories to your device. SD and MultiMediaCard expansion cards let you
store information and applications. Your device also works with memory cards from your digital
camera.
How can expansion cards help me?
Work with photos and videos. Insert a memory card from your digital camera and use the
Camera Companion application on your device to import photos and videos and work with them
on your device or copy them to your computer.
Back up info. Make a copy of your important information for safekeeping in case your device
becomes damaged or is stolen.
Add games and other software. Purchase popular games, dictionaries, travel guides, and more.
To check out the variety of expansion cards available for your device, visit www.palmOne.com/
mylifedrive and click the Accessories link.
Add accessories. Attach SDIO accessories, such as a presentation module, to your device.
Store all your info. Never worry about running out of space on your device. Purchase as many
expansion cards as you need to store your music, photos, videos, and other information.
Expansion cards come in a variety of capacities, and they’re very small, easy to store, and
affordably priced.
»
Key Term
SDIO An acronym for
Secure Digital input/
output.
Tip
Looking for a handy way
to carry your expansion
cards? You can purchase
a variety of carrying
cases. Visit
www.palmOne.com/
mylifedrive and click the
Accessories link.
LifeDrive from palmOne 615
CHAPTER 29 Expanding Your Device
Removing an expansion card
Your device comes with a dummy card inserted into the expansion card slot. You must
remove this card before you can put a real card into the slot.
0
1Push lightly against the card with your thumb until you hear the confirmation
tone.
2Slide the card out of the expansion slot.
Done
NOTE
Tip
To prevent damaging the
card and the info on it,
always wait for your
device to finish writing to
the expansion card
before you remove the
card from the slot.
LifeDrive from palmOne 616
CHAPTER 29 Expanding Your Device
Inserting an expansion card
0
1Insert the card into the expansion slot with the label side facing the front of the
device.
2Push the card in with your thumb until you feel the card “click” in place and
hear the confirmation tone.
No confirmation tone? Check the Sounds & Alerts Preferences to
make sure the System Sound setting is turned on.
Done
NOTE
LifeDrive from palmOne 617
CHAPTER 29 Expanding Your Device
Opening an application on an expansion card
When you insert an expansion card into the expansion slot, your device adds the expansion card
to the category list in the upper-right corner of Applications View. You can easily switch between
applications installed on your device and on the expansion card.
Some applications may not run correctly when you install them on an expansion card.
Try installing these applications on your device instead. If you still have problems, contact the
developer.
0
1Insert the expansion card.
2Go to Applications and select the
expansion card from the
category pick list.
3Select an application icon to open that application.
Done
Did You Know?
You can install
applications and other
files to an expansion card
during synchronization.
Tip
When the highlight on
Applications View is not
active, you can press and
hold the Select button to
open the category pick
list.
NOTE
Category
pick list
LifeDrive from palmOne 618
CHAPTER 29 Expanding Your Device
Opening files on an expansion card
You can open files on an expansion card when you insert the card into the expansion slot.
0
1Open the application associated with the files you want to open.
2Insert the expansion card.
3Select the entry you want to view.
Done
Tip
Use LifeDrive™ Manager
(Windows only) to install
applications and transfer
folders and files from
your Windows computer
to an expansion card.
LifeDrive from palmOne 619
CHAPTER 29 Expanding Your Device
Viewing card information
It’s easy to forget which files you put on a particular expansion card. When you have a card
inserted into the expansion slot, use the Card Info application to view the card name and type,
available storage space, and a summary of the card’s contents.
Go to Applications and select Card Info .
Tip
Reading and writing info
on an expansion card
uses more battery power
than doing the same task
on your device. If you
have enough space on
your device, consider
copying the info to your
device.
Tip
If your device’s battery is
very low, access to the
expansion card may be
disabled. If this occurs,
recharge your device as
soon as possible.
Did You Know?
You can view and access
files or folders on an
expansion card using the
Files application on your
device, and manage your
files on a card using
LifeDrive Manager or
Drive Mode.
Card name
Summary of contents
Space available
LifeDrive from palmOne 620
CHAPTER 29 Expanding Your Device
Renaming a card
The expansion card name appears in the category pick list and in other lists that let you choose
where to store your info. When you buy a new card, give it a name that helps you remember
what’s on the card. You can rename the card later if you decide to store different info on the card.
0
1Insert an expansion card.
2Go to Applications and select Card Info .
3Open the Rename Card dialog
box:
a. Open the menus.
b. Select Rename Card on the
Card menu.
4Enter the new name for the card, and then select Rename.
Done
Tip
You can also use the Files
application to rename
your card.
LifeDrive from palmOne 621
CHAPTER 29 Expanding Your Device
Copying applications to an expansion card
0
1Insert the expansion card, and then go to Applications.
2Open the Copy dialog box:
a. Open the menus.
b. Select Copy on the App menu.
3Copy the application:
A lock appears next to applications that are copy-protected. You
cannot copy or beam these applications.
a. Select the Copy From pick list and select Device.
b. Select the application you want to copy.
c. Select Copy.
d. Select Done.
Done
Tip
If you use a card reader to
view your card on a
computer, the file names
may differ from the
names you see on your
device.
Did You Know?
Some applications, such
as Media, let you copy or
move info between your
device and an expansion
card. See the information
on each application for
details.
NOTE
LifeDrive from palmOne 622
CHAPTER 29 Expanding Your Device
Removing all information from a card
Formatting a card removes all of its info and prepares it to accept new applications and files.
We do not recommend formatting backup cards. Formatting removes the
backup application and turns the card into a blank memory card.
0
1Insert an expansion card.
2Go to Applications and select Card Info .
3Format the card:
a. Open the menus.
b. Select Format Card on the
Card menu.
c. When asked if you want to
format the card, select OK.
Done
IMPORTANT
[!]
LifeDrive from palmOne 623
CHAPTER 29 Expanding Your Device
Related topics
Click a link below to learn about these related topics:
Sharing • Exchanging applications and information with other Palm Powered™
devices by exchanging cards or beaming items between devices
• Sending applications and information to other Bluetooth® devices by
using Bluetooth wireless technology on your device
Managing
Info
Adding applications from your computer to an expansion card, and
installing other files such as photos, videos, or music
Tips & Tricks
Make your device uniquely
yours. For great tips,
software, accessories, and
more, visit
www.palmOne.com/
mylifedrive.
Support
If you’re having problems
with expansion cards or with
anything else on your device,
go to www.palmOne.com/
support.
LifeDrive from palmOne 624
CHAPTER 30
Maintaining Your Device
Your device is designed to be rugged and reliable and to provide you with years
of trouble-free service. Taking care of your device helps keep it working properly
and ensures that it’s available when you need it.
Device do’s and don’ts
To protect your device from damage and ensure reliable performance, follow these guidelines.
Device do’s
• Always store your device in the included pouch when not in use.
• Use only the stylus to tap the screen—no pens, pencils, paper clips, or other sharp objects.
• Use only the supplied AC charger to charge your device.
•Keep the battery charged.
• Keep the screen free of dust (or anything else that could make it dirty).
• For general cleaning, use a soft, damp cloth. If the screen becomes dirty, use a soft cloth
moistened with a diluted window-cleaning solution.
• Use only 3.5mm stereo headphones (sold separately) in your device’s headphone jack.
LifeDrive from palmOne 625
CHAPTER 30 Maintaining Your Device
• Be sure to get rid of any static electricity buildup before you connect your device to any cable or
accessory.
• If you are using your device in Drive Mode for an extended period of time or you are using the
Camera Companion application, or if the battery is low while in Drive Mode or while using
Camera Companion, keep your device connected to the AC charger plugged into a power outlet.
•Synchronize often to maintain a backup copy of your important information on your computer.
Device don’ts
Do not open your device for any reason. There are no user-serviceable parts
inside. Attempting to remove the hard drive voids the warranty on your device.
• Do not drop, bang, or otherwise cause a strong impact to your device. If you drop the device
while the amber indicator light is flashing—indicating that the hard drive is processing
information—you may damage the hard drive.
• Do not carry your device in your back pocket; you might sit on it by mistake.
• Do not let your device get wet; don’t even leave it in a damp location.
• Do not expose your device to very hot or cold temperatures, including placing it near a heater,
leaving it in the trunk of a car, or setting it by a window in direct sunlight.
• Do not carry or use your device at extremely high altitudes, unless you’re in an airplane.
• Do not place your device near strong magnetic fields such as wireless modems. This could
cause loss of information on the hard drive.
Tip
Your device contains a
hard drive and other
components that may
become warm when used
for extended periods of
time. This is normal and
should not affect the
performance or reliability
of your device.
IMPORTANT
[!]
LifeDrive from palmOne 626
CHAPTER 30 Maintaining Your Device
Resetting your device
On rare occasions your device may not respond when you press a button or tap the screen. In this
case, you need to reset your device.
Doing a soft reset
A soft reset tells your device to stop what it’s doing and start over again. None of your information
will be lost. After a soft reset, a screen appears that lets you reset the date and time, if needed.
To do a soft reset, use the tip of the stylus to gently press the reset button on the bottom of your
device.
If your device does not respond after a soft reset, you need to do a hard reset.
Reset button
LifeDrive from palmOne 627
CHAPTER 30 Maintaining Your Device
Doing a hard reset
Only do a hard reset if a soft reset doesn’t solve your problem, or if you want to clear all of your
information from your device.
A hard reset deletes all records and entries stored on your device, including the
username that identifies the device. This is another reason why it's important to synchronize
often, so you have an up-to-date backup available. Before you do a hard reset, be sure to do a full
sync.
0
1Slide the power switch to the right and hold it in that position.
2While holding the switch to the right, use the tip of the stylus (or a similar object
without a sharp tip) to gently press and release the reset button on the bottom
of your device.
3Wait for the reset screen to
appear, and then release the
power switch.
Continued
IMPORTANT
[!]
LifeDrive from palmOne 628
CHAPTER 30 Maintaining Your Device
4On the reset screen, do one of the
following:
Quick Erase Press Up on the 5-way
navigator to do a Quick Erase reset.
This eliminates user information on
the drive in such a way that there is
no info available to anyone using the
device. A Quick Erase reset takes
approximately 5 minutes.
Secure Erase Press Down on the
5-way to do a Secure Erase reset.
This completely deletes all user info
on the drive. A Secure Erase reset
takes about 20-25 minutes.
Do a Secure Erase reset if you are turning the device over to a
new owner. A Secure Erase helps prevent your files from being restored or
recompiled by a new owner who might remove the hard drive and use a drive
reader to access your information. Do a Quick Erase reset for a regular hard
reset, to get your device to wake up and respond again.
If you use a password to protect your device, you must do a Secure
Erase when you hard reset your device; the Quick Erase option does not appear
on the reset screen.
During the reset process, a status screen appears with the words “Quick Erase”
or “Secure Erase” and a progress bar, followed by screens showing the
palmOne, Palm Powered™ and LifeDrive™ logos.
Continued
Tip
When doing a Secure
Erase reset, be sure that
the AC charger is
connected to your device
and plugged into an
outlet.
Tip
When the reset screen
appears, press Center on
the 5-way to cancel the
hard reset and keep all
info on your device.
IMPORTANT
[!]
NOTE
LifeDrive from palmOne 629
CHAPTER 30 Maintaining Your Device
5When prompted, tap to align the screen, and then select the language you want
to use on your device. A screen appears showing the palmOne logo and a
progress bar.
6When the Welcome screen
appears, the hard reset is
complete. Follow the instructions
to set up your device.
Done
LifeDrive from palmOne 630
CHAPTER 30 Maintaining Your Device
Restoring your information after a hard reset
If you synchronized before doing a hard reset, you can now put that information back on your
device. However, you may need to re-enter some of your personal settings, as well as your color-
coded categories in Calendar.
WINDOWS ONLY
0
1Open the Custom menu in the HotSync® application:
a. Click the HotSync Manager icon in the taskbar in the lower-right corner of
the screen.
b. Click Custom.
2Select the correct username from the list at the top of the box.
Continued
LifeDrive from palmOne 631
CHAPTER 30 Maintaining Your Device
3Set the transfer options:
a. Select an application in the
Conduit list, and then click
Change.
b. Select Desktop overwrites
device.
This change applies
only to the next synchronization.
c. Click OK.
4Repeat step 3 for the other applications in the list that you want to restore, and
then click Done.
5Synchronize your device with your computer.
Done
NOTE
LifeDrive from palmOne 632
CHAPTER 30 Maintaining Your Device
Related topics
Click a link below to learn about these related topics:
Managing Info Creating a backup of your information
Customizing Customizing your device again after doing a hard reset
My Device
Make your device uniquely
yours. For great tips,
software, accessories, and
more, visit
www.palmOne.com/
mylifedrive.
Support
If you’re having problems
with resets or with anything
else on your device, go to
www.palmOne.com/
support.
LifeDrive from palmOne 633
CHAPTER 31
Common Questions
Although we can’t anticipate all the questions you might have, this chapter
provides answers to some of the most commonly asked questions.
Setup
Nothing happens when I insert the CD.
WINDOWS ONLY
1. Click Start on your computer, and then select Run.
2. Click Browse and navigate to your CD-ROM drive.
3. Select Autorun, click Open, and then click OK.
I cannot install Palm®Desktop software.
WINDOWS ONLY
• Disable any virus-scanning software on your computer.
• Close any open applications.
• Make sure your computer has at least 170MB of disk space available.
• Delete all temporary files.
LifeDrive from palmOne 634
CHAPTER 31 Common Questions
• Run ScanDisk (or another disk verification tool) on your computer.
• Install the latest Windows software updates to your computer.
• If you are upgrading from an older Palm Powered™ device, remove any previous version(s) of
Palm®Desktop software by clicking Start, navigating to Settings, and clicking Control Panel. Click
Add or Remove Programs.
• Uninstall and then reinstall the current version of Palm Desktop software.
MAC ONLY
• Disable any virus-scanning software on your computer.
• Quit any open applications.
• Make sure your computer has at least 190MB of disk space available.
• Install the latest Mac software updates to your computer.
• If you are upgrading from an older Palm Powered device, remove any previous version(s) of
Palm Desktop software.
• Uninstall and then reinstall the current version of Palm Desktop software.
LifeDrive from palmOne 635
CHAPTER 31 Common Questions
Device
Do not open your device; there are no serviceable parts inside. Opening your
device voids the warranty and is not recommended under any circumstances.
I want to see how much battery life I have left.
A battery icon appears at the top of Favorites and Applications views. Check the icon
periodically to see if your device needs to be recharged. If the battery becomes low, a message
appears on the screen prompting you to recharge the battery.
I’m not sure when I need to recharge my device.
We recommend that you recharge your device for at least half an hour every day. Ideally, connect
your device to a power source every night and recharge it while you sleep.
My battery is drained.
The memory on your device is designed to store your information even if the battery becomes
drained completely. When you recharge your device, all of your existing information, both in
program memory and on the hard drive, should appear.
My battery drains too quickly.
You can conserve battery life by doing any of the following:
•Adjust the screen brightness.
•Reduce the Auto-off setting.
•Use Keylock to prevent your device from turning on by accident.
•Stop music or video playback when not in use.
IMPORTANT
[!]
LifeDrive from palmOne 636
CHAPTER 31 Common Questions
• Keep your device connected to the AC charger plugged into a power outlet when using Drive
Mode or Camera Companion for an extended period of time.
•Respond to or cancel alerts promptly.
• Turn off Bluetooth® wireless technology and Wi-Fi® functionality when not in use.
•If using Auto Sync to automatically retrieve email messages, set the time interval to one hour or
less often.
•Minimize use of the expansion slot.
When I connect my device to the AC charger, it does not charge.
• Confirm that your device is firmly connected to the AC charger.
• Confirm that your AC charger is plugged into an AC outlet that has power.
A lightning bolt over the battery icon indicates that your device is charging. If your battery is
completely drained, you’ll need to charge it for a few minutes before you can turn it on and see the
battery icon.
My device is not responding.
On rare occasions your device may not respond when you press a button or tap the screen. If this
happens, first check that Keylock is not turned on.
If Keylock is off and your device is still not responding, you need to reset your device. A soft reset
tells your device to stop and start over again. This does not affect any of the information or
applications on your device.
If you had a network connection that was cut off, your device may not respond for up to
30 seconds. Wait 30 seconds before performing a soft reset.
Tip
After a soft reset, the
Preferences screen
appears with the Date &
Time option highlighted
so you can reset the date
and time if necessary.
NOTE
LifeDrive from palmOne 637
CHAPTER 31 Common Questions
If your device does not respond after a soft reset, you need to perform a hard reset.
If your device still does not respond after a reset, check your third-party applications for
incompatible applications.
I don’t see anything on my device’s screen.
• Press an application button to ensure that your device is turned on.
• If your device was exposed to cold, make sure it is at room temperature.
• Charge your device.
•Perform a soft reset. If your device still doesn’t turn on, perform a hard reset.
I get a warning message telling me my storage volume is full.
The term “storage volume” refers to your device’s program memory. If you get a message that
your program memory is full, try the following:
• If you have installed additional applications on your device, remove them to recover memory.
•Purge items from Calendar and Tasks. This deletes Tasks items and past Calendar events from
the memory of your device.
•Delete unused memos, photos, and other items, or save them to an expansion card.
• Move infrequently used applications to the Applications folder on the hard drive. Note that some
applications must be installed in program memory in order to run correctly.
My device becomes warm when I use it for extended periods of time.
Your device contains a hard drive and other components that may become warm when used for
extended periods of time. This is normal and should not affect the performance or reliability of
your device.
Tip
When you purge or delete
items, you are given the
option to save an archive
copy on your computer
the next time you
synchronize.
LifeDrive from palmOne 638
CHAPTER 31 Common Questions
My device keeps turning itself off.
Your device is designed to turn itself off after a period of inactivity. This period can be set at 30
seconds or at one, two, or three minutes. Check the Auto-off after setting on the Power Preferences
screen.
My device is not making any sounds.
Check the System, Alarm, and Game Sound settings.
I get a blank screen when I reset my device.
It takes a little while for your device to reset when you press the reset button. During a soft reset,
you see a progress bar, then a screen with the Palm Powered™ logo. Resetting is complete when
the Date & Time Preferences screen appears.
The current date and time are incorrect.
The current date and time are tied to the Location setting. If you change the date and time without
changing the Location setting, the current date and time may appear incorrect.
My application is responding slowly.
WINDOWS ONLY
If you are transferring files using LifeDrive™ Manager and you are working with a large
application on your device such as a game, the application may perform slowly. Wait until the file
transfer has finished before you use the application.
LifeDrive from palmOne 639
CHAPTER 31 Common Questions
Moving around
I can’t find the icon I want in Applications View.
• Select the category pick list in the upper-right corner of Applications View and select All. You
may need to scroll down a bit, but you should now see an icon for each of the applications on
your device.
• The application you want may be installed on your device’s hard drive. To view these
applications, select the category pick list in the upper-right corner of Applications View and
select LifeDrive.
• Some of the applications that come with your device are not preinstalled. You need to install
these extra applications from the software installation CD.
• If you have an expansion card inserted in the expansion slot on your device, the application you
want may be installed on the card instead of on your device. To view the applications installed
on the card, select the pick list in the upper-right corner of Applications View and select the
expansion card’s name from the list.
Entering information
My device doesn’t respond to taps correctly.
If your device is not responding to taps correctly, you need to align the screen.
When I tap Menu on the status bar, nothing happens.
• Tap the upper-left corner of the screen to try to open the menus.
•Align the screen and try tapping Menu again.
• If nothing happens, you may be in an application or screen that does not use menus. Switch to a
different application and try tapping Menu. If it works in the second application, then the first
does not use menus.
• If tapping Menu does not work in the second application, try aligning the screen again.
LifeDrive from palmOne 640
CHAPTER 31 Common Questions
I can’t get my device to recognize my handwriting.
For your device to recognize handwriting input with the stylus, you need to use Graffiti® 2 writing.
Use the Graffiti 2 help to learn how to write characters.
Your device recognizes strokes entered with the stylus other than Graffiti 2 strokes in
the Note Pad application only.
• Make the Graffiti 2 character strokes in the Graffiti 2 input area, not on the display part of the
screen. If you want to write on the display part of the screen, turn full-screen writing on.
• Write Graffiti 2 strokes for lowercase letters in the left side, strokes for capital letters in the
middle, and strokes for numbers in the right side of the Graffiti 2 writing area.
• Make sure that Graffiti 2 is not in shift mode or in Punctuation Shift mode.
The info I entered does not appear in an application.
• Check the Categories pick list in the upper-right corner of Applications View. Select All to display
all the records for the application.
• Did you set private records to be hidden? Check Security Preferences to see that Private Records
is set to Show private records.
• Open the Options menu and select Preferences. Make sure Show Completed Tasks is selected.
I don’t know how to save the info I entered in an application.
Each time you complete an entry such as a contact, memo, or note, your device automatically
saves the information you entered. You don’t have to do anything special to save your info. To
protect your info and create a backup of your info, do a full sync often to back up the info on your
device to your computer.
NOTE
LifeDrive from palmOne 641
CHAPTER 31 Common Questions
Synchronizing
I can’t synchronize my device with my computer.
You must install the software installation CD before you can synchronize.
• Make sure the USB sync cable is connected
securely.
• Make sure the date on your computer matches the
date on your device.
• Read the HotSync log for the user account for
which you are synchronizing.
WINDOWS ONLY
Click the HotSync Manager icon in the Windows
taskbar in the lower-right corner of your screen. Make
sure Local USB has a checkmark next to it. If not,
click it.
If you don’t see the HotSync Manager icon, click Start in the Windows taskbar, and then
select Programs. Go to the palmOne program group and select HotSync Manager.
MAC ONLY
• Make sure HotSync Manager is enabled: Open the Palm folder and double-click the HotSync
Manager icon. On the HotSync Controls tab, be sure Enabled is selected. If it is not, click it.
• Disconnect the USB sync cable from your computer, and then reconnect the cable and restart
your computer.
Tip
Need more help with
synchronizing your
device? Open
Palm Desktop software,
go to the Help menu, and
select HotSync Online
Troubleshooting Guide.
NOTE
NOTE
LifeDrive from palmOne 642
CHAPTER 31 Common Questions
When I synchronize, nothing happens on Palm Desktop software, and
my device times out.
•Perform a soft reset.
• Make sure that HotSync Manager is running on your computer.
• Make a copy of the folder containing your information. This folder is named with either your full
username or a shortened version of the name. Uninstall and then reinstall Palm Desktop
software.
• Turn on your device, and go to Applications. Select HotSync , and then select Local.
I want to change from synchronizing my device with Palm Desktop
software to synchronizing with Outlook.
WINDOWS ONLY
During CD installation, you chose a desktop software application to synchronize with your device.
You may have chosen Palm Desktop software at that time. But if Microsoft Outlook already
contains all of your contacts, appointments, tasks, and notes, you can change your
synchronization method so that your device synchronizes with Outlook instead. You can also
change from Outlook to Palm Desktop software.
If you choose to synchronize with Outlook, info from Contacts, Calendar, Tasks, and
Memos is synchronized with info in Outlook. You can also set up the VersaMail® application to
synchronize email messages on your device with email in Outlook. Other info, such as voice
memos and notes, is synchronized with info in Palm Desktop software.
1. Insert the CD into your computer.
2. Select Change your synchronization method.
3. Follow the onscreen instructions for the desktop software you want to use.
NOTE
Before You Begin
[!]
You must have completed
CD installation and
chosen Palm Desktop
software as your desktop
application for
synchronization in order
to switch to Outlook. Note
that you can choose
Outlook as your
synchronization software
for Contacts, Calendar,
Tasks, and Memos during
CD installation.
LifeDrive from palmOne 643
CHAPTER 31 Common Questions
I can’t synchronize my device with Microsoft Outlook.
WINDOWS ONLY
If you choose to synchronize your device with Outlook, information from Contacts,
Calendar, Tasks, and Memos is synchronized with info in Outlook. Other information, such as voice
memos and notes, is synchronized with info in Palm Desktop software.
• Click the HotSync Manager icon and select Custom. Check the following:
• Make sure that you have the correct username selected from the drop-down list.
• Make sure that the applications you want are set to synchronize the files. If not, select each
application, click Change, and then choose Synchronize the files.
• Make sure that the correct application name is selected. For example, the older version of
Calendar was called Date Book. If you have upgraded from an older device, make sure that
Calendar is set to Synchronize the files, and Date Book is set to Do Nothing.
• If you synchronize your device with more than one computer, click Settings and select Enable
synchronization to multiple PCs for each application you want to synchronize. This helps avoid
duplicating the same information on a single computer.
Check the Set as default box to use this setting each time you synchronize. Otherwise, it
applies during the next synchronization only.
• Be sure that the application you want is installed. Reinstall the HotSync Manager and make sure
that the application is selected.
• Reinstall Palm Desktop software and select the option to synchronize with Microsoft Outlook.
I can’t synchronize wirelessly using my device’s Bluetooth
technology.
• Make sure that the HotSync Manager is running on your desktop computer. The HotSync
Manager icon must appear in the taskbar in the lower-right corner of your screen.
• Click the HotSync Manager icon and verify that there is a checkmark next to Local.
NOTE
NOTE
LifeDrive from palmOne 644
CHAPTER 31 Common Questions
• Your device may not be able to recognize the virtual serial port on your Windows computer. Try
validating the virtual serial port you’re using, or create a different virtual port and change the
HotSync Manager settings to use the new virtual port. To change the virtual serial port, click the
HotSync Manager icon . Select Setup, and then select the Local tab. Select a port from the
Serial port pick list.
When you synchronize wirelessly, your device attempts to connect to a Bluetooth virtual serial port
on your computer. First it looks for a Bluetooth serial HotSync port. If it cannot find that port, it
then looks for a generic Bluetooth serial port. However, some generic Bluetooth serial ports do not
support synchronization. Refer to the documentation that came with your computer operating
system for instructions on creating/changing the virtual port for serial communication.
If the virtual serial port you want to use is used by other applications, exit those applications
before setting up your computer for wireless synchronization.
Some of my applications do not synchronize.
If you have synchronized successfully but you can’t find the information from your device on your
computer, check to see that you have the correct username selected for viewing information.
If you upgraded from a previous device, go to www.palmOne.com/support, select your
country, select the LifeDrive™device from the main page, and click the Upgrade link.
WINDOWS ONLY
Click the HotSync Manager icon in the lower-right corner of your screen, and then select
Custom. Check that the application is set to synchronize the files. If it is not, select the application,
click Change, and then select Synchronize the files. Check the Set as default box to use this setting
each time you synchronize. Otherwise, it applies during the next synchronization only.
MAC ONLY
Double-click the HotSync Manager icon in the Palm folder. From the HotSync menu, select
Conduit Settings. Select your username from the User pop-up menu, and be sure that the
application is set to synchronize.
NOTE
LifeDrive from palmOne 645
CHAPTER 31 Common Questions
I can’t open the HotSync Manager.
On a Windows computer, uninstall Palm Desktop software from your computer, and then reinstall
the software from the software installation CD.
On a Mac computer, just reinstall Palm Desktop software.
When I synchronize, I receive the 8009 error message: An application
has failed to respond to a HotSync notification.
WINDOWS ONLY
The 8009 error indicates that the Windows registry is corrupt. You need to rebuild the HotSync
Manager registry entries. For information on rebuilding the registry entries, go to
www.palmOne.com/support and search the palmOne Knowledge Library for “error 8009.”
My files didn’t install during synchronization.
• If files do not install after you synchronize, the file type was not recognized. On your device,
open the application associated with those files. Then synchronize again. If the files remain in
the palmOne™ Quick Install list on your computer (Windows only), they are not associated with
an application on your device and cannot be installed by synchronizing. You can install the files
using LifeDrive Manager (Windows) or Drive Mode (Mac or Windows).
• If you are trying to install files to an expansion card, make sure that a card is inserted into your
device’s expansion slot before you synchronize.
I can’t add more files to the Quick Install list.
Make sure the dialog box that confirms where the files will be installed is closed. You cannot add
more files to the list when the confirmation dialog box is open.
LifeDrive from palmOne 646
CHAPTER 31 Common Questions
When I add a zipped file (ZIP) to Quick Install, some of the files don’t
appear in the Quick Install list.
Unzip the file with a file compression utility, such as WinZip, and then add the unzipped files to
Quick Install.
I receive an authentication error when I try to synchronize wirelessly
through a LAN access point.
Make sure you entered the correct username and password for the selected network service
profile in the Network Preferences screen.
When I try to synchronize wirelessly through a LAN access point,
it connects, but nothing happens.
• Make sure that Network is selected in the HotSync Manager menu on your computer.
• Contact your system administrator to make sure your network computer is properly set up.
I want to synchronize my computer with more than one device.
If the computer running Palm Desktop software synchronizes with more than one device, each
device should have a unique name. Synchronizing more than one device with the same username
causes unpredictable results and, potentially, loss of your personal information. Assign a
username to your device the first time you synchronize.
If you are synchronizing with Outlook, make sure the right profile is selected for the applications
you want to synchronize in HotSync Manager. In Palm Desktop software, click HotSync, and then
select Custom.
LifeDrive from palmOne 647
CHAPTER 31 Common Questions
LifeDrive™ Manager/Drive Mode
I can’t move or copy files using LifeDrive™ Manager.
WINDOWS ONLY
• Make sure your device is connected securely to the
USB sync cable, and that the cable is connected to
a USB port on the back of your computer.
• Make sure no other applications—such as HotSync
Manager or Pocket Tunes™—are using the USB
sync cable. To check, press the Home button . If
Favorites opens, then no other applications are
using the sync cable. If Favorites does not open,
then another application may be using the cable.
• Try to synchronize. If synchronizing doesn’t work,
LifeDrive™ Manager doesn’t work, either.
• If LifeDrive Manager was working but stops, disconnect and reconnect your device. If this does
not solve the problem, perform a soft reset.
I can’t see a file I moved from my computer to my device.
Your device stores information in two places: in program memory and on the hard drive. When
you view files on your device using LifeDrive Manager on your computer or Files on your device,
only files on the drive are displayed.
If you used Quick Install to move a file to your device, depending on the file type, the file may be
located in your device’s program memory. If this is the case, you can’t view the file using LifeDrive
Manager or Files, but you can access it by using the appropriate application. If you want to be able
to see the file in the LifeDrive Manager window or the Files screen, copy it to your device’s drive
using LifeDrive Manager.
LifeDrive from palmOne 648
CHAPTER 31 Common Questions
I made updates to a file on my device, but when I synchronize,
the changes don’t show up in the file on my computer.
If you use LifeDrive Manager to transfer a file or folder to your device, you must select whether
that item synchronizes. You can either select the Keep synchronized option during file transfer, or
make the file or folder a sync item once it is on the hard drive.
If you move an item into a sync folder on the hard drive, the item automatically synchronizes.
However, the item synchronizes to the copy of the sync folder on your computer, not to its original
location—the version in the original location remains unchanged.
File transfer is taking place slowly.
If you are working with large files or using large applications such as games on your device, file
transfer may go more slowly. Quit all device applications to speed file transfer.
I want to transfer files and use my device with a USB 1.1 connection.
You may be able to connect your device to your computer using a USB 1.1 connection, but we do
not recommend this, because the USB 1.1 connection is very slow. For best performance, connect
your device to your computer using a USB 2.0 connection. You may need to purchase and install a
USB 2.0 cable and software on your computer to do this.
When I try to delete a file using LifeDrive Manager, a message appears
saying the file is busy.
If you are working with a file on your device—for example, editing a document or listening to a
music file—you cannot delete the file using LifeDrive Manager. Close the file on your device and
then delete it.
I can’t write a memo or enter a contact when my device is in Drive
Mode.
When your device is in Drive Mode, it works just like any external drive such as a CD drive. You
cannot enter or work with information directly on your device while it is in Drive Mode. To work
with information directly on your device, turn Drive Mode off.
LifeDrive from palmOne 649
CHAPTER 31 Common Questions
When your device is in Drive Mode and is connected to a computer, you can open files from your
device’s drive on the computer using Windows Explorer or My Computer (on a Windows
computer) or Finder (on a Mac computer), and work with them there.
Your device still displays alerts, such as for appointments or new email messages, when in Drive
Mode.
My device and/or the expansion card is not showing up as a drive in
Windows Explorer or My Computer when I have the device in Drive
Mode.
WINDOWS ONLY
When you turn on Drive Mode, connect your device to your computer, and then open My
Computer or Windows Explorer, the window you open shows two new drives. These drives are
assigned the next available drive letters, for example, E:, F:, and so on. If no letters are available
because you have multiple external devices connected to your computer (such as a card reader or
a camera), or because you are using mapped network drives, the window does not display your
device or the expansion card as a drive. To display them, remove some of the external devices
connected to your computer, or remove some of the mapped network drives.
Calendar
I selected the Today button, but it does not show the correct date.
Make sure the Set Date box on the Date & Time Preferences screen displays the current date.
I created an event, but it doesn’t appear in Week View.
• If scroll arrows appear on the right of your screen, scroll down to see if the event appears farther
down the screen.
• If you have two or more events with the same start time, the events appear as multiple bars
starting at the same time in Week View. To see the overlapping events, select the individual bars,
or select Day View. For more information, see Finding events that overlap.
Tip
Visit www.palmOne.com/
support for more
information on what to
do if your device does not
show up as a drive on
your computer when the
device is in Drive Mode.
LifeDrive from palmOne 650
CHAPTER 31 Common Questions
• If you marked the event as private, check Security Preferences to see that Private Records is set
to Show private records.
Time zones don’t appear on my Palm Desktop software.
Palm Desktop software does not recognize time zones. Only Outlook recognizes times zones.
I set the global time zone preference, but only some of my events are
responding to my time zone change.
Only new events created after the preference is set are affected. The events you created earlier
without time zones do not have the time zone set. You can edit the earlier events to include a time
zone.
I created my event with a time zone, but only that event is responding
to my time zone change.
When you create an event with a time zone setting, only that event is affected. To have all events
automatically include a time zone setting, set the New events include time zones preference.
Memos
I’m having problems listing memos the way I want to see them.
If you cannot manually arrange the order of memos on the list screen, open the Options menu and
select Preferences. Make sure that Sort by is set to Manual.
If you choose to view your memos alphabetically on Palm Desktop software and then synchronize,
the memos on your device still appear in the order defined in the Preferences setting. In other
words, the sort settings you use with Palm Desktop software are not transferred to your device.
LifeDrive from palmOne 651
CHAPTER 31 Common Questions
Note Pad
I’m having problems listing notes the way I want to see them.
If you cannot manually arrange the order of notes on the list screen, select Preferences from the
Options menu and make sure that Sort by is set to Manual.
If you choose to view your notes alphabetically on Palm Desktop software and then synchronize,
the notes on your device still appear in the order defined in the Preferences setting. In other
words, the sort settings you use with Palm Desktop software are not transferred to your device.
Media
I can’t find the Media icon in Applications.
Select the pick list in the upper-right corner of Applications View and select Multimedia. You
should now see an icon for the Media application.
In Favorites View, the entry associated with the Media application is called Photos & Videos. You
can edit the Favorites list to change this to Media, as well as to create or change any other favorite
file, folder, web link, or application.
Camera Companion
I want to use the same expansion card both for saving photos on my
camera and for storing applications for my device.
Your device can read and use an SD card or MultiMediaCard formatted by your camera. Your
camera, however, may be unable to read a card formatted by your device. Although you can use
the same card to save pictures and videos with your digital camera and to store applications with
LifeDrive from palmOne 652
CHAPTER 31 Common Questions
your device, we recommend that you use one card for device applications and a different one for
digital camera pictures. We also recommend that you use your camera to format any card that you
are using to save photos.
I cannot view the videos I transferred from my camera to my device.
Some cameras take video in a format that your device is unable to recognize and play. You can
transfer a video in any format to your device and then transfer it to your computer for viewing;
however, you can only view videos in supported formats on your device.
Pocket Tunes™
I would like better-quality sound during playback.
Saving music files at a lower bit rate creates a smaller file size, but also gives a lower playback
quality. Increase the bit rate to improve playback sound quality, but remember that this increases
file size.
My music file stutters during playback.
WINDOWS ONLY
If you are transferring files using LifeDrive Manager and you are listening to music files on your
device, the music playback may stutter. Wait until the file transfer is finished to listen to the music
file.
My device doesn’t play the music files I burned from a CD.
The Pocket Tunes application installed on your device plays music files in MP3 format only. You
must change the settings in your desktop music application to save files from a CD as MP3 files.To
play files in other formats such as WMA, upgrade to the deluxe version of Pocket Tunes—you can
purchase it by using the Addit™ application on your device or visiting www.palmOne.com.
LifeDrive from palmOne 653
CHAPTER 31 Common Questions
My device doesn’t play the music files I downloaded from my favorite
online music store.
The Pocket Tunes application installed on your device plays music files in MP3 format only. To play
files in other formats such as WMA, upgrade to the deluxe version of Pocket Tunes—you can
purchase it by using the Addit™ application on your device or visiting www.palmOne.com.
When I save songs from a CD, I do not see the song title or artist
name.
When capturing songs from a CD, you must have an active Internet connection to obtain song title
and artist information. This information is supplied from the GraceNote server on the web.
Tasks
The info I entered does not appear in an application.
• Open the Options menu and select Preferences. If Show Completed Tasks is selected, deselect it
to display the missing tasks.
• If you marked the task as private, check Security Preferences to see that Private Records is set to
Show private records.
Connecting wirelessly
My passkey is rejected when I attempt to form a trusted pair with my
mobile phone.
Some mobile phones require that you enter the passkey within a specific time frame. Make sure
you have a passkey in mind and that you enter it immediately when prompted.
LifeDrive from palmOne 654
CHAPTER 31 Common Questions
If your passkey is rejected, your phone may have a preassigned passkey; see the documentation
included with your phone for information. The documentation might refer to a Bluetooth
connection as a Bluetooth pair, Bluetooth link, or bonded pair.
My device cannot connect to my mobile phone.
Use the following steps to test the connection:
1. Tap Bluetooth controls on the status bar to open the Bluetooth settings screen. You can
select the indicator even if it is dimmed.
2. Make sure On is selected.
3. Select the Service pick list and select the service that you want to use to connect to your phone.
4. Select Connect.
If the connection is successful, open the application that requires the connection and complete the
desired task.
If the connection is not successful, try the following steps:
• Make sure that your phone is equipped with Bluetooth technology, that Bluetooth technology is
enabled, and that the power is on.
• You may need to set up a connection with your phone. See the documentation included with
your phone for assistance with completing the connection setup process.
My phone connection drops before I finish using it.
You need to increase the Idle timeout setting on the Network Preferences Details screen.
LifeDrive from palmOne 655
CHAPTER 31 Common Questions
I get an error message when I try to dial a phone number using my
device.
• Make sure that the proper phone driver is installed on your device.
• You may need to set up a connection with your phone. See the documentation included with
your phone for assistance with completing the connection setup process.
•Check the Phone Preferences screen and make sure the correct phone connection is selected.
The VersaMail® application
I am having problems accessing my account.
Occasionally you may experience problems using an email account after you set it up. If you
followed the account setup procedure and are experiencing problems using the account, verify
that the account complies with your email provider’s requirements by following these steps:
• Verify both your password and your username for your email account.
• If you are connecting using a mobile phone through the built-in Bluetooth technology on your
device, a cable, or the IR port on your device, verify that you have either a data-enabled GSM or
a high-speed GPRS account with your wireless service provider.
• Some wireless service providers require you to be on their network to use your email account. If
this is the case, be sure to use your provider’s network as the connection type for the account.
• Some wireless service providers have other requirements specific to their service. For example,
Yahoo! requires you to pay for a POP account in order to download email messages from your
Yahoo! account to your device. Check with your service provider to see if any provider-specific
requirements exist.
LifeDrive from palmOne 656
CHAPTER 31 Common Questions
• Service provider settings frequently change. If your email account was working but you are
currently experiencing problems, check with your service provider to see if any of the account
settings have changed.
I am having problems sending and receiving email.
• Short periods of time when email is unavailable are common due to server problems or poor
wireless coverage. If you have problems sending or receiving mail for an extended period of
time, check with your ISP or email service provider to verify that the service is working properly.
• Make sure your ISP or email provider allows you to send and receive email on a wireless device.
Several providers, like Hotmail, do not offer this option at all.
Auto Sync is not working.
• If Auto Sync is occurring and you turn your handheld off or the connection to your email service
provider is disconnected, Auto Sync fails.
• If you are attempting Auto Sync over a network, you must be in range of a network access point
for Auto Sync to work.
I can receive email fine, but am having problems sending email.
If you are able to receive email messages but cannot send them, try these steps, in turn:
• Make sure your ISP or email provider allows you to access email on a wireless device. Several
providers do not offer this option at all; other providers require an upgrade to access email on a
wireless device.
•Turn on ESMTP
. Many services require authenticated access to use their SMTP servers, or
ESMTP.
•Enter the name of a different outgoing mail server for sending mail. Many ISPs, such as cable
companies, require that you have an Internet connection to their network to send email through
their servers. In this case, you can almost always receive email from these accounts, but if you
want to send email, you must send it through another server.
LifeDrive from palmOne 657
CHAPTER 31 Common Questions
I can’t download any messages.
If the program memory on your device fills up, you cannot download any more messages to your
device. Delete some messages to free up program memory, and try downloading again.
I am trying to synchronize messages on my device with messages on
my computer, but it’s not working.
On your computer, check the advanced account settings for the account you want. Make sure that
the box is checked that allows you to synchronize messages on your device with messages on
your computer.
My vCard or vCal email attachment isn’t forwarding correctly.
WINDOWS ONLY
Palm Desktop software provides several features that work with email client software on a
Windows computer. For these features to work correctly, the email client software must be
properly set up. Follow these steps to check the settings:
1. Click Start on your computer, and then select Settings.
2. Select Control Panel.
3. Select Internet Options, and then click the Programs tab.
4. Make sure that the email field is set to the correct email client software.
5. Click OK.
6. Start the email client software and make sure it is configured as the default MAPI client. Consult
the documentation for your desktop email application for more information.
LifeDrive from palmOne 658
CHAPTER 31 Common Questions
Privacy
I’ve made records private, but I can’t remember my password to
display them.
First, use the password hint to try to remember the password. If this doesn’t help or if you do not
have a password hint, you can use Security Preferences to delete the password, but your device
deletes all entries marked as private. However, if you synchronize before you delete the password,
the synchronization process backs up all entries, whether or not they are marked private. Then you
can follow these steps to restore your private entries:
1. In Security Preferences, tap in the password box and enter a guess at the password.
2. In the dialog box that appears, select Lost Password.
3. Select Delete Password to remove the password and delete all private records.
4. Synchronize your device with your computer again.
I forgot the password, and my device is locked.
First, use the password hint to try to remember the password. If this doesn’t help or if you do not
have a password hint, you must perform a hard reset to continue using your device. Performing a
hard reset deletes all of the information on your device. To protect your info and create a backup of
your info, do a full sync to back up the contents of your device to your computer often.
LifeDrive from palmOne 659
CHAPTER 31 Common Questions
Sharing
I can’t beam information to another device or other device.
Depending on the receiving device model, not all information may be sent correctly.
• If you are beaming to another Palm Powered device, confirm that your device and the other
device are 4 to 39 inches (approximately ten centimeters to one meter) apart and that the path
between the two devices is clear of obstacles. Beaming distances to other devices with an IR
port may be different.
• Move your device closer to the receiving device.
• Make sure the receiving device has beam receive enabled.
•Perform a soft reset on both your device and the receiving device.
• Avoid beaming in bright sunlight or fluorescent light. These produce infrared noise that can
make beaming go slower or, in some cases, prevent it from working at all.
When someone beams information to my device, it doesn‘t receive
the info.
• If you are receiving info from another Palm Powered device, confirm that your device and the
other device are 4 to 39 inches (approximately ten centimeters to one meter) apart and that the
path between the two devices is clear of obstacles. Beaming distances to other devices with an
IR port may be different.
• Move your device closer to the sending device.
• Make sure your device has beam receive enabled.
•Perform a soft reset on both your device and the beaming device.
NOTE
LifeDrive from palmOne 660
CHAPTER 31 Common Questions
When someone beams information to my device, I get a message
telling me it is out of memory.
• Your device requires at least twice the amount of memory available as the info you are
receiving. For example, if you are receiving a 30KB application, you must have at least 60KB
free.
•Purge old Calendar events and delete unused or unnecessary applications.
I cannot send information to another Bluetooth device.
• Make sure that Bluetooth communication is enabled on both your device and the other device.
• Make sure that the receiving device has a compatible Bluetooth application installed.
• The receiving device must be within range of your device, approximately 25 to 30 feet (8 to 10
meters).
Other Bluetooth devices cannot find my device.
• Tap Bluetooth controls on the status bar to open the Bluetooth settings screen and make sure
that Bluetooth is turned on.
• Select Prefs and make sure the Discoverable setting is set to Yes.
LifeDrive from palmOne 661
CHAPTER 31 Common Questions
Problems with incompatible applications
palmOne, Inc. works with developers of third-party add-on applications to ensure the
compatibility of these applications with your device. Some third-party applications, however, may
not have been upgraded to be compatible with your device.
Possible symptoms of incompatible applications include:
• Fatal errors needing resets
• Nonresponsive device requiring a reset
• Slow performance
• Abnormal screen display or uneven sound quality
• Problems using Bluetooth technology or other features
• Problems opening an application
• Problems synchronizing
You can determine whether an incompatible application is causing problems by deleting the
application and then operating your device.
After you have deleted the application, try to replicate the operation that created the error. If
removing the application solves your problem, contact the application developer for a solution.
Also, go to www.palmOne.com/us/support/contact/incompatible_apps.html to provide feedback
to palmOne on the application.
Finding a third-party application that is causing a problem
If you have multiple third-party applications installed on your device or have upgraded from an
earlier model of a Palm Powered device, perform the following procedure to remove all third-party
applications from your device. Once you have removed all of the third-party applications, you can
install one application at a time to determine which application is causing the problem.
LifeDrive from palmOne 662
CHAPTER 31 Common Questions
The following procedures erase all information from your device. Before removing the
applications, do a full sync to back up the contents of your device to your computer.
1. On a Windows computer, open the palmOne folder on your computer, and then open the user
folder for your device. User folder names are often abbreviated as last name, first initial. On a
Mac computer, locate the folder Home/Documents/Palm/Users/<device name>/Backups.
2. Select and drag the Backup folder to the desktop. Make sure you see the Backup folder on the
desktop.
3. On a Windows computer, close the palmOne folder.
4. Perform a hard reset. Synchronize your device with your computer to restore info to your
device’s program memory, and use LifeDrive Manager (Windows) or Drive Mode (Mac) to
restore info to your device’s drive.
5. Operate your device and try to replicate problem operations.
6. Do one of the following:
•If your device still has problems, review this Common Questions section for solutions to the
problem. Fix the problem before reinstalling the third-party applications.
•If your device no longer has problems, install the third-party applications one application at a
time using the following procedure:
a. Open the Backup folder you moved to the desktop in step 2.
b. Double-click a PRC file. On a Windows computer, the Quick Install window opens with the
PRC file listed. On a Mac computer, the HotSync Manager window opens with the PRC
file listed.
Alternatively, on a Mac computer, you can drag the PRC file to the Send To
Device droplet instead of double-clicking it.
c. Click Done.
d. Synchronize your device with your computer.
NOTE
LifeDrive from palmOne 663
CHAPTER 31 Common Questions
e. Operate your device and try to replicate problem operations.
f. Do one of the following:
•If installing the application re-creates your problem, remove the application and contact
the application developer for a solution. Continue to reinstall your applications one
application at a time to make sure another application is not creating a problem.
•If installing the application does not cause a problem, go to step a and reinstall another
application.
g. Go to www.palmOne.com/us/support/contact/incompatible_apps.html to provide
feedback to palmOne on the application.
Some applications use more than one PRC file. You should continue to check
each PRC file even if you identify one associated with an application that is causing a
problem on your device, since that application may use other PRC files.
NOTE
LifeDrive from palmOne 664
CHAPTER 32
Getting Help
This guide is meant to tell you everything you need to know to set up, customize,
and use your device. However, you may occasionally run into an issue that is not
addressed in this guide. Here are some resources to help you if that happens.
Self-help resources
If you run into a problem with your device, be sure to check these resources first:
•Answers to common questions about your device and its features
• The Palm® Desktop online Help
• The Palm Desktop Software for the Macintosh User’s Guide located in the Documentation folder
on your installation CD
• The palmOne™ Knowledge Library, accessible at www.palmOne.com/support
• The most recent palmOne LifeDrive™device HelpNotes on your regional website
LifeDrive from palmOne 665
CHAPTER 32 Getting Help
Technical support
If, after reviewing the self-help resources, you cannot solve your problem, go to
www.palmOne.com/support or send an email to your regional Technical Support office.
Before requesting technical support, please experiment a bit to reproduce and isolate the problem.
When you do contact Technical Support, please provide the following information:
• The name and version of the desktop operating system you are using
• The actual error message or state you are experiencing
• The steps you take to reproduce the problem
• The version of device software you are using and available memory
To find version and memory information, follow these steps:
1. Go to Applications.
2. Open the menus.
3. Select Info from the App menu.
4. Select Version for version info, and Size for memory info.
LifeDrive from palmOne 666
Product Regulatory Information
FCC Statement
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency
energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to
radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be
determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by
one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
The use of shielded I/O cables is required when connecting this equipment to any and all optional peripheral
or host devices. Failure to do so may violate FCC rules.
Changes or modifications not covered in this manual must be approved in writing by the
manufacturer’s Regulatory Engineering Department. Changes or modifications made without written
approval may void the user’s authority to operate this equipment.
In August 1996, the FCC of the United States with its action in Report and Order FCC 96-326 adopted an
updated safety standard for human exposure to radio frequency electromagnetic energy emitted by FCC
regulated transmitters. Those guidelines are consistent with the safety standard previously set by both U.S.
and international standards bodies. The design of this product complies with the FCC guidelines and these
international standards.
IMPORTANT
[!]
LifeDrive from palmOne 667
Exposure to radio frequency energy (SAR)
In order to comply with FCC RF exposure safety guidelines, this device and its antenna must not be co-
located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. The user of this device should
ensure that the operation of this device is in compliance with these provisions.
FCC ID: O3W830
Industry Canada
The term “IC:” before the certification/registration number only signifies that the Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
IC:3905A-830
Canadian Wireless Regulatory Notice
This Class B digital apparatus meets all the requirements of the Canadian Interference Causing Equipment
Regulations. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: a) this device may not cause any
interference, and b) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device. To prevent radio interference to the licensed service, this device is
intended to be operated indoors, and away from windows to prevent maximum shielding. Equipment (or its
transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to licensing.
CE Declaration of Conformity
palmOne, Inc., Declares the Product: Device PDA & HotSync® cable
Model Name/Number: LifeDrive
Manufacturer’s Name: palmOne
Manufacturer’s Address: 400 N. McCarthy Blvd.
Milpitas, 95035-5112
LifeDrive Product Family
Tested to Comply
With FCC Standards
FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE
R
espons
ibl
e
P
arty:
palmOne, Inc.
400 N. McCarthy Blvd.
Milpitas, California 95035
United States of America
(408) 503-7500
LifeDrive from palmOne 668
Meets the following European Council Directives:
• 89/336/EEC (EMC Directive)
• 99/5/EC (R&TTE Directive)
• 73/23/EEC (Low Voltage Directive).
Conforms with the following specifications:
• EN 55024: 1998 (Emissions & Immunity)
• EN55022:1998, CISPR 22 1997, Class B Radiated and Conducted Emissions
• IEC 61000-4-2, A1 1998-01, ESD Immunity, 4kV Contact, and 8kV Air Discharge
• IEC 61000-4-3: 1995 RF Immunity, 80-1000MHz, 3V/M, 1kHz, 80% A.M.
• ENV 50204:1996, RF Immunity, 895-905MHz, 3V/m, 200Hz, 50% AM
• IEC 61000-4-4: 1995 EFT Immunity, 1kV on AC port, 5/50nSec, 5kHs Rep. Freq.
• IEC 61000-4-5: 1995 Surge Immunity, 1.2/50uSec, 2kV(peak), Common Mode, 1kV(peak) Differential Mode
• EN61000-4-6:1996, Conducted Immunity, 150kHz-80MHz, 3V RMS, 1kHz, 80% AM
• IEC 61000-4-11: 1994, 100% Voltage Dip 0.5 period, 30% Dip 25 periods and >100% Dip 250 periods
Authorized palmOne Representative: David Woo
palmOne Compliance Engineer
Date: April 18, 2005
LifeDrive from palmOne 669
Battery Warning
Do not mutilate, puncture, or dispose of batteries in fire. The batteries can burst or explode, releasing
hazardous chemicals. Discard used batteries according to the manufacturer’s instructions and in accordance
with your local regulations.
Varning
Eksplosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte. Använd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som
rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren. Kassera använt batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion.
Advarsel!
Lithiumbatteri—Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig håndtering. Udskiftning må kun ske med batteri af samme
fabrikat og type. Levér det brugte batteri tilbage tilleverandøren.
Varoitus
Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu. Vaihda paristo ainoastaan valmistajan suosittelemaan
tyyppiin. Hävitä käytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti.
Advarsel
Eksplosjonsfare ved feilaktig skifte av batteri. Benytt samme batteritype eller en tilsvarende type anbefait av
apparatfabrikanten. Brukte batterier kasseres i henhold til fabrikantens instruksjoner.
Waarschuwing!
Bij dit produkt zijn batterijen geleverd. Wanneer deze leeg zijn, moet u ze niet weggooien maar inleveren als
KCA.
Uwaga
LifeDrive from palmOne 670
Intrinsic Safety Warning
Warning – Explosion Hazard
• Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class I, Division 2;
• When in hazardous location, turn off power before replacing or wiring modules, and,
• Do not disconnect equipment unless power has been switched off or the area is known to be non-
hazardous.
Wireless Notices—Usage Cautions
In some situations, the user of the wireless device may be restricted. Such restrictions may apply aboard an
airplane, in hospitals, near explosive environment, in hazardous locations etc. If you are not certain of the
policy that applies to the use of this device, please ask for authorization prior to turning on the device.
Static Electricity, ESD, and Your palmOne™ Device
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can cause damage to electronic devices if discharged into the device, so you
should take steps to avoid such an occurrence.
Description of ESD
Static electricity is an electrical charge caused by the buildup of excess electrons on the surface of a material.
To most people, static electricity and ESD are nothing more than annoyances. For example, after walking over
a carpet while scuffing your feet, building up electrons on your body, you may get a shock -- the discharge
event -- when you touch a metal doorknob. This little shock discharges the built-up static electricity.
ESD-susceptible equipment
Even a small amount of ESD can harm circuitry, so when working with electronic devices, take measures to
help protect your electronic devices, including your palmOne™ device, from ESD harm. While palmOne has
built protections against ESD into its products, ESD unfortunately exists and, unless neutralized, could build
up to levels that could harm your equipment. Any electronic device that contains an external entry point for
plugging in anything from cables to docking stations is susceptible to entry of ESD. Devices that you carry
with you, such as your device, build up ESD in a unique way because the static electricity that may have built
up on your body is automatically passed to the device. Then, when the device is connected to another device
such as a docking station, a discharge event can occur.
LifeDrive from palmOne 671
Precautions against ESD
Make sure to discharge any built-up static electricity from yourself and your electronic devices before
touching an electronic device or connecting one device to another. The recommendation from palmOne is
that you take this precaution before connecting your device to your computer, placing the device in a cradle,
or connecting it to any other device. You can do this in many ways, including the following:
• Ground yourself when you’re holding your mobile device by simultaneously touching a metal surface that
is at earth ground.
• For example, if your computer has a metal case and is plugged into a standard three-prong grounded
outlet, touching the case should discharge the ESD on your body.
• Increase the relative humidity of your environment.
• Install ESD-specific prevention items, such as grounding mats.
Conditions that enhance ESD occurrences
Conditions that can contribute to the buildup of static electricity in the environment include the following:
• Low relative humidity.
• Material type (The type of material gathering the charge. For example, synthetics are more prone to static
buildup than natural fibers like cotton.)
• The rapidity with which you touch, connect or disconnect electronic devices.
While you should always take appropriate precautions to discharge static electricity, if you are in an
environment where you notice ESD events, you may want to take extra precautions to protect your electronic
equipment against ESD.
LifeDrive from palmOne 672
INDEX
SYMBOLS
! (exclamation point) in Tasks list 256
* (asterisk) characters 132
. (period) character 579
NUMERICS
12-hour clock See clock
12-hour formats 577
128-bit AES encryption 336
24-hour clock 575, 576
24-hour formats 576, 577
5-way navigator 20, 29, 47–51
A
abbreviations 581, 582
AC charger 24, 624, 635, 636
accented characters 66
on international onscreen keyboard 73
access points (WI-Fi) 290, 297
accessories 17, 24, 29, 614
Account Setup command 354
Account Setup screen
accessing 354
deleting accounts and 361
editing accounts and 360
ESMTP authentication and 362
setting up email accounts from 424
accounts
accessing email 312, 336
Auto Sync and 365
caution for synchronizing and 340
deleting email 361
deleting Microsoft Exchange
ActiveSync 434
editing email 359, 360
instant messenger and 136
logging in to Internet 464
setting up email 336, 343, 420, 424
setting up Microsoft Exchange
ActiveSync 420–427
testing 358
transferring settings to 341
updating information and 99, 434
upgrading email 335
action bar (web browser) 447, 451
actions (pen stroke) 571
Add Bookmark command 454
Add Contact dialog box 374
add-on applications 127, 661
adding
additional software 32, 124
audio to photos 212
bookmarks 448, 454
contacts 74, 132, 135, 374
daily events 152
expense items 498, 500, 501
locations 551
multiday events 159
owner information 586
passwords 518, 519, 524
personal signatures 380
plug-in applications 607
reminders 134, 266, 275
repeating events 156, 157
songs to playlists 237
speed-dial entries 481
tasks 245, 247, 249
trusted devices 329
unscheduled events 155
untimed events 154, 159
user profiles 12, 13
Addit software 31
address fields 136, 448
Address Lookup screen 379
addresses 21, 133, 374, 602
See also contacts
addressing
email 144, 147, 377, 378, 379, 582
text messages 438
adjusting
alarm volume 555, 585
brightness 565
modem volume 594
speaker volume 282, 585
Adobe Acrobat Reader xxi, 34
AES encryption 336
agenda lists 151
See also Calendar application
Agenda View
customizing Tasks lists and 255
described 173
opening 173, 547
setting display options for 180, 182
Agenda View icon 173, 547
Alarm check box 167, 246
alarm clock 167, 246, 546, 554
See also alarms; clock
alarm icons 26, 175
Alarm Preferences command 555
Alarm Preset settings 185
Alarm Sound pick list 269, 585
alarm tones 167, 185, 256, 269, 555
alarms
See also alerts; reminders
adjusting volume 555, 585
LifeDrive from palmOne 673
attaching to notes 269
changing 168
changing sounds for 269
entering preferences for 184, 185, 246
responding to world clock 555
selecting sounds for 167, 185, 256, 555
setting 167, 246, 270, 554
specifying duration of 185
turning off 555
albums
arranging photos in 207, 209
creating 206
managing 205
moving photos in 207
moving photos to other 208
moving videos in 207
scrolling through 203
selecting 206
Alert icon 26
alert options 367
Alert Sound pick list 367
alert symbol (Wi-Fi 26
alerts
See also alarms; reminders
Auto Sync notifications and 366, 368
Drive Mode and 94
low batteries and 5
opening files and 42
text messages and 440
Alerts screen 367
aligning the screen 584
All category 539
Allow wakeup command 332
alphabet (Graffiti 2 writing) 62
alphabetic keyboard 28
alternate stroke shapes 579
anniversaries 154, 156
annual events 156
annual tasks 248, 250
application buttons See quick buttons
application controls 29, 38
application groups 541, 544
application icons 563, 639
application screens 29
application title 52
applications
See also specific built-in application
accessing 639
adding contact information to 140, 150
assigning to buttons 570
beaming 494–495
categorizing 538, 543
categorizing information in 541
checking version numbers for 125, 127
copying 118, 495, 621
creating plug-in 607
deleting 127, 622
displaying 40, 544, 563
displaying categories in 544
displaying information about 17, 126
downloading 118
downloading files to 461
exchanging 623
finding information in 54
importing information from 121
incompatible 661
installation prerequisites for 125
installing 32, 617
marking private entries in 516
moving around in 38
not finding 30, 639
opening 39, 104, 570, 617
organizing 55, 538
related topics for 55
removing categories in 540
removing connections for 592
renaming categories 539
setting preferences for 568, 572
setting primary location for 547
setting secondary locations for 550
soft resets and 636
specifying connections for 589
switching between 10, 46, 617, 642
synchronizing 111, 644
transferring information from 98
transferring to device 33, 34
uninstalling 637
updating information for 111
updating third-party 8
upgrading 125
Applications View
displaying icons on 639
moving around in 49
opening 26
opening applications on 39
overview 40
setting display options for 563
appointments
See also Calendar application; events
adding to calendar 152
adjusting for location 572
color-coding 163
combining tasks with 151
continuous 159
displaying 176, 177, 178
LifeDrive from palmOne 674
entering from Outlook 10, 642
removing from calendar 170
repeating 156
saving 153
scheduling 152–153
setting alarms for 554
setting duration of 153, 184
sharing 21
time zones for Outlook 153
viewing duration of 182
viewing unscheduled time slots for 182
archive folders 123
archived items 123, 170, 254
ASF files 193
Assigned password 598
asterisk (*) characters 132
Attach Signature check box 380
attachments
adding 404
downloading 400
Internet email accounts and 464
opening web browser from 459
previewing with Microsoft Exchange
ActiveSync 430
reading 462
saving 403
sending files as 404, 405
Audible Player software 34
audio applications 24
audio files
transferring with Rhapsody 226
Audio folder 226
authentication 329, 362
Authentication option 353, 358
authentication servers 607
Auto Empty check box 397
Auto Lock option 525
Auto Sync
constraints for 369
retrying 369
scheduling 364, 365
setting notification options for 366
Auto-Disconnect option 412
auto-off delay 588, 638
autofill option 469
automatically locking LifeDrive mobile
device 524, 525
available storage space 619
AVI files 193
B
back panel controls 23, 24
backgrounds
adding photos as 182, 560, 564
customizing 182, 560, 564
selecting color of 268, 568
backing up information 32
backup cards 622
basics 6, 633
battery
cautions for 669
charging 4, 588, 624, 636
checking 332, 635
conserving power for 5, 587, 635
extending life of 558, 635
overview 5
recharging 4, 5, 588, 635
battery gauge 635
BCC option 392
Beam Category command 493
Beam command 492, 494
Beam Contact command 488
Beam dialog box 492, 493, 495
Beam From pick list 494
Beam icon 53
Beam Receive pick list 588
beaming 491–495, 588, 659, 660
beaming port See IR port
beeps 42, 366
See also alerts
Birthday icon 175
birthdays 134, 152
Blank Page setting (web browser) 467
blank screen 637
Blazer application See web browser
application
Blazer Downloads folder 461
blinking cursor 72
blocking private entries 517
Bluetooth application
entering basic settings for 314
features 312, 313
setting up phone connections with 315–
319
Bluetooth controls (status bar) 26, 30
Bluetooth devices
assigning names to 331, 332, 586
connecting to 23, 312, 594
discovering 313, 329, 331
entering passkeys for 330
related topics for 333
sending photos and videos to 216
sending records to 486
setting up 314, 331
sharing information with 36
LifeDrive from palmOne 675
synchronizing with 17
verifying status of 320
waking up device from 332
Bluetooth dialog box 26, 314
Bluetooth HotSync option 322
Bluetooth icon 30
Bluetooth LAN Access Point connections
312
Bluetooth setting (Edit Connection) 594
Bluetooth technology 290, 311, 312
Bluetooth wireless connections 289, 446
BMP files 193
bold fonts 566
bonding trusted pairs 330
Bookmark icon 455, 456
Bookmark Page dialog box 454
bookmarks
adding 448, 454
arranging 457
displaying list of 455
editing addresses for 456
moving 458
selecting 455
viewing 455
Bookmarks dialog box 467
Bookmarks page icon 455
Bookmarks setting (web browser) 467
Bookmarks View 455
bottom arrow controls 29
brightness 565
browsing options 468, 469, 470, 473, 475
browsing the web 31, 312, 320, 447
See also web pages; websites
budgets 498
built-in applications 30, 127
Business Card command 492
business cards 138, 492
business expenses 499
See also Expense application
buttons
activating 50
assigning to applications 570
calculator 510
not responding 579, 626, 636
opening applications from 46
quick 19
reassigning application 570
restoring defaults for 570
selecting dialog box 50
tapping command 29
Buttons Preferences screen 570
C
cache 331
Calculator application
accessing 31
benefits of 509
buttons described 510
categorizing with Expense 538
copying and pasting from 511
displaying calculation history 511
re-entering numbers 510
related topics for 513
troubleshooting 513
Calculator icon 31
calculators (preinstalled) 31
See also Calculator application
calendar
See also Calendar application
adding appointments to 152
changing events on 168
changing repeat intervals for 168
color-coding appointments 153, 163
customizing 180, 181, 577
deleting events 170
displaying appointments for 173, 176,
177, 178
displaying conflicting events in 182
entering birthdays for 134
finding overlapping events on 180
opening 186
purging old events 172
reserving dates 154
scrolling through 177, 178
selecting dates on 152
setting repeat intervals for 157, 158, 159
Calendar application
applying color-coding options 164
categorizing information in 541
checking current date and time from
547
checking schedules in 175, 177, 178
defining repeating events 156, 157
deleting categories 540
deleting events 170
displaying categories in 544
entering event locations from 160
importing information for 121
opening 30, 152
related topics for 187
rescheduling events 168
retrieving events for 428, 433
saving information for 153, 170, 172
scheduling events 152, 154, 159
selecting dates on 245
LifeDrive from palmOne 676
setting alarms from 185, 555
setting display options 180, 181–185
transferring information to 74
troubleshooting 187, 649
Calendar icon 30
Calendar Preferences dialog box 167, 184
calendar views 175, 177, 178, 179
calibration 584
Call History List 480
Call Waiting 599
calling card numbers 599
camera card
copying contents 219
deleting contents 220
viewing contents 221
canceled actions 50
canceled appointments 170
canceled tasks 253
capitalization 60, 68, 260
Card Info application 31, 619
Card Info icon 31
card readers 229, 621
carrying cases 614
categories
See also albums
adding 538
beaming 493
benefits of 537
changing 168
color-coding 164
deleting 540
displaying 544, 563
placing information in different 542
related topics for 545
renaming 539
scrolling through 544
selecting 493
categorizing
applications 538, 543
contacts 142, 538, 541
events 153, 493, 538
expenses 499, 505, 506, 538
information 537, 541
memos 538
notes 267
tasks 245, 251, 256
Category command 543
Category dialog box 543
category lists See Category pick list
category marker 174, 182
Category pick list
displaying events on 166
opening 182, 617
placing entries on 542
removing calendar events from 540
cautions 625, 635
CDs 230
challenge-response prompts 605
Change Repeat dialog box 157, 249
Change your synchronization option 10,
642
changing
alarms 168
bookmarks 454
calendar events 168
category names 539
date and time settings 548
default folders 383
display options 384, 391
email accounts 359, 360
email filters 411
email messages 382
fonts 384
Graffiti 2 ShortCut strokes 583
home pages 465
information 76
locations for World Clock 551, 552
owner information 586
passwords 520
pen widths 267
playlists 236
preset connections 589
preset formats 576
privacy settings 168
repeating events 169
screen colors 568
screen fonts 565–566
server profiles 598
speed-dial entries 483
start pages 467
text colors 182
time zones 552, 572, 573
untimed events 155
URLs 454, 456
World Clock 556
Channel pick list 308
character entry 68, 72, 132
See also data entry
character searches 54
charging the battery 4, 588, 624, 636
chat rooms xxiii
check boxes 29
checking space on device 125
checking the battery 332, 635
Choose Date command 245
LifeDrive from palmOne 677
city preferences 573
cleaning your device 624
clear button (Calculator) 510
Clear cache on exit option 472
Clear Cache option 472
clear entry button (Calculator) 510
Clear Note command 267
clearing
calculations 510
Note Pad screens 267
clock 167, 554, 572, 574
See also World Clock
closing Internet connections 459
Color Theme Preferences screen 561, 568
color-coding 153, 163, 166
colors
applying to annotations 210
applying to email 384
applying to events 153, 163, 166
applying to notes 268
changing screen 568
changing text 182
setting background 268, 568
column widths 385
command buttons 29
command gestures (Graffiti 2) 67
Command mode 53
command shortcuts 53
Command strokes (Graffiti 2) 53, 67
Command toolbar 53
commands 51, 52, 53
See also menus
communication speed 589, 591, 595
communications protocols 337, 602
compact discs 230
company phone lists and memos 11
completed tasks 252, 253, 254, 256
components (device) 2
Compress Day View check box 182
computers
connecting to 8, 312
copying information to 495
customizing connections for 594
Drive Mode and 95
LifeDrive Manager and 83–90
managing schedules from 186
overwriting information on 113, 115
preinstalled software for 32
removing Palm Desktop software 128
synchronization options for 108, 110
synchronizing with 98, 322, 646
system requirements 2–3
transferring files from 94
troubleshooting LifeDrive Manager
problems 647
troubleshooting synchronization
problems 641
updating information from 113, 115
computers See also Mac information;
Windows information
Conduit Settings command 14
conduits 111
conference calls 160
Confirm note delete check box 272
confirmation messages 272
confirmation tones 616
conflicting events 182
conformity declaration 667
Connect command 460
Connect to setting 594
connecting
headphones to device 24, 585
to AC charger 24, 588, 635
to Bluetooth devices 23, 312, 594
to computers 8
to dial-in servers 598
to mobile phones 321
to networks 600
to other devices 290, 311, 589
to personal computers 312
to power sources 636
to the Internet 290, 312, 460, 598
Connection pick list 598
Connection Preferences screen 590, 592,
593
connection types 312
connections
See also connecting
adding login scripts for 604
adding trusted 328
authentication servers and 607
automatically stopping remote 412
closing Internet 459
closing network 600
creating 592, 594
customizing network 597
deleting 592
Drive Mode and 94
dropping 602
limiting device 313
losing 636
omitting passkeys for 315
precautions for 625, 671
preset settings for 589–596
restricting 313
LifeDrive from palmOne 678
retrying Internet 460
selecting 598
setting flow control for 595
setting timeout intervals for 412
setting up network 317, 327, 600
setting up phone 315–319
setting up secure 418
setting up wireless 311, 323
synchronizing over 99
unable to establish 314
wireless technology for 289
connections See also Bluetooth; Wi-Fi
conserving power 5, 587, 635
Contact Details dialog box 142
Contact Edit screen 135, 137
contacting service providers 318
contacts
See also Contacts application
adding 74, 132, 135, 374
archiving 141
categorizing 142, 538, 541
copying information for 133, 135, 139
customizing details for 142
deleting 141
displaying information for 137, 142
duplicating information for 135, 139
entering from Outlook 10, 642
entering in memos 260
entering notes for 135
keeping private 142, 515, 516
locating 140
managing 131
saving 134, 141
selecting 50
transferring from other applications 150
Contacts application
adding contact information 132–134
addressing email from 379
archiving information in 141, 253
beaming from 492
benefits of 131
categorizing information in 538, 541
creating business cards 138
customizing fields in 137
displaying additional fields for 135
duplicating information 139
importing information for 121, 150
marking entries as private 516
opening 30, 132
related topics for 150
saving information in 134, 141
searching from 140
selecting field types for 136
setting display options for 143
transferring information from 74
troubleshooting 150
viewing online help for 149
Contacts icon 30
Contacts list 142
continuous events See repeating events
controls
5-way navigator 47
application 29, 38
LifeDrive mobile manager 19
locating 55
cookies 470, 472
Copy command 77, 621
Copy dialog box 621
Copy icon 53
copy-protected applications 621
copying
applications 118, 495, 621
calculations 511
contacts 133, 135, 139
files 94
information 77
photos 214, 216, 495
service profiles 598
videos 216, 495
copying and pasting 77
copying See also LifeDrive Manager; Drive
Mode
corporate email accounts 290, 337, 338
country information 577
Cradle/Cable setting 594
creating
appointments 152
bookmarks 448, 454
business cards 138
categories 538
company-specific information 11
connections 592, 594
contacts 74, 132, 135, 374
daily events 152
email messages 376
filters 406
login scripts 604
mail folders 388
memos 260
multiday events 159
notes 267
owner information 586
passwords 518, 519, 524
personal signatures 380
photo albums 206
LifeDrive from palmOne 679
playlists 233
plug-in applications 607
reminders 134, 266, 275
repeating events 156, 157
repeating tasks 247, 249
service profiles 597, 598, 601
ShortCut strokes 582
tasks 245, 247, 249
trusted pairs 315, 329
unscheduled events 155
untimed events 154, 159
user profiles 12, 13
video albums 206
currency 499, 500, 502
Currency pick list 500
currency symbols 500, 501, 502, 506
current date and time
checking 547
entering 70, 572, 575
cursor 72, 76
Custom Currencies dialog box 502
customer support xxiii, 17, 191, 243, 665
customizing
backgrounds 182, 560, 564
calendar 180, 181
contact information 137, 142
currency symbols 502
data entry 578
expense lists 506
Graffiti 2 writing 579
LifeDrive mobile manager 11, 32, 558
network settings 597–607
preset formats 577
synchronization settings 107–116
Tasks list 255
Cut command 78
Cut icon 53
cycling through calendar views 173
D
daily events 156
daily schedules 175, 176, 180
daily tasks 248, 250
data entry
See also information
caution for 21
defined 72
input area for 20
methods for 56, 57, 578
data services 459
databases 121
Date & Time Preferences screen 572, 574
date formats 576, 577
dates
assigning to appointments 152, 156
assigning to repeating tasks 249, 250
changing 168, 498, 548
checking 547
displaying current 550
displaying due 256
displaying in World Clock 556
entering current 70, 572, 575
flagging series of 159
incorrect 638
recording completion 256
reserving in calendar 154
resetting 572, 574
scheduling reminders for 134
selecting on calendar 152, 245
setting alarms for specific 167, 247, 270
setting due 245, 246
setting location-specific 548, 572
setting repeat intervals for 157, 158,
159, 168
setting sequence 577
sorting by 271
viewing scheduled 173, 176, 177, 178
viewing specific 177
Day View
displaying overlapping events in 180
scheduling appointments on 152
scheduling events for 154
selecting 175
setting display options for 166, 180, 182
setting timeframes for 184
Day View icon 152
Daylight Saving Time entry box 552
Daylight Savings settings 548
Days To Synchronize Mail option 350
DBA files 121
deadlines 154
decimal separators 577
Default Currency pick list 502
default folders 86
default settings
overwriting 113, 115
restoring 570
selecting 109
Default View pick list 181
Delay command 606
delays 526, 588
after breaking network connection 636
after reset 638
Delete command 128
Delete Contact dialog box 141
LifeDrive from palmOne 680
Delete dialog box 128
Delete Event command 170
Delete Event dialog box 170
Delete From pick list 128
Delete icon 53
Delete Item command 504
Delete Memo command 263
Delete Memo dialog box 263
Delete messages on server option 414
Delete Note command 272
Delete Old Messages dialog box 394
Delete Task command 253
Delete Task dialog box 253
deleting
ActiveSync accounts 434
applications 127, 622
appointments 170
bookmarks 456
categories 540
connections 589, 592
contacts 141
desktop software 7
email 393, 394, 396, 414
email accounts 361
email filters 411
events 170–172, 540
expense items 504, 505
files from device 123
Graffiti 2 ShortCut strokes 583
information 78, 123, 524, 622, 637
locations 553
mail folders 388
memos 263
notes 272
passwords 523
photos 206
playlists 238
private entries 523
saved web pages 456
service profiles 603
songs 237
tasks 253–254
description fields 152, 153
deselecting options 29
Desktop overwrites handheld option 113
desktop software
See also Palm Desktop software
downloading 17
installing 32
overwriting information in 113, 115
removing old 7
updating device from 113, 115
Details dialog box 541, 595, 601
device name cache 331
Device name field 314
device names 331, 332, 586
Device pick list 126
device-to-device networking 290, 304
devices 290, 313, 589
See also Bluetooth devices; LifeDrive
mobile manager
Dial prefix check box 599
dial-in connections 589
dial-in servers 597, 598, 600
dial-up accounts 319, 321
dial-up connections 594, 597
Dialer application
benefits of 477
dialing from 478, 479
related topics for 484
troubleshooting 484
Dialer icon 478
Dialer keypad 478
dialing 478, 479, 480, 482
dialing in to networks 589
dialing preferences 594
Dialing setting (connections) 594
dialog boxes 29, 50
See also specific
dictionaries 614
digital camera card
copying contents 219
deleting contents 220
viewing contents 221
digitizer (defined) 584
Direct X software 35
Disable Auto Complete check box 469
Disable Cookies check box 470
Disable device name cache command 331
Disable Images check box 468
Disable JavaScript check box 475
disabling options 29
Disconnect command 459
Disconnect on Exit option 413
disconnecting from Drive Mode 97
disconnecting from the Internet 459
disconnecting USB sync cable 641
Discoverable pick list 314
Discoverable setting 313, 314, 329
discovering Bluetooth devices 313, 329, 331
Discovery icon 329
Discovery Results screen 313, 329
disk space requirements 3
Display Name option 392
display options (web pages) 452
LifeDrive from palmOne 681
Display Options command 181, 560, 563
Display Options dialog box
Applications View 563
calendar 181
clock 556
Favorites View 560
display preferences 563, 565, 567, 568
display See screen
Display View icon 452
display views (web browser) 452
displaying
application groups 541
applications 40, 544
appointments 173, 176, 177, 178
bookmarks 455
Category pick list 182, 183
contact information 137, 142
current date and time 547, 550
email attachments 462
events 166, 183, 184
Excel spreadsheets 189
expense reports 32
expenses 506
files on hard drive 189
hidden or masked entries 518
images 193, 463
information 544
memos 261
notes 271
personal calendars 151
photo 221
photos 193, 194
PowerPoint files 189
schedules 173, 175, 177, 178
slide shows 198
tasks 173, 182, 251, 255, 256
unread messages 173, 182
URLs 450
video 221
videos 194
web pages 447, 448, 449, 452, 463
Word documents 189
World Clock 32, 556
DNS (defined) 602
DNS addresses 297, 309, 602
Do not allow wakeup command 332
do’s and don’ts 624
DOC files 189
See also Word documents
documentation xxi
Documents application
accessing 30
benefits of 188
companion application for 189
opening files from 190
overview 188, 189
related topics for 191
Documents To Go application 189
domain name system (DNS) 602
down arrow controls 29
Download attachments option 350
Download dialog box 461
download options 401, 461, 468
downloading
additional software 17
applications 118
attachments 399, 400
email 363, 371, 419
files 461, 468
images 468
large messages 401
web pages 461
drafts 376
drained batteries 635
drawing freehand 210, 266
drawing tools 210
Drive Mode
described 82
disconnecting from 97
managing items with 81
overview 94
recommendations for 83, 95, 97
transferring MP3 files 229
troubleshooting 648
turning on 95
Drive Mode icon 30, 95
Drive Mode screen 95
drivers 589
drop-down lists See lists
due dates 245, 246, 250, 256
dummy expansion card 615
Duplicate Contact command 139
duplicating contact information 135, 139
duration 153
E
eBooks 34
Edit Bookmarks command 456, 457
Edit Bookmarks List dialog box 456, 457,
458
Edit Categories command 251
Edit Categories dialog box 164, 165, 538,
540
Edit Connection dialog box 590
Edit currencies command 500
LifeDrive from palmOne 682
Edit List dialog box 551, 553
Edit menu 77, 78
Edit Playlist dialog box 233
editing 76, 261, 267, 271, 456
See also changing
electrostatic discharge 670–671
email
See also email accounts; VersaMail
application
accessing 302, 317, 320, 325, 336
adding addresses to contacts 374
adding attachments to 404
adding signatures 380
addressing 136, 144, 147, 377, 378, 379,
582
changing fonts for 384
changing header information for 415
changing Inbox folders for 383
changing messages 382
composing 376
creating folders for 388
deleting 393, 394, 396, 414
downloading 363, 371, 419
downloading attachments 400
emptying Trash folder for 396, 397
entering user names for 598
filtering 364, 406, 409, 411
forwarding 389
manually marking 398
moving messages 386
opening web browser from 459
reading 373
reading files attached to 462
receiving 320, 335, 339, 363, 428
related topics for 435
replying to 390
sending 320, 372, 376, 464
setting display options for 384
setting maximum size 350
setting notification options for 367, 381
setting preferences for 371
setting retry intervals for 381
tapping URLs in 393
viewing status of 370
viewing unread messages for 173, 182
wireless connections and 290, 302
wireless connections for 435
email accounts
accessing email 312
changing 359, 360
connection types and 336
deleting 361
logging in to Internet 464
scheduling Auto Sync 365, 369
setting up 336, 343, 420, 424
testing 358
transferring settings to 341
upgrading 335
email applications 602
email folders 383
email providers 336, 356
emergency information 538
empty screen 637
Empty Trash dialog box 396
emptying Trash folder 396, 397
Enable device name cache command 331
encryption
device-to-device networking and 306
email passwords and 336
wireless connections and 294, 295, 296
encryption keys 292, 295, 296, 307
encryption systems 292, 336
End command 606
entering
current date and time 70, 572, 575
information 20, 56, 57, 72–107, 578
owner information 586
passkeys 317, 330
passwords 319, 355, 425, 598, 601
phone numbers 478, 480, 482, 601
URLs 447, 448
entries See information
entry fields 29
eraser 267
eReader 34
error messages 645
errors xxii
ESD (electrostatic discharge) 670–671
ESMTP authentication 362
Essential Software folder 125
Euro, in onscreen keyboard 73
events
See also appointments; Calendar
application
Event Details dialog box 168
events
adding to calendar 152
adjusting for location 572
archiving 170, 171, 172
beaming 493
categorizing 153, 493, 538
changing descriptions 168
changing time zones for 162
changing untimed 155
color-coding 153, 163, 166
LifeDrive from palmOne 683
conflicting 182
contact information and 134
creating multiday 159
creating untimed 154, 159
defined 152
defining repeating 156, 157
deleting 170–172, 540
displaying 166, 183, 184
entering notes for 160, 161
extending beyond midnight 159
finding overlapping 180
marking as private 153, 516
rescheduling 168–169
retrieving with Microsoft Exchange
ActiveSync 428, 433
scheduling 152, 154, 184
sending as attachments 404
setting alarms for 167, 185
setting time zones for 162, 163
viewing free time for 182
viewing specific time for 183
Excel spreadsheets
displaying 189
email messages and 334
importing information from 121
managing files for 188
opening 190
sending information to 499
exclamation point (!) in Tasks list 256
EXIF format 203
expansion cards
adding applications to 33, 34, 623
beaming from 494
benefits of 614
copying applications to 495, 621
deleting applications on 127
deleting information on 622
displaying information about 31, 619
downloading files to 461
dummy card for 615
formatting 622
getting applications on 126
inserting 21, 616
limitations 619
opening applications on 617
opening files on 618
preventing damage to 615
related topics for 623
removing 615
renaming 620
transferring music files to 228, 229
types of 614
viewing information on 463
expense records See Expense application
Expense application
archiving information in 504
benefits of 497
categorizing information in 499, 505,
506, 538
categorizing with Calculator 538
changing information 498
choosing currency options 500
customizing lists for 506
deleting categories 540
deleting information in 504–505
entering expenses in 498–499
getting help with 507
installing 32
opening 498, 507
related topics for 508
saving information in 499
transferring information to 74
troubleshooting 508
Expense icon 32
expense lists 506
Expense Preferences dialog box 498, 501
expense reports 32, 500, 505, 506
Expense type pick list 498
extending battery 558, 635
external devices 589
external removable drives 94
external speaker 585
F
fade setting 182, 560, 564
FAQs 633
Favorites View
changing entries in 560
defined 30
moving around in 49
opening 26
FCC Statement 666
fields 29, 135, 136, 137
file names 463, 621
file sync See folder sync options
file transfer application See LifeDrive
Manager
file types 193, 226
files
accessing 473
attaching to email 404, 405
copying 94
displaying contents 462, 463
displaying on expansion cards 619
downloading 461, 468
LifeDrive from palmOne 684
installation prerequisites for 125
installing on Windows computers 117
managing 189
moving 94
opening 94, 190, 463
removing 123, 622
restoring archived 123
saving 461
sending as attachments 404
sharing 290, 312
transferring to device 34, 94, 121
troubleshooting uninstalled 645
Files application
accessing contents on hard drive and 81
installing 30
opening 41
overview 41
troubleshooting 647
Files list 463
filing events 153
filtering email 364, 406, 409, 411
filtering messages 409, 411
Filters dialog box 407, 409
finances 497, 538
See also Expense application
Find dialog box 54
Find icon 26, 54
Find More button 54
Find on Page command 450
Find on Page dialog box 450
finding
contacts 140
information 54
overlapping events 180
firewalls 292, 338
flash drive See hard drive
Flow Ctl pick list 595
folder sync options 98, 102
folders 386, 388, 463, 642
Font command 566
font styles 566
fonts 384, 452, 565–566
forgetting passwords 523
form fields (web pages) 469
Format (codec) pick list 225
Format Card command 622
formats
information-specific 576
multimedia file types 193
Formats Preferences screen 576
formatting expansion cards 622
forwarding email 389
freehand drawing 210, 266
freeing up space 123, 127, 172, 637
frequently asked questions (FAQs) 633
front panel controls 19
frozen screen 626, 636
Full header option 415
full sync option 98
full-screen pen stroke 571
full-screen writing 58, 267, 453
full-screen writing icon 26, 59
G
Game Sound pick list 585
games 541, 585, 614
General Packet Radio Service (GPRS) 318
gestures (Graffiti 2 writing) 67
Get IP command 606
Get unread mail option 371
getting started xxi, xxii, 6
GIF files 193, 463
Go To Date dialog box 152, 154
Go to Web Page dialog box 447
Go to Web Page icon 447
GPRS data services 459
GPRS mobile phones 315, 318, 327, 589
Graffiti 2 command strokes 53, 67
Graffiti 2 input area 20, 28, 57
Graffiti 2 Preferences screen 579
Graffiti 2 writing
changing strokes for 583
command shortcuts and 67
copying and pasting with 77
creating tasks with 245
deleting information with 78
deleting ShortCuts 583
entering information with 57, 60–69
entering ShortCut strokes 70–71, 581
full-screen mode and 58
getting help with 66
guidelines for 61
overview 57
setting alternate stroke shapes for 579
troubleshooting problems with 640
graphics files 463, 468
GSM mobile phones 315, 589
H
handhelds See LifeDrive mobile manager;
Palm OS handhelds
handwriting 267, 640
See also Graffiti 2 writing
hard drive 23, 81
caution for damaging 19
LifeDrive from palmOne 685
hard resets 524, 627, 630, 637
Quick Erase 628
Secure Erase 628
header options (email) 415
headphone jack 24
headphones 24, 585, 624
help xxiii, 17, 29, 66, 523, 664
Help menu 641
hiding
address fields 448
currency symbols 506
input area 28
private entries 515, 517
high-speed connections 321
high-speed data services 597
high-speed wireless carrier 312
highlighting menu commands 51
See also selection highlight
hints 29, 523
See also help
History dialog box 511
Holiday Files folder 186
holidays 154, 156, 158
Home icon 26, 28
home page 451, 465, 467
Home Page icon 465
Home Page setting (web browser) 467
Home screen See Applications View
hosts 602
HotSync cable See USB sync cable
HotSync icon 31
HotSync Manager
See also synchronizing
not responding 645
opening on PCs 323
restoring information from 630
starting 31, 109
turning off 109
HotSync Manager icon 99, 641
HotSync menu 119
HotSync Online Troubleshooting Guide 641
HotSync technology 85, 86, 98
how-to information xxii
HTM files 463
HTML files 459, 462, 463
HTML messages 350
HTML viewer 462
hyperlinks 451
See also URLs
I
icons
application 563, 570
Command toolbar 53
Inbox (VersaMail) 370
input area 28
missing 639
Outbox (VersaMail) 382
Wi-Fi wireless connections 291
ICS files 121
idle timeouts 602
image files 193, 463, 468
IMAP mail folders 416, 417, 418
IMAP protocol 337, 346, 354
IMAP servers 347, 355, 399
importing
contacts 150
information 12
Inbox 358, 383
Inbox icons 370
incoming mail options 357, 427
incoming mail servers 336, 347, 355
incompatible applications 661
incorrect dates and time 638
indicator light 19
Info command 126
Info dialog box 126
information
adding contact 140, 150
adding owner 586
backing up 32
beaming application-specific 491
categorizing 537, 541
caution for overwriting 113, 115
copying and pasting 77
deleting 78, 622
editing 76
entering 20, 56, 57, 72–107, 578
finding 54
hard resets and 524, 627, 630
importing 121
installing company-specific 11
losing xxii, 50
protecting 614
providing emergency 538
restoring 630
sharing 21, 133, 485, 495
synchronizing 99
updating 98, 111
viewing by category 544
infrared port See IR port
Infrared setting 594
initialization strings (modems) 413, 595
input area 20, 28, 57
Input icon 26, 28
LifeDrive from palmOne 686
inserting expansion cards 21, 616
installation CD 2, 7, 32, 124, 633
installation prerequisites 125
installing
additional software 32, 124
applications 32, 617
Palm Desktop software 3, 7, 32
related topics for 17
instant messenger (IM) accounts 136
instant messenger (IM) field 136
Int’l button 73
internal flash drive See hard drive
international keyboard 73
Internet
See also websites
accessing 312
connecting to 290, 312, 460, 598
disconnecting from 459
email accounts and 464
retrying connections for 460
selecting service provider for 321
setting up network connections for 319
Internet Explorer 2
See also web browser application
Internet Message Access Protocol (IMAP)
346, 354
Internet protocol (IP) 602
Internet Service Providers (ISPs) 312, 336,
597
invalidating warranty 635
IP Address check box 602
IP addresses 297, 309, 602
IR port
beaming from 491, 492, 493
creating connections for 589
location of 21
setting up connections for 594
synchronizing from 99
IR to a PC/Handheld connection 589, 590
ISPs 312, 336, 597
iTunes application 230
J
jack (headphone) 24
JavaScript 475
JPG files 193, 463
K
key exchange 330
key index 296
key terms xxiii
Key Type pick list 295, 307
keyboard icons 28
keyboards
connecting to portable 261
entering information with 72, 73
included with device 73
opening alternative 73
opening onscreen 28
Keylock 21, 25
keys (onscreen keyboard) 73
L
LAN Setup option 327
landscape view 27
laptops 312
large fonts 566
large images 468
Last Page Viewed setting (web browser)
467
Leave mail on server option 414
left arrow controls 29
letter keyboard icon 28
LifeDrive Manager
described 82
Drive Mode and 94
opening 88
overview 83, 84
security preferences and 89
synchronizing with 98, 102
transfer options for 84
transferring information with 85, 88
troubleshooting 647
viewing device contents with 81
LifeDrive Manager icon 34, 85
LifeDrive Manager window 88
LifeDrive mobile device
downloading files and 461
locking 524–527
protecting 313, 317
resetting 524
LifeDrive mobile manager
adding additional software 614
adding owner information 586
charging battery for 4, 588, 636
checking space on 125
components of 2
connecting to AC charger 24, 588, 635
connecting to other devices 589
connecting to PCs 8
controls described 19
customizing 32
displaying contents of 88
do’s and don’ts 624
freeing space on 123, 127, 637
LifeDrive from palmOne 687
getting help with 664
locking 586
maintenance information for 624
not making sounds 638
power switch for 21, 25
recharging 4, 5, 588, 635
removing items 123
resetting 24, 626, 636
restoring information on 630
running out of space on 614
safety warnings for 670
setting power preferences for 587–588
setting up 1, 6, 7
timing out 642
turning itself off 638
turning on and off 6
upgrading 4, 7
lightning bolt icon 636
line selection 76
links (documentation) xxii
links (web pages) 451
list screens 50
List view (Media) 194
listening to music 24, 226, 232
listening to voice memos 281
lists
See also song lists
creating company phone 11
customizing expense 506
customizing Tasks 255
displaying applications icons in 563
displaying bookmarks in 455
displaying contacts in 142
displaying pick 29
finding items in 551
moving between items in 50
opening category 182, 617
ordering memos in 262
rearranging items in 262
selecting items in 29, 50
loading user profiles 15, 16
Local Area Networks See networks
locating
contacts 140
controls 55
information 54
overlapping events 180
Location field 160
Location pick list 551, 573
location pick list 551
location settings (World Clock) 547, 550,
552
location-specific preferences 572–577
locations, deleting 553
Lock Device dialog box 525
lock icons 494, 621
lock options 526
locking device 586
locking mobile device 524–527
logging in to email accounts 338, 464
logging in to network servers 604
Login Script dialog box 604, 605
login scripts 604–606
Look Up line (Contacts) 140
Lookup screen 379
losing
information xxii, 50
LifeDrive mobile manager 586
network connections 636
passwords 523, 524
low batteries 5, 635
lowercase letters 61
M
Mac information
creating contacts 149
creating notes 273
creating user profiles 13
described xxii
device system requirements 3
displaying tasks 257
enabling Drive Mode 96
entering information 106
installing device software 7, 118–120,
125
opening calendars 186
synchronizing device 110, 114
synchronizing with user profiles 16
transferring files 94
transferring music 229
troubleshooting problems 634
writing memos 264
Mac OS X systems 118
Macintosh overwrites handheld option 115
magnifying glass (Adobe Reader) xxi
mail folders 386, 388
mail See email
mail servers 337, 347, 355
Mail Service pick list 355, 424
maintenance information 624
Make Default check box 116
Manage Albums icon 205
Manage Albums screen 205, 206
Manual synchronization option 109
manually locking device 524, 527
LifeDrive from palmOne 688
marking information as private 516
marking message status 398
masking private entries 515, 517, 518
math calculators 31
Maximum Message Size option 350, 372
MCI connections 599
Media application
adding photo to contact 133
benefits of 192, 218
displaying photos or videos 194, 221
opening 194
organizing photos and videos 205
overview 192
related topics for 217, 223
media file types 193
Media icon 30, 651
meeting invitations 430
memory
available for Palm OS programs 81
freeing 127, 472, 637
purging calendar events 172
synchronization and 82, 98
memory button (Calculator) 510
memory cards 622
memory clear button (Calculator) 510
memory recall button (Calculator) 510
memos
See also notes; Memos application
adding contact information to 140, 260
backing up 33
creating 260
deleting 263
displaying 261
editing 261, 262
keeping private 515, 516
organizing 262, 538
recording voice 275
saving 260, 263
selecting 50
sending as attachments 265, 404
transferring to PCs 262
Memos application
categorizing information in 538
getting help with 264
importing information for 121
marking entries as private 516
opening 31, 260
overview 259
related topics for 265
reordering memos lists 262
selecting memos 261
transferring information to 74
troubleshooting 265, 650
writing memos with 260
Memos icon 31
Memos list 260, 261, 262
menu bar 52
Menu icon 639
menu shortcuts 53
menus 51, 52
menus icon 26
Message text option 392
messages
See also email; text messages
automatically resending 375
connection types for 312
displaying unread 173, 182
downloading large 401
receiving 312, 437
removing confirmation 272
sending plain text 350
setting alarms for 555
Microsoft Excel spreadsheets See Excel
spreadsheets
Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync
account setup 420–427
deleting accounts for 434
getting calendar events 428, 433
getting messages 428
meeting invitations and 430
Microsoft Exchange Server and 337
overview 419
prerequisites for 419
previewing attachments 430
synchronizing events and 434
time zones and 433
Microsoft Exchange Server 2003 419
Microsoft Internet Explorer 2
See also web browser application
Microsoft Office Manager See Documents
application
Microsoft Outlook See Outlook
Microsoft Windows systems See Windows
information
Microsoft Word documents 188, 189, 190
missing applications 30, 639
missing icons 639
MJPEG+ADPCM files 193
MJPEG+PCM files 193
MJPEG4+ADPCM files 193
mobile devices 136, 142
See also LifeDrive mobile manager
mobile phones
accessing Internet with 312
attaching modems to 589
LifeDrive from palmOne 689
compatibility 316
connecting to 312, 315, 321, 596, 654
connecting to Internet from 321
creating trusted pairs for 315, 653
dialing 144, 145, 477
key exchanges and 330
passkeys and 317, 653
requirements for 147
Modem Wait option 413
modems
connecting to IR port from 589
initialization strings for 413, 595
setting up connections for 594, 598
Money category 538
See also currency
Month View 166, 178, 180, 183
Month View icon 178
month, setting 548, 575
monthly events 156
monthly schedules 178
monthly tasks 248, 250
moving
bookmarks 458
files 94
messages 386, 387
photos 207
videos 207
web pages 453
moving around dialog boxes 50
moving the slider 29
moving through documentation xxi
moving through screens 47
moving through web pages 451
MP3 files
transferring with Rhapsody 226
MP3 players 224
MPA files 121
MPEG-1 files 193
multi-connector 24
multiday events 159
multiline descriptions 152
multimedia applications See Media
application
multimedia file types 193
MultiMediaCard expansion cards 614
music
See also music files, Pocket Tunes,
Rhapsody
changing playlists for 236
deleting playlists for 238
listening to 24, 226
playing 232, 235, 652
removing from playlists 237
selecting 235
storing 614
music applications 224
music files
See also music
music player See Pocket Tunes
N
names See usernames; contacts
naming
connections 594
email accounts 355, 424
expansion cards 620
LifeDrive mobile device 314
photo albums 206
playlists 234
user profiles 12, 13
video album 206
navigating through documentation xxi
navigating through web pages 451
navigational controls 29
navigator 20, 29, 47–51
negative numbers 510
Network pick list 292, 304
Network Preferences screen 597, 600, 601,
603, 604
network settings 597–607
networks
accessing accounts for 317
accessing corporate 338
accessing email from 312
closing connections for 600
connecting to 317, 327, 600
corporate email accounts and 337, 338
creating login scripts for 604–606
customizing connections for 594, 597
deleting service profiles for 603
dialing in to 589
losing connections to 636
selecting communications protocol for
602
selecting encryption settings for 294
setting IP addresses for 602
setting up service profiles for 597, 598
specifying as trusted device 328
synchronizing over 99
wireless connections for 290, 292
New events use time zones setting 162
new lines 260
New Profile screen 12, 13
next arrow icon 29
No-time icon 174
LifeDrive from palmOne 690
Note Pad
See also notes
backing up information in 33
categorizing information in 538, 542
clearing 267
creating notes from 267
deleting notes in 272
displaying notes in 271
getting help with 273, 274
opening 31
overview 266
related topics for 274
selecting pens 268
setting color preferences 268
troubleshooting 651
Note Pad icon 31
notes
See also memos; Note Pad
attaching alarms to 269
attaching to email 274
backing up 33
categorizing 267, 538
creating 267
deleting 272
editing 267, 271
marking as private 267, 274, 515
playing voice memo 275
saving 267
selecting 50, 271
sending as attachments 404
setting background colors for 268
sorting 271
notification options (email) 368, 381
number formats 508, 576, 577
number keyboard 28
number keyboard icon 28
numbers
See also phone numbers
adding to entry fields 63, 72
entering on calculator 510
O
off-line viewing 459, 461, 462
Office files 188–190
See also specific program files
omitting passkeys 315
omitting passwords 598
Online Troubleshooting Guide 641
onscreen keyboards See keyboards
opening
applications 39, 104, 570, 617
Applications View 26
Calendar views 152, 177, 178, 179
Category pick list 182, 617
Favorites View 26
files 94, 190, 463
photo albums 206
web browser 459, 462
operating systems 2
Optimized view (web browser) 452
optional information xxii
options 29
order forms 469
organizing
applications 55, 538
information 55, 537
orientation of screen 27
Outbox 376, 381, 382
Outbox icons 382
outgoing mail options 358
outgoing mail servers 337, 347, 355
Outlook
applications that synchronize 98
marking completed tasks and 252
synchronizing with 10, 112, 128, 153,
642, 643
Overdue task icon 174
overdue tasks 173, 182, 251, 256
overlapping events 180
owner information 586
Owner Preferences screen 586
P
page icons (web browser) 458
Page Info command 450
pager 136
paging through documentation xxi
Palm Desktop Installer icon 7
Palm Desktop software
completing repeated tasks and 252
creating user profiles from 12, 13
described 2, 33
entering information in 105, 106
importing information to 121, 123
installing 3, 7, 32
opening applications in 104, 106
requiring password entry for 520
restoring archived items to 123
synchronizing with 10, 162, 642
system requirements for 2
time zones and 650
troubleshooting 633
uninstalling 128
upgrading device and 7
Palm Dialer software See Dialer application
LifeDrive from palmOne 691
Palm OS applications 38
Palm OS handhelds
exchanging records with 486
sharing notes with 274
palmOne technical support 17
palmOne website 34
paper clip icon 400
parts (device) 2
passkeys 317, 325, 328, 330, 653
passphrases (encryption) 296
Password check box 355, 425
passwords
Bluetooth devices and 317, 325
changing 520
creating 518, 519, 524
deleting 523
displaying web pages and 449
email accounts and 337
encryption protocol for 336
entering 319, 355, 425, 598, 601
forgetting 523
locking device with 524, 586
losing 524
network connections and 328
omitting 598
requiring 520
security options for 515
troubleshooting 658
validating 362
Paste command 77
Paste icon 53
pasting information 77, 511
patches 127
PCs See computers
PDF files 34
Peer-to-Peer (ad hoc) setting 308
pen 268
Pen selector 267
pen widths 267
percentage button (Calculator) 510
performance 624
period (.) character 579
peripheral devices See external devices
personal computers See computers
personal information 470, 518
personalizing contact information 137
personalizing LifeDrive mobile manager
See customizing; preferences
phone 330, 589, 594
See also conference calls; mobile
phones; phone numbers
phone connections 315–319
phone drivers 589
Phone Link Updater application 315
Phone Lookup 74, 140
phone number fields 136
phone numbers
adding speed dial entries for 481
dialing 478, 480, 482
dialing from email message 393
entering 478, 480, 482, 601
getting from contacts 74, 136, 140
organizing emergency 538
redialing 479
sharing 21
temporary storage for 266
phone settings (service profiles) 598
Phone Setup dialog box 315
photo albums
arranging photos in 207, 209
creating 206
moving photos in 207
moving photos to other 208
scrolling through 203
selecting 206
Photo Details screen 203
photos
adding notes to 203
adding to albums 206
adding to contacts 133
adjusting fade setting for 560, 564
copying 214, 216, 495
deleting 206
moving 207
personalizing 210
previewing 194
reformatting 84, 193
selecting 50
selecting as backgrounds 182, 560, 564
sending as attachments 404
sharing 117, 216
sorting 209
storing 614
supported file types for 193
viewing 194, 221
viewing details of 202, 203
Photos application See Media application
pick lists 29
Picture box 133
plain text messages 350
playing back video clips 196
playing music 232, 235, 652
See also music
playlists
creating 233
LifeDrive from palmOne 692
deleting songs on 237
editing 236
naming 234
removing 238
reordering music on 237
selecting music from 235
troubleshooting 653
plug-in applications 607
Pocket Tunes application
compatible formats for 226
desktop companion for 35
getting help with 232
opening 31, 232
overview 224
troubleshooting 652
Pocket Tunes icon 31
POP protocol 346, 354
POP servers 337, 347, 355, 398
Port Number option 357, 358, 427
portable keyboards 261
portrait view 27
ports 21
Post Office Protocol (POP) 346, 354
See also POP servers
power adapter See AC charger
power consumption options 587
power preferences 587–588
Power Preferences screen 587
power switch 21, 25
power-saving settings 587, 588
PowerPoint files 189, 190
PPT files 189
PRC applications 607
precautions 625, 635, 671
predefined service profiles 601
preferences 191, 445, 558, 612
See also customizing
Preferences command 184
Preferences screen 32
Prefs icon 32
preinstalled applications 30, 127
prerequisites xxiii
preset connections 589, 592
preset delays 526
preset formats 576
previous arrow icon 29
Previous View icon (Adobe Reader) xxi
primary location 547, 548, 553, 556
printers 290
printing expense reports 32
prioritizing tasks 245, 256
privacy FAQs 658
privacy levels 517
privacy settings
applications 55
calendar 168
information 515
notes 274
records 515
web pages 470
Private check box 516
profiles 11–16
program memory See memory
programs See software; applications
projectors 290
Prompt command 606
prompts 605
protecting information 514, 516, 524, 614
protecting mobile device 313, 317, 624
protocol (defined) 346, 354
Protocol pick list 355
proxy servers 473, 474
Proxy Settings dialog box 474
punctuation marks 61, 64
Punctuation Shift indicator 68
Punctuation Shift stroke 68
Purge Categories dialog box 505
Purge command 172, 254, 505
Purge dialog box 172, 254
purging items 637
Q
quarterly tasks 249
Query DNS check box 602
questions and answers 633
quick buttons
location of 20
opening applications from 30
reassigning 570
restoring defaults for 570
Quick Erase 628
Quick Install software 117, 645
Quick Look Up icon 140
Quick Look Up line 140
Quick Tour 6, 31
R
radio 23, 34
range (peripheral connections) 313
Read pick list 384
reading
email 373
text messages 440, 442
Real Rhapsody See Rhapsody
LifeDrive from palmOne 693
RealOne Player See Pocket Tunes;
Rhapsody
reassigning quick buttons 570
reboots See resetting LifeDrive mobile
manager
Receipt Details dialog box 500
receiving email 320, 335, 339, 363
receiving messages 312, 437
recently visited web pages 451
recharging battery 4, 5, 588, 635
recipes 263
Recipient List screen 378, 379
Record menu 492
recording voice memos 22, 276
records 127, 627
recovering memory 637
recurring events 152
redialing phone numbers 479
related items, categorizing 538
related topics xxii
Remember Last Category check box 563
reminders
See also alarms
canceling 555
creating 266, 275
scheduling 134, 152
setting alarms as 554
specifying notes as 269
Reminders screen 368, 381
remote access accounts 597
remote connections 412
remote devices 331
remote servers 473, 597
removable drives 94
removing
ActiveSync accounts 434
applications 127, 622
appointments 170
bookmarks 456
categories 540
confirmation messages 272
connections 589, 592
contacts 141
desktop software 7
email 393, 394, 396, 414
email accounts 361
email filters 411
events 170–172, 540
expansion cards 615
expense items 504, 505
files from device 123
Graffiti 2 ShortCut strokes 583
information 78, 123, 524, 622, 637
locations 553
mail folders 388
memos 263
notes 272
Palm Desktop software 128
passwords 523
photos 206
playlists 238
private entries 523
repeating tasks 253
saved web pages 456
selection highlight 47, 49
service profiles 603
songs 237
tasks 253–254
Rename Card dialog box 620
Rename Custom Fields dialog box 137
renaming
categories 539
expansion cards 620
mail folders 388
preset connections 589
web pages 462
Repeat icon 175
repeat intervals
calendar 156, 159
tasks 248, 250
repeating events
changing 169
deleting 170, 171
displaying 183
scheduling 156, 157
repeating tasks 247, 249, 252, 253
Reply To Address option 392
replying to email 390
required steps xxii
rescheduling events 168–169
resending messages 375
reserving dates 154
reset button 24, 626, 627
resetting
clock 548, 574
Graffiti 2 ShortCut strokes 583
LifeDrive mobile device 524
LifeDrive mobile manager 24, 626, 636
local preferences 572, 574
passwords 520
preset connections 589
preset formats 576
quick buttons 570
LifeDrive from palmOne 694
screen fonts 566
server profiles 598
resizing text 261
restarting device See reset button
restoring
archived items 123
defaults 570
information 523, 524, 630
restricting device connections 313
restrictions 625, 635
retrying
Auto Sync 369
email delivery 381
Internet connections 460
Rhapsody application
getting help with 242
installing 35
setting up music files for 225
transferring music with 226
right arrow controls 29
rotary dialing 594
rotating the screen 27
running out of memory 127
running out of space 614
S
Save Page command 462
Save Page dialog box 462
saved web pages 455, 456, 457, 462
saving
appointments 153
attachments 403
battery power 587
contacts 134, 141
files 461
information 46, 123, 640
memos 260, 263
notes 267
synchronization settings 116
tasks 245, 253, 254
web cookies 470
web pages 462
scheduled sending retry (email) 338
schedules 151, 173, 182, 572
See also appointments; calendar
scheduling
appointments 152–153
Auto Sync 365, 366, 369
backup and synchronization 8, 98
events 152, 154, 159, 184
reminders 134, 152
repeating tasks 247, 249
untimed events 155
scheduling conflicts 151
screen
adding photos as backgrounds 182,
560, 564
adjusting brightness 565
aligning 584
blank 637
caring for 624
caution for 21
changing colors of 568
changing fonts for 565–566
clearing 267
frozen 626, 636
landscape and portrait views 27
moving through 20, 47
navigational controls for 29
not responding 626, 636
overview 28
scrolling through 29
tapping elements on 28, 584
viewing information on 20
screen rotation 27
Screen rotation button 22, 27
scripts 607
scroll bar 29
scrolling
Applications View 49
from screen-to-screen 29
in dialog boxes 50
menus 51
to dates 152
SD memory cards 614
SDIO accessories 614
SDIO cards 614
searching for information 54, 140
searching web pages 450
secondary locations 550, 553, 556
secure connections 418
Secure Digital input/output (SDIO) 614
Secure Erase 628
Secure Sockets Layer See SSL connections
security 317, 468, 598
security information (Wi-Fi) 292
security levels 515
security options
See also encryption; passwords;
privacy settings
device 515
records 515
wireless connections 294, 306
Security pick list 294, 306
LifeDrive from palmOne 695
Security Preferences dialog box 517, 519,
520, 586
Select a Color Theme dialog box 561, 568,
569, 578
Select button (navigator) 51
Select Colors dialog box 268
Select Font dialog box 384, 566
Select User dialog box 8, 100
selecting
alarm sounds 555
alternate stroke shapes 579
background colors 268, 568
clock display options 556
command buttons 29
communications protocol 602
connections 598
currency options 500, 501, 502
information 20, 76
Internet Service Providers (ISPs) 598
items in lists 29, 50
menu commands 51, 52, 53
options in dialog boxes 50
security levels 515
synchronization settings 99
selection highlight 49
self-help resources 664
Send command 606
Send CR command 606
Send email from Outbox option 350
Send Password command 606
send retry failures 381, 382
Send to Handheld dialog box 118
Send To Handheld droplet 33, 118
Send User ID command 606
sending
email 320, 372, 376, 464
text messages 312, 436, 437
server preferences 474
servers 473
service (defined) 321
Service Connection Progress messages 600
Service pick list 321, 598, 601
service profiles
deleting 603
selecting 600
setting up 597, 598, 601
service templates 597
services 321, 589, 605
Set Alarm dialog box 246, 270
Set as default check box 114
Set Country dialog box 577
Set Date & Time button 548
Set Date dialog box 548, 575
Set Time dialog box 153, 549, 575
setting up email accounts 354–358
setting up LifeDrive mobile manager 1, 6, 7
setting up Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync
accounts 420–427
setting up wireless connections 292–297,
311
settings See preferences
setup 633
Setup Devices option 322
sharing
files 290, 312
information 21, 133, 485, 495
photos 117, 216
videos 216
sharing FAQs 659
Short header option 415
Short Message Service (SMS) 437
short messages 436
ShortCut strokes (Graffiti 2 writing)
backing up 581
changing 583
deleting 583
described 70–71
setting up 581
ShortCut Text line 582
shortcuts xxiii, 29, 53, 77, 571
ShortCuts Preferences screen 581, 583
Show Address Bar check box 448
Show History command 511
Show in List pick list 142
Show Multiple Locations setting 556
Show Private Records dialog box 518
side panel controls 21, 22
sidebars (documentation) xxiii
signal strength (wireless connections) 26,
291
signal strength indicator 26
Signature dialog box 380
signatures 380
Silent profile settings 585
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol See SMTP
servers
sketching 266
slide shows 194, 198, 207
slider 29
small fonts 566, 567
small icons 563
small triangle (bookmarks) 455
Smart Addressing feature 377
SMS application
See also text messages
LifeDrive from palmOne 696
benefits of 436
installing 31
opening 437
related topics for 445
sending text messages 437
SMS messaging 31, 437
SMTP servers 347, 355, 362
Snooze setting 555
soft resets 626, 636
software
See also specific application
accessing additional 17
adding additional 124, 614
included on device 30
installing 7, 32, 124
third-party applications and 8
Solitaire 32
song files See music files
song lists
See also music
creating 233
deleting 238
editing 236
naming 234
removing items on 237
reordering music on 237
selecting items 235
troubleshooting 653
Sort by date option 209
Sort by name option 209
Sort by pick list 271
Sort by type option 209
Sort manually option 209
Sort order option 384
sorting
expenses 506
memos 538
notes 271
photos 209
videos 209
sound files See audio files
sounds
changing alarm 269
setting alarm 167, 185, 256, 555
setting preferences for 585
Sounds & Alerts screen 585
space characters 581, 598
space information (device) 126
hard drive 81
memory full warning 637
program memory 81
speaker 23, 282, 585
Speaker icon 282
special characters 61, 68, 69
specifications 668
speed (communications) 589, 591, 595
Speed Dial screen 481, 483
Speed pick list 591, 595
speed-dial buttons 481
spreadsheets
displaying 189
email messages and 334
importing information from 121
managing files for 188
opening 190
sending information to 499
square root button (Calculator) 510
SSL connections 352, 357, 358, 418, 427
start page (web browser) 465, 467
Start with pick list 467
starting
HotSync Manager 31, 109
locked devices 524
Outlook applications 112
static electricity 625, 670–671
status bar icon descriptions 26
status icons (Wi-Fi) 291
stereo headphones 24
stopping
download operations 461
information searches 54
Internet connections 460
MP3 player 232
storage 613, 614
See hard drive
storing
device names 331
stylus 6, 21, 60, 210, 624
Subject fields 376
subject lines (email) 363, 376
supported file types 193, 226
switching between applications 10, 46, 617,
642
symbols 68, 69, 72, 132
Sync IMAP Folders screen 418
sync items (LifeDrive Manager) 85, 98
synchronization
See also synchronizing
customizing settings for 107–116
defined 8, 82
Drive Mode and 94
entering information and 104
installing applications and 117
related topics for 17
third-party applications and 8
LifeDrive from palmOne 697
troubleshooting 641–646, 648
upgrades and 4
usernames and 100, 340
synchronization options 98, 99, 107
synchronization software 10, 111, 128, 642
Synchronize incoming email setting 351
Synchronize unread mail only setting 350
synchronizing
See also HotSync Manager
applications 111, 644
caution for 128
IMAP mail folders 416, 417, 418
information 99, 641
LifeDrive mobile device 523
LifeDrive mobile manager 85
over networks 99
wirelessly 312, 322
with IR port 99
with LifeDrive Manager 101
with Microsoft Outlook 10, 112, 128,
642, 643
with user profiles 11, 14, 16
system information, icon on status bar 26
system requirements 2
System Sound pick list 585
T
Tap and Drag scrolling 453
tapping
application titles 52
arrow icons 29
check boxes 29
command buttons 29
entry boxes 29
menu items 52
problems with 626, 636, 639
screen elements 28, 584
URLs 459
Task Preferences dialog box 246, 255
tasks
See also Tasks application
adding contact information to 140
adding notes to 245
adding to Tasks list 255
archiving 253, 254
assigning due dates to 245, 246, 250
categorizing 245, 251, 256
changing date due 256
combining with appointments 151
completing 252
creating 245
deleting 253–254
displaying 173, 182, 251, 255, 256
entering from Outlook 10, 642
managing 244
marking as private 245
organizing 251
prioritizing 245, 256
reordering 256
saving 245, 253, 254
scheduling repeating 247, 249
sending as attachments 404
setting alarms for 246, 256
setting repeat intervals for 248, 250
viewing due dates for 256
viewing overdue 256
Tasks application
adding tasks 245, 247, 249
categorizing information in 538
getting help with 257
importing information for 121
marking completed tasks 252
opening 31, 245
overview 244
related topics for 258
saving information for 254
saving information in 245
securing contents 515
setting display options for 251
setting preferences for 255–256
transferring information to 74
troubleshooting 258, 653
Tasks icon 31
Tasks list 173, 251, 253, 255
TDA files 121
technical assistance xxiii, 17, 191, 243, 665
Technical Support office 665
technical terms xxiii
telephone numbers See phone numbers
testing email accounts 358
text
adjusting fade setting for 560, 564
changing color of 182, 568
changing screen fonts for 565
entering 57, 72
entering abbreviations for 581, 582
finding on web pages 450
resizing 261
searching for 54
selecting 54, 76
viewing against photos 182
text files 121
text messages
See also SMS application
managing 31
LifeDrive from palmOne 698
opening 440
sending 312, 436, 437
viewing 440, 441, 442, 444
third-party applications 8, 637, 661
thousands separator 577
Thumbnail view (Media) 194
thumbnails (photos) 182, 560, 564
TIFF files 193
time
blocking out periods of 156, 159
changing 548
checking 547
displaying current 550
displaying free 182
displaying specific periods of 182
entering current 70
entering display options for 184
incorrect 638
resetting 168, 572, 574
scheduling 153
scheduling periods of 153
setting current 575
setting for alarms 167, 247, 270, 554
setting location-specific 32, 548, 572
unscheduled events and 155
time bars 182
time formats 576, 577
Time Zone entry box 552
time zone pick list 163
time zones
adding locations and 551
automatically including 162
changing 552, 572, 573
Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync and
433
Microsoft Outlook and 153
Palm Desktop software and 650
primary locations and 162
scheduling events and 162, 549, 650
secondary locations and 550
selecting 163
timed events 183
timeout intervals 412
Timeout option 412
tips xxiii, 17, 29
Tips icon 29
to do lists 244
See also tasks; Tasks application
toolbars 53
top arrow controls 29
top panel controls 21, 22
full sync p 98
Touchscreen Preferences screen 584
touchscreen See screen
TouchTone dialing 594
tracking expenses 32, 497
transfer options 631
transferring
applications 33, 34
existing account settings 341
files 34, 94, 121
information 21, 74, 98, 121
wirelessly 290, 312
Trash folder 396, 397
travel expenses 506
travel guides 614
troubleshooting 8, 584, 633
trusted connections 328
Trusted Devices option 329
trusted pairs 312, 313, 315, 329
turning device on and off 588
turning off alarms 555
turning off HotSync Manager 109
turning sounds off 585
Tutorial 35
U
underlined links 451
underlined words (documentation) xxii
Undo icon 53
Unfiled category 539
unfreezing device 626, 627
uniform resource locators See URLs
uninstalling
applications 637
Palm Desktop software 128
unread email messages 173, 182, 398
Unread pick list 384
unrecognized devices 313
unscheduled events 155
unscheduled time slots 182
untimed events 134, 154, 155, 159, 183
up arrow controls 29
updating
information 98, 111
owner information 586
third-party applications 8
upgrades (device) 4, 7
upgrading email accounts 335
uppercase letters 60, 61
URL (defined) 447
URLs
accessing web pages with 447, 448
auto-completion option for 469
changing 454, 456
LifeDrive from palmOne 699
displaying 450
opening Internet connections with 460
selecting in email messages 393
tapping 459
USB connectors 24
USB port 8
USB sync cable
charging device and 24
custom connections and 594
device setup and 4, 6, 8
disconnecting 641
synchronizing and 9, 14, 99, 100, 641
transferring files and 647
transferring information and 86, 88, 95
Use calling card check box 599
Use proxy check box 474
Use Secure Connection option 352, 357,
358, 427
Use short preamble box 309
user profiles 11–16
user-specific information 11
usernames
assigning to device 11
dial-up accounts and 319
email accounts and 335, 337
email addresses and 598
hard resets and 627
network connections and 328
searching for 140
service profiles and 601
synchronization and 100, 340
upgrades and 7
validating 362
Users folder 128
V
vacations 159
validating usernames and passwords 362
VCF files 121
VCS files 121
VersaMail application
getting email 335, 339
icons for 382
installing 31
related topics for 435
setting notification options 381
setting preferences for 406
troubleshooting 435
VersaMail icon 31
version numbers 125, 127
video albums 206, 207
videos
See also Media application
adding notes to 203
copying 216, 495
displaying details of 203
moving 207
playing 196
previewing 194
reformatting 84, 193
sending as attachments 404
sharing 216
sorting 209
supported file types for 193
viewing 194, 221
View Bookmarks command 455
View By pick list 563
viewer (web pages) 462
viewing
application groups 541
applications 40, 544
appointments 173, 176, 177, 178
bookmarks 455
contact information 137, 142
current date and time 547, 550
email attachments 462
events 166, 183, 184
Excel spreadsheets 189
expense reports 32
files on hard drive 189
hidden or masked entries 518
images 193, 463
information 544
memos 261
notes 271
personal calendars 151
photos 193, 194, 221
schedules 173, 175, 177, 178
slide shows 198
tasks 173, 182, 251, 255, 256
unread messages 173, 182
URLs 450
videos 194, 221
web pages 447, 448, 449, 452, 463
Word documents 189
World Clock 32, 556
views (Calendar) 175, 177, 178, 179
views (multimedia files) 194
virtual private networks See VPN accounts
virus-scanning software 633
Voice Memo application
opening 276, 278
overview 275
playing messages from 281
related topics for 288
LifeDrive from palmOne 700
saving memos from 285
setting alarms 283
troubleshooting 288
Voice Memo button 31, 276
Voice Memo list 281
voice memos 22, 276
See also Voice Memo application
sending as attachments 404
volume
adjusting alarm 555, 585
adjusting modem 594
adjusting speaker 282
disabling speaker 585
Volume setting (connections) 594
VPN accounts 338, 608
VPN connections 337, 338, 610, 611
W
Wait For command 605
Wait For Prompt command 605
warnings 637, 669
warranty 635
web addresses 447, 469
See also URLs
web browser application
accessing web pages with 447–449
action bar icons for 451
adding bookmarks with 454
arranging bookmarks and saved pages
with 457–458
automatically completing URLs and
447, 469
benefits of 446
changing display views with 452
changing home page for 465–466
closing Internet connections and 459,
461
download options for 461, 468
editing bookmarks with 456
freeing memory for 472
getting help with 476
moving through web pages with 451
opening 459, 462
opening Bookmarks View for 455
related topics for 476
saving web pages with 462
searching with 450
sending email with 464
setting preferences for 468–475
specifying start page for 467
web browser icon 463
web browsers 2
See also web browser application
Web icon 31
web pages
accessing 447, 448, 449
bookmarking favorites 448, 454
changing bookmarks for 454
changing display options for 452–453
clearing cache for 472
disabling cookies for 470
disabling JavaScript for 475
displaying saved 463
downloading 461
editing bookmarks for 456
finding information on 450
hiding address fields for 448
loading from email 393
loading last viewed 467
moving large 453
navigating 451
opening saved 455
removing images and 468
renaming saved 462
returning to recently visited 451
saving 462
selecting bookmarks for 455
setting autofill option for 469
specifying as home 465
specifying as start 467
viewing off-line 459, 461, 462
viewing URLs for 450
Web Pro application See web browser
application
web services 589
web viewer 462
websites
See also web browser application
accessing 290, 302, 312, 320, 446, 448
as additional resource xxiii, 17
browsing 31, 312, 320, 447
palmOne enterprise 34
palmOne technical support 17
saving personal information for 470
setting browsing options for 468, 469,
470, 473, 475
week days 577
Week View 177, 180, 184
Week View icon 177
weekly events 156
weekly schedules 177, 180
weekly tasks 248, 250
WEP encryption 292, 294, 295, 307
WEP key See encryption keys
Whole Page view (web browser) 452
LifeDrive from palmOne 701
Wi-Fi access points 290, 297
Wi-Fi controls 26
Wi-Fi devices 290, 292
Wi-Fi dialog box 26
Wi-Fi icon 291
Wi-Fi networks 23
Wi-Fi pick list 292
Wi-Fi technology 290
Wi-Fi wireless connections
accessing email with 302
benefits of 289, 290
browsing the web with 302, 446
checking status of 291
device-to-device networking and 304
prerequisites for 292
related topics for 310
setting up 292–297
Windows applications 104
Windows information
creating contacts 149
creating login scripts 604
creating notes 273
creating user profiles 12
described xxii
device system requirements 2
displaying tasks 257
enabling Drive Mode 96
entering expense reports 507
importing 121
installing device software 7, 33, 124
opening calendars 186
restoring information 630
synchronization options for 10, 108,
112, 642
synchronizing with user profiles 14
transferring files 94
troubleshooting problems 633
writing memos 264
Windows Media Player 35
See also Rhapsody application
wireless carriers 312
wireless connections 289, 311, 437
See also Wi-Fi wireless connections;
Bluetooth devices
wireless service providers 597
wireless synchronization 99, 290, 312, 322,
416
Word documents 188, 189, 190
word searches 54
word selection 76
World Clock
benefits of 546
changing display for 556
changing locations list for 551
displaying 32
icon 32
selecting primary location for 572
setting alarms for 554
setting alarms with 167, 554
World Clock icon 547
WPA-PSK encryption 292, 294, 296
writing area 20, 28, 58
writing in your own handwriting 266
writing tool 21, 624
writing with Graffiti 2 characters 57, 70
X
XLS files 189
Y
Year View 179
year, selecting 548, 575
yearly events 156
yearly tasks 248, 250
Z
ZIP files 646

Navigation menu